Garmin | G1000: Beechcraft King Air 200/B200 | Garmin G1000: Beechcraft King Air 200/B200 G1000 Pilot’s Guide for KingAir 200/B200 Series - SSV 0985.02

Garmin G1000: Beechcraft King Air 200/B200 G1000 Pilot’s Guide for KingAir 200/B200 Series - SSV 0985.02
G1000
®
Integrated Flight Deck
Pilot’s Guide
®
G1000 Pilot’s Guide
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062, U.S.A.
p:913.397.8200
f:913.397.8282
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road
Houndsdown Business Park
Southampton, SO40 9RB, U.K.
p:44/0870.8501241
f:44/0870.8501251
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road
Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
p:886/02.2642.9199
f:886/02.2642.9099
www.garmin.com
Beechcraft 200/
B200 Series
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
p:503.391.3411
f:503.364.2138
Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
System Software 0985.02 or later
190-00928-01
Revision A
Untitled-1 1
11/13/2007 9:15:37 AM
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
AUDIO PANEL & CNS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Copyright © 2008, 2009 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 0985.02 or later for the Hawker Beechctaft 200/B200 Series. Some
differences in operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions.
Garmin International, Inc., 1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913/397.8200
Fax: 913/397.8282
Garmin AT, Inc., 2345 Turner Road SE, Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503/391.3411
Fax: 503/364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd., Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road, Hounsdown Business Park, Southampton, SO40 9RB, U.K
Tel: 44/0870.8501241
Fax: 44/0870.8501251
Garmin Corporation, No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road, Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
Tel: 886/02.2642.9199
Fax: 886/02.2642.9099
Website Address: www.garmin.com
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored
in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download
a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for
personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice
and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin® is a registered trademark of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries, and G1000® is a trademark of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These
trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
Bendix/King® and Honeywell® are registered trademarks of Honeywell International, Inc.; Becker® is a registered trademark of Becker
Flugfunkwerk GmbH; NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; and XM® is a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio,
Inc..
July 2009
Printed in the U.S.A.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Limited Warranty
LIMITED WARRANTY
This Garmin product is warranted to be free from defects in materials or workmanship for two years from the date of purchase. Within this
period, Garmin will, at its sole option, repair or replace any components that fail in normal use. Such repairs or replacement will be made
at no charge to the customer for parts and labor, provided that the customer shall be responsible for any transportation cost. This warranty
does not cover failures due to abuse, misuse, accident, or unauthorized alterations or repairs.
THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY LIABILITY ARISING UNDER ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO
STATE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER
RESULTING FROM THE USE, MISUSE, OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR FROM DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCT. Some states do not
allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations may not apply to you.
Garmin retains the exclusive right to repair or replace the unit or software, or to offer a full refund of the purchase price, at its sole
discretion. SUCH REMEDY SHALL BE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY.
To obtain warranty service, contact your local Garmin Authorized Service Center. For assistance in locating a Service Center near you, visit
the Garmin Website at “http://www.garmin.com” or contact Garmin Customer Service at 800-800-1020.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
i
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
WARNING: Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated upon the use of the terrain avoidance
feature. The terrain avoidance feature is NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance
and does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of surroundings during flight. The
terrain avoidance feature is only to be used as an aid for terrain avoidance. Terrain data is obtained from
third party sources. Garmin is not able to independently verify the accuracy of the terrain data.
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitudes (MSAs) are only advisory in nature and should not be
relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current
aeronautical charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: The altitude calculated by G1000 GPS receivers is geometric height above Mean Sea Level and
could vary significantly from the altitude displayed by pressure altimeters, such as the GDC 74A Air Data
Computer, or other altimeters in aircraft. GPS altitude should never be used for vertical navigation. Always
use pressure altitude displayed by the G1000 PFD or other pressure altimeters in aircraft.
WARNING: Do not use outdated database information. Databases used in the G1000 system must be updated
regularly in order to ensure that the information remains current. Pilots using any outdated database do so
entirely at their own risk.
WARNING: Do not use basemap (land and water data) information for primary navigation. Basemap data is
intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be considered as an aid to
enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Traffic information shown on system displays is provided as an aid in visually acquiring traffic.
Pilots must maneuver the aircraft based only upon ATC guidance or positive visual acquisition of conflicting
traffic.
WARNING: Use of the Stormscope is not intended for hazardous weather penetration (thunderstorm
penetration). Stormscope information, as displayed on the G1000 MFD, is to be used only for weather
avoidance, not penetration.
WARNING: GDL 69 Weather should not be used for hazardous weather penetration. Weather information
provided by the GDL 69 is approved only for weather avoidance, not penetration.
Warning: NEXRAD weather data is to be used for long-range planning purposes only. Due to inherent
delays in data transmission and the relative age of the data, NEXRAD weather data should not be used for
short-range weather avoidance.
ii
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
WARNING: The Garmin G1000, as installed in this aircraft, has a very high degree of functional integrity.
However, the pilot must recognize that providing monitoring and/or self-test capability for all conceivable
system failures is not practical. Although unlikely, it may be possible for erroneous operation to occur
without a fault indication shown by the G1000. It is thus the responsibility of the pilot to detect such
an occurrence by means of cross-checking with all redundant or correlated information available in the
cockpit.
WARNING: For safety reasons, G1000 operational procedures must be learned on the ground.
WARNING: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible
for its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy
and performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the Garmin G1000 utilize GPS as a precision electronic
NAVigation AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the G1000 can be
misused or misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of unsafe operation, carefully review and understand all aspects of the G1000
Pilot’s Guide documentation and the G1000 Integrated Avionics System in the Airplane Flight Manual.
Thoroughly practice basic operation prior to actual use. During flight operations, carefully compare indications
from the G1000 to all available navigation sources, including the information from other NAVAIDs, visual
sightings, charts, etc. For safety purposes, always resolve any discrepancies before continuing navigation.
WARNING: The illustrations in this guide are only examples. Never use the G1000 to attempt to penetrate
a thunderstorm. Both the FAA Advisory Circular, Subject: Thunderstorms, and the Aeronautical Information
Manual (AIM) recommend avoiding “by at least 20 miles any thunderstorm identified as severe or giving an
intense radar echo.”
WARNING: Lamp(s) inside this product may contain mercury (HG) and must be recycled or disposed of
according to local, state, or federal laws. For more information, refer to our website at www.garmin.com/
aboutGarmin/environment/disposal.jsp.
WARNING: Because of variation in the earth’s magnetic field, operating the G1000 within the following
areas could result in loss of reliable attitude and heading indications. North of 72° North latitude at all
longitudes; South of 70° South latitude at all longitudes; North of 65° North latitude between longitude
75° W and 120° W. (Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude between longitude 70° W and 128° W.
(Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude between longitude 85° E and 114° E. (Northern Russia);
South of 55° South latitude between longitude 120° E and 165° E. (Region south of Australia and New
Zealand)
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
iii
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
CAUTION: The PFD and MFD displays use a lens coated with a special anti-reflective coating that is very
sensitive to skin oils, waxes, and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM THE
ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important to clean the lens using a clean, lint-free cloth and an
eyeglass lens cleaner that is specified as safe for anti-reflective coatings.
CAUTION: The Garmin G1000 does not contain any user-serviceable parts. Repairs should only be made by
an authorized Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty
and the pilot’s authority to operate this device under FAA/FCC regulations.
Note: When using Stormscope, there are several atmospheric phenomena in addition to nearby thunderstorms
that can cause isolated discharge points in the strike display mode. However, clusters of two or more
discharge points in the strike display mode do indicate thunderstorm activity if these points reappear after
the screen has been cleared.
nOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the G1000 panel and
displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current G1000 system and aviation databases.
Depictions of equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an intermittent loss of
attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 yards
away from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
NOTE: Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or blank.
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with
California’s Proposition 65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please refer to
our web site at www.garmin.com/prop65.
iv
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Revision Information
Record of Revisions
Part Number
190-00928-00
190-00928-01
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Revision
A
A
Date
12/3/08
7/24/09
Page Range
Description
i – I-6
Initial Release for GDU 9.12
i – I-6
Added GDU 10.00 changes
Added TAWS A functionality
Added radar altimeter functionality
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
v
Table of Contents
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
Section 1 System Overview
System Description.................................................... 1
Line Replaceable Units (LRU).................................... 2
G1000 Controls.......................................................... 7
PFD Controls................................................................. 7
Controls Associated With the MFD.................................. 9
AFCS Controls............................................................. 11
Audio Panel Controls................................................... 13
Secure Digital Cards................................................ 15
System Power-up...................................................... 15
System Operation.................................................... 17
Normal Operation. ...................................................... 17
Reversionary Mode. .................................................... 17
AHRS Operation.......................................................... 18
G1000 System Annunciations....................................... 20
Softkey Function. ........................................................ 21
GPS Receiver Operation............................................... 27
Accessing G1000 Functionality.............................. 31
Menus. ...................................................................... 31
MFD Page Groups. ...................................................... 32
MFD System Pages...................................................... 36
Display Backlighting................................................ 49
Section 2 Flight Instruments
2.1 Flight Instruments.................................................... 54
Airspeed Indicator....................................................... 54
Attitude Indicator........................................................ 57
Altimeter.................................................................... 59
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI). ...................................... 61
Vertical Deviation........................................................ 62
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)............................... 63
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)................................... 68
2.2 Supplemental Flight Data....................................... 76
Temperature Displays. ................................................. 76
Wind Data.................................................................. 77
Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications. .......................... 78
2.3 PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions........... 79
G1000 Alerting system. ............................................... 79
Marker Beacon Annunciations...................................... 81
Traffic Annunciation. ................................................... 81
TAWS Annunciations. .................................................. 82
vi
Altitude Alerting. ........................................................ 82
Low Altitude Annunciation........................................... 83
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting....... 83
Radar Altimeter........................................................... 84
2.4 Abnormal Operations.............................................. 86
Abnormal GPS Conditions............................................ 86
Unusual Attitudes. ...................................................... 87
Section 3 Engine Indication System
3.1 EIS Display................................................................ 90
Interstage Turbine Temperature..................................... 92
Torque. ...................................................................... 92
Tachometer (RPM)....................................................... 93
Turbine Speed............................................................. 94
Fuel Flow. .................................................................. 94
Oil Pressure................................................................ 95
Oil Temperature. ......................................................... 95
3.2 EIS Display in Reversionary Mode......................... 96
Reversionary Display. .................................................. 97
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
Section 4 Audio Panel and CNS
Overview................................................................... 99
Audio Panel Volume Control......................................... 99
PFD Controls and Frequency Display. .......................... 100
Audio Panel Controls................................................. 102
Control Unit.............................................................. 104
COM Operation...................................................... 106
COM Transceiver Selection and Activation. .................. 106
COM Transceiver Manual Tuning................................. 107
Quick-Tuning and Activating 121.500 MHz.................. 109
Auto-Tuning the COM Frequency................................ 110
Frequency Spacing. ................................................... 114
Automatic Squelch.................................................... 115
Volume. ................................................................... 115
NAV Operation....................................................... 116
NAV Radio Selection and Activation............................ 116
NAV Receiver Manual Tuning. .................................... 117
Auto-Tuning a NAV Frequency from the MFD............... 120
Marker Beacon Receiver. ........................................... 125
DME Tuning.............................................................. 126
GTX 33 Mode S Transponders............................... 127
Transponder Controls. ............................................... 127
Transponder Mode Selection. ..................................... 128
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Table of Contents
Entering a Transponder Code...................................... 131
IDENT Function......................................................... 133
4.5 Additional Audio Panel Functions........................ 134
Power-Up. ................................................................ 134
Mono/Stereo Headsets. ............................................. 134
Speaker.................................................................... 134
Unmuted Inputs........................................................ 134
Intercom. ................................................................. 135
Passenger Address (PA) System. ................................. 136
Simultaneous COM Operation.................................... 136
Clearance Recorder and Player................................... 137
4.6 Audio Panels Preflight Procedure........................ 138
4.7 Abnormal Operation.............................................. 140
Stuck Microphone..................................................... 140
COM Tuning Failure................................................... 140
PFD Failure, Dual System............................................ 141
Audio Panel Fail-Safe Operation. ................................ 142
Reversionary Mode. .................................................. 142
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
Section 5 Flight Management
Introduction............................................................ 143
Navigation Status Box............................................... 145
Using Map Displays............................................... 146
Map Orientation. ...................................................... 146
Map Range............................................................... 148
Map Panning............................................................ 151
Measuring Bearing and Distance. ............................... 156
Topography. ............................................................. 157
Map Symbols............................................................ 160
Airways.................................................................... 166
Track Vector.............................................................. 168
Wind Vector.............................................................. 169
Nav Range Ring........................................................ 170
Fuel Range Ring........................................................ 171
Field of View (SVS). ................................................... 172
Waypoints............................................................... 173
Airports.................................................................... 174
Intersections............................................................. 182
NDBs. ...................................................................... 184
VORs........................................................................ 186
User Waypoints......................................................... 188
Airspaces................................................................. 194
190-00928-01 Rev. A
5.5 Direct-to-Navigation ............................................ 199
5.6 Flight Planning....................................................... 206
Flight Plan Creation................................................... 207
Adding Waypoints to an Existing Flight Plan................ 212
Adding Airways to a Flight Plan.................................. 214
Adding Procedures to a Stored Flight Plan................... 217
Flight Plan Storage.................................................... 224
Flight Plan Editing..................................................... 226
Along Track Offsets. .................................................. 230
Parallel Track. ........................................................... 231
Activating a Flight Plan Leg........................................ 234
Inverting a Flight Plan. .............................................. 235
Flight Plan Views....................................................... 236
Closest Point of FPL................................................... 238
5.7 Vertical Navigation................................................ 239
Altitude Constraints. ................................................. 241
5.8 Procedures.............................................................. 245
Departures. .............................................................. 245
Arrivals . .................................................................. 248
Approaches . ............................................................ 250
5.9 Trip Planning........................................................... 256
Trip Planning. ........................................................... 256
Weight Planning. ...................................................... 260
Weight Caution And Warning Conditions..................... 262
5.10 RAIM Prediction..................................................... 263
5.11 Navigating a Flight Plan........................................ 267
5.12 Abnormal Operation.............................................. 296
Section 6 Hazard Avoidance
6.1 XM Satellite Weather............................................. 299
Activating Services.................................................... 299
Using XM Satellite Weather Products.......................... 300
Weather Softkeys on the Weather Data Link Page......... 304
6.2 Airborne Color Weather Radar............................. 329
System Description.................................................... 329
Principles of Pulsed Airborne Weather Radar................ 329
Safe Operating Distance. ........................................... 333
Basic Antenna Tilt Setup. ........................................... 334
Practical Application Using the Basic Tilt Setup. ........... 334
Weather Mapping and Interpretation.......................... 335
Ground Mapping and Interpretation. .......................... 346
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
vii
Table of Contents
6.3 Stormscope (Optional).......................................... 347
Setting Up Stormscope on the Navigation Map............ 348
Selecting the Stormscope Page................................... 351
6.4 Terrain Awareness & Warning System (TAWS-B).353
Displaying TAWS-B Data. ........................................... 354
TAWS-B Alerts........................................................... 358
System Status........................................................... 363
6.5 Terrain Awareness & Warning System (TAWS-A).365
TAWS-A Page............................................................ 367
TAWS-A Alerts. ......................................................... 369
System Status........................................................... 381
TAWS-A Abnormal operations. ................................... 382
6.6 Traffic Information Service (TIS)........................... 384
Traffic Map Page....................................................... 387
TIS Alerts.................................................................. 388
System Status........................................................... 389
6.7 L-3 Skywatch (Optional)........................................ 392
TAS Symbology......................................................... 392
Operation................................................................. 393
Altitude Display. ....................................................... 396
Traffic Map Page Display Range.................................. 396
TAS Alerts................................................................. 398
System Status........................................................... 398
6.8 Honeywell KTA 870 (Optional)............................. 400
TAS Symbology......................................................... 400
Operation................................................................. 401
Altitude Display. ....................................................... 404
Traffic Map Page Display Range.................................. 404
TAS Alerts................................................................. 406
System Status........................................................... 407
Section 7 Automatic Flight Control System
7.1 AFCS Overview....................................................... 409
Additional AFCS Controls........................................... 411
7.2 Flight Director Operation...................................... 412
Activating the Flight Director...................................... 412
AFCS Status Box. ...................................................... 413
Flight Director Modes................................................ 414
Switching Flight Directors. ......................................... 414
Command Bars......................................................... 415
7.3 Vertical Modes........................................................ 416
Pitch Hold Mode (PIT)................................................ 417
viii
Selected Altitude Capture Mode (ALTS). ...................... 418
Altitude Hold Mode (ALT)........................................... 419
Vertical Speed Mode (VS)........................................... 420
Flight Level Change Mode (FLC). ................................ 421
Vertical Navigation Modes (VPTH, ALTV). .................... 423
Glidepath Mode (GP)................................................. 428
Glideslope Mode (GS)................................................ 430
Takeoff (TO) and Go Around (GA) Modes..................... 431
7.4 Lateral Modes......................................................... 432
Roll Hold Mode (ROL)................................................ 433
Low Bank Mode........................................................ 433
Navigation Modes (GPS, VOR, LOC)............................. 435
Approach Modes (GPS, VAPP, LOC).............................. 437
Backcourse Mode (BC)............................................... 438
7.5 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Operation................ 440
Flight Control. .......................................................... 440
Engagement............................................................. 441
Control Wheel Steering.............................................. 441
Disengagement......................................................... 442
7.6 Example Flight Plan............................................... 443
Departure................................................................. 444
Intercepting a VOR Radial.......................................... 446
Flying a Flight Plan/GPS Course.................................. 447
Descent.................................................................... 448
Approach. ................................................................ 452
Go Around/Missed Approach...................................... 456
7.7 AFCS Annunciations and Alerts............................ 458
AFCS Status Alerts..................................................... 458
Overspeed Protection. ............................................... 459
Section 8 Additional Features
8.1 Synthetic Vision System (SVS).............................. 462
SVS Operation. ......................................................... 463
SVS Features............................................................. 465
Field of View............................................................. 473
8.2 SafeTaxi................................................................... 475
SafeTaxi Cycle Number and Revision........................... 478
8.3 ChartView............................................................... 481
ChartView Softkeys. .................................................. 481
Terminal Procedures Charts........................................ 482
Chart Options........................................................... 490
Day/Night View......................................................... 496
ChartView Cycle Number and Expiration Date. ............ 498
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Table of Contents
8.4 FliteCharts............................................................... 501
FliteCharts Softkeys................................................... 501
Terminal Procedures Charts........................................ 502
Chart Options........................................................... 509
Day/Night View......................................................... 513
FliteCharts Cycle Number and Expiration Date............. 515
8.5 AOPA Airport Directory......................................... 518
AOPA Database Cycle Number and Revision................ 519
8.6 XM Radio Entertainment....................................... 521
Activating XM Satellite Radio Services. ....................... 521
Using XM Radio........................................................ 523
8.7 Scheduler................................................................ 526
8.8 Flight Data Logging............................................... 528
8.9 Abnormal Operation.............................................. 530
SVS Troubleshooting.................................................. 530
Reversionary Mode. .................................................. 530
Unusual Attitudes. .................................................... 531
Appendices
Annunciations and Alerts................................................ 535
Comparator Annunciations......................................... 538
Reversionary Sensor Annunciations............................. 539
G1000 System Annunciations..................................... 539
G1000 System Message Advisories............................. 542
AFCS Alerts............................................................... 553
TAWS ALERTS. .......................................................... 554
Flight plan Import/Export Messages............................ 556
SD Card Use...................................................................... 557
Jeppesen Databases.................................................. 557
Garmin Databases..................................................... 560
Glossary............................................................................. 567
Frequently Asked Questions........................................... 575
Map Symbols.................................................................... 579
Index
Index . ................................................................................. I-1
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
ix
Table of Contents
Blank Page
x
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Section 1 System Overview
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1.1 System Description
This section provides an overview of the G1000 Integrated Flight Deck as installed in the Beechcraft 200/B200
Series. The G1000 system is an integrated flight control system that presents flight instrumentation, position,
navigation, communication, and identification information to the pilot through large-format displays. The system
consists of the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• GDL 69A Satellite Data Link Receiver
• GDC 74B Air Data Computer (ADC)
• GWX 68 Weather Radar
• GEA 71 Engine/Airframe Unit
• GCU 477 MFD Control Unit
• GRS 77 Attitude and Heading Reference System
(AHRS)
• GMC 710 AFCS Control Unit
• GTP 59 Outside Air Temperature (OAT) Probe
• GMU 44 Magnetometer
• GSA 80 AFCS Servos
• GMA 1347D Dual Audio System with Integrated
Marker Beacon Receiver
• GSM 85A/GSM 86 Servo Gearboxes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GDU 1500 Multi Function Display (MFD)
• GTX 33/33D Extended Squitter Mode S
Transponder
EIS
• GDU 1040A Primary Flight Display (PFD)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A top-level G1000 system block diagram is shown in Figure 1-1 (it does not include the GSM 85A/GSM 86).
NOTE: Refer to the AFCS section for details on the GFC 700 AFCS.
AFCS
In the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series, the GFC 700 Automated Flight Control System (AFCS) provides the flight
director (FD), autopilot (AP), and yaw damper (YD) functions of the G1000 system.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
1
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
1.2 Line Replaceable Units (LRU)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GDU 1040A (2) – Each unit is configured as a PFD that features a 10.4-inch LCD with 1024 x 768 resolution.
The unit installed on the left/pilot side is designated as PFD1, and the one installed on the right/copilot side
is designated as PFD2. These units communicate with each other, the MFD, and with the on-side GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics Unit through a High-Speed Data Bus (HSDB) connection.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GDU 1500 (1) – Features a 15-inch LCD with 1024 x 768 resolution and is configured as an MFD. This unit
is linked to both PFDs via HSDB connection.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GIA 63W (2) – Functions as the main communication hub, linking all LRUs with the on-side PFD. Each
GIA 63W contains a GPS WAAS receiver, VHF COM/NAV/GS receivers, a flight director (FD) and system
integration microprocessors. Each GIA 63W is paired with the on-side PFD via HSDB connection. The GIA
63Ws are not paired together and do not communicate with each other directly.
2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GDC 74B (2) – Processes data from the pitot/static system as well as the OAT probe. This unit provides
pressure altitude, airspeed, vertical speed and OAT information to the G1000 system, and it communicates
with the on-side GIA 63W, on-side GDU 1040A, GDU 1040A MFD, and on-side GRS 77, using an ARINC 429
digital interface (it also interfaces directly with the on-side GTP 59). The GDC 74B is designed to operate in
Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum (RVSM) airspace.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GEA 71 (2) – Receives and processes signals from the engine and airframe sensors. This unit communicates
with both GIA 63Ws using an RS-485 digital interface.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GRS 77 (2) – Provides aircraft attitude and heading information via ARINC 429 to both the on-side GDU
1040A, the GDU 1040A MFD, and the on-side GIA 63W. The GRS 77 contains advanced sensors (including
accelerometers and rate sensors) and interfaces with the on-side GMU 44 to obtain magnetic field information,
with the GDC 74B to obtain air data, and with both GIA 63Ws to obtain GPS information. AHRS modes of
operation are discussed later in this document.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GMU 44 (2) – Measures local magnetic field. Data is sent to the GRS 77 for processing to determine aircraft
magnetic heading. This unit receives power directly from the GRS 77 and communicates with the GRS 77,
using an RS-485 digital interface.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
3
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GMA 1347D (2) – Integrates NAV/COM digital audio, intercom system and marker beacon controls, and is
installed in dual configuration on the outboard side of PFD1 and PFD2. This unit also enables the manual
control of the display reversionary mode (red DISPLAY BACKUP button) and communicates with the on-side
GIA 63W, using an RS-232 digital interface.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GTX 33/33D (2) – Solid-state transponders that provide Modes A, C, S and ADS-B capability. Both transponders
can be controlled from either PFD, and only one transponder can be active at a time. Each transponder
communicates with the on-side GIA 63W through an RS-232 digital interface.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GDL 69A (1) – A satellite radio receiver that provides real-time weather information to the G1000 MFD (and,
indirectly, to the inset map of the PFD) as well as digital audio entertainment. The GDL 69A communicates
with the MFD via HSDB connection. A subscription to the XM Satellite Radio service is required to enable the
GDL 69A capability.
INDEX
APPENDICES
• GWX 68 (1) – Provides airborne weather and ground mapped radar data to the MFD, through the GDL 69A,
via HSDB connection.
4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• GCU 477 (1) – Provides the Flight Management System (FMS) controls for the MFD through an RS-232 digital
interface.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GMC 710 (1) – Provides the controls for the GFC 700 AFCS through an RS-232 digital interface allowing
communication with both PFDs.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GTP 59 (2) – Provides Outside Air Temperature (OAT) data to the on-side GDC 74B.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GSA 80 (4), and GSM 85A/GSM 86 (4) – The GSA 80 servos are used for the automatic control of roll, pitch,
and yaw, and pitch trim. These units interface with each GIA 63W.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The GSM 85A or GSM 86 servo gearbox is responsible for transferring the output torque of the GSA 80 servo
actuator to the mechanical flight-control surface linkage.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
5
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GMC 710
GWX 68
GDU 1040A
EIS
(PFD #1)
GDL 69A
GCU 477
GDU 1040A
(PFD #2)
GDU 1500
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
(MFD)
GMA 1347D
#1
GMA 1347D
#2
GMU 44 #1
GMU 44 #2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GRS 77 #1
GRS 77 #2
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
GIA 63W #1
GIA 63W #2
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS/WAAS
G/S
GDC 74B #1
AFCS Mode Logic
Flight Director
Servo Management
GTP 59 #1
GDC 74B #2
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS/WAAS
G/S
GTP 59 #2
AFCS Mode Logic
Flight Director
Servo Management
GSA 80
(Pitch Trim)
GSA 80
(Pitch)
GSA 80
GTX 33/33D
(Roll)
GTX 33/33D
APPENDICES
GSA 80
(Yaw)
GEA 71 #1
GEA 71 #2
INDEX
Figure 1-1 G1000 System (LRU Configuration)
6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.3 G1000 Controls
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Audio Panel (GMA 1347D) and AFCS controls (GMC 710) are described in the CNS & Audio Panel
and AFCS sections respectively.
The G1000 system controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels, MFD Control Unit, AFCS Control Unit and
audio panel. The controls for the PFD and MFD are discussed within the following pages of this section.
1
2
EIS
PFD Controls
4
3
5
6
7
8
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-2 PFD Controls
13
10
14
11
15
APPENDICES
9
12
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
7
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
1
NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to toggle the Morse code identifier audio ON
and OFF. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
2
NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Toggles the standby and active NAV frequencies.
3
Dual NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to switch the tuning box (cyan box) between NAV1 and NAV2.
4
Joystick – Changes the map range when rotated. Activates the map pointer when pressed.
5
BARO Knob – Sets the altimeter barometric pressure. Press to enter standard pressure (29.92).
6
Dual COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small
knob for kHz). Press to switch the tuning box (cyan box) between COM1 and COM2.
7
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Toggles the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold this
key for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) automatically into the active frequency
field.
8
COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency
field as a percentage. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch ON and OFF.
9
Direct-to Key ( ) – Allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and establish a direct course to the
selected destination (the destination is either specified by the identifier, chosen from the active route, or
taken from the map pointer position).
10
FPL Key – Displays the active Flight Plan Page for creating and editing the active flight plan.
11
CLR Key – Erases information, cancels entries, or removes page menus. Pressing and holding this key
displays the Navigation Map Page automatically.
12
Dual FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob. Press the FMS Knob to turn the selection cursor
ON and OFF. When the cursor is ON, data may be entered in the applicable window by turning the small
and large knobs. The large knob moves the cursor on the page, while the small knob selects individual
characters for the highlighted cursor location.
13
MENU Key – Displays a context-sensitive list of options. This list allows the user to access additional
features or make setting changes that relate to particular pages.
14
PROC Key – Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs) and approach
procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan. If a flight plan is used, available procedures for the departure and/or
arrival airport are automatically suggested. These procedures can then be loaded into the active flight plan.
If a flight plan is not used, both the desired airport and the desired procedure may be selected.
15
ENT Key – Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following list provides an overview of the controls located on the PFD bezel (see Figure 1-2).
8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Controls Associated With the MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The controls for the MFD (GDU 1500) are located on both the MFD bezel and the Control Unit (GCU 477).
The bottom portion of the MFD bezel features 12 softkeys that are designed to perform various functions
depending upon the specific page being displayed. These softkeys are discussed throughout the Pilot’s Guide
documentation.
The following list provides an overview of the controls located on the Control Unit (see Figure 1-3):
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
EIS
11
12
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
13
14
15
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
16
20
19
18
17
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
21
Figure 1-3 Control Unit (GCU 477)
Joystick – Changes the map range when rotated. Activates the map pointer when pressed.
3
CLR Key – Erases information, cancels entries, or removes page menus. Pressing and holding this key
displays the Navigation Map Page automatically.
4
FPL Key – Displays the active Flight Plan Page for creating and editing the active flight plan, or for
accessing stored flight plans.
5
Direct-to Key ( ) – Allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and establish a direct course to the
selected destination (the destination is either specified by the identifier, chosen from the active route, or
taken from the map pointer position).
6
MENU Key – Displays a context-sensitive list of options. This list allows the user to access additional
features or make setting changes that relate to particular pages.
APPENDICES
2
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Alphabetic Keys – Allow the user to enter letters quickly, without having to select individual characters
with the FMS Knob.
AFCS
1
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
9
7
PROC Key – Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs) and approach
procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan. If a flight plan is used, available procedures for the departure and/or
arrival airport are automatically suggested. Theses procedures can then be loaded into the active flight
plan. If a flight plan is not used, both the desired airport and the desired procedure may be selected.
8
ENT Key – Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
9
Dual FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob. When the FMS Key is pressed, this knob selects the
MFD page to be viewed. The large knob selects a page group (MAP, WPT, AUX, NRST), while the small
knob selects a specific page within the page group. Pressing the FMS Knob turns the selection cursor ON
and OFF. When the cursor is ON, data may be entered in the applicable window by turning the small
and large knobs. In this case, the large knob moves the cursor on the page, while the small knob selects
individual characters for the highlighted cursor location. This knob also tuning capability for the COM
and NAV radios when the appropriate COM or NAV key is presssed. When the XPDR Key is pressed, the
transponder code may be entered using the FMS Knob.
10
FMS Key – Sets the FMS Knob to control FMS functions on the MFD. When pressed, an annunciator next
to the key illuminates indicating adjustment of the FMS Knob will now affect FMS functions.
11
Numeric Keys – Allow the user to enter numbers quickly, without having to select individual characters
with the FMS Knob.
12
COM Key – Sets the FMS Knob to control tuning of the COM radios. The first press will select COM1,
as indicated by an illuminated “1” to the left of the key. Press again to select COM2. This is annunciated
with a “2” to the right of the key. Each subsequent press of the COM Key will switch between COM1 and
COM2. Use the FMS Knob to tune the selected COM.
13
Frequency Transfer Key (EMERG) – Switches the standby and active COM or NAV frequencies. Press
and hold this key for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) automatically into the
active frequency field.
14
NAV Key – Sets the FMS Knob to control tuning of the NAV radios. The first press will select NAV1, as
indicated by an illuminated “1” to the left of the key. Press again to select NAV2. This is annunciated with
a “2” to the right of the key. Each subsequent press of the NAV Key will switch between NAV1 and NAV2.
Use the FMS Knob to tune the selected NAV.
15
XPDR Key – Sets the FMS Knob to enter transponders codes. When pressed, an annunciator next to the
key illuminates indicating the FMS Knob can now be used for transponder code entry.
16
IDENT Key – Activates transponder IDENT function.
17
Plus (+) Minus (-) Key – Toggles a (+) or (-) character.
18
SEL Key – The center of this key activates the selected MFD softkey, while the right and left arrows move
the softkey selection box to the right and left, respectively.
19
Decimal Key – Enters a decimal point.
20
BKSP Key – Moves the cursor back one character space.
21
SPC Key – Adds a space character.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AFCS Controls
NOTE: With the exception of the FD and SPD Keys, if a key is selected, its respective annunciator is
2
3
4
19
18
17
16
5
6
7
13
12
8
EIS
1
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
illuminated.
14
11
10
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
15
9
Figure 1-4 AFCS Control Unit (GMC 710)
NAV Key – Selects/deselects Navigation Mode.
4
FD Key – Activates/deactivates the flight director in the default pitch and roll modes. If the autopilot is
engaged, the FD Key is disabled.
5
XFR Key – Switches the autopilot between the pilot-side and the copilot-side flight directors. This selection
also selects which air data computer is communicating with the active transponder. Upon power-up, the
pilot-side FD is selected.
6
ALT Key – Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode.
7
VS Key – Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode.
8
FLC Key – Selects/deselects Flight Level Change Mode.
9
CRS2 Knob – Sets the copilot-selected course on the HSI of PFD2 when the VOR1, VOR2, or OBS/SUSP
mode is selected. Pressing this knob centers the CDI on the currently selected VOR. The copilot-selected
course provides course reference to the copilot-side flight director when operating in Navigation and
Approach modes.
10
SPD Key – Switches the Flight Level Change mode reference speed between IAS and MACH number.
11
NOSE UP/DN Wheel – Controls the active mode reference for the Pitch, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level
Change modes.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
3
APPENDICES
APR Key – Selects/deselects Approach Mode.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2
AFCS
HDG Key – Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The GFC 700 AFCS is mainly controlled through the GMC 710 AFCS Control Unit. The AFCS Control Unit
consists of the following controls:
11
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VNV Key – Selects/deselects Vertical Navigation mode.
13
ALT SEL Knob – Sets the selected altitude in the Selected Altitude Box. In addition to providing the
standard G1000 altitude alerter function, selected altitude provides an altitude setting for the Altitude
Capture/Hold mode of the AFCS.
14
YD Key – Engages/disengages the yaw damper.
15
AP Key – Engages/disengages the autopilot.
16
BANK Key – Selects/deselects Low Bank Mode.
17
CRS1 Knob – Sets the pilot-selected course on the HSI of PFD1 when the VOR1, VOR2, or OBS/SUSP mode
is selected. Pressing this knob centers the CDI on the currently selected VOR. The pilot-selected course
provides course reference to the pilot-side flight director when operating in Navigation and Approach
modes.
18
BC Key – Selects/deselects Back Course Mode.
19
HDG Knob – Sets the selected heading on the HSI. When operating in Heading Select mode, this knob
provides the heading reference to the flight director.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
12
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System Overview
Additional AFCS Controls
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The AP DISC (Autopilot Disconnect) Switch, CWS (Control Wheel Steering) Button, GO AROUND
Switch, and MEPT (Manual Electric Pitch Trim) Switch are additional AFCS controls and are located in the cockpit,
separately from the AFCS Control Unit. These are discussed in detail in the AFCS section.
12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel Controls
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
EIS
2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
17
20
21
22
23
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
19
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
18
24
Figure 1-5 Audio Panel Controls (GMA 1347D)
AFCS
NOTE: When a key is selected, a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated.
2
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard.
3
COM2 MIC – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 is simultaneously selected when this key
is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 can be deselected by
pressing the COM2 Key, or COM1 can be added by pressing the COM1 Key.
4
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard.
APPENDICES
COM1 MIC – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receiver audio
can be added by pressing the COM2 Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
13
5
COM3 MIC – Selects an optional transmitter for transmitting (if installed). COM3 is simultaneously
selected when this key is pressed allowing received audio from the optional receiver to be heard. COM3
can be deselected by pressing the COM3 Key, or either COM1 or COM2 can be added by pressing the
COM1 or COM2 Key.
6
COM3 – When selected, audio from an optional COM can be heard.
7
PA – Selects the passenger address system. The selected COM transmitter is deselected when the PA Key
is pressed.
8
TEL – Not used on the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series.
9
MUSIC – Toggles the Music input on or off. Pressing and holding toggles music muting on or off.
10
SPKR – Pressing this key selects and deselects the corresponding cockpit speaker. With SPKR selected on,
the COM and NAV receiver audio, and alerts are heard on the speaker.
11
MKR/MUTE – Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver audio. Unmutes when new marker
beacon audio is received.
12
HI SENS – Press to increase Marker Beacon Receiver sensitivity. Press again to return to normal.
13
DME – Pressing turns optional DME audio on or off.
14
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
15
ADF – Pressing turns on or off the audio from the optional ADF receiver.
16
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
17
AUX – Not used on the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series.
18
MAN SQ – Press to enable manual squelch for the intercom. When active, press the ICS Knob to illuminate
‘SQ’. Turn the ICS Knob to adjust squelch.
19
PLAY – Press once to play the last recorded audio. Press again to stop playing. Press twice quickly while
audio is playing and the previous block of recorded audio is played. Each subsequent two presses skips
back to the previously recorded block.
20
INTR COM – Pressing selects the pilot/copilot intercom on both audio panels. Press again to deselect the
intercom.
21
CABIN – Initiates intercom communications with passengers in the cabin.
22
ICS Knob – Turn to adjust intercom volume or squelch. Press to switch between volume and squelch
control as indicated by the ‘VOL’ or ‘SQ’ being illuminated. The MAN SQ Key must be selected to allow
squelch adjustment.
23
MSTR Knob – The Master Volume Control adjusts volume for the blended NAV, COM, and intercom
audio.
24
Reversionary Mode Button – Pressing manually selects Reversionary Mode.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
14
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.4 Secure Digital Cards
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for instructions on updating the aviation databases.
NOTE: Ensure that the G1000 system is powered off before inserting the SD card.
EIS
The GDU 1040A and GDU 1500 data card slots use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the top
right portion of the display bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots. SD cards are used
for aviation database and system software updates as well as terrain database storage. Also, flight plans may be
imported or exported from an SD card in the MFD.
Install an SD card
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Insert the SD card in the SD card slot, pushing the card in until the spring latch engages. The front of the card
should remain flush with the face of the display bezel.
Remove an SD card
PFD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch and eject the card.
MFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
SD Card Slots
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-6 Display Bezel SD Card Slots
APPENDICES
1.5 System Power-up
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for AHRS initialization bank angle limitations.
INDEX
NOTE: See the Appendices for additional information regarding system-specific annunciations and alerts.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
15
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
NOTE: See the Pilot’s Operating Handbook and FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual (AFM/POH) for specific
procedures concerning avionics power application and emergency power supply operation.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 system is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical
busses. The G1000 PFDs, MFD and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test
features that exercise the processor, RAM, ROM, external inputs and outputs to provide safe operation.
EIS
During system initialization, test annunciations are displayed, as shown in Figure 1-7. All system annunciations
should disappear typically within one minute of power-up. Upon power-up, key annunciator lights also become
momentarily illuminated on the audio panels, the control units and the display bezels.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
On the PFD, the AHRS begins to initialize and displays ‘AHRS ALIGN: Keep Wings Level’. The AHRS should
display valid attitude and heading fields typically within one minute of power-up. The AHRS can align itself both
while taxiing and during level flight.
When the MFD powers up (Figure 1-8), the MFD Power-up Page displays the following information:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• System version
• Copyright
• Land database name and version
• Safe Taxi database information
• Terrain database name and version
• Obstacle database name and version
• Navigation database name, version, and effective
dates
• Airport Directory name, version and effective dates
• FliteCharts/ChartView database information
• Airport Terrain database name and version
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Current database information includes the valid operating dates, cycle number and database type. When this
information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted
to continue. Pressing the ENT Key acknowledges this information and displays the Auxiliary (AUX) Weight
Planning Page.
Figure 1-8 MFD Power-up Page
INDEX
Figure 1-7 PFD Initialization
16
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.6 System Operation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The displays are connected together via multiple data busses, thus allowing for high-speed communication.
As shown in Figure 1-1, each GIA 63W is connected to the on-side PFD. This section discusses the normal and
reversionary modes of operation as well as the various AHRS modes of the G1000 system.
Normal Operation
PFD
EIS
In normal mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed, altitude
and vertical speed), thereby replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster. The PFD also offers control for
COM and NAV frequency selection.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MFD
In normal mode, the right portion of the MFD displays a full-color moving map with navigation information,
while the left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System (EIS).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PFD1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-9 gives an example of the G1000 displays in normal mode.
PFD2
MFD
AFCS
Figure 1-9 Normal Operation
Reversionary Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: The G1000 system alerts the pilot when backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. Refer to the Appendices
for further information regarding system-specific alerts.
APPENDICES
Reversionary mode is a mode of operation in which all important flight information is presented identically
on at least one of the remaining displays (see Figure 1-10). Transition to reversionary mode should be
straightforward for the pilot, for flight parameters are presented in the same format as in normal mode.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
17
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
Figure 1-10 Reversionary Mode (Manual)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Reversionary mode can be activated manually by pressing the dedicated DISPLAY BACKUP button at the
bottom of the audio panel (see Figure 1-11 and refer to the Audio Panel section for further details). Pressing
this button again deactivates reversionary mode.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the DISPLAY BACKUP
button activates/deactivates
reversionary mode for both the
on-side PFD and the MFD.
Figure 1-11 DISPLAY BACKUP Button
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Each display can be configured to operate in reversionary mode, as follows:
• PFD1 – By pressing the DISPLAY BACKUP button on the left audio panel.
• MFD – By pressing the DISPLAY BACKUP button on the left or the right audio panel.
• PFD2 – By pressing the DISPLAY BACKUP button on the right audio panel.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Should the connection between a PFD and the on-side GIA 63W become inoperative, the on-side GIA 63W
can no longer communicate with the remaining PFD (refer to Figure 1-1). As a result, the NAV and COM
functions provided to the failed PFD by the on-side GIA 63W are flagged as invalid (red “X”) on the remaining
PFD (see Figure 1-12).
Figure 1-12 Inoperative Input (NAV1 Shown)
APPENDICES
AHRS Operation
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for specific AHRS alert information.
INDEX
Note: Aggressive maneuvering while AHRS is not operating normally may degrade AHRS accuracy.
18
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
available
available
unavailable
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
le
ab
Attitude/Heading Invalid
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AHRS
no-GPS
Mode
ail
av
AHRS no- AHRS no-Mag/
Mag Mode
no-Air Mode
Heading Invalid
Air Data
un
available
Air Data
AHRS Normal
Operation
unavailable
available
available
Magnetometer Data
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
unavailable
Magnetometer Data
EIS
unavailable
GPS Data
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In addition to using internal sensors, the GRS 77 AHRS uses GPS information, magnetic field data and air
data to assist in attitude/heading calculations. In normal mode, the AHRS relies upon GPS and magnetic
field measurements. If either of these external measurements is unavailable or invalid, the AHRS uses air
data information for attitude determination. Four AHRS modes of operation are available (see Figure 1-13)
and depend upon the combination of available sensor inputs. Loss of air data, GPS, or magnetometer sensor
inputs is communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts.
AFCS
Figure 1-13 AHRS Operation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GPS Input Failure
Note: In-flight initialization of AHRS, when operating without any valid source of GPS data and at true
APPENDICES
air speed values greater than approximately 200 knots, is not guaranteed. Under these rare conditions, it
is possible for in-flight AHRS initialization to take an indefinite amount of time which would result in an
extended period of time where valid AHRS outputs are unavailable.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
The G1000 system provides two sources of GPS information. If a single GPS receiver fails, or if the
information provided from one of the GPS receivers is unreliable, the AHRS seamlessly transitions to using the
other GPS receiver. An alert message informs the pilot of the use of the backup GPS path. If both GPS inputs
fail, the AHRS continues to operate in reversionary No-GPS mode so long as the air data and magnetometer
inputs are available and valid.
19
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
Air Data Input Failure
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A failure of the air data input has no effect on AHRS output while AHRS is operating in normal mode. A
failure of the air data input while the AHRS is operating in reversionary No-GPS mode results in invalid
attitude and heading information on the PFD (as indicated by red “X” flags).
Magnetometer Failure
EIS
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS transitions to one of the reversionary No-Magnetometer modes
and continues to output valid attitude information. However, if the aircraft is airborne, the heading output
on the PFD does become invalid (as indicated by a red “X”).
G1000 System Annunciations
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: For a detailed description of all annunciations and alerts, refer to Appendix A. Refer to the (AFM/
POH) for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red “X” is typically displayed on windows associated with
the failed data (Figure 1-14 displays all possible flags and responsible LRUs). Upon G1000 power-up, certain
windows remain invalid as equipment begins to initialize. All windows should be operational within one
minute of power-up. If any window remains flagged, the G1000 system should be serviced by a Garminauthorized repair facility.
GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics
Units
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GIA 63W
Integrated
Avionics Units
AFCS
GDC 74B Air
Data Computer
GRS 77 AHRS
Or
GMU 44
Magnetometer
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
Or
GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics
Unit
INDEX
GDC 74B Air
Data Computer
Figure 1-14 G1000 System Failure Annunciations
GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics
Units
GTX 33 Transponder
Or
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
20
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Softkey Function
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The softkeys are located along the bottoms of the displays. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey level
or page being displayed. The bezel keys below the softkeys can be used to select the appropriate softkey. When
a softkey is selected, its color changes to black text on gray background and remains this way until it is turned
off, at which time it reverts to white text on black background.
Softkey On
Softkey Names (displayed)
Bezel-Mounted Softkeys (press)
EIS
Figure 1-15 Softkeys (Second-Level PFD Configuration)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Another means of selecting softkeys on the MFD is by using the GCU 477 Control Unit:
Selecting a softkey using the Control Unit
1) Move the softkey selection box to the desired softkey using the arrows of the SEL Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the center of the SEL Key to select the desired softkey.
PFD Softkeys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The CDI, IDENT, TMR/REF, NRST, and ALERTS Softkeys undergo a momentary change to black text
on gray background and automatically switch back to white text on black background when selected. If
messages remain after acknowledgement, the ALERTS Softkey is black on white.
The PFD softkeys provide control over flight management functions, including GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic,
and lightning (optional). Each softkey sublevel has a BACK Softkey which can be pressed to return to
the previous level. The ALERTS Softkey is visible in all softkey levels. For the top level softkeys and the
transponder (XPDR) levels, the IDENT Softkey remains visible.
OFF
DCLTR (3)
190-00928-01 Rev. A
INDEX
TERRAIN
Displays traffic information on Inset Map
TRAFFIC: No Traffic displayed on Inset Map
TRFC-1: Traffic displayed on Inset Map
TRFC-2: Traffic Only display shown
Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) and elevation
scale on Inset Map
APPENDICES
TOPO
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TRAFFIC
Displays Inset Map in PFD lower left corner
Removes Inset Map
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:
DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible
DCLTR-1: Declutters land data
DCLTR-2: Declutters land and SUA data
DCLTR-3: Removes everything except for the active flight plan
AFCS
INSET
Displays terrain information on Inset Map (not available with TAWS-A)
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
21
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
STRMSCP
NEXRAD
XM LTNG
SENSOR
ADC1
ADC2
AHRS1
AHRS2
PFD
SYN VIS
PATHWAY
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
DFLTS
WIND
BRG1
SYN TERR
HRZN HDG
APTSIGNS
OPTN 1
OPTN 2
OPTN 3
OFF
Displays the softkeys for selecting the two HSI formats
AFCS
HSI FRMT
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
360 HSI
ARC HSI
BRG2
APPENDICES
ALT UNIT
METERS
IN
When enabled, displays altimeter in meters
Press to display the BARO setting as inches of mercury
HPA
Press to display the BARO setting as hectopacals
OBS
INDEX
Displays HSI as a 360° compass rose
Displays HSI as a 140° viewable arc
Cycles the Bearing 2 Information Window through NAV2 or GPS waypoint identifier
and GPS-derived distance information, and ADF/frequency.
Displays softkeys for setting the altimeter and BARO settings to metric units
STD BARO
CDI
22
Displays Stormscope information on Inset Map (optional)
Displays NEXRAD weather and coverage on Inset Map (optional)
Displays XM lightning information on Inset Map (optional)
Displays softkeys for selecting the #1 and #2 AHRS and Air Data Computers
Selects the #1 Air Data Computer
Selects the #2 Air Data Computer
Selects the #1 AHRS
Selects the #2 AHRS
Displays second-level softkeys for additional PFD configurations
Displays the softkeys for enabling or disabling Synthetic Vision features
Displays rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the
active flight plan
Enables synthetic terrain depiction
Displays compass heading along the Zero-Pitch line
Displays position markers for airports within approximately 15 nm of the current
aircraft position. Airport identifiers are displayed when the airport is within
approximately 9 nm.
Resets PFD to default settings, including changing units to standard
Displays softkeys to select wind data parameters
Wind direction arrow with numeric speed
Wind direction arrow with numeric direction and magnitude
Headwind/tailwind and crosswind arrows with numeric speed components
Information not displayed
Cycles the Bearing 1 Information Window through NAV1 or GPS waypoint identifier
and GPS-derived distance information, and ADF/frequency.
Sets barometric pressure to 29.92 in Hg (1013 hPa if metric units are selected)
Selects OBS mode on the CDI when navigating by GPS (only available with active
leg)
Cycles through GPS, VOR1, and VOR2 navigation modes on the CDI
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
System Overview
XPDR
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TMR/REF
NRST
ALERTS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VFR
CODE
0—7
BKSP
ADS-B TX
IDENT
EIS
GND
Displays the DME Tuning Window, allowing tuning and selection of the DME
(optional)
Displays transponder mode selection softkeys
Selects the #1 transponder as active
Selects the #2 transponder as active
Selects standby mode (transponder does not reply to any interrogations)
Selects Mode A (transponder replies to interrogations)
Selects Mode C – altitude reporting mode (transponder replies to identification and
altitude interrogations)
Manually selects Ground Mode, the transponder does not allow Mode A and
Mode C replies, but it does permit acquisition squitter and replies to discretely
addressed Mode S interrogations
Automatically enters the VFR code (1200 in the U.S.A. only)
Displays transponder code selection softkeys 0-7
Use numbers to enter code
Removes numbers entered, one at a time
Enables/disables automatic transmission of ADS-B position and speed.
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds, identifying
the transponder return on the ATC screen
Displays Timer/References Window
Displays Nearest Airports Window
Displays Alerts Window
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
XPDR1
XPDR2
STBY
ON
ALT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DME
(optional)
ALERTS
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-16 Top Level PFD Softkeys
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
23
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
(optional)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ALERTS
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
ALERTS
STRMSCP
EIS
TRFC-1
Select the BACK Softkey
to return to the top-level softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TRFC-2
Figure 1-17 INSET Softkeys
(optional)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ALERTS
ADC1
ADC2
AHRS1
AHRS2
BACK
ALERTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Select the BACK Softkey toreturn to the top level softkeys.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 1-18 SENSOR Softkeys
24
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
(optional)
ALERTS
ALERTS
ALT UNIT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HSI FRMT
SYN VIS
Select the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys
EIS
360 HSI
IN
HPA
ALERTS
ARC HSI
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
METERS
ALERTS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ALERTS
PATHWAY SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS
ALERTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-19 PFD Configuration Softkeys
AFCS
(optional)
ALERTS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ADS-B TX
ALERTS
Select the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.
APPENDICES
ALERTS
Select the BACK Softkey to return to the previous level softkeys.
Figure 1-20 XPDR Softkeys
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
25
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
MFD Softkeys
MAP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TRAFFIC
TOPO
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
TERRAIN
AIRWAYS
(Default label is
dependent on map
setup option selected)
STRMSCP
NEXRAD
Displays XM lightning information on Navigation Map (optional)
Returns to top-level softkeys
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:
DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible
DCLTR-1: Declutters land data
DCLTR-2: Declutters land and SUA data
DCLTR-3: Removes everything except for the active flight plan
When available, displays optional airport and terminal procedure charts
When available, displays optional checklists
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
XM LTNG
BACK
DCLTR (3)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Enables second-level Navigation Map softkeys
Displays traffic information on Navigation Map
Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) and elevation scale
on Navigation Map
Displays terrain information on Navigation Map (not available with TAWS-A)
Displays airways on the map; cycles through the following:
AIRWAYS: No airways are displayed
AIRWY ON: All airways are displayed
AIRWY LO: Only low altitude airways are displayed
AIRWY HI: Only high altitude airways are displayed
Displays Stormscope information on Navigation Map (optional)
Displays NEXRAD weather and coverage information on Navigation Map (optional)
SHW CHRT
CHKLIST
(optional)
DCLTR
SHW CHRT
CHKLIST
AFCS
MAP
DCLTR-1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
DCLTR-2
DCLTR-3
APPENDICES
TRAFFIC
TOPO
(optional)
TERRAIN
AIRWAYS
(optional)
STRMSCP
(optional)
NEXRAD
Select the BACK Softkey
on this level to return to the
top softkey level.
(optional)
XM LTNG
BACK
AIRWY ON
AIRWY LO
INDEX
AIRWAY HI
Figure 1-21 MFD Softkeys
26
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GPS Receiver Operation
Each GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) contains a GPS receiver. Information collected by the specified
receiver (GPS1 for the #1 IAU or GPS2 for the #2 IAU) may be viewed on the AUX - GPS Status Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
GPS1 provides information to the pilot-side PFD and GPS2 provides data to the copilot-side PFD. Internal
system checking is performed to ensure both GPS receivers are providing accurate data to the PFDs. In some
circumstances, both GPS receivers may be providing accurate data, but one receiver may be providing a better
GPS solution than the other receiver. In this case the GPS receiver producing the better solution is automatically
coupled to both PFDs. “BOTH ON GPS 1” or “BOTH ON GPS 2” is displayed in the Reversionary Sensor
Window (see Appendix A) indicating which GPS receiver is being used. Both GPS receivers are still functioning
properly, but one receiver is performing better than the other at that particular time.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
These GPS sensor annunciations are most often seen after system power-up when one GPS receiver has
acquired satellites before the other, or one of the GPS receivers has not yet acquired a WAAS signal. While
the aircraft is on the ground, the WAAS signal may be blocked by obstructions causing one GPS receiver to
have difficulty acquiring a good signal. Also, while airborne, turning the aircraft may result in one of the GPS
receivers temporarily losing the WAAS signal.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the sensor annunciation persists, check for a system failure message in the Messages Window on the PFD.
If no failure message exists, check the GPS Status Page and compare the information for GPS1 and GPS2.
Discrepancies may indicate a problem.
Viewing GPS receiver status information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group (see Section 1.7 for information on navigating MFD
page groups).
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select GPS Status Page.
Selecting the GPS receiver for which data may be reviewed
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - GPS Status Page.
AFCS
2) To change the selected GPS receiver:
a) Select the desired GPS Softkey.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the receiver which is not selected and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
27
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
Satellite Signal
Information Status
GPS Receiver
Status
RAIM
Availability
Prediction
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Satellite Constellation
Diagram
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
MSAS and
WAAS
Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Satellite Signal
Strength Bars
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS Selection
Softkeys
RAIM Softkey
Selected
SBAS Softkey
Selected
Figure 1-22 GPS Status Page (RAIM or SBAS Selected)
AFCS
The GPS Status Page provides the following information:
• Satellite constellation diagram
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Satellites currently in view are shown at their respective positions on a sky view diagram. The sky view is
always in a north-up orientation, with the outer circle representing the horizon, the inner circle representing
45° above the horizon, and the center point showing the position directly overhead.
Each satellite is represented by an oval containing the Pseudo-random noise (PRN) number (i.e., satellite
identification number). Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by solid ovals.
APPENDICES
• Satellite signal information status
The accuracy of the aircraft’s GPS fix is calculated using Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU), Dilution
of Precision (DOP), and horizontal and vertical figures of merit (HFOM and VFOM). EPU is the radius of a
circle centered on an estimated horizontal position in which actual position has 95% probability of laying.
EPU is a statistical error indication and not an actual error measurement.
INDEX
DOP measures satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites received and where they are relative to
each other) on a range from 0.0 to 9.9, with lower numbers denoting better accuracy. HFOM and VFOM,
28
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
measures of horizontal and vertical position uncertainty, are the current 95% confidence horizontal and
vertical accuracy values reported by the GPS receiver.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The current calculated GPS position, time, altitude, ground speed, and track for the aircraft are displayed
below the satellite signal accuracy measurements.
• GPS receiver status
EIS
The GPS solution type (ACQUIRING, 2D NAV, 2D DIFF NAV, 3D NAV, 3D DIFF NAV) for the active
GPS receiver (GPS1 or GPS2) is shown in the upper right of the GPS Status Page. When the receiver is
in the process of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation, the receiver uses satellite orbital data
(collected continuously from the satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that should be
in view. ACQUIRING is indicated as the solution until a sufficient number of satellites have been acquired
for computing a solution.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D differential GPS solution, 3D NAV is indicated as the
solution until the 3D differential fix has finished acquisition. SBAS (Satellite-Based Augmentation System)
indicates INACTIVE. When acquisition is complete, the solution status indicates 3D DIFF NAV and SBAS
indicates ACTIVE.
• RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) Prediction (RAIM Softkey is selected)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In most cases performing a RAIM prediction is not necessary. However, in some cases, the selected approach
may be outside the WAAS coverage area and it may be necessary to perform a RAIM prediction for the
intended approach.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to
calculate a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nautical miles for oceanic and enroute, 1.0
nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of
flight, RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time.
AFCS
The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and time. RAIM
computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival date and time.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not available. The
G1000 automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not available. If RAIM is not
predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become active, as indicated by
the messages “Approach is not active” and “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP”. If RAIM is not available
when crossing the FAF, the missed approach procedure must be flown.
Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
APPENDICES
2) If necessary, select the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window.
5) Enter the desired waypoint:
INDEX
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired waypoint by identifier, facility, or city name and press the ENT Key. Refer
to Section 1.7 for instructions on entering alphanumeric data into the G1000.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
29
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
Or:
a) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the NRST, RECENT, or AIRWAY waypoints, if required.
c) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint. The G1000 automatically fills in the identifier,
facility, and city fields with the information for the selected waypoint.
d) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
EIS
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) With the cursor highlighting ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one
of the following is displayed:
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’—RAIM calculation in progress
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
Predicting RAIM availability at present position
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) If necessary, select the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) With ‘Set WPT to Present Position’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
AFCS
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
9) With the cursor highlighting ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one
of the following is displayed:
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’—RAIM calculation in progress
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
INDEX
• SBAS Selection (SBAS Softkey is selected)
In certain situations, such as when the aircraft is outside or on the fringe of the WAAS coverage area, it may
be desirable to disable WAAS or MSAS (although it is not recommended). When disabled, the SBAS field in
the GPS Status box indicates DISABLED. There may be a small delay for the GPS Status box to be updated
upon WAAS and MSAS enabling/disabling.
30
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Disabling WAAS or MSAS
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) If necessary, press the SBAS Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to hightlight ‘MSAS’ or ‘WAAS’.
4) Press the ENT Key to uncheck the box.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
EIS
• GPS Satellite Signal Strengths
The GPS Status Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor satellite
coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength bar is displayed
for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or 120-138 for WAAS) below each
bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages, as indicated by signal bar appearance:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- No bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite
- Hollow bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data
- Light blue bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used
- Green bar—Satellite is being used for the GPS solution
- Checkered bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion)
- “D” indication—Denotes the satellite is being used as part of the differential computations
Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is hollow) before
the satellite may be used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1.7 Accessing G1000 Functionality
Menus
AFCS
The G1000 has a MENU Key that, when pressed, displays a context-sensitive list of options. This options list
allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically relate to the currently
displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing menu. Some menus provide access to additional
submenus that are used to view, edit, select, and review options. Menus display ‘NO OPTIONS’ when there are
no options for the window/page selected. The main controls used in association with all window/page group
operations are described in section 1.3. Softkey selection does not display menus or submenus.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Navigating the Page Menu Window
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu Window.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of available options (a scroll bar appears to the right of the window
when the option list is longer than the window).
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
4) The CLR Key may be pressed to remove the menu and cancel the operation. Pressing the FMS Knob also
removes the displayed menu.
31
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
No Options with
NRST Window
Displayed on the
PFD
EIS
Options
with FPL
Window
Displayed
Figure 1-23 Page Menu Examples
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MFD Page Groups
Note: Refer to the GPS Navigation, Hazard Avoidance, and Additional Features sections for details on
specific pages.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The page group and active page title box are displayed in the upper right of the screen.
Page Group
Active Page Title
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-24 Page Title Box
In the bottom right corner of the screen, the current page group, number of pages available in the group, and
placement of the current page within the group are indicated.
AFCS
Page Groups
Pages in Current Group
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selected Page
Figure 1-25 Page Group Icons
APPENDICES
The MFD displays information in four main page groups; specific pages within each group can vary depending
on the configuration of optional equipment.
Selecting a page using the FMS Knob
1) Turn the large FMS Knob until the desired page group is selected.
INDEX
2) Turn the small FMS Knob until the desired page is selected.
32
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
There are also several pages (Airport Information and XM Information pages) which are selected first from
within a main page group with the FMS Knobs, then with the appropriate softkey at the bottom of the page. In
this case, the page remains set to the selected screen until a different screen softkey is pressed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map Page Group (MAP)
Navigation Map
Traffic Map
EIS
Weather Radar
Stormscope®(optional)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Weather Data Link (service optional)
TAWS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-26 Map Pages
Waypoint Page Group (WPT)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport/Procedures/Weather Information Pages
- Airport Information
(INFO-1 Softkey)
AFCS
- Airport Directory Information
(INFO-2 Softkey)
- Departure Information
(DP Softkey)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Arrival Information
(STAR Softkey)
- Approach Information
(APR Softkey)
APPENDICES
- Weather Information (optional)
(WX Softkey)
Intersection Information
NDB Information
VOR Information
User Waypoint Information
INDEX
Airport/
Procedures/
Weather
Information
Pages
Figure 1-27 Waypoint Pages
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
33
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
Auxiliary Page Group (AUX)
Weight Planning
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Trip Planning
Utility
GPS Status
System Setup
EIS
XM Satellite pages
- XM Information
(INFO Softkey)
XM
Satellite
Pages
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- XM Radio
(RADIO Softkey)
System Status
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-28 Auxiliary Pages
Nearest Page Group (NRST)
Nearest Airports
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Nearest Intersections
Nearest NDB
Nearest VOR
APPENDICES
Nearest User Waypoints
Nearest Frequencies
Nearest Airspaces
INDEX
Figure 1-29 Nearest Pages
34
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
In addition to the main page groups accessed exclusively using the FMS Knobs, there are pages for flight
planning (FPL) and loading procedures (PROC) which are accessed by a dedicated key. In some instances,
softkeys may be used to access the Procedure Pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Flight Plan Pages are accessed using the FPL Key. Main pages within this group are selected by turning
the small FMS Knob.
EIS
Flight Plan Pages (FPL)
Active Flight Plan
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Wide View, Narrow View (VIEW
Softkey)
Flight Plan Catalog
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Stored Flight Plan (via NEW Softkey on
Flight Plan Catalog Page)
Narrow and
Wide View
Figure 1-30 Flight Plan Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Procedure pages may be accessed at any time on the MFD by pressing the PROC Key. A menu is
initialized, and when a departure, approach, or arrival is selected, the appropriate Procedure Loading Page is
opened. Turning the FMS Knob does not scroll through the Procedure pages (note the single page icon in the
lower right corner).
AFCS
Procedure Pages (PROC)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Departure Loading
Arrival Loading
Approach Loading
APPENDICES
Figure 1-31 Procedure Pages
INDEX
For some of these pages (Airport Information pages, XM Satellite pages, Procedure pages), the title of the page
may change while the page icon remains the same.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
35
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
MFD System Pages
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the Auxiliary (AUX) Page Group, there are two system pages: System Setup (page 5 of 7) and System Status
(page 7 of 7). The System Setup Page allows management of various system parameters, while the System
Status Page displays the status of all G1000 system LRUs.
System Setup Page
The System Setup Page allows management of the pilot profiles and the following system parameters:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• Time display format (local or UTC )
• Displayed measurement units
• MFD Data Bar (Navigation Status Box) fields
(see the Flight Management Section)
• Barometric Transition Alert (see the Flight Instruments Section)
• GPS Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) range (see the Flight Instruments Section)
• Airspace alerts (see the Flight Management Section)
• COM transceiver channel spacing (see the Audio Panel and CNS Section)
• Arrival alert
• Displayed nearest airports (see the Flight Management Section)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Audio alert voice
• CDI/Baro Synchronization) (see the Flight Instruments Section)
• Flight Director Format (see the Flight Instruments Section)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Restoring system setup defaults:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
2) Select the DFLTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Restore Defaults’, and press the ENT Key.
Figure 1-32 System Setup Page
36
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Date/Time
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 obtains the current Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) date and time directly from the GPS
satellite signals (shown on the AUX - GPS Status Page, Figure 1-22). System time (displayed in the lower
right corner of the PFD) can be displayed in three formats: local 12-hr, local 24-hr, or UTC. Local time is
set by adding/subtracting an offset (hours:minutes) to/from UTC.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-33 System Time (Local 24-hr Format)
Configuring the system time:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Time Format’ field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired format and press the ENT Key to confirm selection. The ‘Time
Offset’ field is highlighted.
AFCS
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time offset (±HH:MM) and press the ENT Key to confirm selection.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 1-34 Date/Time Settings (System Setup Page)
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
37
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
Pilot Profiles
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System settings may be saved under a pilot profile. When the system is powered on, the last selected pilot
profile is shown on the MFD Power-up Splash Screen (Figure 1-8). The G1000 can store up to 25 profiles;
the currently active profile, the amount of memory used, and the amount of memory available are shown at
the top of the System Setup Page in the box labeled ‘Pilot Profile’. From here, pilot profiles may be created,
selected, renamed, or deleted.
AFCS
Figure 1-35 Pilot Profile Management (System Setup Page)
Creating a profile:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CREATE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Create Profile’ window is displayed.
APPENDICES
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter a profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key. Pilot profile names
cannot begin with a blank as the first letter.
6) In the next field, use the small FMS Knob to select the desired settings upon which to base the new profile.
Profiles can be created based on Garmin factory defaults, default profile settings (initially based on Garmin
factory defaults unless edited by the pilot), or current system settings.
INDEX
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘CREATE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to create the profile
38
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Or:
Use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CREATE and ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to activate the new profile.
9) To cancel the process, select ‘CANCEL’ with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting an active profile:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the active profile field in the Pilot Profile Box.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the pilot profile list and highlight the desired profile.
5) Press the ENT Key. The G1000 loads and displays the system settings for the selected profile.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Renaming a profile:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘RENAME’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Rename Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to rename.
6) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter a new profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘RENAME’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
9) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting a profile:
AFCS
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘DELETE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Delete Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to delete.
6) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
7) With ‘DELETE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
8) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
39
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
Display Units
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Units in which various quantities are displayed on the G1000 screens are listed on the System Setup Page.
The Navigation Angle reference, the Temperature units, and the Position units can be set from here.
Settings
Magnetic (North)*
True (North)
User
EIS
Category
Navigation Angle
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Distance and Speed** Metric
Nautical*
Altitude and Vertical
Speed***
Feet
Temperature
Celsius*
Fahrenheit
Pounds
AFCS
Fuel and Fuel
Flow***
Weight**
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Position
Affected Quantities
Heading
Course
Bearing
Track
Desired Track
Wind direction (Trip Planning Page)
Crosstrack error (HSI)
Bearing distances (information windows)
DME distance (information window)
Flight plan distances
Map ranges
DIS, GS, TAS, XTK fields (Navigation Status Box)
All distances on MFD
Altitude buffer distance (System Setup)
Arrival Alert trigger distance (System Setup)
All speeds on MFD
All altitudes on MFD
All elevations on MFD
All temperatures on PFD
Total Air Temperature (Trip Planning Page)
Fuel parameters (Trip Planning Page)
Pounds*
N/A
Kilograms
HDDD°MM.MM’* All positions
HDDD°MM’SS.S”
MGRS
UTM/UPS
Exceptions
Airspeed Indicator
True Airspeed (PFD)
Wind speed vector
Map range (Traffic Page, Terrain
Proximity/TAWS Page)
CDI scaling (System Setup)
Fuel range calculation (EIS)
Altimeter
Vertical Speed Indicator
VNV altitudes (Active Flight Plan)
Engine Indication System (EIS)
Engine Indication System (EIS)
N/A
N/A
* Default setting
** Contact a Garmin-authorized service center to change this setting
*** Not configurable
APPENDICES
Table 1-1 Display Units Settings (System Setup Page)
Changing a display unit setting
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
INDEX
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Display Units Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired units.
4) Press the ENT Key. Press the CLR Key to cancel the action without changing the units.
40
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Arrival Alerts
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Arrival Alert Box on the System Setup Page allows the Alerts Window arrival alerts to be turned
ON/OFF, and the alert trigger distance (up to 99.9 units) set for alerts in the Alerts Window and the
PFD Navigation Status Box. An arrival alert can be set to notify the pilot with a message upon reaching
a user-specified distance from the final destination (the direct-to waypoint or the last waypoint in a flight
plan). When Arrival Alerts is set to ON, and the set distance is reached, an “Arrival at waypoint” message
is displayed in the PFD Navigation Status Box, and a “WPT ARRIVAL - Arriving at waypoint - [xxxx]” is
displayed in the Alerts Window. When Arrival Alerts is set to OFF, only the PFD Navigation Status Box
message “Arriving at waypoint” is displayed, and it is displayed when the time to the final destination is
approximately ten seconds.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-36 Arrival Alert Settings (System Setup Page)
Enabling/disabling the Alerts Window arrival alert:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ON/OFF field in the Arrival Alert Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
AFCS
Changing the arrival alert trigger distance:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the distance field in the Arrival Alert Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter a trigger distance and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
Audio Alerts
The Audio Alert Box on the System Setup Page allows the audio alert voice to be set to male or female.
Changing the audio alert voice
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
INDEX
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the voice in the Audio Alert Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and highlight the desired voice and press the ENT Key.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
41
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
System Status Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The System Status Page displays the status and software version numbers for all detected system LRUs.
Pertinent information on all system databases is also displayed. Active LRUs are indicated by green check
marks and failed LRUs are indicated by red “X”s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a service center or Garmin
dealer informed.
Figure 1-37 Example System Status Page
The LRU and ARFRM, Softkeys on the System Status Page select the applicable list (LRU INFO or AIRFRAME
window) through which the FMS Knob can be used to scroll information within the selected window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Selecting the MFD1 DB Softkey (label background changes to grey indicting the softkey is selected) places
the cursor in the database window. Use the FMS Knob to scroll through database information for the MFD.
Selecting the softkey again will change the softkey label to PFD1 DB. PFD 1 database information is now
displayed in the database window. Selecting the softkey a third time will change the softkey label to PFD2
DB. PFD 2 database information is now displayed in the database window.
The ANN TEST Softkey, when selected, causes an annunciation test tone to be played.
APPENDICES
The RA TEST Softkey, when selected, initiates the Radar Altimeter test mode. For more information, see
the Flight Instruments section.
INDEX
Selecting the SYNC DBS Softkey (label background changes to grey indicting the softkey is selected)
activates the Automatic Database Synchronization feature. When this feature is active, databases are
updated automatically in the MFD and both PFDs from one SD card. For a detailed discussion on database
synchronization, see the SD Card Use section in the Appendices.
42
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Utility Page
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For flight planning purposes, timers, trip statistics, and a scheduler feature are provided on the AUX Utility Page. The timers available include a stopwatch-like generic timer, a total time in flight timer, and a
record of the time of departure. Trip statistics—odometer, trip odometer, and average trip and maximum
groundspeeds—are displayed from the time of the last reset. Refer to the Additional Features section for a
dicussion on the Scheduler feature.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-38 Utility Page
AFCS
Timers
The G1000 timers available include:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Stopwatch-like generic timers (available from the PFD Timer/References Window and on the MFD AUX
- Utility Page)
• Total-time-in-flight timer (MFD AUX - Utility Page)
• Time since departure (MFD AUX - Utility Page)
APPENDICES
The generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the
countdown on the timer reaches zero the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset before
reaching zero on a countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting up when
reset, the digits are zeroed.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
43
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
Setting the generic timer (PFD):
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the timer field (hh/mm/ss).
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
4) With the UP/DN field highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (UP/DN) and
press the ENT Key.
6) With ‘START?’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to ‘STOP?’.
EIS
7) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘STOP?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘RESET?’.
8) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘RESET?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘START?’ and the
digits are reset.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
AFCS
Figure 1-39 Generic Timer (PFD Timer/References Window)
Setting the generic timer (MFD AUX - Utility Page)
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (UP/DN) and press the ENT Key.
4) If a desired starting time is desired:
APPENDICES
a) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the HH:MM:SS field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘START?’ and press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to
‘STOP?’.
6) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘STOP?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘RESET?’.
INDEX
7) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘RESET?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘START?’ and the
digits are reset.
44
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 1-40 Timers (MFD AUX - Utility Page)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The flight timer can be set to count up from zero starting at system power-up or from the time that the
aircraft lifts off; the timer can also be reset to zero at any time.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Setting the flight timer starting criterion
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the flight timer.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the ENT Key.
Resetting the flight timer
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
3) With ‘Reset Flight Timer’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The G1000 records the time at which departure occurs, depending on whether the pilot prefers the time
to be recorded from system power-up or from aircraft lift off. The displayed departure time can also be reset
to display the current time at the point of reset. The format in which the time is displayed is controlled
from the System Setup Page.
Setting the departure timer starting criterion
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the departure time.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
45
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
Resetting the departure time
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Reset Departure Time’ and press the ENT Key.
Trip Statistics
EIS
The odometer and trip odometer record the total mileage traveled from the last reset; these odometers can
be reset independently. Resetting the trip odometer also resets the average trip groundspeed. Maximum
groundspeed for the period of time since the last reset is also displayed.
Resetting trip statistics readouts
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key. The following reset options for trip statistics are displayed:
• Reset Trip ODOM/AVG GS—Resets trip average ground speed readout and odometer
• Reset Odometer—Resets odometer readout only
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Reset Maximum Speed—Resets maximum speed readout only
• Reset All—Resets flight timer, departure timer, odometers, and groundspeed readouts
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the desired reset option and press the ENT Key. The selected parameters are reset
to zero and begin to display data from the point of reset.
46
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Scheduler
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000’s Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., “Change oil”,
“Switch fuel tanks”, “Overhaul”) in the Alerts Window on the PFD. Messages can be set to display based
on a specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or
recurrently whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting
automatically reset to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is cycled,
messages are retained until deleted, and message timer countdown is restarted.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-41 Scheduler (Utility Page)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Entering a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field.
AFCS
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the Alerts Window and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to ‘Type’.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select set the message alert type:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time
• One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
APPENDICES
8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HHH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
47
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
9) For event-based messages:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MMM-YYY) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.
Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
5) Press the ENT Key to confirm message deletion.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Scheduler messages appear in the Alerts Window on the PFD and cause the ALERTS Softkey label to
change to ‘ADVISORY’. Pressing the ADVISORY Softkey opens the Alerts Window and acknowledges
the scheduler message. The softkey reverts to the ‘ALERTS’ label and when pressed, the Alerts Window is
removed from the display and the scheduler message is deleted from the message queue.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-42 PFD Alerts Window
48
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.8 Display Backlighting
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The PFD and MFD display backlighting, the PFD and MFD bezel, and the Audio Panel keys can be adjusted
manually in one of two ways:
• Using the individual dimmer bus control for the desired display, or
• Using the PFD Setup Menu and the following procedures. In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be
adjusted from the PFDs. In reversionary mode, adjustments can be made from any remaining displays.
Adjusting display backlighting:
EIS
1) Press either PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD1 DSPL’. If
desired, turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘AUTO’ next to ‘MFD DSPL’ or ‘PFD2 DSPL’.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting then press the ENT Key.
4) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
Adjusting key backlighting:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press either PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD1 DSPL’.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘PFD DSPL’, ‘MFD DSPL’, or ‘PFD2 DSPL’, as desired.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘PFD1 KEY’, ‘MFD KEY’, or ‘PFD2
KEY’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting and press the ENT Key.
7) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 1-43 PFD Setup Menu
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
49
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
Blank Page
50
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Section 2 Flight Instruments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: In the event that the airspeed, attitude, altitude, or heading indications become unusable, refer
to the backup instruments.
Note: The Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) provides additional readouts and bugs on selected flight
instruments. Refer to the AFCS Section for details on these bugs and readouts, as they appear on the display
during certain AFCS modes.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Increased situational awareness is provided by replacing the traditional instruments on the panel with easyto-scan pilot and copilot Primary Flight Displays (PFD) that features a large horizon, airspeed, attitude, altitude,
vertical speed, and course deviation information. In addition to the flight instruments, navigation, communication,
terrain, traffic, and weather information are also presented on the PFD and explained in other sections of this
Pilot’s Guide.
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on the PFDs:
• Horizontal Situation Indicator, showing
– Turn Rate Indicator
– Ground Speed
– Bearing pointers and information windows
– Mach number
– DME Information Window (optional)
– Airspeed awareness ranges
– Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
– Reference flags
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
– True Airspeed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Airspeed Indicator, showing
• DME Tuning Window
• Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
• Altimeter, showing
– Barometric setting
• International Standard Atmosphere Temperature
(ISA)
– Selected Altitude
• System time
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope, and
Glidepath Indicators
• Wind data
• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
• Radar altimeter (optional)
AFCS
• Attitude Indicator with slip/skid indication
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Vertical Navigation indications
The PFDs also display various alerts and annunciations.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
51
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
23
22
21
20
19
1
18
17
EIS
2
16
15
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
14
4
13
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
6
12
7
11
8
10
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
9
1
NAV Frequency Box
13
Turn Rate Indicator
2
Airspeed Indicator
14
Altimeter Barometric Setting
3
Ground Speed
15
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
4
True Airspeed
16
Selected Altitude Bug
5
Current Heading
17
Altimeter
6
Selected Heading Bug
18
Selected Altitude
7
19
COM Frequency Box
8
International Standard Atmosphere
Temperature (ISA)
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
20
AFCS Status Box
9
Softkeys
21
Navigation Status Box
10
System Time
22
Slip/Skid Indicator
11
Transponder Data Box
22
Attitude Indicator
12
Horizontal Situation Indicator ( HSI)
INDEX
Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display (Default)
52
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
17
15
16
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
14
13
12
11
EIS
2
3
10
4
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9
5
8
Selected Course
2
Radar Altimeter (optional)
11
Vertical Speed Required
3
Selected Heading
12
Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)
4
Wind Data
13
Reversionary Sensor Window
5
Inset Map
14
Comparator Window
6
DME Information Window (optional)
15
Current VNV Target Altitude
7
Bearing Information Windows
16
Terrain Annunciation
8
Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height
Flight Plan Window
17
AFCS Status Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
10
AFCS
Traffic Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
9
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7
6
Figure 2-2 Additional PFD Information
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
53
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
2.1 Flight Instruments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airspeed Indicator
Note: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) and FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for
speed criteria and Vspeed values.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a moving tape rolling number gauge. The true airspeed (TAS)
is displayed in knots below the Airspeed Indicator. When displayed, the Mach number appears in place of the
TAS. The ground speed is displayed to the left of the TAS. The numeric labels and major tick marks on the
moving tape are marked at intervals of 10 knots, while minor tick marks on the moving tape are indicated at
intervals of 5 knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 60 knots of airspeed viewable at any time. The
actual airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer remains black until reaching the high airspeed
limit, at which point it turns red.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VYSE
Blue Line
Actual
Airspeed
Vspeed
References
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airspeed
Trend
Vector
VMCA
Red Line
True
Airspeed
AFCS
Ground
Speed
Figure 2-4 Red Pointer
Showing Airspeed Above VMO
Figure 2-3 Airspeed Indicator
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Speeds above the maximum operating speed, VMO or MMO depending on aircraft altitude, appear in the high
speed warning range, represented on the airspeed tape by red/white “barber pole” coloration.
A red low speed awareness range extends up to the low speed awareness velocity, VLSA. An aural stall warning
is generated as the aircraft approaches a stall condition.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical magenta line that appears to the right of the color-coded speed range
strip when airspeed is either accelerating or decelerating. One end of the magenta line is anchored to the
tip of the airspeed pointer while the other end moves continuously up or down corresponding to the rate of
acceleration or deceleration. For any constant rate of acceleration or deceleration, the moving end of the line
shows approximately what the indicated airspeed value will be in six seconds. If the trend vector crosses VMO/
MMO, the text of the actual airspeed readout changes to yellow while the pointer remains black. The trend
vector is absent if the speed remains constant or if any data needed to calculate airspeed is not available due to
a system failure.
54
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Vspeed
Flag
VR
R
V50
50
VREF
RF
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Landing Takeoff
Vspeeds can be changed and their flags turned on/off from the Timer/References Window. When active (on),
the Vspeeds are displayed at their respective locations to the right of the airspeed scale. By default, all Vspeed
values are reset and all flags turned off during power-up.
Table 2-1 Vspeed Flag Labels
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vspeeds are categorized as either takeoff or landing. Takeoff Vspeed flags are automatically turned off when
airspeed reaches 160 knots. The order in which the categories are displayed is determined by whether the
aircraft is on the ground or in the air. If the aircraft is on the ground, the takeoff Vspeeds are displayed at the
top of the Vspeed list. If the aircraft is in the air, the landing Vspeeds are displayed at the top.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The maximum speed with approach flaps is displayed as a solid white triangle to the right of the airspeed
scale. This indication is always displayed and cannot be turned off by the pilot.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Maximum
Approach
Flaps Speed
Figure 2-5 Maximum Flaps Extended Speed Reference
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
55
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
Changing Vspeeds and turning Vspeed flags on/off:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired Vspeed.
3) Use the small FMS Knob to change the Vspeed in 1-kt increments (when a speed has been changed from a
default value, an asterisk appears next to the speed).
4) Press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ON/OFF field
5) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
6) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-6 Takeoff and Landing Vspeeds
(Timer/References Window)
Vspeed flags can be turned on or off and values restored all at once or by category (takeoff and landing).
Modifying Vspeeds (on, off, restore defaults):
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired selection.
4) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
5) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
INDEX
Figure 2-7 Page Menu
(Timer/References Window)
56
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Attitude Indicator
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line. The
Attitude Indicator displays the pitch, roll, and slip/skid information.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
9
8
1
6
3
5
2
Roll Scale
3
Horizon Line
4
Aircraft Symbol
5
Land Representation
6
Pitch Scale
7
Slip/Skid Indicator
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4
Roll Pointer
EIS
7
2
1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-8 Attitude Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and numeric
labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 80˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5˚ increments, up to
25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below to 20˚ above the horizon line, minor pitch marks
occur every 2.5˚. When the Synthetic Vision System is activated, the pitch scale is reduced to 10˚ up and 7.5˚
down; refer to the Additional Features section.
AFCS
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and minor tick
marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. Angle of bank is indicated by the position
of the pointer on the roll scale.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. One bar displacement is equal to one ball
displacement on a traditional inclinometer. The indicator bar moves with the roll pointer and moves laterally
away from the pointer to indicate uncoordinated flight. Slip (inside the turn) or skid (outside the turn) is
indicated by the location of the bar relative to the pointer.
APPENDICES
Figure 2-9 Slip/Skid Indication
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
57
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The yellow symbolic aircraft on the Attitude Indicator changes appearance based on selection of AFCS
flight director Command Bar format (see the AFCS Section for details). Both PFDs show the same Command
Bar format and Aircraft Symbol. The Command Bar format (single-cue or cross-pointer) may be selected from
the AUX - System Setup Page Figure 2-10.
Changing Command Bar format:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Format Active’ in the ‘Flight Director’ box.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired format.
’SNGL CUE’ to display Command Bars as a single cue (Aircraft Symbol in figure 2-10).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
’X-POINTER’ to display Command Bars as a cross pointer (Aircraft Symbol in Figure 2-10).
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Cross-pointer
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Single-cue
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 2-10 Flight Director Format
(AUX - System Setup Page)
58
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Altimeter
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Altimeter displays 600 feet of barometric altitude values at a time on a moving tape rolling number gauge.
Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at intervals of 20
feet. The indicated altitude is displayed inside the black pointer.
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. A bug
corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape. If the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on the
tape, the bug appears at the upper or lower edge of the tape. When the metric value is selected it is displayed
in a separate box above the Selected and Indicated Altitudes (Figure 2-12). See the AFCS Section for more
information about Selected Altitude.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Altitude Trend Vector is a vertical magenta line that appears to the left of the altitude range strip when
the aircraft is either climbing or descending. One end of the magenta line is anchored to the tip of the altitude
pointer while the other end moves continuously up or down according to the rate of vertical speed. For any
constant rate of vertical speed, the moving end of the line shows approximately what the indicated altitude
value will be in six seconds. The trend vector is absent if the altitude remains constant or if data needed for
calculation is not available due to a system failure.
Setting the Selected Altitude:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
T urn the ALT SEL Knob to set the Selected Altitude in 100-ft increments (if baro-min reference is set, the selected
altitude can be set in 10 feet increments to match the baro-min value).
If set, the Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height (MDA/DH) value is also available for the Selected Altitude.
When the altimeter is configured for metric units, the selected altitude is adjusted in 50 meter increments.
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Selected
Altitude
(Meters)
AFCS
Altitude
Trend
Vector
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
Indicated
Altitude
(Meters)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Indicated
Altitude
MDA/DH
Bug
Figure 2-11 Altimeter
Barometric
Setting
(Hectopascals)
APPENDICES
Barometric
Setting
Figure 2-12 Altimeter (Metric Units)
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
59
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
Displaying altitude in meters:
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Press the METERS Softkey to turn on metric altitude readouts.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
EIS
The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or hectopascals
(hPa). Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNV vertical deviation, moving
the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the aircraft to re-establish on the
descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target Altitude, the aircraft may not
re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting:
Turn the BARO Knob to select the desired setting.
Selecting standard barometric pressure:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press the BARO Knob to select standard pressure; STD BARO is displayed in barometric setting box.
Or:
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the STD BARO Softkey; STD BARO is displayed in barometric setting box.
Figure 2-13 Standard Barometric Altimeter Setting
AFCS
Changing altimeter barometric pressure setting units:
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT UNIT Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the IN Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in inches of mercury (in Hg).
Or, press the HPA Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals (hPa; see Figure 2-12).
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
60
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If the barometric altimeter settings differ between PFDs by more than 0.02 in Hg, the readouts turn yellow.
The settings can be synchronized from the PFD Setup Menu. Once the settings are synchronized (BARO
SYNC turned on), they remain synchronized until the setting is turned off.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Synchronizing the altimeter barometric pressure settings:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Baro Sync’ in the Synchronization box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Barometric Settings
not Synchronized on PFD
Displayed in Yellow
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 2-14 System Setup Page, Barometric Pressure Synchronization
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
APPENDICES
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) displays the aircraft vertical speed using a non-moving tape labeled at 2000
and 4000 fpm with minor tick marks every 1000 fpm. The current vertical speed is displayed in the pointer
along the tape. Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or descent rate is greater than 100 fpm. If the rate
of ascent/descent exceeds 4000 fpm, the pointer appears at the corresponding edge of the tape and the rate
appears inside the pointer.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
A magenta chevron bug is displayed as the Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) for reaching a VNV
Target Altitude once the “TOD [Top of Descent] within 1 minute” alert has been generated. See the Flight
Management Section for details on VNV features, and refer to Section 2.2, Supplemental Flight Data, for more
information about VNV indications on the PFD.
61
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
Vertical Deviation
Note: The Glidepath Indicator is only shown for aircraft with GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units when
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WAAS is available.
EIS
The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI; Figure 2-15) uses a magenta chevron to indicate the baro-VNV vertical
deviation when Vertical Navigation (VNV) is being used; the VDI appears in conjunction with the “TOD within
1 minute” alert. Full-scale deflection (two dots) is 1000 feet. The VDI is removed from the display if vertical
deviation becomes invalid. See the Flight Management and AFSC sections for details on VNV features, and refer
to Section 2.2, Supplemental Flight Data, for more information about VNV indications on the PFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Glideslope Indicator (Figure 2-16) appears to the left of the Altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is tuned
in the active NAV field and the aircraft heading and selected course are within 107˚. A green diamond acts as
the Glideslope Indicator, like a glideslope needle on a conventional indicator. If a localizer frequency is tuned
and there is no glideslope, “NO GS” is displayed in place of the diamond.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The glidepath is analogous to the glideslope for GPS approaches supporting WAAS vertical guidance (LNAV+V,
L/VNV, LPV). When an approach of this type is loaded into the flight plan and GPS is the selected navigation
source, the Glidepath Indicator (Figure 2-17) appears as a magenta diamond during the approach. If the
approach type downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is displayed in place of the diamond.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VNV Target
Altitude
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Marker Beacon
Annunciation
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Vertical
Speed Glideslope
Pointer Indicator
Glidepath
Indicator
AFCS
Required
Vertical
Speed
Figure 2-16 Glideslope Indicator
Figure 2-17 Glidepath Indicator
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-15 Vertical Speed and
Deviation Indicators (VSI and VDI)
62
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters
indicate the cardinal points and numeric labels occur every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor
tick marks at 5˚ intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI, and the current
track is represented on the HSI by a magenta diamond indicator. The HSI also presents turn rate, course
deviation, bearing, and navigation source information and is available in two formats (360˚ compass rose and
140˚ arc).
Changing the HSI display format:
EIS
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the HSI FRMT Softkey.
3) Press the 360 HSI or ARC HSI Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The 360˚ HSI contains a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI), with a Course Pointer, To/From Indicator, and a
sliding deviation bar and scale. The course pointer is a single line arrow (GPS, VOR1, and LOC1) or a double
line arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. The To/From arrow rotates with
the course pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID is received.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1
15
14
2
13
4
12
5
11
6
10
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3
AFCS
9
7
8
9
To/From Indicator
2
Current Track Indicator
10
Course Pointer
3
Lateral Deviation Scale
11
Heading Bug
4
Navigation Source
12
Flight Phase
5
Aircraft Symbol
13
Lubber Line
6
14
7
Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)
Rotating Compass Rose
8
OBS Mode Active
APPENDICES
Turn Rate Indicator
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1
Turn Rate/Heading
Trend Vector
15 Current Heading
INDEX
Figure 2-18 Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
63
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Arc HSI is a 140˚ expanded section of the compass rose. The Arc HSI contains a Course Pointer,
To/From Indicator, a sliding deviation indicator (the To/From and deviation indicators are combined), and a
deviation scale. Upon station passage, the To/From Indicator flips and points to the tail of the aircraft, just like
a conventional To/From flag. Depending on the navigation source, the CDI on the Arc HSI can appear in two
different ways: an arrowhead (GPS, VOR, OBS) or a diamond (LOC).
Course Pointer
Navigation Source
Flight Phase Annunciation
Course Deviation and
To/From Indicator
EIS
Lateral Deviation Scale
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-19 Arc HSI
The Selected Heading is shown to the upper left of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted The light blue
bug on the compass rose corresponds to the Selected Heading. While the HSI is displayed as an arc, if the
Selected Heading Bug is adjusted off the shown portion of the compass rose, the digital reading is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Adjusting the Selected Heading:
Turn the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading.
Press the HDG Knob to synchronize the bug to the current heading.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Selected Course is shown to the upper right of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted. While the
HSI is displayed as an arc, the Selected Course is displayed whenever the Course Pointer is not within the 140˚
currently shown.
Adjusting the Selected Course:
Turn the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Press the CRS Knob to re-center the CDI and return the course pointer to the bearing of the active waypoint or
navigation station (see OBS Mode for adjusting a GPS course).
Current Track Indicator
Current Heading
Selected Heading
Selected Course
Selected Heading Bug
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 2-20 Heading and Course Indications
64
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Navigation angles (track, heading, course, bearing) are corrected to the computed magnetic variation (‘Mag
Var’) or referenced to true north (denoted ‘T’), set on the AUX - System Setup Page. When an approach
referenced to true north has been loaded into the flight plan, the system generates a message to change the
navigation angle setting to ‘True’ at the appropriate time.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 2-21 Heading and Course Indications (True)
Changing the navigation angle setting:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Nav Angle’ in the ‘Display Units’ box (Figure 2-22).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
• TRUE - References angles to true north (denoted with ‘T’)
• MAGNETIC - Angles corrected to the computed magnetic variation (‘Mag Var’)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 2-22 System Setup Page, Navigation Angle Settings
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
65
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
Turn Rate Indicator
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left and right
of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the
current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in 6 seconds, based on the present
turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn
rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading. At rates greater than 4
deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction is no longer valid.
EIS
Half Standard
Turn Rate
Arrow Shown
for Turn Rate
> 4 Degrees
per Second
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Standard
Turn Rate
Figure 2-23 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Bearing Pointers and Information Windows
NOTE: When the Arc HSI is displayed, the Bearing Information windows and pointers are disabled.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Two bearing pointers and associated information can be displayed on the HSI for NAV and GPS sources.
The pointers are light blue and are single- (BRG1) or double-lined (BRG2); an icon is shown in the respective
information window to indicate the pointer type. The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are
visually separated from the CDI by a white ring (shown when bearing pointers are selected but not necessarily
visible due to data unavailability).
Tuning Mode
AFCS
Frequency
Bearing 1
Pointer
Bearing 2
Pointer
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Distance
DME Information Window
(optional)
Distance to
Bearing Source
Station
Identifier
APPENDICES
Bearing 2 Information Window
Bearing
Source
Pointer
Icon
Bearing 1 Information Window
INDEX
Figure 2-24 HSI with Bearing and DME Information
66
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When a bearing pointer is displayed, its associated information window is also displayed. The Bearing
Information windows (Figure 2-25) are displayed to the lower sides of the HSI and show:
• Station/waypoint identifier (NAV, GPS)
• Pointer icon (BRG1 = single line, BRG2 = double line)
• GPS-derived great circle distance to bearing
source
• Frequency (NAV)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Bearing source (NAV, GPS, ADF)
EIS
If the NAV radio is the bearing source and is tuned to an ILS frequency (refer to the Audio Panel and CNS
Section for information on tuning the radios), the bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and the frequency
is replaced with “ILS”. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the frequency is replaced by the
station identifier when the station is within range. If GPS is the bearing source, the active waypoint identifier
is displayed in lieu of a frequency.
The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and “NO DATA” is displayed in the information window if:
• GPS is the bearing source and an active waypoint
is not selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• The NAV radio is not receiving the tuned VOR
station
Selecting bearing display and changing sources:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press a BRG Softkey to display the desired bearing pointer and information window with a NAV source.
3) Press the BRG Softkey again to change the bearing source to GPS.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the BRG Softkey a third time to change the bearing source to ADF (note: ADF radio installation is
optional).
5) To remove the bearing pointer and information window, press the BRG Softkey again.
DME Information Window
AFCS
Note: DME radio installation is optional.
The DME Information Window is displayed above the BRG1 Information Window and shows the DME
label, tuning mode (NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD), frequency, and distance. When a signal is invalid, the distance
is replaced by “–.– – NM”. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the radios.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying the DME Information Window:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Information Window above the BRG1 Information Window.
APPENDICES
3) To remove the DME Information Window, press the DME Softkey again.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
67
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
NOTE: If a heading change of greater than 105˚ with respect to the course is made, the CDI on the Arc HSI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
switches to the opposite side of the deviation scale and displays reverse sensing.
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral deviation
scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not
displayed.
EIS
Flight
Phase
Navigation
Source
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Scale
Crosstrack
Error
Navigation
Source
Crosstrack
Error
CDI Scale
CDI
Arc HSI
CDI
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flight
Phase
360º HSI
Figure 2-25 Course Deviation Indicator
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The CDI can display two sources of navigation: GPS or NAV (VOR, localizer). Color indicates the current
navigation source: magenta (for GPS) or green (for VOR and LOC); the Selected Course readout also follows
these color indications. When coupled to GPS, the full scale limits for the CDI are defined by a GPS-derived
distance. When coupled to a VOR or localizer (LOC), the CDI has the same angular limits as a mechanical CDI.
If the CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale (two dots) while coupled to GPS, the crosstrack error
(XTK) is displayed below the white aircraft symbol.
APPENDICES
Navigation
Source Selected
on Both PFDs
INDEX
Figure 2-26 Navigation Sources
68
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing navigation sources:
1) Select the CDI Softkey to change from GPS to VOR1 or LOC1. This places the light blue tuning box over the
NAV1 standby frequency in the upper left corner of the PFD.
NAV1 Selected for Tuning
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the CDI Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. This places the light blue tuning
box over the NAV2 standby frequency.
3) Select the CDI Softkey a third time to return to GPS.
NAV2 Selected for Tuning
EIS
LOC1
Selected
VOR2
Selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS
Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting the CDI Softkey
Cycles through
Navigation Sources
Figure 2-27 Selecting a Navigation Source
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the same VOR/LOC navigation source is selected on both PFDs, the navigation source annunciation turns
yellow on both displays (unless synchronized). Once the CDIs are synchronized (CDI SYNC turned on), they
remain synchronized until the setting is turned off.
Synchronizing the CDIs:
AFCS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘CDI Sync’ in the Synchronization box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
69
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
Figure 2-28 System Setup Page, CDI Synchronization
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system automatically switches from GPS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling accordingly
when all of the following occur:
• A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan
• The final approach fix (FAF) is the active l, the FAF is less than 15 nm away, and the aircraft is moving toward
the FAF
AFCS
• A valid localizer frequency has been tuned
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• The GPS CDI deviation is less than 1.2 times full-scale deflection
70
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GPS steering guidance is still provided after the CDI automatically switches to LOC until LOC capture, up
to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until GPS information becomes invalid. Activating
a Vector-to-Final (VTF; see the Flight Management Section) also causes the CDI to switch to LOC navigation
source; GPS steering guidance is not provided after this switch.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GPS CDI Scaling
When GPS is the selected navigation source, the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically and
annunciations appear on the HSI for the flight phase. Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in
magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist the color changes to yellow. If the current leg in the flight plan
is a heading leg, ‘HDG LEG’ is annunciated in magenta beneath the aircraft symbol.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The current GPS CDI scale setting is displayed as ‘System CDI’ on the AUX - System Setup Page and the fullscale deflection setting may also be changed (2.0 nm, 1.0 nm, 0.3 nm, or Auto) from this page (Figure 2-30).
If the selected scaling is smaller than the automatic setting for enroute and terminal phases, the CDI is scaled
accordingly and the selected setting is be displayed rather than the flight phase annunciation.
Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Selected’ in the ‘GPS CDI’ box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-29 System Setup Page, GPS CDI Settings
APPENDICES
When set to ‘Auto’ (default), the GPS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the
current phase of flight (Figure 2-30, 2-31, 2-32, Table 2-2).
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
71
Terminal
Terminal
Approach
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
Enroute
(Oceanic if >200 nm
from nearest airport)
Refer to accompanying
approach CDI scaling figures
Missed
Approach
EIS
Departure
1.0 nm
0.3 nm
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CDI Full-scale Deflection
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-30 Automatic CDI Scaling
• When a departure procedure is active, the CDI is scaled for departure (0.3 nm).
• The system switches from departure to terminal CDI scaling (1.0 nm) under the following conditions:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- The next leg in the procedure is not aligned with the departure runway
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF (see
Glossary for leg type definitions)
- After any leg in the departure procedure that is not CA or FA
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• At 30 nm from the departure airport the enroute phase of flight is automatically entered and CDI scaling
changes to 2.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
- When navigating with an active departure procedure, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change
until the aircraft arrives at the last departure waypoint (if more than 30 nm from the departure airport)
or the leg after the last departure waypoint has been activated or a direct-to waypoint is activated.
AFCS
• If after completing the departure procedure the nearest airport is more than 200 nm away from the aircraft
and the approach procedure has not yet commenced, the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight (2.0 nm).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Within 31 nm of the destination airport (terminal area), the CDI scale gradually ramps down from 2.0 nm
to 1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm; except under the following conditions:
- When navigating with an active arrival route, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change until the
aircraft arrives at the first waypoint in the arrival route (if within 31 nm from the destination airport).
APPENDICES
• During approach, the CDI scale ramps down even further (see Figures 2-32 and 2-33). This transition
normally occurs within 2.0 nm of the final approach fix (FAF). The CDI switches to approach scaling
automatically once the approach procedure is activated or if Vector-to-Final (VTF) is selected.
- If the active waypoint is the FAF, the ground track and the bearing to the FAF must be within 45° of the
final approach segment course.
INDEX
- If the active waypoint is part of the missed approach procedure, the active leg and preceding missed
approach legs must be aligned with the final approach segment course and the aircraft must not have
passed the turn initiation point.
72
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
FAF
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2 nm
FAF
course width
350 ft
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
CDI Full-scale Deflection
2 nm
angle based
on database
information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
angle set
by system
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CDI scale is set to the smaller of 0.3 nm
or an angle set by the system
CDI Full-scale Deflection
Flight Instruments
Landing
Threshold
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
Figure 2-32 Typical LNAV/VNAV and LPV Approach CDI Scaling
EIS
Figure 2-31 Typical LNAV and LNAV+V Approach CDI Scaling
• When a missed approach is activated, the CDI scale changes to 0.3 nm.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• The system automatically switches back to terminal scaling under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not aligned with the final approach path
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF
Annunciation
DPRT
TERM
ENR
OCN
Approach
(Non-precision)
LNAV
1.0 nm decreasing to 350 feet depending on
variables (see Figure 2-30)
AFCS
LNAV + V
L/VNAV
LPV
MAPR
1.0 nm decreasing to a specified course width, then
0.3 nm, depending on variables (see Figure 2-31)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Approach
(Non-precision with
Vertical Guidance)
Approach
(LNAV/VNAV)
Approach
(LPV)
Missed Approach
Automatic CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
2.0 nm
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight Phase
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
Oceanic
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- After any leg in the missed approach procedure that is not CA or FA
0.3 nm
APPENDICES
Table 2-2 Automatic GPS CDI Scaling
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
73
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OBS Mode
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a GPS
flight plan (GPS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current “active-to” waypoint as the
navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. ‘OBS’ is annunciated to the lower right of the aircraft
symbol when OBS Mode is selected (see Figure 2-33).
EIS
Flight Instruments
While OBS Mode is enabled, a course line is drawn through the “active-to” waypoint on the moving map.
If desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted. When OBS Mode is disabled, the GPS flight
plan returns to normal operation with automatic sequencing of waypoints, following the course set in OBS
Mode. The flight path on the moving map retains the modified course line.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS
Selected
Extended
Course
Line
OBS Mode
Enabled
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Enables
OBS Mode
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Again
Disables OBS Mode
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 2-33 Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode
74
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating a GPS flight plan:
1) Select the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the CRS Knob to select the desired course to/from the waypoint. Press the CRS Knob to synchronize the
Selected Course with the bearing to the next waypoint.
3) Select the OBS Softkey again to return to automatic waypoint sequencing.
EIS
As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing is
suspended. SUSP appears on the HSI at the lower right of the aircraft symbol. The OBS Softkey label
changes to indicate the suspension is active as shown in Figure 2-34. Pressing the SUSP Softkey deactivates
the suspension and resumes automatic sequencing of approach waypoints.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SUSP
Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the SUSP
Softkey Suspends
Waypoint Sequencing
Figure 2-34 Suspending Automatic Waypoint Sequencing
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
75
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
2.2 Supplemental Flight Data
Note: Selecting the DFLTS Softkey (a second-level PFD softkey) turns off metric Altimeter display, the Inset
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map, and wind data display.
In addition to the flight instruments, the PFD also displays various supplemental information, including
temperatures, wind data, and Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications.
Temperature Displays
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) and International Standard Atmosphere Temperature (ISA) are displayed
in degrees Celsius (°C) by default in the lower left of the PFD under normal display conditions, or below the
true airspeed in reversionary mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Normal Display
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Reversionary Mode
INDEX
Figure 2-35 Outside Air Temperature
76
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Wind Data
Option 2
Option 3
No Data
EIS
Option 1
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Wind direction and speed in knots can be displayed in a window to the upper left of the HSI. When the
window is selected for display, but wind information is invalid or unavailable, the window shows “NO WIND
DATA”. Wind data can be displayed in three different ways:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-36 Wind Data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying wind data:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the WIND Softkey to display wind data below the Selected Heading.
AFCS
3) Press one of the OPTN softkeys to change how wind data is displayed:
• OPTN 1: Wind direction arrow and speed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• OPTN 2: Wind direction arrow with true digital direction and speed
• OPTN 3: Wind direction arrows with headwind, tailwind, and crosswind speed components
4) To remove the window, press the OFF Softkey.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
77
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When a VNV flight plan has been activated, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, RVSI, VDI) appear on the
PFD in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute” message and “Vertical track” voice alert. See the Flight
Management and AFCS sections for details on VNV features. VNV indications are removed from the PFD
according to the criteria listed in Table 2-3.
Top of Descent Message
EIS
VNV Target
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Enroute
Phase of
Flight
Figure 2-37 Vertical Navigation Indications (PFD)
AFCS
VNV Indication Removed
Required Vertical
Vertical
VNV Target
Speed (RVSI)
Deviation (VDI)
Altitude
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD due to flight plan change
X
X
X
VNV cancelled (CNCL VNV Softkey selected on MFD)
X
X
X
Distance to active waypoint cannot be computed due to
unsupported flight plan leg type (see Flight Management
X
X
X
Section)
Aircraft > 250 feet below active VNV Target Altitude
X
X
X
Current crosstrack or track angle error has exceeded limit
X
X
X
Active altitude-constrained waypoint cannot be reached within
X
X
maximum allowed flight path angle and vertical speed
X
Last altitude-constrained waypoint in active flight plan reached
X
X
(30 sec before)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Criteria
Table 2-3 VNV Indication Removal Criteria
78
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.3 PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following annunciations and alerting functions are displayed on the PFD. Refer to Appendix A for more
information on alerts and annunciations.
G1000 Alerting system
EIS
Messages appear in the Alerts Window (in the lower right corner of the PFD; Figure 2-38) when a warning,
caution, advisory alert, or G1000 message advisory occurs. System alert messages are provided for awareness
of G1000 system problems or status and may not require pilot action. The Alerts Window allows system alerts
to be displayed simultaneously. The FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the alert messages. The Alerts
Window is enabled/disabled by selecting the ALERTS Softkey. If the window is already open when a new
message is generated, selecting the ALERTS Softkey to acknowledge the message causes it to turn gray.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Annunciation Window appears to the right of the Vertical Speed Indicator and displays abbreviated
annunciation text for aircraft alerts. Text color is based on alert level: warnings appear in red, cautions in
yellow, advisory alerts in white. New alerts, regardless of priority, are displayed at the top of the Annunciation
Window, separated by a white line from acknowledged alerts. Once acknowledged, they are sequenced based
on priority.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Comparator
Window
Reversionary
Sensor
Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Alerts
Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Softkey
Annunciation
Figure 2-38 G1000 Alerting System
APPENDICES
The ADVISORY Softkey provides general information to the pilot that may not need immediate attention.
A flashing ADVISORY Softkey annunciation (no aural tone) indicates the presence of a message advisory. The
flashing ADVISORY Softkey annunciation continues to flash until acknowledged (by pressing the ADVISORY
Softkey).
INDEX
Figure 2-39 Softkey Annunciation
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
79
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Critical values generated by redundant sensors are monitored by comparators. If differences in the sensors
exceed a specified amount, the Comparator Window appears in the upper right corner of the PFD and the
discrepancy is annunciated in the Comparator Window as a ‘MISCOMP’ (miscompare). If one or both of the
sensed values are unavailable, it is annunciated as a ‘NO COMP’ (no compare).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-40 Comparator Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Reversionary sensor selection is annunciated in a window on the right side of the PFD. These annunciations
reflect reversionary sensors selected on one or both PFDs. Pressing the SENSOR Softkey accesses the ADC1,
ADC2, AHRS1, and AHRS2 softkeys. These softkeys allow switching of the sensors being viewed on each
PFD. With certain types of sensor failures, the G1000 may make some sensor selections automatically. The GPS
sensor cannot be switched manually.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 2-41 Reversionary Sensor Window
80
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Marker Beacon Annunciations
Outer Marker
Middle Marker
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Selected Altitude. Outer marker
reception is indicated in blue, middle in yellow, and inner in white. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section
for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.
Inner Marker
EIS
Altimeter
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-42 Marker Beacon Annunciations
Traffic Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The System displays traffic symbolically on the Inset Map (PFD), the Navigation Map Page (MFD), and various
other MFD page maps. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for more details about the Traffic Information
Service (TIS) and optional Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS). When a traffic advisory (TA) is detected, the following
automatically occurs:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• The PFD Inset Map is enabled, displaying traffic (Figure 2-43)
• A flashing black-on-yellow TRAFFIC annunciation (Figure 2-44) appears to the top left of the Attitude
Indicator for five seconds and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area
• A single “Traffic” aural alert is generated, unless an optional Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed (refer to
the applicable TAS documentation for alerts generated by TAS equipment)
AFCS
If additional TAs appear, new aural and visual alerts are generated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic
Symbols
APPENDICES
Figure 2-44 Traffic Annunciation
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
Figure 2-43 Inset Map with Traffic Displayed
81
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
TAWS Annunciations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) annunciations appear on the PFD to the upper left of the
Altimeter. In TAWS-A installations, annunciations also appear to the upper right of the Airspeed Indicator.
Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and Appendix A for information on TAWS alerts and annunciations.
Figure 2-45 Example TAWS-A Annunciations
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude Alerting
The Altitude Alerting function provides the pilot with visual and aural alerts when approaching the Selected
Altitude. Whenever the Selected Altitude is changed, the Altitude Alerter is reset. The Altitude Alerter is
independent of the GFC 700 AFCS, but alerting tones are generated only when the GFC 700 is installed. The
following occur when approaching the Selected Altitude:
AFCS
• Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter)
changes to black text on a light blue background, flashes for 5 seconds, and an aural tone is generated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• When the aircraft passes within 200 ft of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude changes to light blue text
on a black background and flashes for 5 seconds.
• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the pilot flies outside the deviation band (±200 feet of the Selected
Altitude), the Selected Altitude changes to yellow text on a black background, flashes for 5 seconds, and an
aural tone is generated.
APPENDICES
Within 1000 ft
Within 200 ft
Deviation of ±200 ft
INDEX
Figure 2-46 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
82
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Low Altitude Annunciation
NOTE: The Low Altitude Annunciation is available only for aircraft with GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
when WAAS is available. This annunciation is not shown for systems with TAWS, unless TAWS is inhibited.
When the Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active waypoint in a GPS WAAS approach using vertical guidance,
a Low Altitude Annunciation may appear if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed
altitude at the FAF. A black-on-yellow ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation appears to the top right of the Altimeter,
flashing for several seconds then remaining displayed until the condition is resolved.
EIS
Altimeter
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-47 Low Altitude on GPS WAAS Approach
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting
For altitude awareness, a Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or Decision Height (DH), based on barometric
altitude can be set. When active, the altitude setting is displayed to the lower left of the Altimeter and with a
bug at the corresponding altitude along the Altimeter (once the altitude is within the visible range of the tape).
The following visual annunciations alert the pilot when approaching the MDA/DH:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the MDA/DH setting, a box labeled BARO
MIN appears with the altitude in light blue text. The bug appears in light blue on the altitude tape at the
corresponding altitude once in range.
• When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the MDA or DH, the bug and text turn white.
Within 2500 feet
Within 100 feet
AFCS
• Once the aircraft reaches the MDA/DH, the bug and text turn yellow and the aural alert, “Minimums
Minimums”, is generated.
Altitude Reached
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MDA/DH
Bug
APPENDICES
MDA/DH
Setting
Figure 2-48 Barometric MDA/DH Alerting Visual Annunciations
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the setting
for the alert. If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the MDA/DH, once it reaches 50 feet above
the MDA/DH, alerting is disabled.
83
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
The MDA/DH may be set from either PFD and is synchronized on both PFDs. The function is reset when the
power is cycled.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Setting the barometric minimum descent altitude and bug:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Minimums field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘BARO’. ‘OFF’ is selected by default. Press the ENT Key or turn the large
FMS Knob to highlight the next field.
EIS
4) Use the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude (from zero to 16,000 feet).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
Figure 2-49 Timer/References Window, MDA/DH Setting
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Radar Altimeter
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the radar height (the aircraft altitude above ground level detected by the radar altimeter) is between -40
and 2500 feet, the current value is displayed in green above the current aircraft heading (Figure 2-50). Display
of radar height becomes more sensitive as the height above ground decreases (Table 2-4).
Radar Altimeter
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 2-50 Current Radar Height
Radar Height Range
Shown to Nearest
-40 to 200 feet
5 feet
200 to 1500 feet
10 feet
1500 to 2500 feet
50 feet
APPENDICES
Table 2-4 Radar Altimeter Sensitivity
INDEX
When the radar altimeter is selected as the altitude source for the minimum descent altitude alerting function
(Figure 2-51), the color of the radar height changes to yellow (Figure 2-52).
Figure 2-51 RAD ALT Setting
(Timer/References Window)
84
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Figure 2-52 RA as Altitude Source for MDA/DH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A ground line (Figure 2-53) is shown on the Altimeter to display the aircraft’s height relative to the ground.
If the data becomes invalid, the message “RA FAIL” is displayed in yellow in place of the current radar height
(Figure 2-54). The Radar Altimeter test is done on the MFD but is displayed on the PFD directly above the
current heading (Figure 2-55).
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Ground
Line
Radar Altimeter
Minimums Box
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-53 Altimeter Displaying the Ground Line (RAD ALT)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-54 Radar Altimeter Invalid Data
Testing the Radar Altimeter:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page on the MFD.
AFCS
2) Press the RA TEST Softkey.
Or:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page on the MFD.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘Enable RA Test Mode’.
4) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
‘RA TEST’ is annunciated and 50 feet will be displayed in the RA box directly above the current heading on
the PFD.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
Figure 2-55 Radar Altimeter Test
85
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
2.4 Abnormal Operations
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Abnormal GPS Conditions
The annunciations listed in Table 2-5 can appear on the HSI when abnormal GPS conditions occur; see Figure
2-56 for examples. Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on Dead Reckoning Mode.
Annunciation
EIS
LOI
INTEG OK
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DR
Location
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Upper right of
aircraft symbol
Description
Loss of Integrity Monitoring–GPS integrity is insufficient for the current
phase of flight
Integrity OK–GPS integrity has been restored to within normal limits
(annunciation displayed for 5 seconds)
Dead Reckoning–System is using projected position rather than GPS position
to compute navigation data and sequence active flight plan waypoints
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 2-5 Abnormal GPS Conditions Annunciated on HSI
Figure 2-56 Example HSI Annunciations
Dead Reckoning Mode causes the CDI to be removed from the display (when GPS is the selected navigation
source) and the following items on the PFD to be shown in yellow:
AFCS
• Ground Speed
• Current Track Indicator
• Wind data and pointers in the Wind Data Box on the PFD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GPS bearing pointers
• Distances in the Bearing Information windows
• Active Flight Plan distances, bearings, and ETE values
INDEX
APPENDICES
Also, while the system is in Dead Reckoning Mode, the autopilot will not couple to GPS, and TAWS is disabled.
Additionally, the accuracy of all nearest information (airports, airspaces, and waypoints) is questionable. Finally,
airspace alerts continue to function, but with degraded accuracy.
86
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Unusual Attitudes
When the aircraft enters an unusual pitch attitude, red extreme pitch warning chevrons pointing toward the
horizon are displayed on the Attitude Indicator, starting at 50˚ above and 30˚ below the horizon line.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Nose High
Nose Low
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-57 Pitch Attitude Warnings
• Transponder Status Box
• AFCS Annunciations
• PFD Setup Menu
• Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height readout
• Flight director Command Bars
• Windows displayed in the lower
right corner of the PFD:
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators
• Inset Map
– Timer/References
• Altimeter Barometric Setting
• International Standard
Atmosphere Temperature (ISA)
– Nearest Airports
• Selected Altitude
– Flight Plan
• VNV Target Altitude
• DME Information Window
(optional)
– Alerts
• System Time
• Wind data
– DME Tuning (optional)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
AFCS
• Traffic Annunciations
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚, some information displayed on the PFD is removed. The
Altimeter and Airspeed, Attitude, Vertical Speed, and Horizontal Situation indicators remain on the display
and the Bearing Information, Alerts, and Annunciation windows can be displayed during such situations. The
following information is removed from the PFD (and corresponding softkeys are disabled) when the aircraft
experiences unusual attitudes:
– Procedures
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
87
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
Blank Page
88
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Engine Indication System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Section 3 Engine Indication System
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 Engine Indication System (EIS) displays critical engine and fuel flow parameters on the left side of
the Multi Function Display (MFD) during normal operations (Figure 3-1). In Reversionary Mode, the displays are
re-configured to present Primary Flight Display (PFD) symbology together with the EIS (Figure 3-12).
EIS Display
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 3-1 MFD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
EIS information is presented using gauges and digital readouts. Green bands on the instrument scales indicate
normal ranges of operation; yellow and red bands indicate caution and warning, respectively. White or uncolored
bands indicate areas outside of normal operation not yet in the caution or warning ranges. During normal
operating conditions, an instrument’s pointer appears in white and the readout text is green.
APPENDICES
When an unsafe operating condition occurs, the pointer and readout color change to yellow or red, indicating
a caution or warning. If a cautionary time limit is exceeded, the pointers and digits may flash red, even if the
parameter is still within in the cautionary range. If the sensor data for a parameter becomes invalid or unavailable,
a red “X” is displayed across the indicator and/or readout.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
89
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Engine Indication System
3.1 EIS Display
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The gauges displayed and the values shown in this section are taken from the Beechcraft 200/B200
baseline configuration. Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) and FAA Approved Airplane Flight
Manual (AFM) for specific values and operating limitations.
1
3
Tachometer (PROP RPM)
4
Propeller Sync
5
Turbine Speed (% RPM)
6
7
Fuel Flow
(FFLOW PPH)
Oil Pressure (OIL PSI)
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm); the red band
indicates propeller overspeed
Displays a diamond when propellers are in sync. Indicates when propellers
are out of sync by the diamond transitioning to an arrowhead. The
arrowhead points towards the propeller turning at a higher-speed.
Displays turbine speed in a percentage of the revolutions per minute
(rpm)
Displays current fuel flow in pounds per hour (pph)
8
Oil Temperature (OIL °C)
Displays torque in foot-pounds
Displays pressure of oil supplied to the engines in pounds per square
inch (psi)
Displays the oil temperature in degrees Celsius (°C)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Displays Interstage Turbine Temperature in degrees Celsius (°C)
2
Interstage Turbine
Temperature (ITT)
Torque (FT-LB)
90
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Engine Indication System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
200/B200 Baseline Configuration
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
EIS
2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4
3
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6
AFCS
7
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
8
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
Figure 3-2 EIS Display
91
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Engine Indication System
Interstage Turbine Temperature
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Interstage Turbine Temperature (ITT) Gauge is displayed at the top of the EIS. This gauge differs for
engine start and running conditions. Values between 200 and 1200 degrees Celsius (°C) are shown at engine
start; values change to 200 to 900 °C once the engine has stabilized. A red triangle is displayed at 1000
°C during engine start to indicate maximum starting ITT. This is available in both normal and reversionary
modes.
ITT Engine Start
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
ITT Engine Running
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 3-3 ITT Gauge
Torque
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Torque Gauge displays engine power in foot-pounds and is located beneath the ITT gauge. The values
range from 0 FT-LB to 2600 FT-LB If the torque remains above 2230 FT-LB for more than 5 seconds, a warning
condition occurs.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 3-4 Torque Gauge
92
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Engine Indication System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Tachometer (RPM)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Tachometer is located beneath the Torque gauge and displays the propeller speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM) from 0 to 2500. A propeller overspeed is indicated if the propeller speed exceeds the maximum
safe operating speed (red tick mark). The Tachometer is equipped with a propeller sync indicator, which
points towards the higher-speed propeller when propellers are out of sync. The indicator changes linearly
with RPM difference between the left and right propellers. A full diamond is displayed when the propellers are
synchronized and transitions to a full arrowhead when the difference is greater or equal to 50 rpm.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 3-5 Propellers Synchronized
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 3-6 Propellers Out of Sync (less than 50 rpm)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 3-7 Propellers Out of Sync
(greater than or equal to 50 rpm)
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
93
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Engine Indication System
Turbine Speed
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Turbine Speed Gauge is located beneath the Tachometer. The gauge range is from 0 to 110%.
Figure 3-8 Turbine Speed Gauge
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Fuel Flow
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Fuel Flow Gauge is displayed beneath the Turbine Speed gauge. Fuel Flow is displayed in pounds per
hour (pph) from 0 to 600 pph.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 3-9 Fuel Flow Gauge
94
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Engine Indication System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Oil Pressure
Below FL210
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Oil Pressure Gauge is located beneath the Fuel Flow gauge. Oil pressure is displayed in pounds per square
inch (psi) from 0 to 200 psi. Safe operating pressure is more than 90 psi and less than 135 psi (varies based on
altitude above FL210 and type of engines installed; refer to the AFM). A red triangle represents the maximum oil
transient pressure at 200 psi.
Above FL210
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 3-10 Oil Pressure Gauge
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Oil Temperature
The Oil Temperature Gauge is located beneath the Oil Pressure gauge. Oil temperature is displayed in
degrees Celsius (°C).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 3-11 Oil Temperature Gauge
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
95
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Engine Indication System
3.2 EIS Display in Reversionary Mode
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the event of PFD1, PFD2 or MFD failure, the Display Backup button must be pressed to enter reversionary
(or backup) mode. Reversionary mode is a mode of operation in which all important flight information is
presented identically on at least one of the remaining displays (see Figure 3-12). Transition to reversionary
mode should be straightforward for the pilot, for flight parameters are presented in the same format as in
normal mode (refer to the System Overview for information about display Reversionary Mode).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
EIS Display
AFCS
Figure 3-12 Reversionary Mode (200/B200)
In the event of display failure, the display modes are as follows:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• PFD1 failure – Press the Display Backup button on the left Audio Panel. MFD enters reversionary mode; PFD2
remains in normal mode.
• MFD failure – Press the Display Backup buttons on both Audio Panels. PFD1 and PFD2 enter reversionary
mode.
APPENDICES
• PFD2 failure – Press the Display Backup button on the right Audio Panel. MFD enters reversionary mode;
PFD1 remains in normal mode.
INDEX
Figure 3-13 Display Backup Button
96
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Engine Indication System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Reversionary Display
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The EIS Reversionary Mode Display gauges have a different shape and share one title (i.e. ITT, FFLOW)
for each pair of gauges. Major white tick marks are displayed only at the minimum and maximum values.
No minor tick marks or numeric labels are displayed. The Prop Synchronization is not displayed while in
Reversionary Mode.
NOTE: The gauges displayed and the values shown in this section are taken from the Beechcraft 200/B200
baseline configuration. Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) and FAA Approved Airplane Flight
Manual (AFM) for specific values and operating limitations.
EIS
200/B200 Baseline Configuration
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 3-14 EIS Reversionary Mode Display
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
97
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Engine Indication System
Blank Page
98
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Section 4 Audio Panel and CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4.1 Overview
The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the Audio Panels, communication radios,
navigation radios, and Mode S transponders. The System Overview Section provides a block diagram description
of the Audio Panels and CNS system interconnection.
• Audio Panel (2)
• Multi Function Display (MFD)
• Mode S Transponder (2)
• Integrated Avionics Unit (2)
• Control Unit
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Primary Flight Display (PFD) (2)
EIS
CNS operation in the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series is performed by the following Line Replaceable Units
(LRUs):
The PFD and Control Unit controls are used to tune the communication transceivers and navigation radios.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The two Audio Panels provide the traditional audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio
selection. Each Audio Panel includes a two position intercom system (ICS) between the pilot and copilot, a
marker beacon system, and a COM clearance recorder. Ambient noise from the aircraft radios is reduced by a
feature called Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ). When no audio is detected, MASQ processing further reduces
the amount of background noise from the radios.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Mode S Transponders are controlled with softkeys and the FMS Knobs. The Transponder Data Box is
located to the left of the System Time Box. The data box displays the selected transponder, the active four-digit
code, mode, and a reply status (Figure 4-1).
Audio Panel Volume Control
AFCS
Adjusting the master volume control affects all radio audio volume and airframe type warnings that are heard
in the headsets (not the speaker) for the pilot or copilot side Audio Panel. Radio adjustments made on the PFD
controls to compensate for the master volume change on the Audio Panel also affect the radio levels for the other
pilot. Independent radio volume adjustments made using the Audio Panel Master Volume controls affect only
the audio heard in the corresponding crew position headset.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Radio volume adjustments may be overridden by each crew position independently using the master volume
control on the Audio Panel for the respective crew position. In addition, the master volume control for each
Audio Panel affects all other system audio output to its designated crew position headset much like volume
adjustments found on many aviation headsets.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
99
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
PFD Controls and Frequency Display
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
9
10
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
11
12
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-1 PFD Controls, NAV/COM Frequency Tuning Boxes, and DME Tuning Window
100
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
5
COM Frequency Box – Displays COM standby and active frequency fields and volume. The selected COM
transceiver frequency is displayed in green.
6
COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to move the frrequency selected for tuning (light blue numbers) and the Frequency Transfer
Arrow between COM1 and COM2.
7
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold this key
for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the active frequency
field.
8
COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch on
and off. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency field as a percentage.
9
DME Tuning Window – Displays DME frequency pairing mode. Display by selecting DME Softkey.
10
ENT Key – Validates or confirms DME pairing mode and Auto-tune selection.
11
FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob, used to enter transponder codes, select DME modes, and
Auto-tune entries when DME Tuning Window or NRST Window is present. Press the FMS Knob to turn
the selection cursor on and off. The large knob moves the cursor in the window. The small knob selects
individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.
12
Transponder Data Box – Indicates the selected transponder code, operating mode, reply, and ident status
for the applicable transponder.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NAV Frequency Box – Displays NAV standby and active frequency fields, volume, and station ID. The
frequency of the NAV radio selected for navigation is displayed in green.
AFCS
4
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
Press to move the frequency selected for tuning (light blue numbers) and the Frequency Transfer Arrow
between NAV1 and NAV2.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.
EIS
2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to turn the Morse code identifier audio on
and off. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
101
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Audio Panel Controls
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
18
19
20
21
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
17
22
23
24
AFCS
Figure 4-2 Audio Panel Controls
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: When a key is selected, a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated.
102
1
COM1 MIC – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive can be
added by pressing the COM2 Key.
2
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard.
3
COM2 MIC – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive can be
added by pressing the COM1 Key.
4
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard.
5
COM3 MIC – Reserved for optional COM radio.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SPKR – Selects and deselects the on-side flight deck speaker. COM and NAV receiver audio can be heard
on the speaker.
11
MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver
audio. Unmutes automatically when new marker beacon audio is received.
12
HI SENS – Press to increase marker beacon receiver sensitivity. Press again to return to low sensitivity.
13
DME – Turns optional DME audio on or off.
14
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
15
ADF – Turns optional ADF receiver audio on or off.
16
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
17
AUX – Not used in Beechcraft 200/B200 Series aircraft.
18
MAN SQ – Enables manual squelch for the intercom. When the intercom is active, press the ICS Knob to
illuminate SQ. Turn the ICS Knob to adjust squelch.
19
PLAY – Press once to play the last recorded COM audio. Press again to stop playing. Press twice within 0.5
second while audio is playing and the previous block of recorded audio will be played. Each subsequent
two presses within 0.5 second plays each previously recorded block.
20
INTR COM – Selects and deselects the pilot/copilot intercom on both Audio Panels.
21
CABIN – Initiates intercom communications with passengers in the cabin.
22
ICS Knob – Turn to adjust intercom volume or squelch. Press to switch between volume and squelch
control as indicated by illumination of VOL or SQ. The MAN SQ Key must be selected to allow squelch
adjustment.
23
MSTR Knob – The Master Volume Control adjusts volume for the blended NAV, COM, intercom audio,
and alert warnings.
24
DISPLAY BACKUP Button – Manually selects PFD/MFD Reversionary Mode.
APPENDICES
10
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MUSIC – Toggles the Music 1 input on or off. Pressing and holding toggles music muting on or off.
AFCS
9
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TEL – Not used in Beechcraft 200/B200 Series aircraft.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PA – Selects the passenger address system. The selected COM transmitter is deselected when the PA Key
is pressed.
EIS
7
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM3 – Reserved for optional COM radio.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
103
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
Control Unit
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Control Unit is a pedestal-mounted interface allowing MFD operation, data entry, COM and NAV tuning,
and transponder control. Many procedures can be performed using the Control Unit rather than the display
bezel controls. Annunciators beside the FMS, XPDR, COM, and NAV keys illuminate when their respective
control modes are selected. The unit is in FMS control mode by default on system power-up.
The appropriate frequency box on the selected display is outlined by a light blue selection box, which flashes
for a few seconds to indicate control unit activity. Selection of a different display control or radio tuning mode
results in cancelation of the previous radio tuning mode.
2
3
4
5
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6
7
8
9
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
14
AFCS
10
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
13
12
11
Figure 4-3 Control Unit
APPENDICES
Tuning Selection
Box
INDEX
Figure 4-4 Frequency Tuning with the Control Unit
104
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
FMS Key – Sets the FMS Knob to control FMS functions on the MFD. When pressed, an annunciator next
to the key illuminates indicating adjustment of the FMS Knob will now affect FMS functions.
6
COM Key – Sets the FMS Knob to control tuning of the COM radios. The first press will select COM1,
as indicated by an illuminated “1” to the left of the key. Press again to select COM2. This is annunciated
with a “2” to the right of the key. Each subsequent press of the COM Key will switch between COM1 and
COM2. Use the FMS Knob to tune the selected COM The COM Tuning Selection Box is outlined with a
light blue line when the COM frequency is active on the control unit (Figure 4‑4).
7
Frequency Transfer Key (EMERG) – Transfers the standby and active COM or NAV frequencies. Press
and hold for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the COM
active frequency field.
8
NAV Key – Sets the FMS Knob to control tuning of the NAV radios. The first press will select NAV1, as
indicated by an illuminated “1” to the left of the key. Press again to select NAV2. This is annunciated with
a “2” to the right of the key. Each subsequent press of the NAV Key will switch between NAV1 and NAV2.
Use the FMS Knob to tune the selected NAV. The NAV Tuning Selection Box is outlined with a light blue
line when the NAV frequency is active on the control unit.
9
XPDR Key – Sets the FMS Knob to enter transponder codes. When pressed, an annunciator next to the
key illuminates indicating the FMS Knob can now be used for transponder code entry. Transponder code
entry can be performed with either the number keypad or FMS Knob.
10
IDENT Key – Press to activate the IDENT function of the transponder. When the IDENT Key is pressed,
a green IDNT indication is displayed in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box for 18 seconds.
11
SEL Key – The center of this key activates the selected MFD softkey, while the right and left arrows move
the softkey selection box to the right and left, respectively.
12
Decimal Key – Enters a decimal point.
13
BKSP Key – Moves cursor back one character space and removes last character entered.
14
Alphanumeric Keys – Allows data entry (rather than using the FMS Knob to select characters/
numbers).
APPENDICES
5
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob. This knob provides tuning capability for the COM and
NAV radios when the appropriate COM or NAV key is presssed. When the XPDR Key is pressed, the
transponder code may be entered using the FMS Knob. The large knob moves the cursor in the window.
The small knob selects individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.
AFCS
4
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ENT Key – Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MENU Key – Displays a list of options for accessing additional features or making setting changes.
EIS
2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CLR Key – Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
105
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
4.2 COM Operation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM Transceiver Selection and Activation
NOTE: During PA Mode, the COM MIC Annunciator is extinguished and the COM active frequency color
changes to white, indicating that neither COM transmitter is active.
NOTE: When turning on the G1000 for use, the system remembers the last frequencies used and the active
EIS
COM transceiver state prior to shutdown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies are on the left side and the
two standby frequencies are on the right. The COM transceiver is selected for transmitting by pressing the
COM MIC Keys on the Audio Panel. During reception of audio from the COM radio selected for transmission,
audio from the other COM radio is muted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
An active COM frequency displayed in green indicates that the COM transceiver is selected on the Audio
Panel (COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key). Both active COM frequencies appearing in white indicate that no COM
radio is selected for transmitting (PA Key is selected on the Audio Panel).
Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either light blue or gray. The standby frequency selected for
tuning is light blue. The other standby frequency is gray.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Active
Fields
Standby
Fields
Top Section of
the Audio Panel
Selected for Tuning
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
COM1 Radio is Selected on the Audio Panel
Figure 4-5 Selecting a COM Radio for Transmit
INDEX
APPENDICES
COM3 is reserved for an optional COM radio.
106
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Transmit/Receive Indications
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During COM transmission, a white TX appears by the active COM frequency. On the Audio Panel, when
the active COM is transmitting, the active transceiver COM MIC Key Annunciator flashes approximately once
per second.
During COM signal reception, a white RX appears by the active COM frequency.
EIS
Transmit and
Receive Indicators
Annunciator
Flashes During
Transmission
Figure 4-6 COM Radio Transmit and Receive Indications
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When the same COM radio is selected on both Audio Panels, the pilot has transmit priority on COM1, the
copilot has transmit priority on COM2.
COM Transceiver Manual Tuning
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The COM frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the right side of each PFD.
Manually tuning a COM frequency:
1) Turn the COM Knob to tune the desired frequency (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the COM VOL/SQ Knob.
4) Press the COM VOL/SQ Knob to turn automatic squelch on and off.
AFCS
Turn the VOL/SQ Knob to adjust
volume. Press the Knob to Turn
Automatic Squelch On or Off
Press the Frequency Transfer
Key to Transfer COM
Frequencies Between Active
and Standby Frequency
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turn the COM Knob
to Tune the Selected
Frequency
APPENDICES
Figure 4-7 COM Frequency Tuning
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
107
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
Manual COM frequency tuning from the Control Unit
1) Press the COM Key to enable the FMS Knob for COM tuning. The COM Tuning Selection Box is shown.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the COM Key again, if needed, to select the desired COM radio (1 or 2).
3) Turn the FMS Knob to tune the desired frequency in the COM Tuning Box (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz).
Or:
Press the numeric keys on the keypad to enter a Frequency.
EIS
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If an error is made during frequency entry with the numeric keypad, pressing the BKSP Key moves the cursor
back one space. If an incorrect frequency is entered, reenter the correct one using the same procedure.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
First, Press the COM Key to activate COM
tuning from the FMS Knob or Numeric
Keypad
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Third, Press the Frequency
Transfer Key to Move the
Frequency to the Active Field.
AFCS
Second, Turn the FMS Knob or Press
the Numeric Keys to Enter a Frequency
into the COM Standby Frequency Box
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-8 Frequency Tuning from the Control Unit
108
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting the Radio to be Tuned
Press the small COM Knob to transfer the frequency selected for tuning and the Frequency Transfer Arrow
between the upper and lower radio frequency fields.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the COM Knob to Switch
the Tuning Selection From One
COM Radio to the Other
EIS
Figure 4-9 Switching COM Tuning Boxes
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Quick-Tuning and Activating 121.500 MHz
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing and holding the COM Frequency Transfer Key for two seconds automatically loads the emergency
COM frequency (121.500 MHz) in the active field of the COM radio selected for tuning (the one with the
transfer arrow). In the example shown, pressing the Audio Panel COM2 MIC Key activates the transceiver.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press for Two Seconds to
Load 121.500 MHz
Figure 4-10 Quickly Tuning 121.500 MHz
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
109
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
Auto-Tuning the COM Frequency
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM frequencies can be automatically tuned from the following:
• Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies Page (ARTCC, FSS, WX)
• WPT – Airport Information Page
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces Page
• NRST – Nearest Airports Page
Auto-Tuning from the PFD
EIS
COM frequencies for the nearest airports can be automatically tuned from the Nearest Airports Window on
the PFD. When the desired frequency is entered, it becomes a standby frequency. Pressing the Frequency
Transfer Key places this frequency into the COM Active Frequency Field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Auto-tuning a COM frequency for a nearby airport from the PFD:
1) Select the NRST Softkey on the PFD to open the Nearest Airports Window. A list of 25 nearest airport identifiers
and COM frequencies is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired COM frequency.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the COM Standby Frequency Field.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
INDEX
Figure 4-11 Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
Select the NRST
Softkey to Open
the Nearest
Airports Window
110
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Auto-tuning from the MFD
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the COM Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT
page group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-12, 4-13, and 4-14).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Auto-tuning a COM frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the COM frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or
selecting the appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency (Figure 4-11).
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key on either PFD to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency
Field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press the ENT Key to Load a
Highlighted Frequency into the
COM Standby Frequency Box.
Turn the FMS Knob to Scroll Through a
List of Frequencies.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-12 Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key (Figure 4-9) to display the page menu (Figure 4-10).
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor on the desired selection.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob or the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
Figure 4-13 Nearest Pages Menus
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
111
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
On the WPT - Airport Information Page, the cursor can be placed on the frequency field by pressing the
FMS Knob and scrolling through the list. The frequency is transferred to the COM Standby Field with the
ENT Key.
Selected Airport
Identifier and
Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Runway
Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press ENT Key to
load frequency
into PFD1 COM
Standby Field.
Cursor then
advances to the
next frequency.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-14 WPT – Airport Information Page
Select INFO‑1
Softkey for
AIRPORT,
RUNWAYS, and
FREQUENCIES
Windows
112
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
COM frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Frequencies,
and NRST – Nearest Airports Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU
Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-15 NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Airports, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
113
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
Frequency Spacing
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing
(118.000 to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel spacing
is selected, all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in the complete 3040-channel list.
COM channel spacing is set on the System Setup Page of the AUX Page Group.
EIS
8.33-kHz Channel
Spacing
25-kHz Channel
Spacing
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing COM frequency channel spacing:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-16 COM Channel Spacing
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Channel Spacing Field in the COM Configuration Box.
1) Select the AUX – System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired channel spacing.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the channel spacing selection.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
While the COM CONFIG Window is selected, the G1000 softkeys are blank.
APPENDICES
Select 8.33-kHz
or 25.0-kHz
COM Frequency
Channel Spacing
INDEX
AUX - SYSTEM
SETUP PAGE
Figure 4-17 AUX – System Setup Page
114
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Squelch
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Automatic Squelch quiets unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing good
sensitivity to weak COM signals. To disable Automatic Squelch, press the VOL/SQ Knob. When Automatic
Squelch is disabled, COM audio reception is always on. Continuous static noise is heard over the headsets and
speaker, if selected. Pressing the VOL/SQ Knob again enables Automatic Squelch.
When Automatic Squelch is disabled, a white RX appears next to the COM frequency.
EIS
Manual Squelch
Indication
Press the COM VOL/
SQ Knob to turn off
Automatic Squelch.
Press again to restore
Automatic Squelch.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-18 Overriding Automatic Squelch
Volume
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. When adjusting volume,
the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains for two seconds after
the change.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COM Volume
Level Remains
for Two Seconds
Figure 4-19 COM Volume Level
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
115
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
4.3 NAV Operation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV Radio Selection and Activation
The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; two standby fields and two active fields. The active
frequencies are on the right side and the standby frequencies are on the left.
EIS
A NAV radio is selected for navigation by selecting the CDI Softkey located on the PFD. The active NAV
frequency selected for navigation is displayed in green. Selecting the CDI Softkey once selects NAV1 as the
navigation radio. Selecting the CDI Softkey a second time selects NAV2 as the navigation radio. Selecting the
CDI Softkey a third time activates GPS mode. Selecting the CDI Softkey again cycles back to NAV1.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
While cycling through the CDI Softkey selections, the selected NAV standby frequency is selected for tuning,
the Frequency Transfer Arrow is placed in the selected NAV Frequency Field, and the active NAV frequency
color changes to green.
The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a green single line arrow (not shown) labeled either VOR1 or LOC1
is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.
• VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a green double line arrow (shown) labeled either VOR2 or LOC2 is
displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GPS – If GPS Mode is selected, a magenta single line arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and neither NAV
radio is selected. Both active NAV frequencies are then displayed in white and the previously selected NAV
standby frequency remains selected for tuning.
AFCS
Standby
Fields
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selected for
Tuning
Active
Fields
The NAV Radio is
Selected by Selecting
the CDI Softkey
APPENDICES
Figure 4-20 Selecting a NAV Radio for Navigation
INDEX
See the Flight Instruments Section for selecting the DME and Bearing Information windows and using VOR
or ADF as the source for the bearing pointer.
116
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NAV radios are selected for listening by pressing the corresponding keys on the Audio Panel. Pressing the
NAV1, NAV2, ADF, or DME Key selects and deselects the navigation radio source. Selected audio can be heard over
the headset and the speakers (if selected). All radios can be selected individually or simultaneously.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 4-21 Selecting a NAV Radio Receiver
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NAV Receiver Manual Tuning
The NAV frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the left side of the PFDs.
Manually tuning a NAV frequency:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Turn the NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box.
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the NAV VOL/ID Knob to turn the Morse code identifier audio on and off.
Turn VOL/ID Knob to adjust
volume. Press Knob to Turn
Morse Code On or Off.
AFCS
Press the Frequency Transfer Key to
Transfer NAV Frequencies Between
Active and Standby Frequency Fields
Turn the NAV Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Box
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-22 NAV Frequency Tuning
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
117
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
Manual NAV frequency tuning from the Control Unit
1) Press the NAV Key to enable the FMS Knob for NAV tuning. The NAV Tuning Selection Box is shown.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the NAV Key again, if needed, to select the desired NAV radio (1 or 2).
3) Turn the FMS Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz).
Or:
Press the numeric keys on the keypad to enter a Frequency.
EIS
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If an error is made during frequency entry with the numeric keypad, pressing the BKSP Key moves the cursor
back one space. If an incorrect frequency is entered, reenter the correct one using the same procedure.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Third, Press the Frequency
Transfer Key to Move the
Frequency to the Active Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
First, Press the NAV Key to activate NAV
tuning from the FMS Knob or Numeric
Keypad
Second, Turn the FMS Knob or Press
the Numeric Keys to Enter a Frequency
into the NAV Standby Frequency Box
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-23 Frequency Tuning from the Control Unit
118
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting the Radio to be Tuned
Press the small NAV Knob to transfer the frequency tuning selection and the Frequency Transfer Arrow
between the upper and lower radio frequency fields.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the NAV Knob to Switch
the tuning selection from one
NAV Radio to the other
EIS
Figure 4-24 Switching NAV Tuning Boxes
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VOR/LOC ID
When the Morse code Identifier audio is on for a NAV radio, a white ID appears to the left of the active
NAV frequency.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Morse Code Identifier
for the TOP VOR is On
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In the example shown, in order to listen to either station identifier, press the NAV1 or NAV2 Key on the
Audio Panel. Pressing the VOL/ID Knob turns off the Morse code audio only in the radio selected for tuning
(light blue numbers). To turn off both NAV IDs, transfer the tuning selection between NAV1 and NAV2 with
the small NAV Knob and press the VOL/ID Knob again to turn the Morse code off in the other radio.
Station
Identifier
Figure 4-25 NAV Radio ID Indication
AFCS
Volume
NAV Radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/ID Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, counterclockwise decreases volume.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When adjusting, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains
for two seconds after the change.
APPENDICES
NAV Volume Level
Remains for Two
Seconds
Figure 4-26 NAV Volume Level
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
119
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Auto-Tuning a NAV Frequency from the MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Audio Panel and CNS
• WPT – VOR Information
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies (FSS, WX)
• NRST – Nearest Airports
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces
NAV frequencies can be selected and loaded from the following MFD pages:
• WPT – Airport Information
• NRST – Nearest VOR
EIS
The MFD provides auto-tuning of NAV frequencies from waypoint and nearest pages. During enroute
navigation, the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV standby frequency field. During approach
activation the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV active frequency field.
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT page
group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-27, 4-28, and 4-29).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Auto-tuning a NAV frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the NAV frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or the
appropriate softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired NAV identifier or NAV frequency.
3) On the Nearest VOR and Nearest Airports pages, press the FREQ Softkey to place the cursor on the NAV
frequency (Figure 4-25).
4) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
AFCS
Press the ENT Key to Load a
Highlighted Frequency into the
NAV Standby Frequency Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-27 NAV Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
120
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Or:
1) When on the NRST pages, press the MENU Key on the MFD control unit to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor in the desired window.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob or the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest VOR Menu
Figure 4-28 Nearest Pages Menus
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
121
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the example shown, the VOR list is selected with the VOR Softkey or from the page menu. The FMS Knob
or ENT Key is used to scroll through the list. The cursor is placed on the frequency with the FREQ Softkey and
loaded into the NAV Tuning Box with the ENT Key.
Press the ENT
Key to Load
the Frequency
into the NAV
Standby Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Select the VOR Softkey
to Place the Cursor on
the VOR Identifier
Select the FREQ Softkey
to Place the Cursor on
the VOR Frequency
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-29 Loading the NAV Frequency from the NRST – Nearest VOR Page
122
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
While enroute, NAV frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airports,
WPT – Airport Information, WPT – VOR Information, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages on the MFD in
a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 4-30 NRST – Nearest Frequencies, WPT – VOR Information, WPT – Airport Information, and
NRST – Nearest Airports Pages
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
123
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
Auto-Tuning NAV Frequencies on Approach Activation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS/Localizer approach.
NOTE: When an ILS/LOC approach has been activated in GPS Mode, the system switches to NAV Mode as
the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm of the FAF). See the Flight Management Section for
details.
EIS
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency field on approach activation, on both
PFD1 and PFD2.
When loading or activating a VOR or ILS/LOC approach, the approach frequency is automatically transferred
to a NAV frequency field as follows:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV1 or NAV2
active frequency fields. The frequency that was previously in the NAV1 or NAV2 active frequency fields are
transferred to standby.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, and if the approach frequency is already loaded into the NAV1
or NAV2 standby frequency field, the standby frequency is transferred to active.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• If the current CDI navigation source is NAV1 or NAV2, the approach frequency is transferred to the standby
frequency fields of the selected CDI NAV radio.
124
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Marker Beacon Receiver
NOTE: The marker beacon indicators operate independently of marker beacon audio and cannot be turned
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
off.
The marker beacon receiver is used as part of an ILS. The marker beacon receiver is always on and detects
any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft.
The receiver detects the three marker tones – outer, middle, and inner – and provides the marker beacon
annunciations located to the left of the Altimeter on the PFD.
Middle Marker
Indication
Inner Marker
Indication
EIS
Outer Marker
Indication
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-31 Marker Beacon Annunciations on the PFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-32 Marker Beacon Keys
AFCS
The Audio Panels provide three different states of marker beacon operation; On, Muted, and Deselected.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key selects and deselects marker beacon audio. The key annunciator indicates when
marker beacon audio is selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
During marker beacon audio reception, pressing the MKR/MUTE Key mutes the audio but does not affect the
marker annunciations (Figure 4-31). The marker tone is silenced, then waits for the next marker tone. The
MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator is illuminated, indicating audio muting. The audio returns when the next marker
beacon signal is received. If the MKR/MUTE Key is pressed during signal reception (O, M, I indication) while
marker beacon audio is muted, the audio is deselected and the MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator is extinguished.
APPENDICES
Pressing the HI SENS Key switches between high and low marker beacon receiver sensitivity. The HI SENS
function (annunciator illuminated) is used to provide an earlier indication when nearing a marker during an
approach. The LO SENS function (annunciator extinguished) results in a narrower marker dwell while over a
station.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
125
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
DME Tuning
NOTE: When turning on the G1000 for use, the system remembers the last frequency used for DME tuning
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
and the NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD state prior to shutdown.
The G1000 System tunes the optional DME transceiver. The UHF DME frequency is tuned by pairing with a
VHF NAV frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.
EIS
The DME Tuning Window is located to the right of the HSI in the lower right corner of the PFD. The DME
transceiver is tuned by selecting NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD in the DME Tuning Window. Pressing the DME
Softkey switches the DME Tuning Window on and off.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DME
Modes
Figure 4-33 DME Tuning Window
The following DME transceiver pairing can be selected:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• NAV1 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV1 frequency.
• NAV2 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV2 frequency.
• HOLD – When in the HOLD position, the DME frequency remains paired with the last selected NAV
frequency.
AFCS
Selecting DME transceiver pairing:
1) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Tuning Window.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the DME tuning mode.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
Pressing the CLR Key or FMS Knob while in the process of DME pairing cancels the tuning entry and reverts
back to the previously selected DME tuning state. Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates the cursor in
the DME Tuning Window.
INDEX
APPENDICES
See the Flight Instruments Section for displaying the DME information window.
126
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.4 GTX 33 Mode S Transponders
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The GTX 33 Mode S Transponders provide Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S interrogation and reply capabilities.
Selective addressing or Mode Select (Mode S) capability includes the following features:
• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft and ATC facilities)
• Surveillance identifier capability
• Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting – The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as either the
aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.
EIS
• Altitude reporting
• Airborne status determination
• Transponder capability reporting
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Acquisition squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification address. The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations. The purpose of acquisition
squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic Avoidance System (TAS) to
recognize the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.
• Extended squitter – Transmits the Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) position, velocity, and
heading information periodically without requiring an interrogation.
The Hazard Avoidance Section provides more details on traffic avoidance systems.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Transponder Controls
Transponder function is displayed on three levels of softkeys on the PFD: Top-level, Mode Selection, and
Code Selection. When the top-level XPDR Softkey is selected, the Mode Selection softkeys appear: XPDR1,
XPDR2, STBY, ON, ALT, VFR, CODE, IDENT, ADS-B TX , BACK.
AFCS
When the CODE Softkey is selected, the number softkeys appear: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, IDENT, BKSP,
BACK. The digits 8 and 9 are not used for code entry. Selecting the numbered softkeys in sequence enters
the transponder code. If an error is made, selecting the BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the
previous digit. Selecting the BKSP Softkey again moves the cursor to the next previous digit.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting the BACK Softkey during code selection reverts to the Mode Selection Softkeys. Selecting the BACK
Softkey during mode selection reverts to the top-level softkeys.
APPENDICES
The code can also be entered with the FMS Knob on either PFD. Code entry must be completed with either
the softkeys or the FMS Knob, but not a combination of both.
Selecting the IDENT Softkey while in Mode or Code Selection initiates the ident function and reverts to the
top-level softkeys.
After 45 seconds of transponder control inactivity, the system reverts back to the top-level softkeys.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
127
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
XPDR1
XPDR2
STBY
ON
ALT
GND
VFR
XPDR
IDENT
CODE
IDENT
ADS-B TX
BACK
ALERTS
EIS
Selecting the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IDENT
BKSP
BACK
ALERTS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting the BACK Softkey returns to the mode selection softkeys.
Figure 4-34 Transponder Softkeys (PFD)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting and activating Transponder 1 or Transponder 2:
1) Select the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Select the XPDR1 or XPDR2 Softkey to select and activate the desired transponder.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When turning on the G1000 for use, the system activates Transponder 1 as the default unit, regardless of
which transponder was active prior to shutdown. When switching between Transponder 1 and Transponder 2,
the code and mode remain the same. If a new code is entered in the active transponder, switching transponders
does not bring back the previous code.
Transponder Mode Selection
AFCS
Mode selection can be automatic (Ground and Altitude Modes) or manual (Standby, ON, and Altitude Modes).
The STBY, ON, and ALT Softkeys can be accessed by selecting the XPDR Softkey.
Selecting a transponder mode:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
INDEX
APPENDICES
2) Select the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode.
128
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Ground Mode
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Ground Mode is normally selected automatically when the aircraft is on the ground. The transponder
powers up in the last mode it was in when shut down. Ground Mode can be overridden by selecting any one
of the Mode Selection Softkeys. A green GND indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of
the Transponder Data Box. In Ground Mode, the transponder does not allow Mode A and Mode C replies,
but it does permit acquisition squitter and replies to discretely addressed Mode S interrogations.
When Standby Mode has been selected on the ground, the transponder can be returned to Ground Mode
by selecting the GND Softkey.
EIS
GND
Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-35 Ground Mode
Standby Mode (Manual)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inhibited.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Standby Mode can be selected at any time by selecting the STBY Softkey. In Standby, the transponder does
not reply to interrogations, but new codes can be entered. When Standby is selected, a white STBY indication
and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box. In all other modes, these fields
appear in green.
STBY Mode (White
Code Number and
Mode)
AFCS
Figure 4-36 Standby Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Manual ON Mode
ON Mode can be selected at any time by selecting the ON Softkey. ON Mode generates Mode A and Mode S
replies, but Mode C altitude reporting is inhibited. In ON Mode, a green ON indication and transponder
code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box.
APPENDICES
ON Mode
(No Altitude
Reporting)
Figure 4-37 ON Mode
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
129
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Altitude Mode (Automatic or Manual)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Audio Panel and CNS
If Altitude Mode is selected, a green ALT indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the
Transponder Data Box, and all transponder replies requesting altitude information are provided with pressure
altitude information.
Altitude Mode is automatically selected when the aircraft becomes airborne. Altitude Mode may also be
selected manually by selecting the ALT Softkey.
EIS
ALT Mode
(Mode C Altitude
Reporting)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-38 Altitude Mode
Reply Status
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations, a white R indication appears momentarily in the
reply status field of the Transponder Data Box.
Reply to
Interrogation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-39 Reply Indication
ADS-B TX MODE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The transmission of the ADS-B information is enabled/disabled by pressing the ADS-B TX Softkey. ADS-B
transimssion defaults to enabled at each power cycle. Do not disable ADS-B transmission unless requested
by ATC.
ADS-B Transmission
Enabled
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-40 Altitude Mode
130
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Entering a Transponder Code
Entering a transponder code with softkeys:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Select the CODE Softkey to display the Transponder Code Selection Softkeys, for digit entry.
3) Select the digit softkeys to enter the code in the code field. When entering the code, the next softkey in sequence
must be selected within 10 seconds, or the entry is cancelled and restored to the previous code. Selecting the
BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the previous digit. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been
entered, the transponder code becomes active.
EIS
Entering
a Code
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-41 Entering a Code
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Entering a transponder code with the PFD FMS Knob:
1) Select the XPDR and the CODE Softkeys as in the previous procedure to enable code entry.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the first two code digits.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete code digit entry.
Pressing the CLR Key or small FMS Knob before code entry is complete cancels code entry and restores the
previous code. Waiting for 10 seconds after code entry is finished activates the code automatically.
AFCS
Turn the Large
FMS Knob to
Move the Cursor
to the Next
Code Field
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turn the Small
FMS Knob to
Enter Two Code
Digits at a Time
Press the ENT Key
to Complete Code
Entry
Figure 4-42 Entering a Code with the FMS Knob
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
131
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
Manual code entry from the Control Unit
1) Press the XPDR Key to select the transponder code field.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob on the PFD to enter the first two code digits, turn the large FMS Knob to select the
last two digits, and turn the small FMS Knob to enter the last two code digits.
Or:
Press the numeric keys on the keypad to enter a code.
EIS
If an error is made during code entry with the numeric keypad, pressing the BKSP Key moves the cursor
back one space. If an incorrect code is entered, reenter the correct one using the same procedure.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
First, Press the XPDR Key to
Activate Code Entry from the
FMS Knob or Numeric Keypad
into the Transponder Data Box
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Second, Turn the FMS Knob, Small
Knob to Enter Two Code Digits at a
Time, Large Knob to Move the Cursor
to the Next Code Field, or Press the
Numeric Keys to Enter a Code into the
Transponder Data Box
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Third, Press ENT Key to
Complete Code Entry
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-43 Transponder Code Entry from the Control Unit
132
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VFR Code
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VFR code can be entered either manually or by selecting the XPDR Softkey, then the VFR Softkey.
When the VFR Softkey is selected, the pre-programmed VFR code is automatically displayed in the code field
of the Transponder Data Box. Selecting the VFR Softkey again restores the previous identification code.
The pre-programmed VFR Code is set at the factory to 1200. If a VFR code change is required, contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
VFR Code
EIS
Figure 4-44 VFR Code
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
IDENT Function
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT Softkey is inoperative.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting the IDENT Softkey sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC). The indication
distinguishes the identing transponder from all the others on the air traffic controller’s screen. The IDENT
Softkey appears on all levels of transponder softkeys. When the IDENT Softkey is selected, a green IDNT
indication is displayed in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box for a duration of 18 seconds.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
After the IDENT Softkey is selected while in Mode or Code Selection, the system reverts to the top-level
softkeys.
IDNT
Indication
AFCS
Select the
IDENT Softkey
to Initiate the
ID Function
Figure 4-45 IDENT Softkey and Indication
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
133
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
4.5 Additional Audio Panel Functions
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Power-Up
The Audio Panels perform a self-test during power-up. During the self-test all Audio Panel annunciator lights
illuminate for approximately two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, most of the settings are restored to
those in use before the unit was last turned off. The exceptions are the speaker and intercom, which are always
selected during power up.
EIS
Mono/Stereo Headsets
Stereo headsets are recommended for use in this aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the right headset channel output to ground. While this does
not damage the Audio Panel, a person listening on a monaural headset hears only the left channel in both ears.
If a monaural headset is used at one of the passenger positions, any other passenger using a stereo headset hears
audio in the left ear only.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Speaker
NOTE: When the oxygen mask switch on the instrument panel is selected, each pilot’s microphone audio is
heard on the cross-side speaker. The on-side speaker is also enabled and cannot be deselected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Each Audio Panel is connected to a separate flight deck speaker for listening to all of the radios. Each SPKR
Key controls the on-side speaker unless oxygen masks are in use. During oxygen mask use the on-side speaker
is always enabled.
AFCS
Pressing the SPKR Key selects and deselects the speaker. Except for oxygen mask use, speaker audio is
muted when the PTT Key is pressed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-46 Speaker Key
Unmuted Inputs
INDEX
APPENDICES
Aural alerts are always present on the headset and are on the speaker when the SPKR is selected. These
warnings and the aircraft radios are not heard on the passenger headphones.
134
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Intercom
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the INTR COM Key on either Audio Panel selects and deselects the intercom on both Audio Panels.
The annunciator is lit when the intercom is active. The intercom connects the pilot and copilot together. Either
the pilot or copilot may select or deselect the intercom.
The CABIN Key initiates two way communication between the pilot or copilot and the passengers in the
cabin. The annunciator is lit when the cabin intercom is active on either Audio Panel.
EIS
When the flight crew wants to communicate with the passengers, the pilot or copilot presses the CABIN
Key to signal that communication is desired. The cabin signal must be acknowledged to begin intercom
conversation.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When the passengers want to communicate with the pilot/copilot, they press the HAIL Key at their seat in
the cabin. The CABIN annunciator flashes on both Audio Panels to signal the pilot and copilot that cabin
communication is desired. The hail signal must be acknowledged by pressing the CABIN Key to begin intercom
conversation.
The MAN SQ Key allows either automatic or manual control of the intercom squelch setting. Pressing the
MAN SQ Key enables manual squelch control, indicated by the MAN SQ annunciator.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• When the MAN SQ Annunciator is extinguished (Automatic Squelch is on), the ICS Knob controls only the
volume (pressing the ICS Knob has no effect on the VOL/SQ selection).
• When the MAN SQ Annunciator is illuminated (Manual Squelch), the ICS Knob controls either volume or
squelch (selected by pressing the ICS Knob and indicated by the VOL or SQ annunciation).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Manual Squelch
Annunciator; Off
for Automatic
Squelch, On for
Manual Squelch
Pilot/Copilot
ICS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press to switch
between VOL and SQ.
Turn to adjust Squelch
when SQ Annunciation
is lit, Volume when
VOL Annunciation is lit.
AFCS
Cabin Annunciator; On for
Cabin Intercom, Flashes for
Cabin to Flight Deck Hail
Selects and Deselects
Cabin Intercom
Master Volume
Control for Pilot
Side or Copilot
Side
Volume Annunciation
Squelch Annunciation
APPENDICES
Figure 4-47 Intercom Controls
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
135
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
Passenger Address (PA) System
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A passenger address system is provided by pressing the PA Key to deliver messages to the passengers. The
message is heard by the other pilot on the headset only if the INTR COM Key is enabled. PA messages are one
way from the flight deck to the passengers.
A Push-to-talk (PTT) must be pressed to deliver PA announcements to the passengers over their
headphones.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
When PA is selected on the Audio Panel, the annunciator flashes about once per second while pressing the
PTT, the COM MIC annunciator is no longer lit, and the active COM frequency for that Audio Panel changes to
white, indicating that there is no COM selected.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PA Key is Selected on
the Audio Panel
Figure 4-48 PA Key Selected for Cabin Announcements
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Simultaneous COM Operation
Both the pilot and the copilot can transmit and receive simultaneously over separate COM radios. The
selected COM MIC Annunciator flashes when either pilot’s microphone PTT is pressed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
If both pilots select the same COM radio, the pilot has priority on COM1 and the copilot has priority on
COM2.
136
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Clearance Recorder and Player
NOTE: Pressing the play key on the pilot’s Audio Panel plays recorded audio to the Pilot. Pressing the play
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
key on the Copilot’s Audio Panel plays recorded audio to the Copilot.
The Audio Panel contains a digital clearance recorder that continually records up to 2.5 minutes of the
selected COM radio signal. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of
recording time have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks, starting from
the oldest block.
EIS
The PLAY Key controls the play function. The PLAY annunciator remains lit to indicate when play is in
progress. The PLAY annunciator turns off after playback is finished.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the PLAY Key once plays the latest recorded memory block and then returns to normal operation.
Pressing the PLAY Key again during play of a memory block stops play. If a COM input signal is detected
during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the PLAY Key twice within one-half second while audio is playing plays the previous block of
recorded audio. Each subsequent two presses of the PLAY Key within one-half second backtracks through the
recorded memory blocks to reach and play any recorded block.
Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PLAY Key
Controls the
Play Function
Figure 4-49 Play Key
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
137
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
4.6 Audio Panels Preflight Procedure
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: If the flight crew is using headsets that have a high/low switch or volume control knob, verify that
the switch is in the high position and the volume control on the headsets are at max volume setting. On
single‑pilot flights, verify that all other headsets are not connected to avoid excess noise in the audio
system.
NOTE: When the MAN SQ Key is pressed, the flight crew is now able to set the ICS squelch manually. If
EIS
manual squelch is set to full open (SQ annunciated and the small knob turned counterclockwise) background
noise is heard in the ICS system as well as during COM transmissions.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
After powering up the G1000 system the following steps aid the flight crew in maximizing the use of the Audio
Panels as well as prevent flight crew induced issues. These preflight procedures should be performed each time a
flight crew boards the aircraft to insure awareness of all audio levels in the Audio Panels and radios.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Automatic/Manual
Squelch
Pilot/Copilot
ICS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Cabin ICS
Master Volume
Control
AFCS
ICS Volume and
Squelch Control
Volume Annunciation
Squelch Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Reversionary Mode
for PFD1 and MFD
Reversionary Mode
for PFD2 and MFD
Pilot Side
Copilot Side
APPENDICES
Figure 4-50 Audio Panel Controls
INDEX
Independent radio volume adjustments made using the PFD controls affect only the audio output for each
radio selected for adjustment. Radio volume adjustment affects both crew positions equally for each radio that
is adjusted. Turning the master volume control located on either Audio Panel affects only the audio heard in the
corresponding crew position headset. Thus, radio volume adjustments may be overridden by each crew position
independently using the master volume control on the Audio Panel for the respective crew position. The master
volume control for each Audio Panel affects all other system audio output for the pilot or copilot headset.
138
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Setting the Audio Panels during preflight:
1) Verify that the INTR COM Key is selected.
2) Verify that the MAN SQ Annunciator is extinguished.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the MSTR Knob (Master Volume Control) on both Audio Panels clockwise two full turns. This sets the
headset audio level to max volume (least amount of attenuation).
4) Adjust radio volume levels (COM, NAV, etc.) to a suitable level.
5) Adjust the ICS volume Knob on each Audio Panel to the desired intercom level.
EIS
Once this procedure has been completed, the master volume controls on both Audio Panels may now be
adjusted. The flight crew can change settings, keeping in mind the notes above.
Pilot Master
Volume Control
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Radio Volume
Knobs Adjust
Radio Level
Master Volume
Knobs Adjust
Headphone
Volume Level
COM Radio
Audio
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NAV Radio
Audio
AFCS
Copilot Master
Volume Control
Figure 4-51 Radio and Headphone Volume Controls
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
139
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
4.7 Abnormal Operation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Abnormal operation of the G1000 includes equipment failures of the G1000 components and failure of
associated equipment, including switches and external devices.
Stuck Microphone
If the push-to-talk (PTT) Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of
continuous operation. An alert appears on the PFD to advise the crew of a stuck microphone.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key Annunciator on the Audio Panel flashes as long as the PTT Key remains
stuck.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-52 Stuck Microphone Alert
COM Tuning Failure
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in
the radio in which the tuning failure occurred.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Emergency Channel
Loaded Automatically
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-53 COM Tuning Failure
140
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PFD Failure, Dual System
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If PFD1 fails, COM1 and NAV1 display a red X on both remaining displays. NAV1 is unavailable. COM1
automatically tunes 121.500 MHz, but the frequency is not shown. The COM1 emergency frequency is available
to both the copilot and pilot.
Emergency Channel
Loaded Automatically
EIS
Figure 4-54 Frequency Section of PFD2 Display after PFD1 Failure
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If PFD2 fails, COM2 and NAV2 display a red X on the remaining PFD display. NAV2 is unavailable. COM2
tunes 121.500 MHz, but the frequency is not shown. The COM2 emergency frequency is available to both the
copilot and pilot.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-55 PFD1 Display after PFD2 Failure
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
141
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
Audio Panel Fail-Safe Operation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If there is a failure of both Audio Panels, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset and microphone directly
to the COM1 transceiver and the copilot’s headset directly to the COM2 transceiver. Audio is not available on
the speakers.
If there is a failure of one Audio Panel, the remaining one does not have access to the others side’s COM and
NAV. For example, if the pilot side Audio Panel fails, the copilot side Audio Panel has access to all the radios
except for COM1 and NAV1.
EIS
Reversionary Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The red DISPLAY BACKUP Button selects the PFD/MFD Reversionary Mode. See the System Overview
Section for more information on Reversionary Mode.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-56 Reversionary Mode Button
142
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Section 5 Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5.1 Introduction
The G1000 is an integrated flight, engine, communication, navigation and surveillance system. This section of
the Pilot’s Guide explains flight management using the G1000.
EIS
The most prominent part of the G1000 are the three full color displays: two Primary Flight Displays (PFD) and
a Multi Function Display (MFD). The information to successfully navigate the aircraft using the GPS sensors is
displayed on the PFD and the MFD. See examples in the Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2. Detailed descriptions of GPS
navigation functions are discussed later in this section.
A brief description of the GPS navigation data on the PFD and MFD follows.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation mode indicates which sensor is providing the course data (e.g., GPS, VOR) and the flight plan phase
(e.g., Departure (DPRT), Terminal (TERM), Enroute (ENR), Oceanic (OCN), Approach (LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV,
or LPV), or Missed Approach (MAPR)).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Inset Map is a small version of the MFD Navigation Map and can be displayed in the lower left corner of
the PFD. When the system is in reversionary mode, the Inset Map is displayed in the lower right corner. The
Inset Map is displayed by pressing the INSET Softkey. Pressing the INSET Softkey again, then pressing the OFF
Softkey removes the Inset Map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Map displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic data (e.g.,
cities, lakes, highways, borders), topographic data (map shading indicating elevation), and hazard data (e.g.,
traffic, terrain, weather). The amount of displayed data can be reduced by selecting the DCLTR Softkey. The
Navigation Map can be oriented four different ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRK UP), Desired Track
Up (DTK UP), or Heading Up (HDG UP).
AFCS
An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated present position.
The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are accurately based on GPS calculations. The basemap upon which
these are placed are from a source with less resolution, therefore the relative position of the aircraft to map features
is not exact. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation
map. The other legs are shown in white.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in the
lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. To change the map
range on any map, turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in ( -, decreasing), or clockwise to zoom out (+,
increasing).
APPENDICES
The Direct-to Window, the Flight Plan Window, the Procedures Window, and the Nearest Airports Window
can be displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Details of these windows are discussed in detail later in
the section.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
143
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Status Box
Navigation Mode
Inset Map
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Location of:
- Direct To Window
- Flight Plan Window
- Procedures Window
- Nearest Airports Window
Figure 5-1 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Status Box
Map Orientation
Navigation Page Title
Navigation Map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Aviation Data
- Geographic Data
- Topographic Data
- Hazard Data
Flight Plan Leg
Active Flight Plan Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
Map Range
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-2 GPS Navigation Information on the MFD Navigation Page
144
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Navigation Status Box
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the PFD contains two fields displaying the following
information:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD Navigation Status Box
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the
MFD contains four data fields, each displaying one of
the following items:
• Distance (DIS) and Bearing (BRG) to the next
waypoint or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘TOD
within 1 minute’)
• Bearing (BRG)
Symbol
Description
Active Leg
Right Procedure Turn
Left Procedure Turn
• Endurance (END)
• Enroute Safe Altitude (ESA)
• Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
• Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)
• Fuel on Board (FOB)
• Fuel over Destination (FOD)
• Ground Speed (GS)
• Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA)
Left Holding Pattern
• True Air Speed (TAS)
Vector to Final
• Track Angle Error (TKE)
Left DME Arc
• Track (TRK)
AFCS
Right DME Arc
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Right Holding Pattern
• Desired Track (DTK)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Direct-to
• Distance (DIS)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The symbols used in the PFD status bar are:
EIS
• Active flight plan leg (e.g., ‘D-> KICT’ or ‘KIXD > KCOS’) or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘Turn
right to 021˚ in 8 seconds’)
• Vertical Speed Required (VSR)
• Crosstrack Error (XTK)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MFD Navigation Status Box
APPENDICES
The navigation information displayed in the four data fields can be selected on the MFD Data Bar Fields Box
on the AUX - System Setup Page. The default selections (in order left to right) are GS, DTK, TRK, and ETE.
Changing a field in the MFD Navigation Status Box:
1) Select the System Setup Page.
INDEX
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the MFD Data Bar Fields Box.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
145
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list.
5) Select the desired data.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Press the ENT Key. Selecting the DFLTS Softkey returns any field to its default setting.
5.2 Using Map Displays
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Map displays are used extensively in the G1000 to provide situational awareness in flight. Most G1000 maps
can display the following information:
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, airways, land data • Icons for enabled map features
(highways, cities, lakes, rivers, borders, etc.) with • Aircraft icon (representing present position)
names
• Nav range ring
• Map Pointer information (distance and bearing to
pointer, location of pointer, name, and other pertinent • Flight plan legs
information)
• User waypoints
• Map range
• Track vector
• Wind direction and speed
• Topography scale
• Map orientation
• Topography data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The information in this section applies to the following maps unless otherwise noted:
• All Map Group Pages (MAP)
• Flight Plan Pages (FPL)
• All Waypoint Group Pages (WPT)
• Direct-to Window
• AUX - Trip Planning
• PFD Inset Map
• All Nearest Group Pages (NRST)
• Procedure Loading Pages
AFCS
Map Orientation
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Maps are shown in one of four different orientation options, allowing flexibility in determining aircraft
position relative to other items on the map (north up) or for determining where map items are relative to where
the aircraft is going (track up, desired track up, or heading up). The map orientation is shown in the upper
right corner of the map.
Figure 5-3 Map Orientation
146
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• North up (NORTH UP) aligns the top of the map display to north (default setting).
• Track up (TRK UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current ground track.
• Desired track up (DTK UP) aligns the top of the map display to the desired course.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Heading up (HDG UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading.
Note: When panning or reviewing active flight plan legs in a non-North Up orientation, the map does not
show the map orientation nor the wind direction and speed.
EIS
Note: Map orientation can only be changed on the Navigation Map Page. Any other displays that show
navigation data reflect the orientation selected for the Navigation Map Page:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing the Navigation Map orientation:
1) With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Map Setup
Selection
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-4 Navigation Map Page Menu Window
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Map Setup Window.
AFCS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob, or press the ENT Key once, to select the ‘ORIENTATION’ field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
147
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Map Group Selection
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Orientation Field
Figure 5-5 Map Setup Menu Window - Map Group
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired orientation.
5) Press the ENT Key to select the new orientation.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the base page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map Range
AFCS
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in
the lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. When the
map range is decreased to a point that exceeds the capability of the G1000 to accurately represent the map,
a magnifying glass icon is shown to the left of the map range. To change the map range turn the Joystick
counter-clockwise to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the range.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Range Overzoom
INDEX
Figure 5-6 Map Range
148
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Auto Zoom
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Auto zoom allows the G1000 to change the map display range to the smallest range clearly showing the
active waypoint. Auto zoom can be overridden by adjusting the range with the Joystick, and remains until
the active waypoint changes, a terrain or traffic alert occurs, the aircraft takes off, or the manual override times
out (timer set on Map Setup Window).
EIS
If a terrain caution or warning occurs, any map page displaying TAWS/TERRAIN data automatically adjusts
to the smallest map range clearly showing the highest priority alert. If a new traffic advisory alert occurs, any
map page capable of displaying traffic advisory alerts automatically adjusts to the smallest map range clearly
showing the traffic advisory. When terrain or traffic alerts clear, the map returns to the previous auto zoom
range based on the active waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The auto zoom function can be turned on or off independently for the PFDs and MFD. Control of the
ranges at which the auto zoom occurs is done by setting the minimum and maximum ‘look forward’ times
(set on the Map Setup Window for the Map Group). These settings determine the minimum and maximum
distance to display based upon the aircraft’s ground speed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Waypoints that are long distances apart cause the map range to increase to a point where many details on
the map are decluttered. If this is not acceptable, lower the maximum look ahead time to a value that limits
the auto zoom to an acceptable range.
• Waypoints that are very short distances apart cause the map range to decrease to a point where situational
awareness may not be what is desired. Increase the minimum look ahead time to a value that limits the auto
zoom to a minimum range that provides acceptable situational awareness.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Flight plans that have a combination of long and short legs cause the range to increase and decrease as
waypoints sequence. To avoid this, auto zoom can be disabled or the maximum/minimum times can be
adjusted.
• The ‘time out’ time (configurable on the Map Setup Page for the Map Group) determines how long auto
zoom is overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob. At the expiration of this time, the auto
zoom range is restored. Setting the ‘time out’ value to zero causes the manual override to never time out.
AFCS
• When the maximum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the upper limit becomes the maximum range available
(2000 nm).
• When the minimum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the lower limit becomes 1.5 nm.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
149
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Auto Zoom:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Off, MFD Only, PFD Only, All On
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Manual Range Override
Expiration Time
Maximum Look Forward Time
Minimum Look Forward Time
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-7 Map Setup Menu Window - Map Group, Auto Zoom
Configuring automatic zoom:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘AUTO ZOOM’ field.
6) Select ‘Off’, ‘MFD Only’, ‘PFD Only’, or ‘ALL On’.
AFCS
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘MAX LOOK FWD’ field.
Times are from zero to 999 minutes.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to set the time. Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
9) Repeat step 8 for ‘MIN LOOK FWD’ (zero to 99 minutes) and ‘MAX LOOK FWD’ (zero to 999 minutes).
INDEX
APPENDICES
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
150
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Map Panning
Map panning allows the pilot to:
• View parts of the map outside the displayed range without adjusting the map range
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Highlight and select locations on the map
• Review information for a selected airport, NAVAID or user waypoint
• Designate locations for use in flight planning
• View airspace and airway information
EIS
When the panning function is selected by pressing the Joystick, the Map Pointer flashes on the map display.
A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position of the pointer,
the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position, and the elevation of the land at the
position of the pointer.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map Pointer Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Map Pointer
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-8 Navigation Map - Map Pointer Activated
APPENDICES
Note: The map is normally centered on the aircraft’s position. If the map has been panned and there has
been no pointer movement for about 60 seconds, the map reverts back to centered on the aircraft position
and the flashing pointer is removed.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
151
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the Map Pointer is placed on an object, the name of the object is highlighted (even if the name was
not originally displayed on the map). When any map feature or object is selected on the map display, pertinent
information is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Information about Point
of Interest
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Map Pointer on
POI
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-9 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Point of Interest
152
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When the Map Pointer crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information
is shown at the top of the display. The information includes the name and class of airspace, the ceiling in feet
above Mean Sea Level (MSL), and the floor in feet MSL.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Information about
Airspace
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map Pointer on
Airspace
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-10 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Airspace
Panning the map:
AFCS
1) Press the Joystick to display the Map Pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to move the Map Pointer around the map.
3) Press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and recenter the map on the aircraft’s current position.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
153
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Reviewing information for an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint:
1) Place the Map Pointer on a waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Waypoint Information Page for the selected waypoint.
3) Select the GO BACK Softkey, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the Waypoint Information Page and return to
the Navigation Map showing the selected waypoint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
NAVAID
Information
GO BACK Softkey
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-11 Navigation Map - Information Window - NAVAID
154
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing airspace information for a special-use or controlled airspace:
1) Place the Map Pointer on an open area within the boundaries of an airspace.
2) Press the ENT Key to display an options menu.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) ‘Review Airspace?’ should already be highlighted, if not select it. Press the ENT Key to display the Airspace
Information Page for the selected airspace.
4) Press the CLR or ENT Key to exit the Airspace Information Page.
EIS
Airspace
Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-12 Navigation Map - Information Window - Airspace
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
155
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Measuring Bearing and Distance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Distance and bearing from the aircraft’s present position to any point on the viewable navigation map may be
calculated using the ‘Measure Bearing and Distance’ selection from Navigation Map page menu. The bearing
and distance tool displays a dashed Measurement Line and a Measure Pointer to aid in graphically identifying
points with which to measure. Lat/Long, distance and elevation data for the Measure Pointer is provided in a
window at the top of the navigation map.
Measuring bearing and distance between any two points:
1) Press the MENU Key (with the Navigation Map Page displayed).
EIS
2) Highlight the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ field.
3) Press the ENT Key. A Measure Pointer is displayed on the map at the aircraft’s present position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Move the Joystick to place the reference pointer at the desired location. The bearing and distance are displayed
at the top of the map. Elevation at the current pointer position is also displayed. Pressing the ENT Key changes
the starting point for measuring.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option, press the Joystick; or select ‘Stop Measuring’ from the Page
Menu and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Measurement
Information
Pointer Lat/Long
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Measurement Line
INDEX
Figure 5-13 Navigation Map - Measuring Bearing and Distance
156
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Topography
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All navigation maps can display various shades of topography colors representing land elevation, similar
to aviation sectional charts. Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following
procedures.
Navigation Map
Topographic Data
Navigation Map
Black Background
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TOPO Softkey
Not Enabled
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TOPO Softkey
Enabled
TOPO Off
TOPO On
Figure 5-14 Navigation Map - Topographic Data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying/removing topographic data on all pages displaying navigation maps:
1) Select the MAP Softkey (the INSET Softkey for the PFD Inset Map).
2) Select the TOPO Softkey.
3) Select the TOPO Softkey again to remove topographic data from the Navigation Map. When topographic data
is removed from the page, all navigation data is presented on a black background.
AFCS
Displaying/removing topographic data (TOPO DATA) using the Navigation Map Page Menu:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ field.
APPENDICES
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
157
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
TOPO DATA
On/Off
TOPO DATA
Range
Figure 5-15 Navigation Map Setup Menu - TOPO DATA Setup
The topographic data range is the maximum map range on which topographic data is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Note: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the
PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting a topographical data range (TOPO DATA):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ range field. TOPO ranges are from 500 ft to 2000 nm.
6) To change the TOPO range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
In addition, the Navigation Map can display a topographic scale (located in the lower right hand side of the
map) showing a scale of the terrain elevation and current elevation values.
158
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Maximum Displayed Elevation
Minimum Displayed Elevation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Aircraft Altitude (MSL)
Range of
Displayed
Elevations
EIS
Ground Elevation at Map Pointer
Location (only visible when Map
Pointer is displayed)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-16 Navigation Map - TOPO SCALE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displaying/removing the topographic scale (TOPO SCALE):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group and select the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Highlight the ‘TOPO SCALE’ field.
5) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
TOPO SCALE
On/Off
Figure 5-17 Navigation Map Setup Menu - TOPO SCALE Setup
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
159
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Map Symbols
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This section discusses the types of land and aviation symbols that can be displayed. Each listed type of symbol
can be turned on or off, and the maximum range to display each symbol can be set. The decluttering of the
symbols from the map using the DCLTR Softkey is also discussed.
Land Symbols
The following items are configured on the land menu:
Land Symbols
EIS
(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med), or Large
(Lrg)
Symbol
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
Latitude/Longitude (LAT/LON)
Off
2000
Interstate Highway (FREEWAY)
300
800
International Highway (FREEWAY)
300
800
US Highway (NATIONAL HWY)
30
80
State Highway (LOCAL HWY)
15
30
8
15
Railroads (RAILROAD)
15
30
LARGE CITY (> 200,000)
800
1500
MEDIUM CITY (> 50,000)
100
200
SMALL CITY (> 5,000)
States and Provinces (STATE/PROV)
20
800
50
1500
Rivers and Lakes (RIVER/LAKE)
200
500
USER WAYPOINT
150
300
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Highways and Roads
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Local Road (LOCAL ROAD)
N/A
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 5-1 Land Symbol Information
160
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Aviation Symbols
The following items are configured on the aviation menu:
Aviation Symbols
Symbol
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
2000
500
300
100
20
100
30
Non-directional Beacon (NDB WAYPOINT)
15
30
VOR (VOR WAYPOINT)
150
300
Class B Airspace/TMA (CLASS B/TMA)
200
500
Class C Airspace/TCA (CLASS C/TCA)
200
500
Class D Airspace (CLASS D)
150
300
Restricted Area (RESTRICTED)
200
500
Military Operations Area [MOA(MILITARY)]
200
500
Other/Air Defense Interdiction Zone (OTHER/ADIZ)
200
500
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
500
2000
See Airports, NAVAIDs
See Additional Features
N/A
APPENDICES
2000
250
150
50
3
Off
15
Active Flight Plan Waypoint (ACTIVE FPL WPT)
Large Airports (LARGE APT)
Medium Airports (MEDIUM APT)
Small Airports (SMALL APT)
Taxiways (SAFETAXI)
Runway Extension (RWY EXTENSION)
Intersection (INT WAYPOINT)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2000
AFCS
2000
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Non-active Flight Plan Leg (ACTIVE FPL)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2000
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2000
EIS
Active Flight Plan Leg (ACTIVE FPL)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med),
or Large (Lrg)
Table 5-2 Aviation Symbol Information
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
161
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Symbol Setup
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All pages with maps can display land symbols (roads, lakes, borders, etc). Land symbols can be removed
totally (turned off).
Displaying/removing all land symbols:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The Page Menu is displayed and the cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Group Menu is displayed and the cursor flashes on the ‘Map’ option.
EIS
3) Highlight the ‘LAND DATA’ field.
4) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
LAND DATA
On/Off
AFCS
Figure 5-18 Navigation Map Setup Menu - LAND DATA Setup
The label size (TEXT) sets the size at which labels appear on the display (none, small, medium, and large).
The range (RNG) sets the maximum range at which items appear on the display.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting a ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ group item text size and range:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
APPENDICES
3) Select the ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
5) Select the desired land option.
6) Select the desired text size.
INDEX
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected size.
6) Select the desired range.
162
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected range.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Maximum Display Range
EIS
Text Label Size
(None, Small, Med, or Lrg)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-19 Navigation Map Setup Menu - LAND GROUP Setup
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Text Label Size
(None, Small, Med, or Lrg)
Maximum Display Range
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-20 Navigation Map Setup Menu - AVIATION GROUP Setup
APPENDICES
Note: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the
PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
163
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Map Declutter
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through four levels of removing map information.
The declutter level is displayed in the DCLTR Softkey and next to the Declutter Menu Option.
Declutter Level
EIS
DCLTR Softkey
Navigation Map Page Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-21 Navigation Map - Declutter Level Indications
Decluttering the map:
Select the DCLTR Softkey with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The current declutter level is shown. With
each softkey selection, another level of map information is removed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed.
2) Select ‘Declutter’. The current declutter level is shown.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the ENT Key.
Decluttering the PFD Inset Map:
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
2) Select the DCLTR Softkey. The current declutter level is shown. With each selection, another level of map
information is removed.
164
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Table 5-3 lists the items displayed at each declutter level. The ‘X’ represents map items displayed for the
various levels of declutter.
Item
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Flight Plan Route Lines
Flight Plan Route Waypoints
Rivers/Lakes
Topography Data
International Borders
Track Vector
Navigation Range Ring
Fuel Range Ring
Terrain Data
Traffic
Airways
NEXRAD
XM Lightning Data
Airports
Runway Labels
Restricted
MOA (Military)
User Waypoints
Latitude/Longitude Grid
NAVAIDs
Class B Airspaces/TMA
Class C Airspaces/TCA
Class D Airspaces
Other Airspaces/ADIZ
TFRs
Obstacles
Land/Country Text
Cities
Roads
Railroads
State/Province Boundaries
River/Lake Names
No Declutter Declutter-1 Declutter-2 Declutter-3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Table 5-3 Navigation Map Items Displayed by Declutter Level
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
165
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Airways
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This airways discussion is based upon the North American airway structure. The airway structure in places
other than North America vary by location, etc. and are not discussed in this book. Low Altitude Airways (or
Victor Airways) primarily serve smaller piston-engine, propeller-driven airplanes on shorter routes and at lower
altitudes. Airways are eight nautical miles wide and start 1,200 feet above ground level (AGL) and extend up
to 18,000 feet mean sea level (MSL). Low Altitude Airways are designated with a “V” before the airway number
(hence the name “Victor Airways”) since they run primarily between VORs.
EIS
High Altitude Airways (or Jet Routes) primarily serve airliners, jets, turboprops, and turbocharged piston
aircraft operating above 18,000 feet MSL. Jet Routes start at 18,000 feet MSL and extend upward to 45,000 feet
MSL (altitudes above 18,000 feet are called “flight levels” and are described as FL450 for 45,000 feet MSL). Jet
Routes are designated with a “J” before the route number.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray (the same shade used for roads). High Altitude Airways are drawn
in green. When both types of airways are displayed, High Altitude Airways are drawn on top of Low Altitude
Airways.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When airways are selected for display on the map, the airway waypoints (VORs, NDBs and Intersections) are
also displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Low Altitude
Airway
(Victor Airway)
APPENDICES
High Altitude
Airway
(Jet Route)
INDEX
Figure 5-22 Airways on MFD Navigation Page
166
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilot’s discretion using either a combination of AIRWAYS Softkey
selections, or menu selections using the MENU Key from the Navigation Map Page. The Airway range can also
be programmed to only display Airways on the MFD when the map range is at or below a specific number.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Displaying/removing airways:
1) Select the MAP Softkey.
2) Select the AIRWAYS Softkey. Both High and Low Altitude Airways are displayed (AIRWY ON).
3) Select the softkey again to display Low Altitude Airways only (AIRWY LO).
4) Select the softkey again to display High Altitude Airways only (AIRWY HI).
EIS
5) Select the softkey again to remove High Altitude Airways. No airways are displayed (AIRWAYS).
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘AIRWAYS’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Off’, ‘All’, ‘LO Only’, or ‘HI Only’, and press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Off, All, LO Only, HI Only
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airway Display Selection
Low Altitude Airway Range
High Altitude Airway Range
Figure 5-23 Navigation Map Setup Menu - AIRWAYS Setup
AFCS
The airway range is the maximum map range on which airways are displayed.
Selecting an airway range (LOW ALT AIRWAY or HI ALT AIRWAY):
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Airway’ group.
APPENDICES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘LOW ALT AIRWAY’ or ‘HI ALT AIRWAY’ range field.
6) To change the range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
7) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
INDEX
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
167
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
The following range items are configurable on the airways menu:
Airway Type
Symbol
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Low Altitude Airway (LOW ALT AIRWAY)
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
200
500
High Altitude Airway (HI ALT AIRWAY)
300
500
EIS
Table 5-4 Airway Range Information
Track Vector
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Navigation Map can display a track vector that is useful in minimizing track angle error. The track vector
is a solid light blue line segment extended to a predicted location. The track vector look-ahead time is selectable
(30 sec, 60 sec (default), 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min) and determines the length of the track vector. The track
vector shows up to 90 degrees of a turn for the 30 and 60 second time settings.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Track Vector
Figure 5-24 Navigation Map -Track Vector
Displaying/removing the track vector:
AFCS
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TRACK VECTOR’ field.
APPENDICES
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the look
ahead time field. Use the FMS Knob to select the desired time. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
168
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Nav Range Ring On/Off
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Wind Vector On/Off
Track Vector
- On/Off
- Look Ahead Time
EIS
Fuel Range
- On/Off
- Fuel Reserve Time
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-25 Navigation Map Setup Menu -TRACK VECTOR, WIND VECTOR, NAV RANGE RING, FUEL RANGE RING Setup
Wind Vector
Wind Direction
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The map displays a wind vector arrow in the upper right-hand portion of the screen. Wind vector information
is displayed as a white arrow pointing in the direction in which the wind is moving for wind speeds greater than
or equal to 1 kt.
Wind Speed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-26 Navigation Map - Wind Vector
Note: The wind vector is not displayed until the aircraft is moving. It is not displayed on the Waypoint
AFCS
Information pages.
Displaying/removing the wind vector:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
5) Highlight the ‘WIND VECTOR’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
169
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Nav Range Ring
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Nav Range Ring shows the direction of travel (ground track) on a rotating compass card. The range is
determined by the map range. The range is 1/4 of the map range (e.g., 7.5 nm on a 30 nm map).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Range (radius)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nav Range Ring
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-27 Navigation Map - Nav Range Ring
Note: The Nav Range Ring is not displayed on the Waypoint Information pages, Nearest pages, or Direct-to
Window map.
AFCS
Displaying/removing the Nav Range Ring:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘NAV RANGE RING’ field.
APPENDICES
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Note: The Nav Range Ring is referenced to either magnetic or true north, based on the selection on the AUX
INDEX
- System Setup Page.
170
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Fuel Range Ring
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display a fuel range ring which shows the remaining flight distance. A dashed green circle
indicates the selected range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the total endurance range. If only
reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid yellow circle.
Total Endurance Range
Time to Reserve Fuel
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Range to Reserve Fuel
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-28 Navigation Map - Fuel Range Ring
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying/removing the fuel range ring and selecting a fuel range time:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
AFCS
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘FUEL RNG (RSV)’ field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Highlight the fuel reserve time field. This time should be set to the amount of flight time equal to the amount
of fuel reserve desired.
APPENDICES
8) To change the reserve fuel time, enter a time (00:00 to 23:59; hours:minutes). The default setting is 00:45
minutes.
9) Press the ENT Key.
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
171
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Field of View (SVS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display the boundaries of the PFD Synthetic Vision System (SVS) lateral field of view. The field
of view is shown as two dashed lines forming a V shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map. This is only
available if SVS is installed on the aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Lateral Field
of View
Boundaries
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-29 Navigation Map - Field of View
Displaying/removing the field of view:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘FIELD OF VIEW’ field.
AFCS
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
172
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.3 Waypoints
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints are predetermined geographical positions (internal database) or pilot-entered positions, and are
used for all phases of flight planning and navigation.
Communication and navigation frequencies can be tuned “automatically” from various Waypoint Information
(WPT) pages, Nearest (NRST) pages, and the Nearest Airports Window (on PFD). This auto-tuning feature
simplifies frequency entry over manual tuning. Refer to the CNS and Audio Panel section for details on autotuning.
- Waypoint Identifier
- Type (symbol)
- Facility Name
- City
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
City Entry Field
Facility
Entry Field
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Identifier Entry Field
EIS
Waypoints can be selected by entering the ICAO identifier, entering the name of the facility, or by entering
the city name. See the System Overview section for detailed instructions on entering data in the G1000. As a
waypoint identifier, facility name, or location is entered, the G1000’s Spell’N’Find™ feature scrolls through the
database, displaying those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered to that point. A direct-to
navigation leg to the selected waypoint can be initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on any of the waypoint
pages.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Entered Waypoint on
Map
Map Area Showing
Entered Waypoint
AFCS
Waypoint Location
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-30 Waypoint Information Window
APPENDICES
If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location, additional entries may be viewed by continuing
to turn the small FMS Knob during the selection process. If duplicate entries exist for an identifier, a Duplicate
Waypoints Window is displayed when the ENT Key is pressed.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
173
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Identifier with
Duplicates
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Duplicate
Waypoints
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Duplicate Message
Airports
Figure 5-31 Waypoint Information Window - Duplicate Identifier
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Note: ‘North Up’ orientation on the Airport Information Page cannot be changed; the pilot needs to be
aware of proper orientation if the Navigation Map orientation is different from the Airport Information Page
Map.
AFCS
The Airport Information Page is the first page in WPT group and allows the pilot to view airport information,
load frequencies (COM, NAV, and lighting), review runways, and review instrument procedures that may be
involved in the flight plan. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information on loading frequencies
(auto-tuning). After engine startup, the Airport Information Page defaults to the airport where the aircraft is
located. After a flight plan has been loaded, it defaults to the destination airport. On a flight plan with multiple
airports, it defaults to the airport which is the current active waypoint.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area, the Airport Information
Page displays airport information in three boxes labeled ‘AIRPORT’, ‘RUNWAYS’, and ‘FREQUENCIES’. For
airports with multiple runways, information for each runway is available.
174
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Airport Information
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
- Lat/Long/Elev
- Fuel Available
- Time Zone (UTC Offset)
Runway Information
- Designation
- Length/Width/Surface
- Lighting Available
EIS
Airport/Runway
Diagram
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
- Availability
- Additional Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Softkeys
Figure 5-32 Airport Information Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Information Page:
• Usage type: Public, Military, or Private
• Runway surface type: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
AFCS
• Runway lighting type: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or PCL Freq (for pilot-controlled
lighting)
• COM Availability: TX (transmit only), RX (receive only), PT (part time), i (additional information available)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
175
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Airport Directory
Information
Airport Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
Softkeys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-33 Airport Directory Page Example
The following are types of AOPA airport directory information shown (if available) on the Airport Directory
Page:
AFCS
• Airport:
Identifier, Site
Number, Name, City, State
• Phones: Phone/Fax Numbers
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Hours: Facility Hours, Light
Hours, Tower Hours, Beacon
Hours
• Location: Sectional, Magnetic
Variation
• Frequencies: Type/Frequency
INDEX
• Transportation:
Ground
Transportation Type Available
• Approach: Approach Facility
Name, Frequency, Frequency
Parameter
176
• Traffic Patteren Altitudes
(TPA): Aircraft Class/Altitude
• Weather:
Service Type,
Frequency, Phone Number
• Flight Service Station (FSS):
FSS Name, Phone Numbers
• Runway: Headings, Length,
Width, Obstructions, Surface
• Obstructions: General Airport
Obstructions
• Special
Operations
at
Airport
• Instrument
Approaches:
Published Approach, Freq.
• NAVAIDS: Type, Identifier,
Frequency, Radial, Distance
• Noise:
Noise Abatement
Procedures
• Charts: Low Altitude Chart
Number
• Services Available: Category,
Specific Service
• Notes: Airport Notes
• Pilot Controlled Lighting:
High/Med/Low Clicks/Second
• FBO:
Type, Frequencies,
Services, Fees, Fuel, Credit
Cards, Phone/Fax Numbers
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting an airport for review by identifier, facility name, or location:
1) From the Airport Information Page, press the FMS Knob.
2) Use the FMS Knobs and enter an identifier, facility name, or location.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Selecting a runway:
1) With the Airport Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘RUNWAYS’ Box, on the runway designator.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired runway (if more than one) for the selected airport.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS Knob.
View a destination airport:
From the Airport Information Page press the MENU Key. Select ‘View Destination Airport’. The Destination
Airport is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Airport Frequencies Box uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in the following table:
Navigation Frequencies
ILS
LOC
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Communication Frequencies
Approach * Control
Pre-Taxi
Arrival *
CTA *
Radar
ASOS
Departure * Ramp
ATIS
Gate
Terminal *
AWOS
Ground
TMA *
Center
Helicopter
Tower
Class B *
Multicom
TRSA *
Class C *
Other
Unicom
Clearance
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
* May include Additional Information
Table 5-5 Airport Frequency Abbreviations
APPENDICES
A departure, arrival, or approach can be loaded using the softkeys on the Airport Information Page. See the
procedures section for details. METARs or TAFs applicable to the selected airport can be selected for display (see
the Hazard Avoidance section for details about weather.
The G1000 provides a NRST Softkey on the PFD, which gives the pilot quick access to nearest airport
information (very useful if an immediate need to land is required). The Nearest Airports Window displays a
list of the 25 nearest airports (three entries can be displayed at one time). If there are more than three they are
displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200NM” is displayed.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
177
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Bearing/Distance to Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airport Identifier/
Type
Approach Available
Length of Longest
Runway
COM Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Additional Airports
(within 200 nm)
NRST Softkey
Figure 5-34 Nearest Airports Window on PFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the ENT Key displays the PFD Airport Information Window for the highlighted airport. Pressing the
ENT Key again returns to the Nearest Airports Window with the cursor on the next airport in the list. Continued
presses of the ENT Key sequences through the information pages for all airports in the Nearest Airports list.
Airport Information
- ID/Type/City
- Facility
Airport Information
- Usage/Time/Elev
- Region
AFCS
Airport Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Lat/Long
APPENDICES
Figure 5-35 Airport Information Window on PFD
The Nearest Airports Page on the MFD is first in the group of NRST pages because of its potential use in
the event of an in-flight emergency. In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and
surrounding area, the page displays nearest airport information in five boxes labeled ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’,
‘INFORMATION’, ‘RUNWAYS’, ‘FREQUENCIES’, and ‘APPROACHES’.
INDEX
The selected airport is indicated by a white arrow, and a dashed white line is drawn on the navigation map
from the aircraft position to the nearest airport. Up to five nearest airports, one runway, up to five frequencies,
and up to five approaches are visible at one time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled.
178
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If there are no items for display in a boxed area, text indicating that fact is displayed. The currently selected
airport remains in the list until it is unselected.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Nearest Airports
- ID/Type
- Bearing/Distance
Airport Information
- Facility/City/Elevation
EIS
Runway Information
- Designation/Surface
- Length/Width
Nearest Airport
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Airport
- Identification
- Frequency
Window Selection
Softkeys
LD APR Softkey (only
available if an approach is
highlighted)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-36 Nearest Airport Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Approaches Available
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the PFD:
1) Select the NRST Softkey to display the Nearest Airports Window.
AFCS
2) Highlight the airport identifier with the FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to display the Airport Information
Window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) To return to the Nearest Airports Window press the ENT Key (with the cursor on ‘BACK’) or press the CLR
Key. The cursor is now on the next airport in the nearest airports list. (Repeatedly pressing the ENT Key
moves through the airport list, alternating between the Nearest Airports Window and the Airport Information
Window.)
4) Press the CLR Key to close the PFD Nearest Airports Window.
APPENDICES
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the MFD:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the NRST page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Nearest Airports Page (it is the first page of the group, so it may already
be selected. If there are no Nearest Airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200 NM” is displayed.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
179
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
3) Select the APT Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Airport Window’ and
press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’ Box. The first airport in the nearest airports
list is highlighted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airport. (Pressing the ENT Key also moves to the next airport)
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Viewing runway information for a specific airport:
1) With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, select the RNWY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select
Runway Window’; and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘RUNWAYS’ Box.
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for frequency selection and the Procedures section for approaches.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Nearest Airports Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type
used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are
not appropriately surfaced from being displayed. Default settings are 0 feet (or meters) for runway length and
“HARD/SOFT” for runway surface type.
Selecting nearest airport surface matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the Nearest Airports Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (ANY, HARD ONLY, HARD/SOFT).
5) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Selecting nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the minimum length field in the Nearest Airport Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 25,000 feet) and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
180
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Nearest Airport Criteria
- Type of Runway Surface
- Minimum Runway Length
EIS
Figure 5-37 System Setup Page - Nearest Airport Selection Criteria
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
181
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Intersections
Note: The VOR displayed on the Intersection Information Page is the nearest VOR, not necessarily the VOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
used to define the intersection.
The Intersection Information Page is used to view information about intersections. In addition to displaying
a map of the currently selected intersection and surrounding area, the Intersection Information Page displays
intersection information in three boxes labeled ‘INTERSECTION’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘NEAREST VOR’.
EIS
Intersection Identifier
Intersection Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Intersection
- Region
- Lat/Long
Nearest VOR Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Radial to VOR
- Distance to VOR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Intersection
AFCS
Figure 5-38 Intersection Information Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Select an intersection:
1) With the Intersection Information Page displayed, enter an identifier in the Intersection Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
Or:
1) With the Nearest Intersections Page displayed, press the FMS Knob
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest Intersection Box.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
182
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Nearest Intersections Page can be used to quickly find an intersection close to the flight path. In addition
to displaying a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest intersections in
three boxes labeled ‘NEAREST INT’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘REFERENCE VOR’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The selected intersection is indicated by a white arrow. Up to seventeen intersections are visible at a time. If
there are more than can be shown, the list can be scrolled. If there are no items for display, text indicating that
fact is displayed
Note: The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.
EIS
Intersection Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to
intersection from
aircraft position
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Intersection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Intersection Lat/Long
Reference VOR Info
Nearest
Intersection
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- VOR Frequency
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
AFCS
Figure 5-39 Nearest Intersections Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
183
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
NDBs
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The NDB Information Page is used to view information about NDBs. In addition to displaying a map of
the currently selected NDB and surrounding area, the page displays NDB information in four boxes labeled
‘NDB’, ‘INFORMATION’, ‘FREQUENCY’, and ‘NEAREST AIRPORT.
NDB Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
EIS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
NDB Information
- Type
- Region
- Lat/Long
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NDB Frequency
Nearest Airport Info
Selected NDB
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
Figure 5-40 NDB Information Page
AFCS
Note: Compass locator (LOM): a low power, low or medium frequency radio beacon installed in conjunction
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
with the instrument landing system. When LOM is used, the locator is at the Outer Marker; when LMM is
used, the locator is at the Middle Marker.
Select an NDB:
1) With the NDB Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the NDB, or the city in which it’s
located in the NDB Box.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest NDB Page displayed, press the FMS Knob
INDEX
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest NDB Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
184
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Nearest NDB Page can be used to quickly find a NDB close to the flight path. In addition to displaying
a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest NDBs in three boxes labeled
‘NEAREST NDB’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘FREQUENCY’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A white arrow before the NDB identifier indicates the selected NDB. Up to seventeen NDBs are visible at a
time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. The list only includes waypoints that are
within 200nm. If there are no NDBs in the list, text indicating that there are no nearest NDBs is displayed. If
there are no nearest NDBs in the list, the information and frequency fields are dashed.
EIS
NDB Identifier/Symbol
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
- Bearing/Distance to
NDB from aircraft
position
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nearest NDB
NDB Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Facility Name/City
- Type
- Lat/Long
NDB Frequency
Figure 5-41 Nearest NDB Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
185
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
VORs
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VOR Information Page can be used to view information about VOR and ILS navigation signals, or to
quickly auto-tune a VOR or ILS frequency. Localizer information cannot be viewed on the VOR Information
Page. If a VOR station is combined with a TACAN station it is listed as a VORTAC on the VOR Information
Page and if it includes only DME, it’s displayed as VOR-DME.
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected VOR and surrounding area, the VOR Information
Page displays VOR information in four boxes labeled ‘VOR’, ‘INFORMATION’, ‘FREQUENCY’, and ‘NEAREST
AIRPORT’.
EIS
VOR Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing
Selected VOR
VOR Information
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Region
- Lat/Long
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VOR Frequency
Nearest Airport Info
Selected VOR
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
Figure 5-42 VOR Information Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The VOR classes used in the VOR information box are: LOW ALTITUDE, HIGH ALTITUDE, and
TERMINAL
Select a VOR:
APPENDICES
1) With the VOR Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the VOR, or the city in which it’s
located in the VOR Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
INDEX
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the FMS Knob or press the VOR Softkey.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
186
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Or:
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT VOR WINDOW’, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
The Nearest VOR Page can be used to quickly find a VOR station close to the aircraft. Also, a NAV frequency
from a selected VOR station can be loaded from the Nearest VOR Page. In addition to displaying a map of
the surrounding area, the Nearest VOR Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VOR stations in three
boxes labeled ‘NEAREST VOR’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘FREQUENCY’. The list only includes waypoints that
are within 200 nm.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A white arrow before the VOR identifier indicates the selected VOR. Up to seventeen VORs are visible at
a time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. If there are no VORs in the list, text
indicating that there are no nearest VORs is displayed. If there are no nearest VORs in the list, the information
is dashed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VOR Identifier/Symbol
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
VOR
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
from aircraft position
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
VOR Information
- Facility Name/City
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Lat/Long
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Nearest VOR
VOR Frequency
APPENDICES
Figure 5-43 Nearest VOR Page
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
187
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
User Waypoints
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can create and store up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints. User waypoints can be created from any
map page (except PFD Inset Map, AUX-Trip Planning Page, or Procedure Pages) by selecting a position on the
map using the Joystick, or from the User Waypoint Information Page by referencing a bearing/distance from
an existing waypoint, referencing bearings from two existing waypoints, or entering a latitude/longitude. Once
a waypoint has been created, it can be renamed, deleted, or moved.
EIS
User Waypoint Info
- Identifier
- Temporary/Normal
- Waypoint Type
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
Reference Wpt/Info
Selected User
Waypoint
User Waypoint List
- Identifier/Rad/Dist or
- Identifiers/Radials or
- Region/Lat/Long
- Identifier
- Comment
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
User Wpt Comment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
# User Wpts Used
Displayed if User Wpt
was created on map
page
Softkeys
AFCS
Figure 5-44 User Waypoint Information Page
Select a User Waypoint:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, enter the name of the User Waypoint, or scroll to the
desired waypoint in the User Waypoint List using the large FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
Or:
1) With the Nearest User Waypoint Page displayed, press the FMS Knob
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest USR Box.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
188
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Nearest User Wpt List
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Identifier
- Bearing/Distance from
aircraft position
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
EIS
Selected User
Waypoint
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
User Waypoint Info
- Comment
- Lat/Long
Reference Wpt Info
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier
- Radial/Distance
Figure 5-45 Nearest User Waypoint Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Creating User Waypoints
User waypoints can be created from the User Waypoint Information Page in the following ways:
Creating user waypoints from the User Waypoint Information Page:
1) Select the NEW Softkey, or press the MENU Key and select ‘Create New User Waypoint’.
AFCS
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The current aircraft position is the default location of the new waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
APPENDICES
b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
INDEX
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
189
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
6) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Are you sure you want to create the new User Waypoint AAAAAA?’ is
displayed.
EIS
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
Figure 5-46 User Waypoint Information Page Menu
190
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating user waypoints from map pages:
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function and pan to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key. The User Waypoint Information Page is displayed with the captured position.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: If the pointer has highlighted a map database feature, one of three things happens upon pressing
the ENT Key: 1) information about the selected feature is displayed instead of initiating a new waypoint,
2) a menu pops up allowing a choice between ‘Review Airspaces’ or ‘Create User Waypoint’, or 3) a new
waypoint is initiated with the default name being the selected map item.
EIS
3) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The first reference waypoint box is highlighted.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
9) Press the GO BACK Softkey to return to the map page.
Editing User Waypoints
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Editing a user waypoint comment or location:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Move the cursor to the desired field.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to make any changes.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
191
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Renaming user waypoints:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Management
2) Enter a new name.
1) Highlight a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List. Select the RENAME Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select ‘Rename User Waypoint’
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Do you want to rename the user waypoint AAAAAA to BBBBBB?’ is
displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Changing the location of an existing waypoint to the aircraft present position:
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Use Present Position’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice. The new waypoint’s location is saved.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
A system generated comment for a user waypoint incorporates the reference waypoint identifier, bearing,
and distance. If a system generated comment has been edited, a new comment can be generated.
Resetting the comment field to the system generated comment:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Auto Comment’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The generated comment is based on the reference point used to define the waypoint.
AFCS
The default type of user waypoint (normal or temporary) can be changed using the user waypoint information
page menu. Temporary user waypoints are automatically deleted upon the next power cycle.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Changing the user waypoint storage duration default setting:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Move the cursor to select ‘Waypoint Setup’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Select ‘NORMAL’ or ‘TEMPORARY’ as desired, and press the ENT Key
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor and return to the User Waypoint Information Page.
192
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Deleting User Waypoints
Deleting a single user waypoint
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Select the DELETE Softkey or press the CLR Key. ‘Yes’ is highlighted in the confirmation window.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
EIS
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Select ‘Delete User Waypoint’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Note: The option to ‘Delete All User Waypoints’ is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all user waypoints
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Delete All User Waypoints.’
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
193
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
5.4 Airspaces
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 can display the following types of airspaces: Class B/TMA, Class C/TCA, Class D, Restricted, MOA
(Military), Other Airspace, Air Defense Identification Zone (ADIZ), and Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR).
Class D Airspace
EIS
MOA (Military)
Class B Airspace
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Restricted Area
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TFR
Alert Area
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Class C Airspace
APPENDICES
ADIZ
INDEX
Warning Area
Figure 5-47 Airspaces
194
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Nearest Airspaces Page, Airspace Alerts Window, and Airspace Alerts on the PFD provide additional
information about airspaces and the location of the aircraft in relationship to them.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Airspace Alerts Box allows the pilot to turn the controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on or off.
This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the
Navigation Map Page. It simply turns on/off the warning provided when the aircraft is approaching or near an
airspace.
EIS
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For example,
if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an alert message is
not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected to enter it, the pilot
is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the altitude buffer field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Turning an airspace alert on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
195
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Airspace Alerts Box
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
- Airspace Altitude Buffer
- Alert On/Off
(Default Settings Shown)
DFLTS Softkey
Figure 5-48 System Setup Page - Airspace Alerts
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map ranges for the airspace boundaries are selected from the Aviation Group in the Map Setup Menu: See Table
5-2 for the default and maximum ranges for each type of airspace and the symbol used to define the airspace
area.
196
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Nearest Airspaces Page can be used to quickly find airspaces close to the flight path. In addition, a selected
frequency associated with the airspace can be loaded from the Nearest Airspaces Page. In addition to displaying
a map of airspace boundaries and surrounding area, the Nearest Airspaces Page displays airspace information in
four boxes labeled ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’, ‘AIRSPACE, AGENCY’, VERTICAL LIMITS’, and ‘FREQUENCIES’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airspace Alerts Info
- Name
- Proximity (Ahead, Inside,
Ahead < 2nm, Within 2nm)
- Time till Intercept (only if
Ahead or Ahead < 2nm)
EIS
Airspace/Agency Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Airspace Type
- Controlling Agency
Airspace 1
Airspace Vertical Limits
- Ceiling
- Floor
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Associated Frequencies
- Type
- Availability/Info
- Frequency
Airspace 2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Softkeys
Figure 5-49 Nearest Airspaces Page
AFCS
Airspace alerts and associated frequencies are shown in scrollable lists on the Nearest Airspaces Page. The
ALERTS and FREQ softkeys place the cursor in the respective list. The FREQ Softkey is enabled only if one or
more frequencies exist for a selected airspace.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting and viewing an airspace alert with its associated information:
1) Select the Nearest Airspace Page.
2) Select the ALERTS Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Alerts Window’,
and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’ Box.
APPENDICES
3) Select the desired airspace.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
197
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Pressing the PFD ALERTS Softkey displays the message window on the PFD. The following airspace alerts are
displayed in the message window:
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead –
less than 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near –
less than 2 nm.
Comments
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft penetrates the airspace within 10
minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 5-6 PFD Airspace Alert Messages
198
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.5 Direct-to-Navigation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Direct-to method of navigation, initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on either the MFD or PFD, is
quicker to use than a flight plan when the desire is to navigate to a single point such as a nearby airport.
Once a direct-to is activated, the G1000 establishes a point-to-point course line from the present position to the
selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is replaced with a new direct-to or
flight plan, or cancelled.
EIS
A vertical navigation (VNV) direct-to creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the current altitude to a selected altitude at the direct-to waypoint. Vertical navigation is based on barometric
altitudes, not on GPS altitude, and is used for cruise and descent phases of flight.
The Direct-to Window allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation. The Direct-to Window displays
selected direct-to waypoint data on the PFD and the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Direct-to Point Info
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier/Symbol/Region
- Facility Name
- City
Map of Selected Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Location of Destination
AFCS
- Bearing/Distance
Desired Course
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-50 Direct-to Window - MFD
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
199
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Direct-to Point Info
- Identifier/Symbol/City
- Facility Name
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
Direct-to Point Info
- Bearing/Distance
- Desired Course
EIS
Activation Command
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-51 Direct-to Window - PFD
Any waypoint can be entered as a direct-to destination from the Direct-to Window.
Entering a waypoint identifier, facility name, or city as a direct-to destination:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan wayoint as the default
selection or a blank waypoint field if no flight plan is active).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier (turning it counter-clockwise brings
up the waypoint selection submenu - press the CLR Key to remove it), or turn the large FMS Knob to select the
facility name, or city field and turn the small FMS Knob to begin entering a facility name or city. If duplicate
entries exist for the entered facility or city name, additional entries can be viewed by turning the small FMS
Knob during the selection process.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the direct-to.
AFCS
Any waypoint contained in the active flight plan can be selected as a direct-to waypoint from the Direct-to
Window, the Active Flight Plan Page, or the Active Flight Plan Window.
Waypoint Submenu
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Flight Plan Waypoints
- Nearest Waypoints
- Recent Waypoints
- User Waypoints
- Airway Waypoints
(only available when
active leg is part of an
airway)
INDEX
Figure 5-52 Waypoint Submenu
200
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting an active flight plan waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) While navigating an active flight plan, press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the
active flight plan waypoint as the default selection.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
3) Select the desired waypoint.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
EIS
Or:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, or the Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Select the desired waypoint.
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Any NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoint can be selected as a direct-to destination in the Direct-to
Window.
Selecting a NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoint as a direct-to destination:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan destination as the
default selection or a blank destination if no flight plan is active).
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoints
AFCS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Direct-to Window can be displayed from any page and allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation.
If the direct-to is initiated from any page except the WPT pages, the default waypoint is the active flight plan
waypoint (if a flight plan is active) or a blank waypoint field. Direct-to requests on any WPT page defaults to the
displayed waypoint.
APPENDICES
Selecting any waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Select the page or window containing the desired waypoint type and select the desired waypoint.
2) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected waypoint as the direct-to
destination.
INDEX
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
4) Press ENT again to activate the direct-to.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
201
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Selecting a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
1) Select the NRST Softkey on the PFD; or turn the FMS Knob to display the Nearest Airports Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the desired airport (the nearest one is already selected).
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
EIS
Direct-to destinations may also be selected by using the pointer on the navigation map pages. If no airport,
NAVAID, or user waypoint exists at the desired location, a temporary waypoint named ‘MAPWPT’ is automatically
created at the location of the map arrow.
Selecting a waypoint as a direct-to destination using the pointer:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) From a navigation map page, press the Joystick to display the pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to place the pointer at the desired destination location.
3) If the pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint, the waypoint name is highlighted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected point entered as the direct-to
destination.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Cancelling a Direct-to:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. If a flight plan is still active, the G1000 resumes
navigating the flight plan along the closest leg.
202
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Page Menu
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Cancel Direct-To
Navigation
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-53 Direct-to Window - Cancelling Direct-to Navigation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When navigating a direct-to, the G1000 sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination. The course
to a destination can also be manually selected using the course field (‘COURSE’) on the Direct-to Window.
Selecting a manual direct-to course:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Highlight the course field.
AFCS
3) Enter the desired course.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Reselecting the direct course from the current position:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
APPENDICES
3) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
203
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A direct-to with altitude constraints creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from the
aircraft’s current altitude to the altitude of the direct-to waypoint. The altitude is reached at the waypoint, or at the
specified distance along the flight path if an offset distance has been entered. All VNV altitudes prior to the directto destination are removed from the active flight plan upon successful activation of a direct-to destination that is
part of the active flight plan. All VNV altitudes following the direct-to waypoint are retained. See the section on
Vertical Navigation for more information regarding the use and purpose of VNV altitudes and offset distances.
Entering a VNV altitude and along-track offset for the waypoint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor over the ‘VNV’ altitude field.
3) Enter the desired altitude.
4) Press the ENT Key. The option to select MSL or AGL is now displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now flashing in the VNV offset distance field.
7) Enter the desired along-track distance before the waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
9) Press the ENT Key to activate.
204
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Removing a VNV altitude constraint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With ‘Clear Vertical Constraints’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
Page Menu
EIS
- Clear Vertical Navigation
Constraints
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-54 Direct-to Window - Clearing Vertical Constraints
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
205
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
5.6 Flight Planning
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight planning on the G1000 consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints one at a time, adding
waypoints along airways, and inserting departures, airways, arrivals, or approaches as needed. The G1000 allows
flight planning information to be entered from either the MFD or PFD. The flight plan is displayed on maps using
different line widths, colors, and types, based on the type of leg and the segment of the flight plan currently being
flown (departure, enroute, arrival, approach, or missed approach).
Flight Plan Leg Type
Symbol
EIS
Active non-heading Leg
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active heading Leg
Non-heading Leg in the current flight segment
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Heading Leg not in the current flight segment
Non-heading leg not in the active flight segment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turn Anticipation Arc
Table 5-7 Flight Plan Leg Symbols
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Up to 99 flight plans with up to 99 waypoints each can be created and stored in memory. One flight plan can be
activated at a time and becomes the active flight plan. The active flight plan is erased when the system is turned
off and overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, departure,
or arrival, the G1000 uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the
database is changed or updated, the G1000 automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been
modified. If an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the
affected stored flight plan(s), and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous System Messages) advising that one or
more stored flight plans need to be edited.
APPENDICES
Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach,
departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the instrument
procedure the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active (unless an instrument
procedure is activated) when the procedure is loaded.
INDEX
When the database is updated, the airways need to be reloaded also. Each airway segment is reloaded from
the database given the entry waypoint, the airway identifier and the exit waypoint. This re-loads the sequence of
waypoints between the entry and exit waypoints (the sequence may change when the database is updated). The
update of an airway can fail during this process. If that happens, the airway waypoints are changed to regular
(non-airway) flight plan waypoints, and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous System Messages).
206
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following could cause the airway update to fail:
• Airway identifier, entry waypoint or exit waypoint not found in the new database.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Airway entry/exit waypoint is not an acceptable waypoint for the airway – either the waypoint is no longer on
the airway, or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being used.
• Loading the new airway sequence would exceed the capacity of the flight plan.
Flight Plan Creation
There are three methods to create or modify a flight plan:
EIS
• Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
• Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
• Flight Plan Catalog Page on the MFD (create/modify a stored flight plan)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active FPL Waypoint List
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Comment
- Procedure Header
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Vertical Navigation Profile
Non-Active,
Flight Plan Leg
AFCS
- Active Vertical WPT Alt/ID
- Vertical Speed Target
- Flight Path Angle
- Vertical Speed Target
- Time to Top of Descent
- Vertical Deviation
Turn Anticipation
Arc
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-55 Active Flight Plan Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
207
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Active Flight Plan Comment
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Active Flight Plan Waypoint List
EIS
- Waypoint ID
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Airway Identifier
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-56 Active Flight Plan Window on PFD
Catalog Contents
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- # Used
- # Empty
Flight Plan List
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Comment
Selected
Flight Plan
Map
AFCS
Selected FPL Info
- Departure Waypoint
- Destination Waypoint
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Softkeys
Figure 5-57 Flight Plan Catalog Page
APPENDICES
The active flight plan is listed on the active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, and in the Active Flight Plan
Window on the PFD. It is the flight plan to which the G1000 is currently providing guidance, and is shown
on the navigation maps. Stored flight plans are listed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page, and are available for
activation (becomes the active flight plan).
Creating an active flight plan:
INDEX
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (only on MFD).
208
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, or airway waypoints).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
5) Repeat step numbers 3 and 4 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
6) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Creating a stored flight plan:
EIS
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Select the NEW Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create New Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key to
display a blank flight plan for the first empty storage location.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, or airway waypoints).
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key.
6) Repeat step numbers 4 and 5 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog Page. The new
flight plan is now in the list.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
209
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Flight plans can be imported from an SD Card or exported to an SD Card from the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Importing a Flight Plan from an SD Card
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Insert the SD card containing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key on the Control Unit to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight an empty or existing flight plan.
EIS
6) Press the IMPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Import Flight Plan”, and press the ENT Key.
If an empty slot is selected, a list of the available flight plans on the SD card will be displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If an existing flight plan is selected, an “Overwrite existing flight plan? OK or CANCEL” prompt is displayed.
Press the ENT Key to choose to overwrite the selected flight plan and see the list of available flight plans on the
SD card. If overwriting the existing flight plan is not desired, select “CANCEL” using the FMS Knob, press the
ENT Key, select another flight plan slot, and press the IMPORT Softkey again.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan for importing.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the import.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
9) Press the ENT Key again to confirm the import.
Import/Export Softkeys
List of Flight Plans to Import &
Details for the Selected File
Import Successful
INDEX
Figure 5-58 Flight Plan Import
210
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Note: If the imported flight plan contains a waypoint with a name that duplicates the name of a waypoint
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
already stored on the system, the system compares the coordinates of the imported waypoint with those of
the existing waypoint. If the coordinates are different, the imported waypoint is automatically renamed by
adding characters to the end of the name.
Exporting a Flight Plan to an SD Card
1) Insert the SD card into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key on the Control Unit to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
EIS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be exported.
6) Press the EXPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Export Flight Plan”.
7) If desired, change the name for the exported file by turning the large FMS Knob to the left to highlight the
name, then use the small and large FMS knobs to enter the new name, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the export.
9) Press the ENT Key to confirm the export.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Stored Flight Plan to be Exported &
Exported Flight Plan Name
APPENDICES
Import/Export Softkeys
Export Successful
Figure 5-59 Flight Plan Export
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
211
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Adding Waypoints to an Existing Flight Plan
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose the flight plan, select the
desired point of insertion, enter the waypoint, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. Flight plans
are limited to 99 waypoints (including waypoints within airways and procedures). If the number of waypoints
in the flight plan exceeds 99, the message “Flight plan is full. Remove unnecessary waypoints.” appears and the
new waypoint(s) are not added to the flight plan.
Stored Flight Plan Selected
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
- Memory Slot
- Comment
- Procedure Identifier
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
Softkeys
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-60 Stored Flight Plan Page
INDEX
Flight Plan Full Message
Figure 5-61 Active Flight Plan Page - FPL Full
212
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Adding a waypoint to a stored flight plan:
1) On the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select “EDIT” and press
the ENT Key. The Stored Flight Plan Page is displayed.
4) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly in front of the
highlighted waypoint.
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city of the new waypoint.
EIS
6) Press the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan.
Note: If the identifier entered in the Waypoint Information Window has duplicates, a Duplicate Waypoint
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Window is displayed. Use the FMS Knob to select the correct waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-62 Duplicate Waypoints Window
Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
APPENDICES
3) Select the point in the flight plan before which to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly
in front of the highlighted waypoint.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, or airway waypoints).
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
213
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating and adding user waypoints to the active flight plan:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Management
2) Select the LD WPT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The user
waypoint is created with a name of USRxxx (using the next available in sequence) and is added to the end of
the active flight plan.
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function on the Active Flight Plan Page and pan to the map location
of the desired user waypoint.
Adding Airways to a Flight Plan
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Airways can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose a flight plan (add the desired
airway entry point if not already in the flight plan), select the waypoint after the desired airway entry point,
select the airway, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. An airway can only be loaded if there is a
waypoint in the flight plan that is part of the desired airway and is not part of an arrival or approach procedure.
The G1000 also anticipates the desired airway and exit point based on loaded flight plan waypoints.
Airway Entry Waypoint
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Airway
Airways Available at TOP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airway Waypoint
Sequence
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Preview of
Selected Airway
APPENDICES
Figure 5-63 Select Airway Page - Selecting Airway
Adding an airway to a flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
INDEX
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint after the desired airway entry point. If this waypoint is not
a valid airway entry point, a valid entry point should be entered at this time.
214
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Turn the small FMS Knob one click clockwise and select the LD AIRWY Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select “Load Airway”. The Select Airway Page is displayed. The LD AIRWY Softkey or the “Load Airway” menu
item is available only when a valid airway entry waypoint has been chosen (the waypoint ahead of the cursor
position).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key. Low altitude airways are
shown first in the list, followed by “all” altitude airways, and then high altitude airways.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is
highlighted.
7) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway inserted.
EIS
Airway Entry Waypoint
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected Airway
Selected Exit Point
Preview of
Selected Airway
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airway Exit Points
Available
Selected Airway Exit
Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-64 Select Airway Page - Selecting Exit Point
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
215
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Inserted Airway Header
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
- Airway Identifier: [airway
identifier].[exit waypoint identifier]
(e.g., V4.SLN)
Figure 5-65 Active Flight Plan Page - Airway Inserted
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Restrictions on Adding Airways
Some airways have directional restrictions on all or part of the route. For example, Airway “A2” in Europe
has a directional restriction over the whole route such that it can be flown only in the direction MTD-ABBBNE-DEVAL.
AFCS
Airway “UR975” in North Africa has more complicated directional restrictions within the list of airway
waypoints AMANO, VAKOR, LIBRO, NELDA, DIRKA, GZO, KOSET, and SARKI:
• Starting from AMANO, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
• Starting from SARKI, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Between NELDA and GZO, the airway can be flown in either direction.
In the US, airways that are “one-way” for specified hours of operation are not uncommon. These airways
are always bidirectional in the G1000 database.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The system only allows correct airway sequences to be inserted. If the pilot subsequently inverts the flight
plan, the system inverts the airway waypoint sequence and removes the airway header.
216
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Adding Procedures to a Stored Flight Plan
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 allows the pilot to insert pre-defined instrument procedures from the navigation database into a
flight plan. The procedures are designed to facilitate routing of traffic leaving an airport (departure), arriving at
an airport (arrival), and landing at an airport (approach). See the procedures section for more details.
Flight Plan Name
EIS
Flight Plan Waypoint
List
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Softkeys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Load Departure Load Arrival Load Approach Activate Flight Plan
Figure 5-66 Stored Flight Plan Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
217
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Departure (DP)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can
be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Departure Airport
EIS
Selected
Departure
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Departures Available at
KMKC
Preview of
Selected
Departure
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Departure Waypoint
Sequence
Figure 5-67 Departure Loading Page - Selecting the Departure
AFCS
Loading a departure procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘EDIT FLIGHT PLAN’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Select the LD DP Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Departure”, and press the ENT Key. The
Departure Loading Page is displayed.
4) Select a departure. Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
5) Select a transition for the selected departure. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway served by the selected departure, if required. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected departure procedure.
218
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Departure Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Departure
Selected Runway
Preview of
Selected
Departure
Selected Transition
Departure Transition Points
Available
EIS
Selected
Departure End
Point
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-68 Departure Loading Page - Selecting Transition
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inserted Departure Header
AFCS
- Departure Identifier: [departure
airport]-[departure runway].
[departure transition].
[departure end point]
(e.g., KMKC-ALL.WLDCT2.SLN)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-69 Stored Flight Plan Page - Departure Inserted
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
219
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Arrival (STAR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) is loaded at the destination airport in the flight plan. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Destination Airport
Selected Arrival
EIS
Arrivals Available at KCOS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected Runway
Arrival Waypoint Sequence
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of
Selected Arrival
Figure 5-70 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Arrival
AFCS
Loading an arrival procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘EDIT FLIGHT PLAN’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Select the LD STAR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Arrival”, and press the ENT Key. The Arrival
Loading Page is displayed.
4) Select an arrival. Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
5) Select a transition for the selected arrival. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway served by the selected arrival, if required. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected arrival procedure.
220
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Destination Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Arrival
Selected Transition
Transitions Available with
DBRY1
EIS
Arrival Waypoint Sequence
Preview of
Selected Arrival
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-71 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inserted Arrival Header
AFCS
- Arrival Identifier:
[arrival airport]-[arrival transition].
[arrival].[arrival runway]
(e.g., KCOS-TBE.DBRY1.ALL)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-72 Stored Flight Plan Page - Arrival Inserted
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
221
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Approach (APPR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has an approach available. Only one
approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route for a selected approach is defined by designating
transition waypoints.
EIS
Destination Airport
Selected
Approach
Approaches Available at
KCOS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Barometric Minimum
Preview of
Selected
Approach
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
Figure 5-73 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Approach
AFCS
Loading an approach procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘EDIT FLIGHT PLAN’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Select the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Approach”, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed.
4) Select an approach. Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
5) Select a transition for the selected approach. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
6) Press the ENT Key to load the selected approval procedure.
222
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Destination Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Approach
Selected Transition
Transitions Available with
Selected Approach
EIS
Preview of
Selected
Approach
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Load Approach?
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-74 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Inserted Approach Header
- Approach Identifier: [approach
airport].[runway and approach type]
(e.g., KCOS-RNAV 35RGPS LPV)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-75 Stored Flight Plan Page - Approach Inserted
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
223
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Flight Plan Storage
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 can store up to 99 flight plans, numbered 1 through 99. The active flight plan is erased when
the G1000 is powered off or when another flight plan is activated. Details about each stored flight plan can be
viewed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page and on the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Viewing information about a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
EIS
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
4) The Flight Plan Information is displayed showing departure, destination, total distance, and enroute safe altitude
information for the selected Flight Plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Select the EDIT Softkey to open the Stored Flight Plan Page and view the waypoints in the flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the FMS Knob to exit the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Flight Plan Name
(Comment)
Selected Flight Plan
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan
Stored Flight Plan Info
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Departure Airport
- Destination Airport
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
Stored FPL Editing
Softkeys
APPENDICES
Figure 5-76 Stored Flight Plan Information
Storing an active flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Page or the Active Flight Plan Window:
1) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
2) Highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The flight plan is stored in the next available position in the flight
plan list on the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
224
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Sort Flight Plans
The stored flight plans can be sorted alphanumerically based on the flight plan name (comment) assigned
to each flight plan.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Sorting by flight plan name (comment):
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Sort By Comment’ and press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed.
EIS
4 ) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to change flight plan ordering. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Activate a Flight Plan
Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with the flight plan being activated.
Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint order and activates it.
Activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Select the ACTIVE Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The
‘Activate Stored Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Select the INVERT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key.
The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
Copy a Flight Plan
APPENDICES
The G1000 allows copying a flight plan into a new flight plan memory slot, allowing editing, etc., without
affecting the original flight plan. This can be used to duplicate an existing stored flight plan for use in creating
a modified version of the original stored flight plan.
Copying a stored flight plan on the MFD:
INDEX
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
225
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
3) Select the COPY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Copy Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The
‘Copy to Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Delete a Stored Flight Plan
Individual or all stored flight plans can be deleted from the G1000 memory.
Deleting a stored flight plan:
EIS
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Select the DELETE Softkey; press the CLR Key; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press
the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Note: The option to delete all stored flight plans is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all stored flight plans:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Delete All’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all flight plans. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Flight Plan Editing
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The active flight plan or any stored flight plan can be edited. The edits made to the active flight plan affect
navigation as soon as they are entered.
Deleting the Active Flight Plan
The G1000 allows deleting an active flight plan. Deleting the active flight plan suspends navigation by the
G1000.
APPENDICES
Deleting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete all waypoints in flight
plan?’ window is displayed.
INDEX
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the active flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
226
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Deleting Flight Plan Items
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Individual waypoints, entire airways, and entire procedures can be deleted from a flight plan. Some waypoints
in the final approach segment (such as the FAF or MAP) can not be deleted individually. Attempting to delete
a waypoint that is not allowed results in a window displaying ‘Invalid flight plan modification.’
Deleting an individual waypoint from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint to be deleted.
EIS
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire airway from the active flight plan:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the white header of the airway to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name>?’ window is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the white header of the procedure to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
227
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Deleting an individual waypoint from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint to be deleted.
EIS
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire airway from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the airway to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name>?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
AFCS
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire procedure from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
APPENDICES
4) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the procedure to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
228
Or:
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
EIS
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing Flight Plan Comments (Names)
The comment field (or name) of each flight plan can be changed to something that is useful for identification
and sorting.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Changing the active flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
3) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Changing a stored flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
AFCS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
229
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Along Track Offsets
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A waypoint having an “along track offset” distance from an existing waypoint can be entered into a flight plan.
Along track offset waypoints lie along the path of the existing flight plan, and can be used to make the system
reach a specified altitude before or after reaching the specified flight plan waypoint. Offset distances can be
entered from 1 to 99 nm in increments of 1 nm. Entering a negative offset distance results in an along track
offset waypoint inserted before the selected waypoint, whereas entering a positive offset distance results in an
along track offset waypoint inserted after the selected waypoint. Multiple offset waypoints are allowed.
EIS
A waypoint must be adjacent to its parent waypoint in the flight plan, so the system limits the along-track
distance to less than the length of the leg before or after the selected waypoint. If the selected waypoint is the
active waypoint, the distance is limited to less than the distance to go to the active waypoint. Assigning an along
track offset to a leg with indeterminate length is not permitted. An along track offset is not allowed at or after
the final approach fix of an approach.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
An along track offset distance cannot be modified once entered. If the along track offset distance must be
changed, the existing along track offset waypoint must be deleted and a new one created with the new offset
distance.
Along Track Offset
Waypoint and Distance
from Flight Plan Waypoint
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Along Track
Offset Waypoint
and Distance
APPENDICES
Figure 5-77 Along Track Offset
Entering an along track offset distance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
INDEX
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the along track offset.
3) Select the ATK OFST Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create ATK Offset Waypoint’, and
press the ENT Key.
230
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Enter a positive or negative offset distance in the range of +/- 1 to 99 nm (limited by leg distances).
5) Press the ENT Key to create the offset waypoint.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Parallel Track
The Parallel Track (PTK) feature allows creation of a parallel course offset of 1 to 50 nm left or right of the
current flight plan. When Parallel Track is activated, the course line drawn on the map pages shows the parallel
course, and waypoint names have a lower case “p” placed after the identifier.
EIS
Using direct-to, loading an approach, a holding pattern, or editing and activating the flight plan automatically
cancels Parallel Track. Parallel Track is also cancelled if a course change occurs greater than 120° or the parallel
tracks overlap as a result of the course change.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Note: Vertical navigation is unavailable while the Parallel Track feature is active.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Active Flight Plan prior to Parallel Track
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting Parallel
Track
AFCS
Figure 5-78 Active Flight Plan Window - Selecting Parallel Track
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Activating parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
APPENDICES
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with the direction field highlighted.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Left’ or ‘Right’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘DISTANCE’ field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter a distance from 1-99 nm and press the ENT Key. ‘ACTIVATE PARALLEL
TRACK’ is highlighted.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
5) Press the ENT Key to activate parallel track. Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to cancel the parallel track
activation.
231
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Offset Direction
Offset Distance
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activation Prompt
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-79 Parallel Track Window
Parallel Track Waypoints
- TIFTO-p
- TOP-p
- ULNAZ-p
- ...
- LAA-p
Activating Parallel Track
affects the entire active
flight segment (e.g.,
enroute)
AFCS
Parallel Track
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Original Track
Figure 5-80 Parallel Track Active
INDEX
If the parallel track proposed by the offset direction and distance is not allowed by the system, the activation
prompt is displayed, but disabled. Parallel Track cannot be activated if a course is set using direct-to or if the
active leg is the first leg of the departure procedure. Attempting to activate parallel track with these conditions
results in the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable Invalid Route Geometry’. If an approach leg is active the status
232
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track with the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable
Approach Leg Active’. If the offset direction and distance results in an unreasonable route geometry the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because of invalid geometry.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Subdued Prompt
(Unavailable)
EIS
Unavailable Status
Invalid
Geometry
Approach
Active
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-81 Parallel Track Unavailable
If the active leg is not a track between two fixes (TF) or a course to a fix (DF) leg, the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because parallel track is not available for the
active leg type.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Offset Direction &
Distance Subdued
(Unavailable)
AFCS
Cancel Prompt
Active Status
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-82 Cancelling Parallel Track
Cancelling parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
INDEX
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with ‘CANCEL PARALLEL TRACK?’ highlighted.
3) Press the ENT Key.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
233
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Activating a Flight Plan Leg
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Management
Activating a flight plan leg:
The G1000 allows selection of a highlighted leg as the “active leg” (the flight plan leg which is currently
used for navigation guidance).
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the destination waypoint for the desired leg.
EIS
3) Select the ACT LEG Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Leg’, and press the ENT Key.
A confirmation window is displayed with ‘ACTIVATE’ highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan leg. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press
the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Selected Destination
Waypoint
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Current
Active Leg
Activate Leg Softkey
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-83 Active Flight Plan Page - Selecting the Leg Destination Waypoint
234
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
New Active
Flight Plan Leg
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Confirmation Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-84 Active Flight Plan Page - New Active Leg
Inverting a Flight Plan
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Any flight plan may be inverted (reversed) for navigation back to the original departure point.
Inverting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. An ‘Invert Active Flight Plan?’
confirmation window is displayed.
3) Select ‘OK’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the active flight plan. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be inverted.
4) Select the INVERT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Invert & Activate Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key.
An ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ confirmation window is displayed.
INDEX
5) Select ‘OK’.
6) Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the stored flight plan. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
235
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Flight Plan Views
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Information about flight plans can be viewed in more than one way. The active flight plan can be configured
to show cumulative distance over the length of the flight plan or the distance for each leg of the flight plan;
and the active flight plan can be viewed in a narrow or wide view. In the wide view, additional information is
displayed: Fuel Remaining (FUEL REM), Estimated Time Enroute (ETE), Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA), and
Bearing to the waypoint (BRG).
Switching between leg-to-leg waypoint distance and cumulative waypoint distance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
EIS
2) Select the VIEW Softkey to display the CUM and LEG-LEG Softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Select the CUM Softkey to view cumulative waypoint distance, or select the LEG-LEG Softkey to view leg-to-leg
waypoint distance.
4) Select the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
Active Flight Plan Cumulative Distance
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Active Flight Plan Leg to Leg Distance
WIDE Softkey, NARROW Softkey, LEG-LEG Softkey, CUM Softkey
APPENDICES
Figure 5-85 Active Flight Plan - Leg to Leg vs. Cumulative Distance
Switching between wide and narrow view:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
INDEX
2) Select the VIEW Softkey to display the WIDE and NARROW Softkeys.
3) Select the WIDE Softkey to display the wide view, or select the NARROW Softkey to display the narrow view.
4) Select the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
236
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Active Flight Plan Narrow View
Active Flight Plan Wide View
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
WIDE Softkey, NARROW Softkey, LEG-LEG Softkey, CUM Softkey
Figure 5-86 Active Flight Plan - Wide vs. Narrow View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Collapsing Airways
The G1000 allows airways on the active flight plan to be collapsed or expanded from the Active Flight Plan
Page/Window. When airways have been collapsed, it is indicated on the airway heading.
AFCS
When airways are collapsed, leg-to-leg computed values such as DIS or ETE shown for the exit waypoint
reflects the total of all the legs on the airway that have been hidden in the collapsed display. The DTK value is
inhibited because it is not usable in this context.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Active Flight Plan Page always keeps the following three waypoints visible: “From” waypoint, “To”
waypoint, and the “Next” waypoint. To prevent one or more of these waypoints from being hidden in a collapsed
airway segment, the airway segment that contains either the “To” or the “Next” waypoint is automatically
expanded. When an airway is loaded, airways are automatically expanded to facilitate flight plan review.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
237
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Q3.FEPOT Airway
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Collapsed View
Expanded View
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-87 Expanded/Collapsed Airways
Collapsing/expanding the airways in the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Collapse Airways’ or ‘Expand Airways’, and press the ENT Key. The airways are
collapsed/expanded.
Closest Point of FPL
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a reference
waypoint, and creates a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen reference
waypoint.
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Closest Point of FPL’’, and press the ENT Key. A window appears with the
reference waypoint field highlighted.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and press the ENT Key. The G1000 displays the bearing (BRG) and
distance (DIS) to the closest point along the flight plan to the selected reference waypoint and creates a user
waypoint at this location. The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the reference
waypoint.
238
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.7 Vertical Navigation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: The G1000 supports vertical navigation for all lateral leg types except for CA, CI, FA, FM, HA, HM, PI,
VA, VD, VI, VR, and VM. Vertical constraints are not retained in stored flight plans.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
EIS
The G1000 system Vertical Navigation (VNV) feature provides vertical profile guidance during the enroute
and teminal phases of flight. Guidance based on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan or to a
direct-to waypoint is provided. It includes vertical path guidance to a descending path, which is provided as a
linear deviation from the desired path. The desired path is defined by a line joining two waypoints with specified
altitudes or as a vertical angle from a specified waypoint/altitude. The vertical waypoints are integrated into the
active flight plan. Both manual and autopilot-coupled guidance are supported.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Enabled (valid data)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Disabled (fields dashed)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ENBL VNV Softkey
CNCL VNV Softkey
Figure 5-88 Enabling/Disabling Vertical Navigation
APPENDICES
Enabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
2) Select the ENBL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Enable VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is enabled, and vertical guidance begins with the waypoint shown in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box
(defaults first waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude enabled for vertical navigation (e.g., HABUK)).
239
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Disabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the CNCL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Cancel VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is disabled.
EIS
Canceling vertical navigation results in vertical deviation (V DEV), vertical speed required (VS REQ), and time
to top of descent/bottom of descent (TIME TO TOD/BOD) going invalid. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)
and Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) on the PFD are removed, and the V DEV, VS REQ, and TIME TO
TOD items displayed in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box are dashed. VNV remains disabled until manually
enabled. Vertical guidance in reversionary mode can only be enabled for a direct-to waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The G1000 allows a vertical navigation direct-to to any waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude
constraint “designated” for vertical guidance. Selecting the VNV Direct-to Softkey on the Active Flight Plan Page
allows the flight plan to be flown, while vertical guidance based on the altitude constraint at the VNV direct-to
waypoint is provided. The altitude change begins immediately and is spread along the flight plan from current
position to the vertical direct-to waypoint, not just along the leg for the direct-to waypoint. A direct-to with
altitude constraint activated by pressing the Direct-to Key also provides vertical guidance, but would bypass
flight plan waypoints between the current position in the flight plan and the direct-to waypoint. A top of descent
(TOD) point is computed based on the default flight path angle; descent begins once the TOD is reached.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
After VNV Direct-to
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Prior to VNV Direct-to
VNV Direct-To Softkey
VNV PROF Softkey
INDEX
Figure 5-89 Vertical Navigation Direct-To
240
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Activating a vertical navigation direct-to:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: The selected waypoint must have a designated altitude constraint (light blue number) to be used. If
not, the first waypoint in the flight plan with a designated altitude constraint is selected.
3) Select the VNV Direct-To Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘VNV Direct-To’, and press the ENT Key.
An ‘Activate vertical Direct-to to: NNNNNFT at XXXXXX?’ confirmation window is displayed.
EIS
4) Press the ENT Key. Vertical guidance begins to the altitude constraint for the selected waypoint.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The vertical navigation profile can be modified by directly entering a vertical speed target (VS TGT) and/or flight
path angle (FPA) in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box.
Modifying the VS TGT and FPA:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Select the VNV PROF Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select VNV Profile Window’, and press the
ENT Key. The cursor is now located in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box.
3) Turn the FMS Knobs as needed to edit the values.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude Constraints
AFCS
The G1000 system can use altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints to give guidance for vertical
navigation. These altitudes are, depending on the specific instance, manually entered or retrieved from the
published altitudes in the navigation database. The navigation database only contains altitudes for procedures
that call for “Cross at” altitudes. If the procedure states “Expect to cross at,” then the altitude is not in the
database. In this case the altitude may be entered manually.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displayed Text
Examples
Cross AT
or ABOVE
5,000 ft
Large White Text
Large Light Blue Text
APPENDICES
Cross AT
2,300 ft
Small Light Blue Text
Cross AT
or BELOW
3,000 ft
Small Light Blue
Subdued Text
INDEX
Altitude Constraint
Examples
Small White Text with
Altitude Restriction Bar
Figure 5-90 Waypoint Altitude Constraints
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
241
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
White Text
Light Blue Text
Light Blue Subdued Text
Large Altitude calculated by the system
Text estimating the altitude of the aircraft as
it passes over the navigation point. This
altitude is provided as a reference and is
not designated to be used in determining
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude has been entered manually.
Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude does not match the published
altitude in navigation database or no
published altitude exists.
The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition
Small
Text
Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude has been retrieved from the
navigation database or has been entered
manually and matches a published
altitude in the navigation database.
The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition
Altitude is not designated to be used in
determining vertical speed and deviation
guidance. Altitude has been retrieved
from the navigation database and is
provided as a reference.
Table 5-8 Altitude Constraint Size and Color Coding
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitudes associated with arrival and approach procedures are “auto-designated”. This means the system
automatically uses the altitudes loaded with the arrival or approach for giving vertical speed and deviation
guidance. Note that these altitudes are displayed as blue text up to, but not including the FAF. The FAF is
always a “reference only” altitude and cannot be designated, unless the selected approach does not provide
vertical guidance. In this case, the FAF altitude can be designated.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitudes that have been designated for use in vertical guidance can be “un-designated” using the CLR Key.
The altitude is now displayed only as a reference. It is not used to give vertical guidance. Other displayed
altitudes may change due to re-calculations or be rendered invalid as a result of manually changing an altitude
to a non-designated altitude.
Designating a waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter editing mode.
4) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in blue, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Designating a procedure waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
APPENDICES
3) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in blue, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
INDEX
Altitude constraints are displayed and entered in feet mean sea level (MSL) values to the nearest hundred. An
altitude constraint in feet above ground level (AGL) format is supported for airports. When a database altitude
restriction is displayed, the G1000 allows entry of a different altitude when creating a waypoint, effectively
overriding the database restriction (only before the FAF). When a database altitude restriction of type “AT or
ABOVE” or “AT or BELOW” is activated, the system uses the “AT” portion of the restriction to define the vertical
profile.
242
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
An altitude constraint is invalid if:
• Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Meeting the constraint requires the maximum flight path angle (6° down) or maximum vertical speed (-6000 fpm) to be exceeded
• The altitude constraint results in a TOD behind the aircraft present position
• The constraint is within a leg type for which altitude constraints are not supported
• The altitude constraint is added to the FAF of an approach that provides vertical guidance (i.e., ILS or GPS
WAAS approach)
EIS
• The altitude constraint is added to a waypoint past the FAF.
Entering/modifiying an altitude constraint:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Enter an altitude constraint value using the FMS Knobs. To enter altitudes as a flight level, turn the small
FMS Knob counter-clockwise past zero or clockwise past 9 on the first character, and the system automatically
changes to show units of Flight Level. Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to highlight the first zero and enter
the three digit flight level.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude constraints can be modified or deleted after having been added to the flight plan. In the event
an altitude constraint is deleted and the navigation database contains an altitude restriction for the lateral
waypoint, the G1000 displays the altitude restriction from the database provided no predicted altitude
can be provided. The G1000 also provides a way to reinstate a published altitude constraint that has been
edited.
AFCS
Deleting an altitude constraint provided by the navigation database:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove VNV altitude constraint?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting an altitude constraint that has been manually entered:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
4) Select ‘REMOVE’ and press the ENT Key. The manually entered altitude is deleted (it is replaced by a system
calculated altitude, if available).
243
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Reverting a manually entered altitude constraint back to the navigation database value:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘REVERT’ and press the ENT Key. The altitude is changed to the navigation database value.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
Modifying a system calculated altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. An ‘Edit or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘EDIT’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Edit the value using the FMS Knobs, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
244
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.8 Procedures
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 can access the whole range of instrument procedures available. Departures (DPs), arrivals (STARs),
and non-precision and precision approaches (APPRs) are stored within the database and can be loaded using any
Procedures (PROC) Key.
EIS
The selected procedure for the departure or arrival airport is added to the active flight plan. No waypoints are
required to be in the active flight plan to load procedures; however, if the departure and arrival airport are already
loaded, the procedure loading window defaults to the appropriate airport, saving some time selecting the correct
airport on the Procedure Loading Page. Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate”
is given. “Loading” adds the approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation
guidance. This allows continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps
the procedure available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds
the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Departures
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can be
loaded at a time in a flight plan. If a departure is loaded when another departure is already in the active flight
plan, the new departure replaces the previous departure. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
Loading a Departure into the Active Flight Plan
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Loading a departure into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT DEPARTURE’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Departure Loading Page is displayed.
AFCS
4) Select a departure from the list and press the ENT Key.
5) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.
7) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
245
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Available Procedure Actions
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Departure Airport
Loaded Procedures
Departure Choices
Departure Preview
Figure 5-91 Departure Selection
Loaded Departure
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Departure
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
INDEX
Figure 5-92 Departure Loading
246
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing available departures at an airport:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), select the DP Softkey. The Departure Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Departure. The departure is previewed on
the map.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available departures. Press the ENT Key to select the departure. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The departure is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Transition box. The departure is previewed on the map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The departure is previewed on the map.
7) Select the INFO Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Removing a Departure from the Active Flight Plan
When plans change while flying IFR, departures can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing a departure procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Departure’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
AFCS
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the departure header in the active flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
247
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Arrivals
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in the active
flight plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
Loading an Arrival into the Active Flight Plan
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
EIS
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT ARRIVAL’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Select an arrival from the list and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key. The Arrival Loading Page is displayed.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure.
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
7) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.
Destination Airport
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Available Procedure Actions
Loaded Procedures
Arrival Preview
Arrival Choices
INDEX
Figure 5-93 Arrival Selection
248
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selected Arrival
Loaded Arrival
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
Figure 5-94 Arrival Loading
Viewing available arrivals at an airport:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), select the STAR Softkey. The Arrival Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport Information Page.
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
AFCS
3) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Arrival. The arrival is previewed on the
map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available arrivals. Press the ENT Key to select the arrival. The cursor moves
to the Transition box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
APPENDICES
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
7) Select the INFO Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
249
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Removing an Arrival from the Active Flight Plan
When plans change while flying IFR, arrivals can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Removing an arrival from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Arrival’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
EIS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the arrival header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Approaches
NOTE: If certain GPS parameters (WAAS, RAIM, etc.) are not available, some published approach procedures
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
for the desired airport may not be displayed in the list of available approaches.
AFCS
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available, and provides guidance
for non-precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach procedures.
Only one approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an approach is loaded when another approach
is already in the active flight plan, the new approach replaces the previous approach. The route is defined by
selection of an approach and the transition waypoints.
APPENDICES
When selecting an approach, a “GPS” designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure
can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures do not have this designation, meaning the GPS
receiver can be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. If the GPS receiver cannot be used for
primary guidance, the appropriate navigation receiver must be used for the selected approach (e.g., VOR or
ILS). The final course segment of ILS approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to
the proper frequency and selecting that NAV receiver on the CDI.
INDEX
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate” is given. “Loading” adds the
approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This allows
continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the procedure
available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds the
procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.
The G1000 WAAS GPS allows for flying LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, and LPV approaches according to the published
chart. LNAV+V is a standard LNAV approach with advisory vertical guidance provided for assistance in
250
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
maintaining a constant vertical glidepath similar to an ILS glideslope on approach. This guidance is displayed
on the G1000 PFD in the same location as the ILS glideslope using a magenta diamond. In all cases where
LNAV+V is indicated by the system during an approach, LNAV minima are used. The active approach type
is annunciated on the HSI as shown in the following table:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Example on HSI
Approach Type
- LNAV
- LNAV+V
- L/VNAV
- LPV
EIS
HSI Annunciation
Description
LNAV
GPS approach using published LNAV minima
LNAV+V
GPS approach using published LNAV minima.
Advisory vertical guidance is provided
L/VNAV
GPS approach using published LNAV/VNAV
minima
LPV
GPS approach using published LPV minima
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 5-9 Approach Types
Loading an Approach into the Active Flight Plan
Loading an approach into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT APPROACH’, and press the ENT Key. The Approach Loading Page is displayed.
3) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
4) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Minimums
a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘RAD ALT’ (optional), and press the ENT Key.
Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
AFCS
b) To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the arrival procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED
FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV
receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
251
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Destination Airport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Available Procedure Actions
Loaded Procedures
Approach Preview
Approach Choices
Figure 5-95 Approach Selection
Loaded Approach
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Approach
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys LOAD or ACTIVATE? Annunciation
INDEX
Figure 5-96 Approach Loading
252
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing available approaches at an airport:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), select the APR Softkey. The Departure
Information Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Approach. The approach is previewed on
the map.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available approaches. Press the ENT Key to select the approach. The
cursor moves to the Runway box. The approach is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Transition box. The approach is previewed on the map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The approach is previewed on the map.
7) Select the INFO Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the Nearest Airport Page:
1) Select the Nearest Airports Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired nearest airport. The airport is
previewed on the map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Select the APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Approach Window’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired approach.
5) Select the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Load Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed with the transitions field highlighted.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired transition, and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
5) Minimums
a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘RAD ALT’ (optional), and press the ENT Key.
Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
b) To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key. The ‘LOAD?’ field is highlighted.
APPENDICES
8) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the arrival procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure. The system continues
navigating the current flight plan until the approach is activated. When GPS is not approved for the selected
final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the
approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
253
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Activating an Approach
A previously loaded approach can be activated from the Procedures Window.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activating a previously loaded approach:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed with ‘Activate Approach’ highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
EIS
In many cases, it may be easiest to “load” the full approach while still some distance away, enroute to the
destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, use the steps above to select ‘Activate Vector-To-Final’ — which
makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active.
Activating a previously loaded approach with vectors to final:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
2) Highlight ‘ACTIVATE VECTOR-TO-FINAL’ and press the ENT Key.
Loading and activating an approach using the MENU Key:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) From the Approach Loading Page, press the MENU Key. The page menu is displayed with ‘Load & Activate
Approach’ highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key. When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT
APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to
a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Removing an Approach from the Active Flight Plan
When plans change while flying IFR, approaches can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing an approach from the active flight plan:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the approach header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
254
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Missed Approach
Activating a missed approach in the active flight plan:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the PROC Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE MISSED APPROACH’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The aircraft automatically sequences to the MAHP.
Or:
Press the Go-Around Button.
EIS
Course To Altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6368ft’) is
not part of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along
the runway centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded.
This altitude is provided by Jeppesen, and may be below, equal to, or above the published minimums for
this approach. In this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,368 feet) after crossing
the MAP, a direct-to is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 6,368 feet is
reached. After reaching 6,368 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case MOGAL).
If the aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to the
published fix (MOGAL) to begin the missed approach procedure.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure.
For example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach
Hold Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the
aircraft altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg
when the missed approach procedure is activated.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Course to Altitude Leg
APPENDICES
Figure 5-97 Course to Altitude
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
255
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
5.9 Trip Planning
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 allows the pilot to view trip planning information, fuel information, and other information for
a specified flight plan or flight plan leg based on automatic data, or based on manually entered data. Weight
planning is also available, based on manually entered fuel data and the active flight plan (to estimate remaining
fuel).
Trip Planning
EIS
All of the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of the statistics is done on the Trip Planning Page
located in the AUX Page Group.
Selected Flight Plan Segment
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- FPL Number/Cumulative Legs (CUM or REM) or Leg Number (NN)
- Waypoints Defining Selected Flight Plan/Flight Plan Leg
Trip Planning Page Mode
- Automatic/Manual
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan/
Flight Plan Leg
Trip Input Data (sensor/pilot)
- Departure Time (local)
- Ground Speed
- Fuel Flow
- Fuel On Board Aircraft
- Calibrated Airspeed
- Indicated Altitude
- Barometric Pressure
- Total Air Temperature
Trip Statistics
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Desired Track Distance Est. Time Enroute Est. Time of Arrival Enroute Safe Altitude Sunrise Time (local) Sunset Time (local) -
Other Statistics
- Density Altitude
- True Airspeed (TAS)
Fuel Statistics
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Efficiency Total Endurance Remaining Fuel Remaining Endurance Fuel Required Total Range -
Softkeys
- Automatic/Manual Page Mode
- Flight Plan/Waypoint Mode
APPENDICES
Figure 5-98 Trip Planning Page
The trip planning inputs are based on sensor inputs (automatic page mode) or on pilot inputs (manual page
mode). Some additional explanation of the sources for some of the inputs is as follows:
INDEX
• Departure time (DEP TIME) - This defaults to the current time in automatic page mode. The computations
are from the aircraft present position, so the aircraft is always just departing.
256
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• Calibrated airspeed (CALIBRATED AS) - The primary source is from the air data system, and the secondary
source of information is GPS ground speed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Indicated altitude (IND ALTITUDE) - The primary source is the barometric altitude, and the secondary source
of information is GPS altitude.
Trip Statistics
The trip statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs.
EIS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and the entire flight plan (CUM) selected,
the waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the selected flight plan.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and the remaining flight plan (REM)
selected, the ‘from’ waypoint is the present position of the aircraft and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the
active flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
‘from’ waypoint is the current aircraft position and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the selected leg.
In waypoint (WPTS) mode these are manually selected waypoints (if there is an active flight plan, these
default to the endpoints of the active leg).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has already
been flown.
• Desired Track (DTK) - DTK is shown as nnn° and is the desired track between the selected waypoints. It is dashed unless only a single leg is selected.
• Distance (DIS) - The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9, and in whole units up to 9999. AFCS
• Estimated time enroute (ETE) - ETE is shown as hours:minutes until less than an hour, then it is shown
as minutes:seconds.
• Estimated time of arrival (ETA) - ETA is shown as hours:minutes and is the local time at the
destination.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- If in waypoint mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the departure time.
- If a flight plan other than the active flight plan is selected it shows the ETA by adding to the departure
time all of the ETEs of the legs up to and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected,
then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.
APPENDICES
- If the active flight plan is selected the ETA reflects the current position of the aircraft and the current
leg being flown. The ETA is calculated by adding to the current time the ETEs of the current leg up to
and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the
last leg of the flight plan was selected.
• Enroute safe altitude (ESA) - The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT
INDEX
• Destination sunrise and sunset times (SUNRISE, SUNSET) - These times are shown as hours:minutes
and are the local time at the destination.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
257
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Fuel Statistics
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The fuel statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs. Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has
already been flown.
• Fuel efficiency (EFFICIENCY) - This value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed by the
current fuel flow.
• Time of fuel endurance (TOTAL ENDUR) - This time is shown as hours:minutes. This value is obtained
by dividing the amount of fuel on board by the current fuel flow.
EIS
• Fuel on board upon reaching end of selected leg (REM FUEL) - This value is calculated by taking the
amount of fuel onboard and subtracting the fuel required for trip.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Fuel endurance remaining at end of selected leg (REM ENDUR) - This value is calculated by subtracting
the time of fuel endurance by the amount of time to go.
• Fuel required for trip (FUEL REQ) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time to go by the fuel
flow.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Total range at entered fuel flow (TOTAL RANGE) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time of fuel
endurance by the ground speed.
Other Statistics
These statistics are calculated based on the system sensor inputs or the manual trip planning inputs.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Density altitude (DENSITY ALT)
• True airspeed (TRUE AIRSPEED)
The pilot may select automatic (AUTO) or manual (MANUAL) page mode, and flight plan (FPL) or waypoint
(WPTS) mode. In automatic page mode, only the FPL, LEG, or waypoint IDs are editable (based on FPL/WPTS
selection).
AFCS
Selected Flight Plan NN -
Selected Leg(s)
00 is Active FPL
01-99 are Stored FPLs
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Starting and Ending Waypoint of
Selected Flight Plan Segment
Stored Flight Plan
- CUM: Beginning to End of FPL
- NN: Beginning to End of Selected Leg
Active Flight Plan
- REM: Pres. Pos. to End of FPL
- NN: Pres. Pos. to End of Selected Leg
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-99 Trip Planning Page - Flight Plan Mode
258
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selected Flight Plan
Selected Leg(s)
Not Available
Not Available
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Starting and Ending Waypoints
Figure 5-100 Trip Planning Page - Waypoint Mode
Selecting automatic or manual page mode:
EIS
Select the AUTO Softkey or the MANUAL Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Auto Mode’ or ‘Manual
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
Selecting flight plan or waypoint mode:
Select the FPL Softkey or the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Flight Plan Mode’ or ‘Waypoints
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting a flight plan and leg for trip statistics:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the flight plan number field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired flight plan number.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CUM’ or ‘REM’. The statistics for each leg can be viewed by turning the
small FMS Knob to select the desired leg. The Inset Map also displays the selected data.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting waypoints for waypoint mode:
1) Select the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Waypoints Mode’, and press the ENT Key. The
cursor is positioned in the waypoint field directly below the FPL field.
2) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint (or select from the Page Menu ‘Set WPT to Present Position’
if that is what is desired), and press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the second waypoint field.
AFCS
3) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint, and press the ENT Key. The statistics for the selected leg
are displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In manual page mode, the other eight trip input data fields must be entered by the pilot, in addition to flight
plan and leg selection.
Entering manual data for trip statistics calculations:
APPENDICES
1) Select the MANUAL Softkey or select ‘Manual Mode’ from the Page Menu, and press the ENT Key. The cursor
may now be positioned in any field in the top right two boxes.
2) Turn the FMS Knobs to move the cursor onto the DEP TIME field and enter the desired value. Press the ENT Key.
The statistics are calculated using the new value and the cursor moves to the next entry field. Repeat until all
desired values have been entered.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
259
Weight Planning
Note: All weight planning page data fields display data rounded to the nearest 10 pounds or 5 kilograms.
Fuel Weight Calculator
A/C Payload Calculator
- Zero Fuel Weight Calculation
- Fuel on Board Entry
- Aircraft Weight Calculation
- Estimated Landing Weight Calculation
- Estimated Landing Fuel Calculation
- Fuel Reserve Entry
- Excess Fuel Calculation
Basic Empty Weight Entry Pilot and Stores Weight Entry Basic Operating Weight Calculation Passenger(s) Weight Entry Cargo Weight Entry Zero Fuel Weight Calculation -
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Empty Weight Softkey
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(selects Basic Empty
Weight)
Entering basic empty weight:
Figure 5-101 Weight Planning Page
AFCS
1) Select the EMPTY WT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Set Basic Empty Weight’, and press the ENT
Key to select the BASIC EMPTY WEIGHT field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the basic empty weight.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Entering a pilot and stores weight:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the ‘PILOT AND STORES’ field.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the pilot and stores weight.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
The basic operating weight is calculated by adding the basic empty weight and the pilot and stores weight.
260
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Entering the number of passengers:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the ‘PASSENGERS #’ field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the number of passengers.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Entering the average passenger weight:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the passenger weight field.
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the average passenger weight.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
The total weight of passengers is calculated by multiplying the number of passengers by the average passenger
weight.
Entering the cargo weight:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the ‘CARGO’ field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the cargo weight.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
The ‘ZERO FUEL WEIGHT’ is calculated by adding the basic empty, pilot and stores, passenger, and cargo
weights.
Entering a fuel on board weight:
AFCS
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the ‘FUEL ON BOARD’ field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the fuel on board.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Entering fuel reserve:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the ‘FUEL RESERVES’ field.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the fuel reserves amount.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
261
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When the aircraft is in the air and a destination waypoint has been entered, the fuel calculations can be
completed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Management
• Estimated landing fuel weight = fuel on board weight - (fuel flow x ETE)
• Estimated landing weight = zero fuel weight + estimated landing fuel weight. • Excess fuel weight = estimated landing fuel weight - fuel reserves weight
If the aircraft is on the ground or a destination waypoint has not been entered, the following fields display
invalid values consisting of six dashes:
EIS
• Estimated landing weight
• Estimated landing fuel weight
• Excess fuel weight
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Weight Caution And Warning Conditions
If the zero fuel weight is greater than the maximum allowable zero fuel weight, then the zero fuel weight is
displayed in amber.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the aircraft weight is greater than the maximum allowable takeoff weight, then the aircraft weight is displayed
in amber.
If the estimated landing weight is greater than the maximum allowable landing weight, then the estimated
landing weight is displayed in amber.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the estimated landing fuel weight is positive, but less than or equal to the fuel reserves weight, the following
values are displayed in amber:
• Estimated fuel at landing weight
• Excess fuel weight
AFCS
If the estimated landing fuel weight is zero or negative, then the following values are displayed in red:
• Estimated fuel at landing weight
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Excess fuel weight
262
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.10 RAIM Prediction
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to calculate
a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nm for oceanic, 2.0 nm for enroute, 1.0 nm for terminal,
and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of flight, RAIM is
available nearly 100% of the time. The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a
specified date and time. RAIM computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival
date and time. Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not
available. RAIM prediction must be initiated manually if there is concern over WAAS coverage at the destination
or some other reason that compromises navigation precision. If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the
final approach course, the approach does not become active. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the
missed approach procedure must be flown.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
RAIM PREDICTION Box
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Prediction Waypoint
- Arrival Time
- Arrival Date
- RAIM Status
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
RAIM Softkey
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
Figure 5-102 RAIM Prediction
APPENDICES
Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
263
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, or airway waypoints).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint; or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.
EIS
Predicting RAIM availability at the aircraft present position:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Set WPT to Present Position’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Status of the RAIM computation for the selected waypoint, time, and date is displayed at the bottom of the
RAIM PREDICTION Box as follows:
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ - RAIM has not been computed.
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’ - RAIM calculation is in progress.
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’ - RAIM is predicted to be available.
AFCS
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’ - RAIM is predicted to be unavailable.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) provides increased navigation accuracy when available. SBAS
can be enabled or disabled manually on the GPS Status Page.
264
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SBAS Status
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SBAS SELECTION Box
- WAAS Enable/Disable
- MSAS Enable/Disable
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
RAIM Softkey
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
Figure 5-103 SBAS Display - Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
265
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Enabling/Disabling SBAS:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘MSAS’ or ‘WAAS’.
3) Press the ENT Key to disable SBAS. Press the ENT Key again to enable SBAS.
EIS
SBAS Status
SBAS SELECTION Box
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- WAAS Enable/Disable
- MSAS Enable/Disable
RAIM Softkey
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-104 SBAS Display - Disabled
266
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.11 Navigating a Flight Plan
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following discussion is an example of navigating a flight plan with the WAAS capable GPS system while the
G1000 provides vertical guidance through descents. A lateral flight plan (LNAV) would be navigated in much the
same way, but would not include vertical guidance when the final approach course is active.
nOTE: The following example flight plan is for instructional purposes only. All database information depicted
should be considered not current.
EIS
The example is a flight plan from KMKC to KCOS filed using the TIFTO2 departure, various Victor Airways,
and the DBRY1 arrival with the transition at TBE. The flight plan includes an enroute altitude of 12,000 feet, an
LPV (WAAS) approach selected for runway 35R, and a missed approach executed at the Missed Approach Point
(MAP). A few enroute changes are demonstrated.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Prior to departure, the TIFTO2 departure, the airways, and the DBRY1 arrival at KCOS are loaded. See the
Procedures section for loading departures and arrivals. Note the magenta arrow in Figure 5-105 indicating the
active departure leg.
After takeoff, ATC assigns a heading of 240º.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Figure 5-105 shows the aircraft on the assigned heading of 240º. ‘TERM’ (Terminal) is the current CDI flight
phase displayed on the HSI indicating 1.0 nm CDI scaling.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-105 Assigned Heading of 240º
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
267
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) ATC now assigns routing to join V4. A heading of 290º is assigned to intercept V4. The aircraft turns to heading
290° as seen in Figure 5-106.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-106 Assigned Heading of 290º
4) Enter V4 into the flight plan.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
268
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
b) The desired entry point for V4 (TOP) must be entered. Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight
plan insertion point (SLN) as shown in Figure 5-107. When the V4 entry point (TOP) is inserted, it is placed
immediately above the highlighted waypoint (SLN).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-107 Begin Adding V4 to the Flight Plan
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. Enter the desired entry point for V4,
Topeka VOR (TOP), as shown in Figure 5-108.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-108 Entering V4 Entry Point
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
269
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
d) Press the ENT Key. TOP is inserted into the flight plan as in Figure 5-109.
Figure 5-109 TOP Inserted into the Flight Plan
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
e) With SLN still highlighted as in Figure 5-109, turn the small FMS Knob clockwise. The Waypoint Information
Page is displayed and the LD AIRWY Softkey is now available.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
f) Select the LD AIRWY Softkey to display the list of available airways for TOP as seen in Figure 5-110.
APPENDICES
Figure 5-110 List of Available Airways for TOP
INDEX
g) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight V4 in the list as seen in Figure 5-110.
270
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
h) Press the ENT Key. The list of available exits for V4 is now displayed as in Figure 5-111.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-111 List of Available Exits for V4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
i) If necessary, turn either FMS Knob to select the desired exit. In this case Salina VOR (SLN) is selected as in
Figure 5-111.
j) Press the ENT Key. The selected airway and exit are displayed, and the prompt “LOAD?” highlighted as in
Figure 5-112.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-112 Ready to Load V4
k) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
271
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
l) V4 is now loaded into the flight plan as shown in Figure 5-113.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-113 V4 is Loaded in the Flight Plan
5) Making V4 the active leg of the flight plan.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ULNAZ. The TO waypoint of the leg is selected in order to activate the
leg.
AFCS
c) Select the ACT LEG Softkey. The confirmation window is now displayed as in Figure 5-114. Note the TOP to
ULNAZ leg is actually part of V4.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-114 Comfirm Active Leg
272
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
d) Verify the displayed leg is the desired leg and press the ENT Key. Note in Figure 5-115, the magenta arrow in
the flight plan window and magenta line on the map indicating V4 is now the active flight plan leg. Note the
phase of flight remained in Terminal (TERM) mode up to this point because a departure leg was active. Since a
leg after the departure is now active, the current CDI flight phase is ENR (Enroute) and CDI scaling has changed
to 2.0 nm.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-115 V4 Now Active Leg
AFCS
6) The aircraft continues on heading 290º. When crosstrack distance is less than 2.0 nm, the XTK disappears from
the HSI and the CDI is positioned on the last dot indicating a 2.0 nm distance from the centerline of the next
course.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
273
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7) As the CDI approaches center, the aircraft turns onto the active leg as seen in Figure 5-116.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-116 Turn on to Active Leg
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
8) At SLN, Victor Airway 244 (V244) is intercepted. Turn prompts are displayed in the PFD Navigation Status Box
as seen in Figure 5-117.
INDEX
Figure 5-117 Turn to Intercept V244
274
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
9) As seen in Figure 5-118, V244 is now the active flight plan leg.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-118 V244 Now Active Leg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
275
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
10) At Lamar VOR (LAA) V263 is intercepted. See Figure 5-119.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-119 WIZGE to LAA Leg Active
11) ATC grants clearance to proceed direct to the OPSHN intersection to begin the arrival procedure. ATC advises
to expect an altitude of 10,000 feet at OPSHN.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to select OPSHN in the flight plan list.
276
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
c) Press the Direct-to (
) Key. The Direct-to Window is now displayed as shown in Figure 5-120.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-120 Direct To OPSHN
d) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the VNV altitude field as shown in Figure 5-121.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-121 Enter VNV Altitude
e) An altitude of 10,000 feet is entered as requested by ATC.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
277
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
f) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the VNV offset field as shown in Figure 5-122.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-122 Enter VNV Offset Distance
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
g) Enter the offset, or distance from the waypoint at which to reach the selected altitude. In this case, three miles
prior to OPSHN is entered. In other words, the G1000 gives vertical guidance so the aircraft arrives at an
altitude of 10,000 feet three miles prior to OPSHN.
278
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
h) Press the ENT Key twice to activate the direct-to. Note, in Figure 5-123, the magenta arrow indicating the directto OPSHN after the offset waypoint for OPSHN. The preceding offset waypoint indicates the offset distance
and altitude that were previously entered. The remaining waypoints in the loaded arrival procedure have no
database specified altitudes, therefore, dashes are displayed. Keep the CDI centered and maintain a track along
the magenta line to OPSHN.
Note the Direct-to waypoint is within the loaded arrival procedure, therefore, phase of flight scaling for the CDI
changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
NOTE: If the loaded arrival procedure has waypoints with altitude constraints retrieved from the database
EIS
to be used as is, the altitude must be manually accepted by placing the cursor over the desired altitude,
then pressing the ENT Key. The altitude is now displayed as light blue meaning it is used by the system to
determine vertical speed and deviation guidance.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-123 Direct-to Active
12) The aircraft is proceeding to OPSHN. The expected approach is the RNAV LPV approach to runway 35R, so it is
selected.
APPENDICES
a) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
279
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) ‘SELECT APPROACH’ should be highlighted as shown in Figure 5-124.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-124 Procedures Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) Press the ENT Key. A list of available approaches for the destination airport is displayed as in Figure 5-125.
APPENDICES
Figure 5-125 List of Available Approaches
INDEX
d) Turn either FMS Knob to select the LPV approach for 35R as shown in Figure 5-125.
280
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
e) Press the ENT Key. A list of available transitions for the selected approach is displayed as in Figure 5-126.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-126 List of Available Transitions
f) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired transition. In this case, the Initial Approach Fix (IAF) at HABUK is
used.
g) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
h) Barometric Minimums
To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’, and press the ENT Key. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
AFCS
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
281
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-127 Barometric Minimums Set
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
i) With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, again press the ENT Key. The selected approach is added to the flight plan as seen
in Figure 5-128.
INDEX
Figure 5-128 Loaded Approach
282
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
13) Note the altitude constraints associated with each of the approach waypoints as seen in Figure 5-129. These
altitudes are loaded from the database and are displayed as light blue text, indicating these values are
“designated” for use in computing vertical deviation guidance.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired altitude.
c) Press the CLR Key.
d) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: To no longer use the displayed altitude for calculating vertical deviation guidance, perform the
following:
After making the altitude “non-designated”, it is displayed as white text.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude constraint values associated with the Final Approach Fix (FAF) and waypoints beyond the FAF cannot be
designated for vertical guidance. These altitude values are always displayed as white text, as in Figure 5-129.
Vertical guidance from the FAF and on to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) is given using the WAAS GPS
altitude source, therefore, the displayed altitude values are for reference only.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-129 Vertical Guidance is Active to the FAF
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
283
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
14) As the aircraft approaches OPSHN, it may be desirable to adjust the speed, or steepness of the upcoming
descent. The default Flight Path Angle (FPA) is -3.5 degrees and a required vertical speed is computed to
maintain the -3.5 FPA. To change the vertical flight path, perform the following steps.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Select the VNV PROF Softkey to place the cursor in the target vertical speed field (VS TGT) as shown in Figure
5-130.
b) At this point, the descent vertical speed can be selected, or the FPA can be selected. Turn the large FMS Knob
to select the desired selection field, then turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired value.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Note the information now displayed in the ‘CURRENT VNV PROFILE’ box. Also, note the offset waypoint (orange
box) and gray circle are now displayed on the map. The gray circle marks the Top of Descent (TOD). In this
example, vertical guidance is provided at the TOD that results in a -3.0 degree FPA descent to an altitude of
10,000 feet upon reaching the offset waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-130 Adjusting the Descent
INDEX
APPENDICES
c) Press the ENT Key.
284
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
15) As seen in Figure 5-131, the aircraft is approaching TOD. Note the target vertical speed required to reach the
selected altitude. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) and the Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) are
now displayed on the PFD as shown in Figure 5-129. When the aircraft is within one minute of the TOD, it is
annunciated as shown in Figure 5-132, and an aural alert ‘Vertical track’ will be heard.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-131 Approaching Top of Descent (TOD)
AFCS
Target Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
APPENDICES
Required Vertical
Speed Indicator
(RVSI)
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
Figure 5-132 VDI & RVSI Upon Reaching Top of Descent (TOD)
285
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
16) Upon reaching TOD, a descent vertical speed is established which places the VSI pointer in line with the RVSI as
shown in Figure 5-133.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Keep Vertical Deviation
Indicator Centered
Align Actual Vertical Speed
with
Required Vertical Speed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-133 VDI & RVSI Showing Correctly Established Descent
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
17) When the aircraft is one minute from the bottom of descent (BOD) it is annunciated as shown in Figure 5-134.
Upon reaching the offset waypoint for OPSHN, the aircraft is at 10,000 feet.
INDEX
Figure 5-134 Approaching Bottom of Descent (BOD) at OPSHN Offset Waypoint
286
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
18) The aircraft is approaching OPSHN. The upcoming turn and next heading are annunciated at the top left of the
PFD as seen in Figure 5-135. Initiate the turn and maneuver the aircraft on a track through the turn radius to
intercept the magenta line for the OPSHN to FSHER leg and center the CDI.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-135 Turn to intercept OPSHN to FSHER Leg
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
287
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
19) After passing OPSHN, the next leg of the arrival turns magenta as shown in Figure 5-136. The magenta arrow
in the flight plan list now indicates the OPSHN to FSHER leg of the arrival procedure is now active.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-136 Tracking the OPSHN to FSHER Leg
20) The flight continues through the arrival procedure to PYNON (see Figure 5-137). At a point 31 nm from the
destination airport, the phase of flight scaling for the CDI changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by
displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
A descent to HABUK is in the next leg. Note the TOD point on the map. Annunciations for the upcoming turn
and descent, as well as the VDI and RVSI, appear on the PFD as the flight progresses.
288
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 5-137 Approaching PYNON
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
289
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
21) Upon passing PYNON the approach procedure automatically becomes active. The approach may be activated
at any point to proceed directly to the IAF. In this example, the aircraft has progressed through the final
waypoint of the arrival and the flight plan has automatically sequenced to the IAF as the active leg, activating
the approach procedure (see Figure 5-138).
Figure 5-138 Approach is Now Active
Note: To manually activate the approach procedure, perform the following steps:
AFCS
a) Press the PROC Key.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ as shown in Figure 5-139.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
c) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
INDEX
Figure 5-139 Manually Activate Approach
290
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
22) The IAF is the next waypoint. At the TOD, establish a descent vertical speed as previously discussed in Step 16.
The aircraft altitude is 9,000 feet upon reaching HABUK.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-140 Descending Turn to the Initial Approach Fix (IAF)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
291
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
23) After crossing FALUR the next waypoint is the FAF. The flight phase changes to LPV on the HSI indicating the
current phase of flight is in Approach Mode and the approach type is LPV. CDI scaling changes accordingly and is
used much like a localizer when flying an ILS approach. The RVSI is no longer displayed and the VDI changes to
the Glidepath Indicator (as shown in Figure 5-141) when the final approach course becomes active.
Figure 5-141 Descending to the FAF
The descent continues through the FAF (CEGIX) using the Glidepath Indicator, as one would use a glideslope
indicator, to obtain an altitude “AT” 7,800 feet at the FAF. Note the altitude restriction lines over and under (At)
the altitude in the ‘ALT’ field in Figure 5-141.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
292
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
24) After crossing CEGIX, the aircraft continues following the glidepath to maintain the descent to “AT or ABOVE”
6,370 feet at the Missed Approach Point (MAP) (RW35R) as seen in Figure 5-142.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-142 Descending to the Missed Approach Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6368ft’) is not part
of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along the runway
centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded. This altitude
is provided by Jeppesen, and may be below, equal to, or above the published minimums for this approach. In
this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,368 feet) after crossing the MAP, a direct-to
is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 6,368 feet is reached. After reaching
6,368 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case MOGAL). If the aircraft altitude is
above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to the published fix (MOGAL) to
begin the missed approach procedure.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure. For
example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach Hold
Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the aircraft
altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg when the
missed approach procedure is activated.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
293
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A direct-to is initiated to MOGAL, which is the Missed Approach Hold Point (MAHP) as seen in Figure 5-143.
The aircraft is climbing to 10,000 feet. The CDI flight phase now changes from LPV to MAPR as seen on the
HSI.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
25) Upon reaching the MAP, it is decided to execute a missed approach. Automatic waypoint sequencing is
suspended past the MAP. Select the SUSP Softkey on the PFD to resume automatic waypoint sequencing
through the missed approach procedure.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Management
INDEX
Figure 5-143 Missed Approach Active
294
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
26) The aircraft continues climbing to “AT or ABOVE” 10,000 feet at MOGAL. A holding pattern is established at
the MAHP (MOGAL) as shown in Figure 5-144.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-144 Establishing the Holding Pattern
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
27) The aircraft maintains 10,000 feet while following the magenta line through the hold as in Figure 5-145.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 5-145 Hold Established
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
295
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
5.12 Abnormal Operation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This section discusses the Dead Reckoning mode of operation and the subsequent indications.
Note: Dead Reckoning Mode only functions in Enroute (ENR) or Oceanic (OCN) phase of flight. In all other
phases, an invalid GPS solution produces a “NO GPS POSITION” annunciation on the map and the G1000
stops using GPS.
EIS
While in Enroute or Oceanic phase of flight, if the G1000 detects an invalid GPS solution or is unable to
calculate a GPS position, the system automatically reverts to Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode. In DR Mode, the G1000
uses its last-known position combined with continuously updated airspeed and heading data (when available) to
calculate and display the aircraft’s current estimated position.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by the G1000 in DR Mode may become increasingly
unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. If while in DR Mode airspeed and/or heading data
is also lost or not available, the DR function may not be capable of accurately tracking estimated position and,
consequently, the system may display a path that is different than the actual movement of the aircraft. Estimated
position information displayed by the G1000 through DR while there is no heading and/or airspeed data available
should not be used for navigation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
DR Mode is inherently less accurate than the standard GPS/WAAS Mode due to the lack of satellite measurements
needed to determine a position. Changes in wind speed and/or wind direction compound the relative inaccuracy
of DR Mode. Because of this degraded accuracy, other navigation equipment must be relied upon for position
awareness until GPS-derived position data is restored.
AFCS
DR Mode is indicated on the G1000 by the appearance of the letters ‘DR’ superimposed in yellow over the
‘own aircraft’ symbol as shown in Figure 5-146. In addition, ‘DR’ is prominently displayed in yellow on the HSI
slightly above and to the right of the aircraft symbol on the CDI as shown in Figure 5-146. The CDI deviation
bar remains, but is removed from the display after 20 minutes in DR Mode. The autopilot will remain coupled
in DR mode as long as the deviation info is available (20 min.) Lastly, but at the same time, a ‘GPS NAV LOST’
alert message appears on the PFD. Normal navigation using GPS/WAAS source data resumes automatically once
a valid GPS solution is restored.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and
is displayed as yellow text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information as shown in Figure
5-146.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Also, while the G1000 is in DR Mode, some terrain functions are not available. Additionally, the accuracy of
all nearest information (airports, airspaces, and waypoints) is questionable. Finally, airspace alerts continue to
function, but with degraded accuracy.
296
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Distance &
Bearing
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Current
Track
Indicator
Ground
Speed
EIS
Dead Reckoning
Annunciaion
Wind Data
GPS Navigation
Lost Message
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Course
Deviation
Indicator
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Bearing
Pointer/
Distance
Wind Data
Nav Data Bar
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
All data except
Active Leg,
TAS, and DTK
are in yellow
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
AFCS
Subdued Aircraft
Symbol
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-146 Dead Reckoning Mode - GPS Derived Data Shown in Yellow
INDEX
Note: The Inset Map is removed from the PFD any time aircraft pitch is greater than +30° or less than –20°,
or when a 65° bank angle is reached.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
297
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Blank Page
298
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Section 6 Hazard Avoidance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hazard avoidance features available for the G1000 are designed to aid situational awareness and provide advisory
information with regard to potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather, terrain, and air traffic.
Weather
• GDL 69/69A XM® Satellite Weather
• GWX 68 Airborne Color Weather Radar
• L-3 STORMSCOPE® WX-500 Series II Weather Mapping Sensor (Optional)
EIS
Terrain Avoidance
• TAWS-B (Terrain Awareness Warning System - TSO-C151b certified)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• TAWS-A (Terrain Awareness Warning System - TSO-C151b and TSO-92c certified) (Optional)
Traffic
• Traffic Information Service (TIS)
• L-3 SKYWATCH® (SKY 497/899) Traffic Advisory System (TAS) (Optional)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Honeywell® KTA 870 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) (Optional)
6.1 XM Satellite Weather
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Note: XM Satellite Weather data provides information for avoiding hazardous weather. Do not utilize XM
Weather information to penetrate hazardous weather.
AFCS
XM Satellite Weather is provided through the GDL 69A, a remote-mounted data-link satellite receiver. Received
graphical weather information and associated text is displayed on the Multi Function Display (MFD) and the
Primary Flight Display (PFD) Inset Map. The GDL 69A can also receive XM Satellite Radio® entertainment
services. Both weather data and entertainment programming operate in the S-band frequency range to provide
continuous reception capabilities at any altitude throughout North America.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
XM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
www.xmradio.com.
Activating Services
APPENDICES
Before XM Satellite Weather can be used, the service must be activated. Service is activated by providing XM
Satellite Radio with coded IDs unique to the installed GDL 69A. XM Satellite Radio and XM Satellite Weather
services each have coded IDs. The Data and Audio Radio IDs must be provided to XM Satellite Radio to activate
the weather service and entertainment subscriptions, respectively. These IDs are located on:
• The label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• The XM Information Page on the MFD (Figure 6-1)
INDEX
• The XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit (available at www.garmin.com, P/N
190-00355-04)
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
299
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Contact the installer if the Audio and Data Radio IDs cannot be located.
XM Satellite Radio uses the coded IDs to send an activation signal that allows the G1000 to display weather
data and/or entertainment programming provided through the GDL 69A.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activating XM Satellite Weather and XM Satellite Radio services:
1) Contact XM Satellite Radio by email (address listed on their website, www.xmradio.com) or by the customer
service phone number listed on the website. Follow the instructions provided by XM Satellite Radio services.
2) Select the XM page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
EIS
3) Press the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
4) Verify that the desired services are activated.
5) Press the LOCK Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘YES’.
Data Radio
ID (for XM
Weather)
Audio Radio ID
(for XM Satellite
Radio)
Weather Products
(Available Products
for Service Class
Indicated in Green)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) To complete activation, press the ENT Key
Select INFO
Softkey to Display
XM Information
Page
Figure 6-1 XM Information Page
Select LOCK
Softkey to Lock
Subscription
Information
INDEX
Using XM Satellite Weather Products
300
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The primary map for viewing XM Weather data is the Weather Data Link Page in the Map Page Group. This
is the only G1000 map display capable of showing information for all available XM weather products.
Viewing the Weather Data Link Page:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link Page.
EIS
NEXRAD
Weather
Product Age
and Legend
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NEXRAD Weather
Product Selected
for Display
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Display Enabled
Figure 6-2 Weather Data Link Page
AFCS
When a weather product is active on the Weather Data Link Page or the Navigation Map Page, the age of the
data is displayed on the screen (Figure 6-2). The age of the product is based on the time difference between
when the data was assembled on the ground and the current GPS time. Weather products are refreshed at
specific intervals (defined in the Refresh Rate column in Table 6-1).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If for any reason, a weather product is not refreshed within the 30-, 60-, 90-, or 180 minute Expiration Time
intervals (see Table 6-1), the data is considered expired and is removed from the display. This ensures that the
displayed data is consistent with what is currently being broadcast by XM Satellite Radio services. If more than
half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color of the product age displayed changes to yellow.
APPENDICES
Table 6-1 shows the weather product symbols, the expiration time and the refresh rate. The refresh rate
represents the interval at which XM Satellite Radio broadcasts new signals that may or may not contain new
weather data. It does not represent the rate at which weather data is updated or new content is received by the
Data Link Receiver. Weather data is refreshed at intervals that are defined and controlled by XM Satellite Radio
and its data vendors.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
301
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
30
Refresh Rate
(Minutes)
5
Cloud Top (CLD TOP)
60
15
Echo Top (ECHO TOP)
30
7.5
XM Lightning (LTNG)
30
5
Cell Movement (CELL MOV)
30
1.25
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
60
12
METARs
90
12
City Forecast (CITY)
90
12
Surface Analysis (SFC)
60
12
Freezing Levels (FRZ LVL)
60
12
Winds Aloft (WIND)
60
12
County Warnings (COUNTY)
60
5
Cyclone Warnings (CYCLONE)
60
12
90
22
90
12
90
12
180
18
30
60
60
5
12
12
Weather Product
Symbol
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NEXRAD
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Icing Potential (CIP and SLD)
(ICNG)
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
Air Report
(AIREPs)
Turbulence
(TURB)
Radar Coverage
TFRs
TAFs
No product image
No product image
No product image
Table 6-1 Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
302
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Cloud Top (CLD TOP)
+
Echo Top (ECHO TOP)
+
Nearest Page Group
Flight Plan Pages
+
AUX - Trip Planning
Page
Weather Data Link
Page
+
Weather Information
Page
Navigation Map Page
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Cell Movement (CELL MOV)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
+
METARs
+
City Forecast (CITY)
+
Surface Analysis (SFC)
+
Freezing Levels (FRZ LVL)
+
Winds Aloft (WIND)
+
County Warnings (COUNTY)
+
Cyclone Warnings (CYCLONE)
+
Icing Potential (ICNG)
+
PIREPs
+
+
AIREPs
+
+
Turbulence (TURB)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
+
AFCS
TAFs
+
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TFRs
+
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Radar Coverage
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
XM Lightning (LTNG)
EIS
NEXRAD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Weather Product
PFD Inset Map
Table 6-2 shows which XM products can be displayed (indicated with a ‘+’ symbol) on specific maps.
Table 6-2 Weather Product Display Maps
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
303
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Weather Softkeys on the Weather Data Link Page
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Softkeys control the display of weather information on most MFD pages and the PFD Inset Map (Figure 6-3
shows the weather product softkeys for the Weather Data Link Page). When a weather product is selected
for display, the corresponding softkey label changes to gray to indicate the product is enabled. Unavailable
weather products have subdued softkey labels (softkeys are disabled from selection).
NEXRAD ECHO TOP CLD TOP
FRZ LVL
METAR
LEGEND MORE WX CHKLIST
WIND OFF ICNG OFF TURB OFF AIREPS
PIREPS
COUNTY
CELL MOV
BACK
EIS
CYCLONE SFC OFF
SIG/AIR
LTNG
SFC Softkey label changes
to reflect current selection.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WIND/ICNG/TURB Softkey labels
change to reflect current selection.
CURRENT
OFF
12 HR
24 HR
36 HR
48 HR
Select the BACK Softkey
to move up one level.
LEGEND
BACK
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PREV and NEXT Softkeys cycle through Winds Aloft,
Icing, and Turbulence altitude selection softkeys.
PREV
OFF
SFC
3000
6000
9000
12000
15000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
36000
39000
42000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
1000
3000
6000
9000
12000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
39000
42000
45000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
15000
36000
APPENDICES
Figure 6-3 Weather Data Link Weather Product Softkeys
INDEX
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page and the Weather Data Link Page control the map range settings
above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the weather
product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. The menus also
provide a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling display of weather products.
304
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-4).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘XM Product Group 1’ or ‘XM Product Group 2’, and press the ENT Key
(Figure 6-5).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
EIS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link Page with the changed settings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-4 Weather Data Link Page Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-5 Weather Data Link Page Setup Menu
Restoring default Weather Data Link Page settings:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) Highlight the desired default(s) to restore (all or for selection) and press ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
305
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Maps besides the Weather Data Link Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
Setting up and customizing weather data for the Navigation Map Page:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-6).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-7).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-8).
EIS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-6 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-7 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-8 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
APPENDICES
Each active weather product has an associated legend which can be displayed on the Weather Data Link
Page.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
INDEX
2) Press the LEGEND Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
Or:
306
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the window.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) To remove the Legend Window, press the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
Additional information about the following can be displayed by panning over the display on the map:
• County Warnings
• Cell Movement
• TFRs
• SIGMETs
• AIREPs
• AIRMETs
• PIREPs
EIS
• Echo Tops
• METARs
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the RANGE Knob. The map range is adjusted by turning
the RANGE Knob. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map
Pointer.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Additional
Information
on Weather
Feature
Selected with
Map Pointer
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Tornado Warning
Selected with Map
Pointer
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-9 Panning on the Weather Data Link Page
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
307
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hazard Avoidance
WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar), is a network of 158 high-resolution Doppler radar
systems that are operated by the National Weather Service (NWS). NEXRAD data provides centralized
meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The maximum
range of a single NEXRAD radar site is 250 nm. In addition to a wide array of services, the NEXRAD network
provides important information about severe weather for air traffic safety.
NOTE: NEXRAD cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
NEXRAD data is not real-time. The lapsed time between collection, processing, and dissemination of
NEXRAD images can be significant and may not reflect the current radar synopsis. Due to the inherent delays
and the relative age of the data, it should be used for long-range planning purposes only. Never use NEXRAD
data or any radar data to penetrate hazardous weather. Instead, use it to an early-warning capacity of predeparture and enroute evaluation.
Figure 6-10 NEXRAD Data on the Weather Data Link Page
APPENDICES
NEXRAD data can be displayed on the following maps:
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Weather Data Link Page
• Flight Plan Pages
INDEX
• Airport Information Page
308
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying NEXRAD weather information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
Composite data from all the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States is shown. This data is composed of
the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display of the information is color-coded to
indicate the weather severity level. All weather product legends can be viewed on the Weather Data Link Page.
For the NEXRAD legend (Figure 6-11), press the LEGEND Softkey when NEXRAD is selected for display.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-11 NEXRAD Data with Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The display of radar coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or ECHO TOPS is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected
are indicated in grayish-purple. Radar capability exists in these areas, but it is not active or is off-line.
Reflectivity
AFCS
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
APPENDICES
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
309
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• NEXRAD base reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine cloud layers or precipitation
characteristics (wet hail vs. rain). For example, it is not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet
hail, and rain.
• NEXRAD base reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna elevation angle. An individual NEXRAD
site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information about storms directly over
the site.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• When zoomed in to a range of 30 nm, each square block on the display represents an area of four square
kilometers. The intensity level reflected by each square represents the highest level of NEXRAD data
sampled within the area (Figure 6-12).
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Block represents
4 km2
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-12 NEXRAD Data - Zoomed
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
• Ground clutter
APPENDICES
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
INDEX
• Metallic dust from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
310
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD Limitations (Canada)
• Radar coverage extends to 55ºN.
• Any precipitation displayed between 52ºN and 55ºN is displayed as mixed because it is unknown.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
No Coverage
Above 55°N
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Precipitation Above
52°N Displays as
Mixed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-13 NEXRAD Data - Canada
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
311
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Echo Tops
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hazard Avoidance
Echo Tops data (Figure 6-14) shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest radar echo. The
highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or clouds; rather it indicates the highest altitude at
which precipitation is detected. Information is derived from NEXRAD data.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Note: Display of Echo Tops is mutually exclusive with Cloud Tops and NEXRAD.
AFCS
Figure 6-14 Echo Tops Data
Displaying Echo Tops information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ECHO TOPS Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
To display the Echo Tops legend (Figure 6-15), press the LEGEND Softkey when Echo Tops is selected for
display. Since Echo Tops and Cloud Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Echo Tops is activated, NEXRAD and Cloud Tops data are
removed.
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-15 ECHO TOPS Legend
312
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Cloud TOPs
Note: Cloud Tops and Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Cloud Tops data (Figure 6-16) depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite imagery.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-16 Cloud Tops Data
Displaying Cloud Tops information:
AFCS
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page with the FMS Knob.
2) Select the CLD TOP Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Cloud Tops legend (Figure 6-17), select the LEGEND Softkey when Cloud Tops is selected
for display. Since Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Cloud Tops is activated, Echo Tops data is removed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-17 Cloud Tops Legend
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
313
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
XM Lightning
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: XM Lightning and optional L-3 STORMSCOPE® WX-500 Lightning are mutually exclusive.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Lightning data (Figure 6-18) shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning strikes. A strike
icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer region. The exact location of the lightning
strike is not displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Lightning
Strikes
AFCS
Figure 6-18 Lightning Data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
XM Lightning data displays on the following maps:
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Weather Data Link Page
• Flight Plan Pages
Displaying XM Lightning information:
APPENDICES
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the XM LTNG Softkey (LTNG Softkey on the Weather Data Link Page).
INDEX
To display the XM Lightning legend on the Weather Data Link Page (Figure 6-19), press the LEGEND
Softkey when XM Lightning is selected for display.
Figure 6-19 Lightning Legend
314
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Cell Movement
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Cell Movement data (Figure 6-20) shows the location and movement of storm cells as identified by the
ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares, with direction of movement indicated with
short, orange arrows..
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Storm
Cells
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-20 Cell Movement Data
On most applicable maps, Cell Movement data is selected for display along with NEXRAD. On the Weather
Data Link Page, Cell Movement data can be selected independently. Cell Movement data can be displayed
on the following maps:
• Nearest Pages
•Navigation Map
• Weather Data Link Page
AFCS
• PFD Inset Map
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• AUX - Trip Planning Page
Displaying Cell Movement information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, select the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey (CEL MOV Softkey on the Weather Data Link Page). For Cell Movement to be
displayed on maps other than the Weather Data Link Page, Cell Movement must be turned on in the Navigation
Map Setup Menu (see “Setting Up XM Satellite Weather”).
To display the Cell Movement legend on the Weather Data Link Page, (Figure 6-21), press the LEGEND
Softkey when Cell Movement is selected for display.
INDEX
Figure 6-21 Cell Movement Legend
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
315
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
SIGMETS and AIRMETS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SIGMET (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMET (AIRmen’s METeorological Information)
are issued for potentially hazardous weather. A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective
weather such as severe or widespread thunderstorms. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather condition
occurring at a localized geographical position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airmet
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Sigmet
Figure 6-22 SIGMET/AIRMET Data
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
AFCS
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the RANGE Knob and move the Map Pointer over the
icon.
4) Press the ENT key. Figure 6-23 shows sample SIGMET text.
INDEX
APPENDICES
To display the SIGMET and AIRMET legend (Figure 6-23), press the LEGEND Softkey when SIGMETs and
AIRMETs are selected for display.
Sample SIGMET Text
SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
Figure 6-23 SIGMET/AIRMET Text and Legend
316
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
METARs and TAFs
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure as reported for METARs is given in hectopascals (hPa), except for in the United
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
States, where it is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
Note: METAR information is only displayed within the installed aviation database service area.
EIS
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an airport or
observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical
data. METARs reflect hourly observations; non-routine updates include the code “SPECI” in the report.
METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Instructions
for Viewing
METAR and
TAF Text
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Airport
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-24 METAR Flags on the Weather Data Link Page
APPENDICES
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports within a 24- hour period,
and may span up to 36 hours. TAFs typically include forecast wind, visibility, weather phenomena, and sky
conditions using METAR codes.
METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed first in a
decoded fashion, then as raw text. TAF information is displayed only in its raw form when it is available
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
317
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Displaying METAR and TAF text:
1) On the Weather Data Link Page, press the METAR Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the RANGE Knob and pan to the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link Page.
EIS
Or:
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Press the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note that the METAR text must
be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
AFCS
METAR
Text
METAR
Symbol
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TAF
Text
Figure 6-25 METAR with Text
INDEX
To display the METAR legend (Figure 6-26) on the Weather Data Link Page, select the LEGEND Softkey
when METARs are selected for display.
318
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text. A gray METAR flag is displayed
when the METAR text does not contain adequate information.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 6-26 METAR Legend
Surface Analysis and City Forecast
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Note: Surface Analysis and City Forecast data are displayed only within the installed Aviation Database
service area.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Surface Analysis and City Forecast (Figure 6-27) information is available for current and forecast weather
conditions. Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-27 Surface Analysis Data - 24-Hour
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
319
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Displaying Surface Analysis and City Forecast information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the SFC Softkey.
4) Select the desired forecast time: CURRENT, 12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, or 48 HR. The SFC Softkey label changes
to reflect the forecast time selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
To display the Surface Analysis and City Forecast legend (Figure 6-28), press the LEGEND Softkey when
Surface Analysis and City Forecast are selected to be displayed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-28 Surface Analysis Legend
320
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Freezing Level
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Freezing Level data (Figure 6-29) shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and location at
which the first isotherm is found. When no data is displayed for a given altitude, the data for that altitude
has not been received, or is out of date and has been removed from the display. New data appears at the next
update.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-29 Freeze Level Data
AFCS
Displaying Freezing Level information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the FRZ LVL Softkey.
To display the Freezing Level legend (Figure 6-30), press the LEGEND Softkey when Freezing Level data is
selected to be displayed.
APPENDICES
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
Figure 6-30 Freezing Level Legend
321
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Winds Aloft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Winds Aloft data (Figure 6-31) shows the forecast wind speed and direction at the surface and at selected
altitudes. Altitude can be displayed in 3000-foot increments up to 42,000 feet MSL.
Displaying Winds Aloft data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page with the FMS Knob.
2) Select the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Select the WIND Softkey.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
4) Select the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Select the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The WIND Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-31 Winds Aloft at 12,000 Feet
APPENDICES
To display the Winds Aloft legend (Figure 6-32), select the LEGEND Softkey when Winds Aloft is
selected for display.
INDEX
Figure 6-32 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
322
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
County Warnings
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
County warning data (Figure 6-33) provides specific public awareness and protection weather warnings from
the National Weather Service (NWS). This can include information on fires, tornadoes, severe thunderstorms,
flood conditions, and other natural disasters.
Additional
Information on
Flood Warning
Selected with
Map Pointer
EIS
Flood
Warning
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Tornado
Warning
Figure 6-33 County Flood and Tornado Warnings
AFCS
Displaying County Warning information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page with the FMS Knob.
2) Select the MORE WX Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the COUNTY Softkey.
To display the County Warnings legend (Figure 6-34), select the LEGEND Softkey when County Warnings
are selected to be displayed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-34 County Warnings Legend
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
323
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Cyclone
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Cyclone weather product (Figure 6-35) shows the current location of cyclones (hurricanes) and their
projected tracks.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Cyclone
Figure 6-35 Cyclone Data Selected for Display
Displaying cyclone (hurricane) track information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page with the FMS Knob.
AFCS
2) Select the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Select the CYCLONE Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Cyclone legend (Figure 6-36), select the LEGEND Softkey when Cyclones are selected to
be displayed.
INDEX
Figure 6-36 Cyclone Legend
324
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Icing (CIP & SLD)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Current Icing Product (CIP) data (Figure 6-37) shows a graphical view of the current icing environment.
Icing severity is displayed in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not specific to aircraft type).
The CIP product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the current conditions at the time of the analysis.
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large,
super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat areas are depicted
as magenta dots over the CIP colors.
Displaying Icing data:
EIS
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the ICNG Softkey.
4) Select the desired altitude level: 1,000 feet up to 30,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle through
the altitude softkeys. The ICNG Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Icing
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Supercooled
large droplets
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-37 Icing Data at 15,000 Feet
APPENDICES
To display the Icing Potential legend (Figure 6-38), press the LEGEND Softkey when Icing is selected for
display.
INDEX
Figure 6-38 Icing Potential Legend
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
325
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Turbulence
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Turbulence data (Figure 6-39) identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude air mass
associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe or extreme, at altitudes between 21,000
and 45,000 feet.Turbulence data is intended to supplement AIRMETs and SIGMETs.
Displaying Turbulence data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
EIS
3) Press the TURB Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Select the desired altitude level: 21,000 feet up to 45,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The TURB Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Severe
Turbulence
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-39 Turbulence Data at 30,000 Feet
APPENDICES
To display the Turbulence legend (Figure 6-40), press the LEGEND Softkey when Turbulence is selected
for display.
INDEX
Figure 6-40 Turbulence Legend
326
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PIREPs and AIREPs
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) (Figure 6-41) provide timely weather information for a particular route of
flight. When significant weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are
required to solicit PIREPs. A PIREP may contain unforecast adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight
visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent
(UUA).
Another type of PIREP is an Air Report (AIREP). AIREPs are used almost exclusively by commerical
airlines.
EIS
Instructions for
Viewing PIREP
and AIREP Text
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AIREP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Urgent
PIREP
Routine
PIREP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-41 AIREPs and PIREPs on the Weather Data Link Page
Displaying PIREP and AIREP text:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the AIREPS or PIREPS Softkey.
APPENDICES
4) Press the RANGE Knob and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather
report when it is selected.
5) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with PIREP or AIREP text. The data is first displayed
in a decoded fashion, then as raw text.
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP or AIREP text.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link Page.
327
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
EIS
Raw PIREP Text
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Decoded PIREP Text
Figure 6-42 PIREP Text on the Weather Data Link Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
To display the PIREP or AIREP legend (Figure 6-43), press the LEGEND Softkey when PIREPs or AIREPs are
selected for display.
AFCS
The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-43 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
328
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.2 Airborne Color Weather Radar
System Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Garmin GWX 68 Airborne Color Weather Radar is a four-color digital pulsed radar with 6.5 kilowatts
of output power. It combines excellent range and adjustable scanning profiles with a high-definition target
display. The pulse width is four microseconds (µs) on all ranges except the 2.5 nm range. The GWX 68 uses a
one µs pulse width at this range to reduce the targets smearing together on the display for better target definition
at close range.
EIS
The KingAir 200/B200 Series uses a 12-inch phased array antenna that is fully stabilized to accommodate 30º
of pitch and roll.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
To focus radar scanning on specific areas, Sector Scanning offers pilot-adjustable horizontal scan angles of
20º, 40º, 60º, or 90º. A vertical scanning function helps to analyze storm tops, gradients, and cell buildup
activity at various altitudes.
Radar features include:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Extended Sensitivity Time Constant (STC) logic that automatically correlates distance of the return echo with
intensity, so cells do not suddenly appear to get larger as they get closer.
• WATCH™ (Weather ATtenuated Color Highlight) helps identify possible shadowing effects of short-range
cell activity, identifying areas where radar return signals are weakened or attenuated by intense precipitation
(or large areas of lesser precipitation) and may not fully reflect the weather behind a storm.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Weather Alert that looks ahead for intense cell activity in the 80-320 nm range, even if these ranges are not
being monitored.
Principles of Pulsed Airborne Weather Radar
AFCS
The term RADAR is an acronym for RAdio Detecting And Ranging. Pulsed radar locates targets by transmitting
a microwave pulse beam that, upon encountering a target, is reflected back to the radar receiver as a return
echo. The microwave pulses are focused and radiated by the antenna, with the most intense energy in the
center of the beam and decreasing intensity near the edge. The same antenna is used for both transmitting and
receiving. The returned signal is then processed and displayed on the G1000 MFD.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Radar detection is a two-way process that requires 12.36 µs for the transmitted microwave pulses to travel out
and back for each nautical mile of target range. It takes 123.6 µs for a transmitted pulse to make the round trip
if a target is ten nautical miles away.
APPENDICES
Airborne weather radar should be used to avoid severe weather, not for penetrating severe weather. The
decision to fly into an area of radar targets depends on target intensity, spacing between the targets, aircraft
capabilities, and pilot experience. Pulse type weather radar detects only precipitation, not clouds or turbulence.
The display may indicate clear areas between intense returns, but this does not necessarily mean it is safe to fly
between them. Only Doppler radar can detect turbulence.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
Airborne weather radar has other capabilities beyond weather detection. It also has the ability to detect and
provide distance to cities, mountains, coastlines, rivers, lakes, and oceans.
329
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
NEXRAD and Airborne Weather Radar
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Both Airborne Weather Radar and NEXRAD measure weather reflectivity in decibels (dB). A decibel is a
logarithmic expression of the ratio of two quantities. Airborne Weather Radar measures the ratio of power
against the gain of the antenna, while NEXRAD measures the energy reflected back to the radar, or the radar
reflectivity ratio.
Both systems use colors to identify the different echo intensities, but the colors are not interchangeable.
Airborne color radar values used by Garmin Airborne Color Weather Radar should not be confused with
NEXRAD radar values.
EIS
Antenna Beam Illumination
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The radar beam is much like the beam of a spotlight. The further the beam travels, the wider it becomes.
The radar is only capable of seeing what is inside the boundaries of the beam. The figure below depicts a radar
beam’s characteristics. The figure illustrates vertical dimensions of the radar beam, although the same holds
true for the horizontal dimensions. In other words, the beam is as wide as it is tall. Note that it is possible to
miss areas of precipitation on the radar display because of the antenna tilt setting. With the antenna tilt set
to zero in this illustration, the beam overshoots the precipitation at 15 nautical miles.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude (x1000 ft.)
80
Antenna at Zero Tilt
18,000 ft.
8°
0
0
15
Half Power at
s
Beam Sidelobe
Max Power at Beam Center
18,000 ft.
30
45
60
75
90
AFCS
Range (nautical miles)
Figure 6-44 Radar Beam from a 12 inch Antenna
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The curvature of the earth can also be a factor in missing areas of precipitation, especially at range settings
of 150 nautical miles or more. Here the beam overshoots the precipitation at less than 320 nautical miles.
INDEX
320 nm
Figure 6-45 Radar Beam in Relation to the Curvature of the Earth
330
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Radar Signal Attenuation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The phenomenon of radar signal attenuation affects the operation of weather radar. When the radar signal
is transmitted, it is progressively absorbed and scattered, making the signal weaker. This weakening, or
attenuation, is caused by two primary sources, distance and precipitation.
Attenuation because of distance is due to the fact that the radar energy leaving the antenna is inversely
proportional to the square of the distance. The reflected radar energy from a target 40 miles away that fills
the radar beam is one fourth the energy reflected from an equivalent target 20 miles away. This would appear
to the operator that the storm is gaining intensity as the aircraft gets closer. Internal signal processing within
the GWX 68 system compensates for much of this distance attenuation.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Attenuation due to precipitation is not as predictable as distance attenuation. It is also more intense. As the
radar signal passes through moisture, a portion of the radar energy is reflected back to the antenna. However,
much of the energy is absorbed. If precipitation is very heavy, or covers a large area, the signal may not
reach completely through the area of precipitation. The weather radar system cannot distinguish between an
attenuated signal and an area of no precipitation. If the signal has been fully attenuated, the radar displays
a radar shadow. This appears as an end to the precipitation when, in fact, the heavy rain may extend much
further. A cell containing heavy precipitation may block another cell located behind the first, preventing it
from being displayed on the radar. Never fly into these shadowed areas and never assume that all of the heavy
precipitation is being displayed unless another cell or a ground target can be seen beyond the heavy cell. The
WATCH™ feature of the GWX 68 Weather Radar system can help in identifying these shadowed areas. Areas
in question appear as shadowed or gray on the radar display. Proper use of the antenna tilt control can also
help detect radar shadows.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Attenuation can also be due to poor maintenance or degradation of the radome. Even the smallest amount of
wear and scratching, pitting, and pinholes on the radome surface can cause damage and system inefficiency.
Radar Signal Reflectivity
AFCS
Precipitation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Precipitation or objects more dense than water, such as the surface of the earth or solid structures, are
detected by the weather radar. The weather radar does not detect clouds, thunderstorms, or turbulence
directly. It detects precipitation associated with clouds, thunderstorms, and turbulence. The best radar
signal reflectors are raindrops, wet snow, or wet hail. The larger the raindrop, the better the reflectivity. The
size of the precipitation droplet is the most important factor in radar reflectivity. Because large drops in a
small concentrated area are characteristic of a severe thunderstorm, the radar displays the storm as a strong
return. Ice crystals, dry snow, and dry hail have low levels of reflectivity as shown in the illustration, and
often not displayed by the radar. Additionally, a cloud that contains only small raindrops, such as fog or
drizzle, does not reflect enough radar energy to produce a measurable target return.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
331
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 6-46 Precipitation Type and Reflectivity
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The intensity of ground target returns depends upon the angle at which the radar beam strikes the
ground target (Angle of Incidence) and the reflective properties of that target. The gain can be adjusted so
shorelines, rivers, lakes, and cities are well-defined. Increasing the gain too much causes the display to fill
in between targets, thus obscuring some landmarks.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Ground Returns
Cities normally provide a strong return signal. While large buildings and structures provide good returns,
small buildings can be shadowed from the radar beam by the taller buildings. As the aircraft approaches
and shorter ranges are selected, details become more noticeable as the highly reflective regular lines and
edges of the city become more defined.
AFCS
Bodies of water such as lakes, rivers, and oceans are not good reflectors and normally do not provide good
returns. The energy is reflected in a forward scatter angle with inadequate energy being returned. They
can appear as dark areas on the display. However, rough or choppy water is a better reflector and provides
stronger returns from the downwind sides of the waves.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Mountains also provide strong return signals to the antenna, but also block the areas behind. However,
over mountainous terrain, the radar beam can be reflected back and forth in the mountain passes or off
canyon walls, using up all or most of the radar energy. In this case, no return signal is received from this
area, causing the display to show a dark spot which could indicate a pass where no pass exists.
APPENDICES
Angle of Incidence
INDEX
The angle at which the radar beam strikes the target is called the Angle of Incidence. The figure illustrates
the incident angle (‘A’). This directly affects the detectable range, the area of illumination, and the intensity
of the displayed target returns. A large incident angle gives the radar system a smaller detectable range and
lower display intensity due to minimized reflection of the radar energy.
332
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-47 Angle of Incidence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A smaller incident angle gives the radar a larger detectable range of operation and the target display shows
a higher intensity. Since more radar energy is reflected back to the antenna with a low incident angle, the
resulting detectable range is increased for mountainous terrain.
Safe Operating Distance
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The following information establishes a minimum safe distance from the antenna for personnel near
operating weather radar. The minimum safe distance is based on the FCC’s exposure limit at 9.3 to 9.5 GHz for
general population/uncontrolled environments, which is 1 mW/cm2. See Advisory Circular 20-68B for more
information on safe distance determination.
Maximum Permissible Exposure Level (MPEL)
AFCS
The zone in which the radiation level exceeds the US Government standard of 1 mW/cm2 is the semicircular
area of at least 11 feet from the 12-inch antenna. All personnel must remain outside of this zone. With a
scanning or rotating beam, the averaged power density at the MPEL boundary is significantly reduced.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MPEL
Boundary
APPENDICES
11’ for 12”
antenna
INDEX
Figure 6-48 MPEL Boundary
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
333
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Basic Antenna Tilt Setup
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following discussion is a simple method for setting up the weather radar antenna tilt for most situations.
It is not to be considered an all encompassing setup that works in all situations, but this method does provide
good overall parameters for the monitoring of threats. Ultimately, it is desired to have the antenna tilted so that
the bottom of the radar beam is four degrees below parallel with the ground. The following example explains
one way of achieving this.
EIS
With the aircraft flying level, adjust the antenna tilt so ground returns are displayed at a distance that equals
the aircraft’s current altitude (AGL) divided by 1,000. For example, if the aircraft is at 14,000 feet, adjust the
tilt so the front edge of ground returns are displayed at 14 nautical miles. Note this antenna tilt angle setting.
Now, raise the antenna tilt 6 degrees above this setting. The bottom of the radar beam is now angled down 4º
from parallel with the ground.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Practical Application Using the Basic Tilt Setup
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
With the antenna tilt set as previously described, any displayed target return should be scrutinized when
flying at altitudes between 2,000 and 30,000 feet AGL. If the displayed target advances on the screen to within
5 nautical miles of the aircraft, avoid it. This may be either weather or ground returns that are 2,000 feet or less
below the aircraft. Raising the antenna tilt 4 degrees can help separate ground returns from weather returns in
relatively flat terrain. This aligns the bottom of the radar beam parallel with the ground. Return the antenna
tilt to the previous setting after a few sweeps.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the aircraft is above 29,000 feet, be cautious of any target return that gets to within 30 nautical miles. This is
likely a thunderstorm that has a top high enough that the aircraft cannot fly over it safely.
If the aircraft altitude is 15,000 feet or lower, setting the displayed range to 60 miles may be more helpful.
Closely monitor anything that enters the display.
4000
Change in Antenna Tilt
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
+4°
+3°
+2°
+1°
0°
-1°
-2°
-3°
-4°
3000
2000
1000
0
1000
2000
APPENDICES
3000
10 nm
4000
Vertical Change of Radar Beam (feet)
AFCS
Also, after setting up the antenna tilt angle as described previously, ground returns can be monitored for possible
threats. The relationship between antenna tilt angle, altitude, and distance is one degree of tilt equals 100 feet of
altitude for every one nautical mile.
Figure 6-49 Vertical Change in Radar Beam per Nautical Mile
INDEX
Therefore, with the antenna tilt set so that the bottom of the beam is four degrees below parallel with
the ground, a target return at 10 nm is approximately 4,000 feet below the aircraft; at 20 nm, 8,000 feet;
334
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
at 50 nm, 20,000 feet. In other words, at this tilt setting, a ground return (such as a mountain peak) being
displayed at 10 nm would have a maximum distance below the aircraft of 4,000 feet. When the ground target
return moves to 5 nm, maximum distance below the aircraft is 2,000 feet.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This setup provides a good starting point for practical use of the GWX 68. There are many other factors to
consider in order to become proficient at using weather radar in all situations.
Weather Mapping and Interpretation
Weather Display Interpretation
EIS
When evaluating various target returns on the weather radar display, the colors denote precipitation intensity
and rates shown in the table.
Black
Green
Yellow
Red
Magenta
< 23 dBZ
23 dBZ to < 32 dBZ
32 dBZ to < 41 dBZ
41 dBZ to < 50 dBZ
50 dBZ and greater
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Intensity
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Weather Mode Color
Approximate
Precipitation Rate
(in/hr.)
< .01.
.01 - 0.1.
0.1 - 0.5
0.5 - 2
>2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-5 Precipitation Intensity Levels
Thunderstorms
AFCS
Updrafts and downdrafts in thunderstorms carry water through the cloud. The more severe the drafts, the
greater the number and size of the precipitation droplets. With this in mind, the following interpretations
can be made from what is displayed on the weather radar. Avoid these areas by an extra wide margin.
• In areas where the displayed target intensity is red or magenta (indicating large amounts of precipitation),
the turbulence is considered severe.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Areas that show steep color gradients (intense color changes) over thin bands or short distances suggest
irregular rainfall rate and strong turbulence.
• Areas that show red or magenta are associated with hail or turbulence, as well as heavy precipitation. Vertical
scanning and antenna tilt management may be necessary to identify areas of maximum intensity.
APPENDICES
Along squall lines (multiple cells or clusters of cells in a line) individual cells may be in different stages
of development. Areas between closely spaced, intense targets may contain developing clouds not having
enough moisture to produce a return. However, these areas could have strong updrafts or downdrafts.
Targets showing wide areas of green are generally precipitation without severe turbulence.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
Irregularities in the target return may also indicate turbulence, appearing as hooks, fingers, or scalloped
edges. These irregularities may be present in green areas with no yellow, red, or magenta areas and should
be treated as highly dangerous areas. Avoid these areas as if they are red or magenta.
335
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Squall Line
EIS
Steep Gradient
Hook or Finger
Scalloped Edge
Figure 6-50 Cell Irregularities
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Thunderstorm development is rapid. A course may become blocked within a short time. When displaying
shorter ranges, periodically select a longer range to see if problems are developing further out. That can
help prevent getting trapped in a blind alley or an area that is closed at one end by convective weather.
Figure 6-51 The Blind Alley - Horizontal Scan
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
In areas of multiple heavy cells, use the Vertical Scan feature along with antenna tilt management to
examine the areas. Remember to avoid shadowed areas behind targets.
INDEX
The Blind Alley at Close Range
The Large Storm Behind
Figure 6-52 The Blind Alley
336
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Tornadoes
There are no conclusive radar target return characteristics which identify a tornado. However, tornadoes
may be present if the following characteristics are observed:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• A narrow, finger-like portion extends and in a short time curls into a hook and closes on itself.
• A hook, which may be in the general shape of the numeral 6 (9 in the southern hemisphere), especially
if bright and projecting from the southwest quadrant (northeast quadrant in the southern hemisphere) of
a major thunderstorm.
• V-shaped notches.
EIS
• Doughnut shapes.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
These shapes do not always indicate tornadoes, and tornado returns are not limited to these characteristics.
Confirmed radar observations of tornadoes most often have not shown shapes different from those of a
normal thunderstorm display.
Hail
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Hail results from updrafts carrying water high enough to freeze. Therefore, the higher the top of a
thunderstorm, the greater the probability that it contains hail. Vertically scanning the target return can
give the radar top of a thunderstorm that contains hail. Radar top is the top of a storm cell as detected by
radar. It is not the actual top, or true top of the storm. The actual top of a storm cell is seen with the eyes
in clear air and may be much higher than the radar top. The actual top does not indicate the top of the
hazardous area.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Hail can fall below the minimum reflectivity threshold for radar detection. It can have a film of water on
its surface, making its reflective characteristics similar to a very large water droplet. Because of this film of
water, and because hail stones usually are larger than water droplets, thunderstorms with large amounts
of wet hail return stronger signals than those with rain. Some hail shafts are extremely narrow (100 yards
or less) and make poor radar targets. In the upper regions of a cell where ice particles are dry (no liquid
coating), target returns are less intense.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Hail shafts are associated with the same radar target return characteristics as tornados. U-shaped cloud
edges three to seven miles across can also indicate hail. These target returns appear quite suddenly along
any edge of the cell outline. They also change in intensity and shape in a matter of seconds, making vigilant
monitoring essential.
Operation in Weather Mode
APPENDICES
WARNING: Begin transmitting only when it is safe to do so. When transmitting while the aircraft is on the
ground, no personnel or objects should be within 11 feet of the antenna.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
CAUTION: In Standby mode, the antenna is parked at the center line. It is always a good idea to put the
radar in Standby mode before taxiing the aircraft to prevent the antenna from bouncing on the bottom stop
and possibly causing damage to the radar assembly.
337
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
When the weather radar system is in the Weather or Ground Map mode, the system automatically switches
to Standby mode on landing.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In Reversionary mode, the weather radar system automatically switches to Standby mode. The system
remains in Standby mode until both displays are restored. In Reversionary mode, the weather radar system
cannot be controlled.
Scan Line
Antenna Stabilization Status
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Radar Mode
Figure 6-53 Horizontal Scan Display
Displaying weather on the Weather Radar Page:
AFCS
1) Select the Weather Radar Page in the Map Page Group with the FMS Knob.
2) Select the MODE Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) While on the ground, select the STANDBY Softkey. A one-minute warm-up period is initiated (countdown is
displayed on the screen). After the warm-up is complete, the radar enters the Standby Mode.
a)
Select the WEATHER Softkey. A confirmation window is displayed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-54 Confirming Activating Radar
338
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
b)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight YES and press the ENT Key to continue radar activation.
OR:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the aircraft is airborne, select the WEATHER Softkey. A one-minute warm-up period is initiated (countdown
is displayed on the screen). After the warm-up is complete, the radar begins transmitting.
4) Turn the RANGE Knob to select the desired map range.
5) The horizontal scan is initially displayed (Figure 6-53). If desired, select the VERTICAL Softkey to change to
vertical scanning.
Vertically scanning a storm cell:
EIS
NOTE: Vertical scanning of a storm cell should be done with the aircraft wings level to avoid constant
adjustment of the Bearing Line.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) While in the Horizontal Scan view, select the BRG Softkey. This places the cursor in the BEARING field and
displays the Bearing Line.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the Bearing Line is not displayed, press the MENU Key and turn the large FMS Knob to select Show Bearing
Line. Press the ENT Key.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to place the Bearing Line on the desired storm cell or other area to be vertically
scanned.
Bearing Line
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Scan Line
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-55 Bearing Line on Horizontal Scan
INDEX
4) Select the VERTICAL Softkey. A vertical scan of the selected area is now displayed (Figure 6-56).
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
339
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
5) The small FMS Knob may be used to move the scanned bearing line a few degrees right or left.
6) Turn the RANGE Knob to adjust the range.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
8) To select a new area to be vertically scanned, select the HORIZON Softkey to return to the Horizontal Scan view
and repeat the previous steps.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The RANGE Knob can also be used to adjust bearing from left to right.
Figure 6-56 Vertical Scan Display
Adjusting Antenna Tilt Angle
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
In order to make an accurate interpretation of a storm cell, the radar beam should be pointed at the wet
part of the weather cell to record the proper rainfall intensity (color level). The ideal aiming point is just
below the freezing level of the storm. The best way to find this point is to use the Vertical Scan feature. The
antenna tilt angle can be centered on the strongest return area in the vertical scan to get a more accurate
view of the coverage and intensity of the target in the horizontal scan.
Adjusting antenna tilt on the Horizontal Scan display:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the TILT field.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired antenna tilt angle.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
INDEX
The RANGE Knob can also be used to adjust tilt up and down.
340
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Adjusting antenna tilt on the Vertical Scan display:
1) Select the TILT Softkey to activate the cursor in the TILT field and display the Tilt Line.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the Tilt Line is not displayed, press the MENU Key and turn the large FMS Knob to select Show Tilt Line. Press
the ENT Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to adjust the antenna tilt angle. The selected tilt angle is implemented when Horizontal
Scan is again selected.
The RANGE Knob can also be used to adjust tilt.
Tilt Line
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Scan Line
AFCS
Figure 6-57 Adjusting Tilt on Vertical Scan Display
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
341
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Adjusting Gain
WARNING: Changing the gain in weather mode causes precipitation intensity to be displayed as a color
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
not representative of the true intensity. Remember to return the gain setting to Calibrated for viewing the
actual intensity of precipitation.
1) Select the GAIN Softkey to activate the cursor in the GAIN field.
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to adjust the gain for the desirable level. The gain setting is visible in the GAIN field
as a movable horizontal bar in a flashing box. The line pointer is a reference depicting the calibrated position.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Select the GAIN Softkey again to recalibrate the gain. CALIBRATED is displayed in the GAIN field.
Manual Gain Set Below Calibrated
Calibrated Gain
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-58 Gain Calibration
Sector Scan
APPENDICES
1) While in horizontal scan mode, select the BRG Softkey to display the Bearing Line and place the cursor in the
BEARING field. If the Bearing Line is not displayed, press the MENU Key and turn the large FMS Knob to select
Show Bearing Line.
INDEX
2) Press the ENT Key.
342
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-59 Selecting Sector Scan Position
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to place the Bearing Line in the desired position. The location of the Bearing Line
becomes the center point of the Sector Scan.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the SECTOR SCAN field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select FULL, 60˚, 40˚, or 20˚ scan.
6) If desired, readjust the Bearing Line as discussed previously to change the center of the Sector Scan.
7) Select the BRG Softkey again to remove the Bearing Line and cursor. The bearing reference is reset to 0º.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-60 40˚ Sector Scan
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
343
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Antenna Stabilization
1) To activate or deactivate the antenna stabilization, select the MODE Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the STAB ON Softkey to activate antenna stabilization or select the STAB OFF Softkey to deactivate. The
current stabilization condition is shown in the upper right of the weather radar display.
Weather Attenuated Color Highlight (WATCH™)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
While in horizontal scan mode, this feature can be used as a tool to determine areas of possible inaccuracies
in displayed intensity due to weakening of the radar energy. This weakening is known as attenuation. The
radar energy weakens as it passes through areas of intense precipitation, large areas of lesser precipitation,
and distance. Issues with the radome also attenuates the radar energy. All these factors have an effect on the
return intensity. The more energy that dissipates, the lesser the displayed intensity of the return. Accuracy
of the displayed intensity of returns located in the shaded areas are suspect. Make maneuvering decisions
with this information in mind. Proper antenna tilt management should still be employed to determine the
extent of attenuation in a shaded area.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
To activate or deactivate the WATCH™ feature, select the WATCH Softkey.
Areas of
Attenuated Signal
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displayed intensity is questionable.
Potentially stronger than displayed.
Horizontal Scan Without WATCH™
Horizontal Scan With WATCH™
INDEX
Figure 6-61 Horizontal Scan Without and With WATCH™
344
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Weather Alert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Weather Alert feature indicates the presence of heavy precipitation between the ranges of 80 and 320
nm regardless of the currently displayed range. Weather Alert targets appear as red bands along the outer
range ring at the approximate azimuth of the detected returns.
If a Weather Alert is detected within ±10° of the aircraft heading, an alert is displayed on the PFD in the
Messages Window.
If the antenna tilt is adjusted too low, a weather alert can be generated by ground returns. To avoid
unwanted weather alerts, deselect the WX ALRT Softkey..
EIS
Weather Alerts
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-62 Weather Alert Indications
To activate or deactivate Weather Alerts, select the WX ALRT Softkey. Activating and deactivating also
enables or inhibits the alert on the PFD.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-63 Weather Alert on PFD
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
345
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Ground Mapping and Interpretation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A secondary use of the weather radar system is for the presentation of terrain. This can be a useful tool for
verifying aircraft position. A picture of the ground is represented much like a topographical map that can be
used as a supplement to the navigation map on the MFD.
EIS
Ground Map mode uses a different gain range than Weather mode. Different colors are also used to represent
the intensity levels. The displayed intensity of ground target returns are defined in the table below. Use of the
GAIN and TILT controls help improve contrast so that specific ground targets can be recognized more easily.
As previously discussed, the type and orientation of the target in relation to the aircraft affects the intensity
displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Ground Map
Mode Color
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the weather radar system is in either the Weather or Ground Map mode, the system automatically
switches to Standby mode upon landing.
Yellow
Black
Light blue
Magenta
Blue
Intensity
0 dB
> 0 dB to < 9 dB
9 dB to < 18 dB
18 dB to < 27 dB
27 dB and greater
Table 6-6 Ground Target Return Intensity Levels
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Operation in Ground Map Mode
1) Select the MODE Softkey.
2) Select the GROUND Softkey to place the radar in Ground Map mode.
3) Select the BACK Softkey.
AFCS
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the TILT field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Adjust the antenna tilt angle by turning the small FMS Knob to display ground returns at the desired distance.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
346
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.3 Stormscope (Optional)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Stormscope system is not intended for hazardous thunderstorm penetration. Weather information
on the G1000 MFD is approved for weather avoidance only. Refer to the WX-500 User’s Guide for a detailed
description of Stormscope operation.
Note: L-3 STORMSCOPE® WX-500 Lightning and GDL 69/69A XM® Satellite Weather Lightning are
mutually exclusive.
EIS
The following pages can display Stormscope data:
• AUX - Trip Planning Page
• Nearest Pages
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• PFD Inset Map
• Stormscope Page
• Navigation Map
Lightning Age
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
To display Stormscope data on any map besides the Stormscope Page, press the MAP Softkey (or the INSET
Softkey for the PFD Inset Map), then press the STRMSCP Softkey. These pages can also display cell or strike data
using the yellow lightning strike symbology shown in Table 6-7.
Symbol
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Strike is less than 6 seconds old
Strike is between 6 and 60 seconds old
AFCS
Strike is between 1 and 2 minutes old
Strike is between 2 and 3 minutes old
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-7 Lightning Age and Symbols
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
347
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Setting Up Stormscope on the Navigation Map
Setting up Stormscope options on the Navigation Map:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) On the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Setup’ selected (Figure 6-64), press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the group selection window. Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Weather’
(Figure 6-65), and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move between the product selections.
EIS
5) When an item is highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the option.
6) Press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page (Figure 6-66).
The following options are available (Figure 6-65):
• STRMSCP LTNG – Turns the display of Stormscope data on or off.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• STRMSCP MODE – Selects the CELL or STRIKE mode of lightning activity. Cell mode identifies clusters
or cells of electrical activity. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning strikes.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• STRMSCP SMBL – Selects the range at which Stormscope data displays. Stormscope data is removed
when a map range greater than the STRMSCP SMBL value is selected.
Figure 6-65 Map Setup Menu
INDEX
Figure 6-64 Page Menu
348
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Cell and Strike Mode on the Navigation Map
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
On the Navigation Map, cell mode identifies cells of lightning activity (Figure 6-66). Stormscope identifies
clusters of electrical activity that indicate cells. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning
strikes.
Selecting the ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ mode on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Setup’ selected, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-64).
3) Select the ‘Weather’ group.
EIS
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on ‘STRMSCP LTNG’.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘STRMSCP MODE’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to change between ‘CELL’ and ‘STRIKE’ options. When an item is selected, press the
ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Map
Orientation
Stormscope
Mode
Strike Rate
per Minute
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Stormscope
Icon
80 nm Map
Range
Figure 6-66 Navigation Map Page with Stormscope
Lightning Data
APPENDICES
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn
(Figure 6-67). This is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the
nose of the aircraft.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
349
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Manually clearing Stormscope data on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select ‘Clear Stormscope Lightning’ (Figure 6-67).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-67 Navigation Map Page Options Menu
Zoom Range on the Navigation Map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Stormscope lightning data can be displayed up to 800 nm zoom range (in North Up orientation) on the
Navigation Map Page. However, in Track Up orientation at the 500 nm range, a portion of Stormscope lightning
data can be behind the aircraft and therefore not visible on the Navigation Map. Since the range for Stormscope
data is 400 nm diameter total (200 nm in front and 200 nm behind), the 500 nm range in North Up orientation
shows all the data.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
At a map range of less than 25 nm, Stormscope lightning data is not displayed, but can still be present. The
presence of Stormscope lightning data is indicated by the annunciation ‘LTNG < 25 nm’ in the upper right
corner (Figure 6-68).
Figure 6-68 Lightning Display Range Annunciation
APPENDICES
Selecting a Stormscope range on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘MAP SETUP’.
3) Select the ‘Weather’ group.
INDEX
4) Press the ENT Key.
350
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘STRMSCP SMBL’.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the maximum display range.
7) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
To change the display range on the Navigation Map Page, turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to zoom out or
counter-clockwise to zoom in.
Selecting the Stormscope Page
EIS
Stormscope lightning data can be displayed at the ranges of 25 nm, 50 nm, 100 nm, and 200 nm.
Adjusting the Stormscope Map Range:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Stormscope Page.
3) To change the map range, turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to zoom out or counter-clockwise to zoom in.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-69 Stormscope Page
Changing between ‘cell’ and ‘strike’ mode:
APPENDICES
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the MODE Softkey. The CELL and STRIKE softkeys are displayed.
3) Press the CELL Softkey to display ‘CELL’ data or press the STRIKE Softkey to display ‘STRIKE’ data. ‘CELL’ or
‘STRIKE’ is displayed in the mode box in the upper left corner of the Stormscope Page.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the Stormscope Page.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
INDEX
Or:
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
351
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between ‘CELL’ and ‘STRIKE’ options.
4) When an item is selected, press the ENT Key.
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn
(Figure 6-70). This is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the
nose of the aircraft.
EIS
Manually clearing Stormscope data:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Select ‘Clear Stormscope Lightning’ (Figure 6-70).
4) Press the ENT Key.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the CLEAR Softkey.
AFCS
Figure 6-70 Navigation Map Page Options Menu
Changing the viewing mode between 360˚ and 120˚:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the VIEW Softkey. The 360 and ARC softkeys are displayed.
3) Press the 360 Softkey to display a 360˚ viewing area or press the ARC Softkey to display a 120˚ viewing area.
APPENDICES
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the Stormscope Page.
Or:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between ‘View Arc’ and ‘View 360˚ options.
INDEX
4) When an item is selected, press the ENT Key.
352
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.4 Terrain Awareness & Warning System (TAWS-B)
Warning: Do not use TAWS-B information for primary terrain avoidance. TAWS-B is intended only to
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft latitude is greater than 75° North or 60° South.
NOTE: The data contained in the TAWS-B databases comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately
EIS
processes and cross-validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TAWS-B (Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B) is an optional feature to increase situational awareness
and aid in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). TAWS-B provides visual and aural annunciations when
terrain and obstacles are within the given altitude threshold from the aircraft. The displayed alerts and warnings
are advisory in nature only.
TAWS-B satisfies TSO-C151b Class B requirements for certification.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TAWS-B requires the following to operate properly:
• A valid terrain/obstacle/airport terrain database
• A valid 3-D GPS position solution
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAWS-B uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources. Terrain information is based
on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may be
shown if available in the database. The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm accuracy of the content,
per TSO-C151b. However, the displayed information should never be understood as being all-inclusive and data
may be inaccurate.
AFCS
TAWS-B uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude. GPS
altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS altitude is converted to a mean sea level (MSL)-based
altitude (GPS-MSL altitude) and is used to determine TAWS-B alerts. GPS-MSL altitude accuracy is affected by
factors such as satellite geometry, but it is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally
affect pressure altitude devices. GPS-MSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL
altitude. Therefore, GPS altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain
and obstacle alerts.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
The terrain and obstacle databases used by TAWS-B are referenced to mean sea level (MSL). Using the GPS
position and GPS-MSL altitude, TAWS-B displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative
to the position and altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, the GPS position and GPS-MSL altitude are used to
calculate and “predict” the aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this
manner, TAWS-B can provide advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric
conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter setting
to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because actual atmosphere conditions seldom
match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where pressure,
temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the baro-corrected altitude (as read from the
353
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
altimeter) to differ from the GPS-MSL altitude. This variation results in the aircraft’s true altitude differing from
the baro-corrected altitude.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Displaying TAWS-B Data
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
TAWS-B uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than
200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as the
aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 6-71 and Table 6-8 are used to represent terrain,
obstacles, and potential impact points.
Figure 6-71 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TAWS-B
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
Potential
Impact
Points
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
WARNING: Red obstacle is above or within
100’ below current aircraft altitude
AFCS
CAUTION: Yellow obstacle is between 100’
and 1000’ below current aircraft altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-8 TAWS-B Obstacle Colors and Symbology
TAWS-B information can be displayed on the following maps:
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Page
APPENDICES
• TAWS-B Page
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the TAWS-B Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
INDEX
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
354
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When TAWS-B is selected on maps other than the TAWS-B Page, an icon to indicate the feature is enabled for
display and a legend for TAWS-B terrain colors are shown (Figure 6-74).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map.
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles for which warnings
and cautions are issued are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within the setting
limit.
EIS
Maps besides the TAWS-B Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page. The
maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the Navigation
Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20 nm, the highest
obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-72).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-73).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-74).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
• OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
AFCS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
355
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Figure 6-72 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-73 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-74 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAWS-B Page
The TAWS-B Page is specialized to show terrain, obstacle, and potential impact point data in relation to the
aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs)
can be displayed for reference. If an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect, the display
automatically zooms in to the closest potential point of impact on the TAWS-B Page.
AFCS
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying the TAWS-B Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the TAWS-B Page.
APPENDICES
Changing the TAWS-B Page view:
1) Press the VIEW Softkey.
2) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
Or:
INDEX
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘View 120º’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view
356
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Showing/hiding aviation information on the TAWS-B Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Red Terrain
(Warning - Terrain
Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
EIS
Map Range
Terrain Legend
Annunciation Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Yellow Terrain
(Caution - Terrain
Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-75 TAWS-B Page, 360º View
AFCS
APPENDICES
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Yellow Terrain
(Caution - Terrain
Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Map Range Arc
Red Terrain
(Warning - Terrain
Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Figure 6-76 TAWS-B Page (ARC View)
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
357
INDEX
Annunciation Window
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
TAWS-B Alerts
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within TAWS-B software algorithms.
TAWS-B alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert is
issued, visual annunciations are displayed and aural alerts are simultaneously issued. Table 6-9 shows TAWS-B
alert types with corresponding annunciations and aural messages.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The TAWS-B Alert Annunciation is
shown to the upper left of the Altimeter on the PFD and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD. If the TAWS-B
Page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
EIS
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the TAWS-B Page)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PFD Alert Annunciation
MFD
Pop-up
Alert
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-77 TAWS-B Alert Annunciations
Terrain Display Enabled
Terrain Legend
INDEX
Alert Annunciation
Figure 6-78 Navigation Map Page with Terrain data
(After TAWS-B Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)
358
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
MFD Pop-Up Alert
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PFD/MFD Alert
Annunciation
Alert Type
Aural Message
Excessive Descent Rate
Warning (EDR)
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Warning (RTC)
Imminent Terrain Impact
Warning (ITI)
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Warning (ROC)
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
*
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
*
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”*
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
*
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”*
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
*
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
*
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
or
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Warning (IOI)
or
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Caution (RTC)
or
Imminent Terrain Impact
Caution (ITI)
or
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Caution (ROC)
or
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Caution (IOI)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Premature Descent Alert
Caution (PDA)
Altitude Callout “500”
Excessive Descent Rate
Caution (EDR)
or
AFCS
*
or
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up’
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
*
or
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
EIS
*
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
“Pull Up”
“Too Low, Terrain”
None
None
“Five-Hundred”
Negative Climb Rate Caution
(NCR)
*
or
APPENDICES
“Sink Rate”
“Don’t Sink”*
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
INDEX
* Alerts with multiple messages are configurable at installation and are installation-dependent. Alerts for the default
configuration are indicated with asterisks.
Table 6-9 TAWS-B Alerts Summary
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
359
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Excessive Descent Rate Alert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide suitable notification when the
aircraft is determined to be closing (descending) upon terrain at an excessive speed. Figure 6-79 shows the
parameters for the alert as defined by TSO-C151b.
6000
5500
5000
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
4500
EIS
4000
NK
: “SI
ion
Caut
3500
”
RATE
3000
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2500
2000
Warning: “PULL UP”
1500
1000
12000
11000
Descent Rate (FPM)
10000
9000
8000
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
0
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
500
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-79 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
AFCS
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come within the minimum
clearance values in Figure 6-80. When an RTC alert is issued, a potential impact point is displayed on the
TAWS-B Page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the
aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and IOI alerts are
accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the TAWS-B Page. The alert is annunciated when the
projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in Figure 6-80.
360
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Required Terrain Clearance
RTC Level (FT)
RTC Descending (FT)
800
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
600
500
400
300
EIS
Required
Terrain
Clearance
(FT)
Required
Terrain Clearance
(FT)
700
200
100
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
Distance From Runway (NM)
Distance
From Runway (NM)
30
Figure 6-80 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FLTA alerts are automatically inhibited when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination runway
elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends.
Premature Descent Alerting
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly
below the normal approach path to a runway (Figure 6-81).
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is below 700 feet AGL within 15 nm of the destination airport and
ends when the aircraft is 0.5 nm from the runway threshold.
800
AFCS
600
500
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
400
300
PDA Alerting Area
200
APPENDICES
Height Above Destination (Feet)
700
100
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
Distance to Destination (NM)
Figure 6-81 PDA Alerting Threshold
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
361
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PDA and FLTA aural and visual alerts can be manually inhibited. Discretion should be used when inhibiting
TAWS-B and the system should be enabled when appropriate. When TAWS-B is inhibited, the alert
annunciation ‘TAWS INH’ is shown on the PFD and MFD (Figure 6-82).
Figure 6-82 TAWS-B Alerting Disabled
(TAWS Inhibited) Annunciation
EIS
Inhibiting/enabling TAWS-B alerting:
1) Select the TAWS-B Page.
2) Press the INHIBIT Softkey to inhibit or enable TAWS-B (choice dependent on current state).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Inhibit TAWS’ or ‘Enable TAWS’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If TAWS-B alerts are inhibited when the Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint in a GPS WAAS approach,
a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation may appear on the PFD next to the Altimeter if the current aircraft altitude is at
least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix. See the Flight Instruments Section for
details.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Five-Hundred Aural Alert
The purpose of the aural alert message “Five-hundred” is to provide an advisory alert that the aircraft is
500 feet above terrain or the destination runway elevation. When the aircraft reaches this altitude, the aural
message “Five-hundred” is generated. There are no display annunciations or pop-up alerts that accompany
the aural message.
AFCS
Negative Climb Rate After Takeoff Alert (NCR)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Takeoff alert (also referred to as “Altitude Loss After Takeoff”)
provides alerts when the system determines the aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff.
The aural message “Don’t Sink” is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by an annunciation and a pop-up terrain
alert on the display. NCR alerting is only active when departing from an airport and when the following
conditions are met:
• Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet
APPENDICES
• Distance from the departure airport is 5 nm or less
• Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110 degrees
INDEX
NCR alerts can be triggered by either altitude loss (Figure 6-83) or sink rate (6-84).
362
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1000
800
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
900
700
600
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
EIS
200
100
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
0
Altitude Loss (Feet)
Figure 6-83 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss
1000
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
800
700
600
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
900
200
100
AFCS
0
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
5500
6000
6500
7000
Sink Rate (FPM)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-84 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate
System Status
PFD/MFD Alert TAWS-B Page
Annunciation Annunciation
Alert Type
System Test in Progress
None
TAWS-B System Test Fail
Aural Message
TAWS TEST
None
None
Single Chime
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
INDEX
System Test Pass
APPENDICES
During power-up, TAWS-B conducts a self-test of its aural and visual annunciations. The system test can also
be manually initiated. A single chime is issued at test completion. TAWS-B System Testing is disabled when
ground speed exceeds 30 knots.
Table 6-10 TAWS-B System Test Status Annunciations
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
363
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Manually testing the TAWS-B System:
1) Select the TAWS-B Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) Select ‘Test TAWS System’ and press the ENT Key to confirm the selection. (Figure 6-85)
Figure 6-85 TAWS-B Page Menu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TAWS-B continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status, and
GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the aural message “TAWS System Failure” is
generated along with the ‘TAWS FAIL’ alert annunciation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAWS-B requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should the
navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
‘TAWS N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the TAWS-B Page. If in-flight, the aural message
“TAWS Not Available” is also generated. When the GPS signal is re-established and the aircraft is within the
database coverage area, the aural message “TAWS Available” is generated.
Additional
TAWS-B Page
Annunciation
Aural Message
Terrain, Airport Terrain, or
Obstacle database unavailable
or invalid on all GDUs; software
mismatch among GDUs; TAWS
configuration mismatch among
GDUs; TAWS audio fault
No GPS position, excessively
degraded GPS signal
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
NO GPS
POSITION
Out of database coverage area
None
“TAWS Not Available”*
“TAWS Available” when sufficient GPS signal is
re-established.
“TAWS Not Available”*
“TAWS Available”* when aircraft enters
database coverage area..
PFD/TAWS-B Page
Annunciation
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Alert Cause(s)
* Aural message occurs only while in-flight.
INDEX
Table 6-11 TAWS-B Abnormal Conditions
364
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.5 Terrain Awareness & Warning System (TAWS-A)
Warning: Do not use TAWS information for primary terrain avoidance. TAWS-A is intended only to enhance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft latitude is greater than 75° North or 60° South.
NOTE: The data contained in the TAWS databases comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately
EIS
processes and cross-validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TAWS-A (Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class A) is an optional feature to increase situational awareness
and aid in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). TAWS-A provides visual and aural annunciations when
terrain and obstacles are within the given altitude threshold from the aircraft. The displayed alerts and warnings
are advisory in nature only.
TAWS-A satisfies TSO-C151b Class A and TSO-92c requirements for certification.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Class A TAWS requires the following components:
• A valid terrain/obstacle/airport terrain database
• A valid 3-D GPS position solution
• Valid flap and landing gear status inputs
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• A valid radar altimeter
AFCS
TAWS-A uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources. Terrain information is based
on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may be
shown if available in the database. The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm accuracy of the content,
per TSO-C151b. However, the displayed information should never be understood as being all-inclusive and data
may be inaccurate.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TAWS-A uses information from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude, along with
additional altitude input from the radar altimeter. GPS altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS
altitude is converted to a mean sea level (MSL)-based altitude (GPS-MSL altitude) and is used in part to determine
TAWS-A alerts. GPS-MSL altitude accuracy is affected by factors such as satellite geometry, but it is not subject to
variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude devices. GPS-MSL altitude does not
require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. Therefore, GPS altitude provides a highly accurate and
reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts.
APPENDICES
The terrain and obstacle databases used by TAWS-A are referenced to mean sea level (MSL). Using the GPS
position and GPS-MSL altitude, TAWS-A displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative
to the position and altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, the GPS position and GPS-MSL altitude are used to
calculate and “predict” the aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this
manner, TAWS-A can provide advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
365
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Class A TAWS incorporates radar altimeter input with the GPS-MSL altitude to provide a more accurate position
reference when at lower altitudes for certain alert types, and to retain a level of ground proximity warning capability
in the unlikely event of an airport, terrain or obstacle database failure.
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric
conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter setting
to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because actual atmospheric conditions seldom
match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where pressure,
temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the baro-corrected altitude (as read from the
altimeter) to differ from the GPS-MSL altitude. This variation results in the aircraft’s true altitude differing from
the baro-corrected altitude.
TAWS-A provides the following alert types:
• Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) Alerting, which consists of:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) / Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC) Alerting
• Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) / Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) Alerting
• Premature Descent Alerting (PDA)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Ground Proximity Warning System (GPWS) Alerting, which consists of:
• Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) Alerting
• Excessive Closure Rate (ECR) to Terrain Alerting
• Flight Into Terrain (FIT) Alerting
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Negative Climb Rate (NCR) after takeoff Alerting
• Excessive below Glideslope/Glidepath Deviation (GSD) Alerting
• Altitude Voice Call Out (VCO) Alerting
AFCS
Displaying TAWS-A Data
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TAWS-A uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than
200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as the
aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 6-86 and Table 6-12 are used to represent terrain,
obstacles, and potential impact points.
Figure 6-86 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TAWS-B
366
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
Potential
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL Impact Points
Obstacle Location
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Red obstacle is above or within
100’ below current aircraft altitude
CAUTION: Yellow obstacle is between 100’
and 1000’ below current aircraft altitude
Table 6-12 TAWS-A Obstacle Colors and Symbology
EIS
TAWS-A Page
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The TAWS-A Page shows terrain, obstacle, and potential impact point data in relation to the aircraft’s current
altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be displayed
for reference. If an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect, the display automatically
zooms in to the closest potential point of impact on the TAWS-A Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
Displaying the TAWS-A Page:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the TAWS-A Page.
Changing the TAWS-A Page view:
1) Select the VIEW Softkey.
AFCS
2) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Select ‘View Arcº’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view
Showing/hiding aviation information on the TAWS-A Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
APPENDICES
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the
ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
367
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Red Terrain
(Warning - Terrain
Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Map Range
EIS
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Yellow Terrain
(Caution - Terrain
Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Terrain Legend
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Annunciation Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-87 TAWS-A Page, 360º View
AFCS
Red Terrain
(Warning - Terrain
Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Yellow Terrain
(Caution - Terrain
Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Map Range Arc
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
APPENDICES
Terrain Legend
Annunciation Window
INDEX
Figure 6-88 TAWS-A Page (ARC View)
368
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAWS-A Alerts
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within TAWS-A software algorithms.
TAWS-A alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert is
issued, visual annunciations are displayed and aural alerts are simultaneously issued. Table 6-9 shows TAWS-A
alert types with corresponding annunciations and aural messages.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The TAWS-A Alert Annunciation is
shown to the upper left of the Altimeter or upper right of the Airspeed indicator on the PFD and below the
Terrain Legend on the MFD. If the TAWS-A Page is not already displayed on the MFD, a pop-up alert appears
on the MFD while an alert is active. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
EIS
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the TAWS-A Page)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PFD with TAWS-A Annunciations
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
MFD Pop-Up Alert (on non-TAWS-A pages)
MFD TAWS-A Page with Alert Annunciation
Figure 6-89 Example TAWS-A Annunciations
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
369
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
PFD/MFD TAWS-A
Page
Annunciation
Alert Type
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
MFD Map Page
Pop-Up Alert
or
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
or
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
EIS
or
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
or
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up” *
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
*
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
*
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
*
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
“<whoop> <whoop> Pull Up”
Excessive Closure Rate Warning (ECR)
“<whoop> <whoop> Pull Up”
or
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
or
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
*
Excessive Descent Rate Warning (EDR)
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
or
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)
or
*
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”*
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
*
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
*
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
*
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”*
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
“Too Low, Terrain”
Excessive Descent Rate Caution (EDR)
“Sink Rate”
Excessive Closure Rate Caution (ECR)
“Terrain, Terrain”
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Premature Descent Alert Caution (PDA)
Negative Climb Rate Caution (NCR)
Flight Into Terrain High Speed Caution
(FIT)
“Too Low, Terrain”
APPENDICES
AFCS
Aural Message
Flight Into Terrain Gear Caution (FIT)
“Too Low, Gear”
Flight Into Terrain Flaps Caution (FIT)
“Too Low, Flaps”
Flight Into Terrain Takeoff Caution (FIT)
“Too Low, Terrain”
or
“Don’t Sink”*
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
*
Glide Slope Deviation Caution (GSD)
INDEX
(depends on approach type)
Altitude Voice Callout (VCO)
or
or
“Glideslope”
or
“Glidepath”
None
None
“Five-Hundred”*, “Four-Hundred”*, “Three-Hundred”*, “Two-Hundred”*, “One-Hundred”*
* Alerts with multiple messages are configurable. Alerts for the default configuration are indicated with asterisks.
Table 6-13 TAWS-A Alerts Summary
370
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come within the minimum
clearance values in Figure 6-90. When an RTC alert is issued, a potential impact point is displayed on the
TAWS-A Page.
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the
aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and IOI alerts are
accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the TAWS-A Page. The alert is annunciated when the
projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in Figure 6-90.
EIS
Required Terrain Clearance
RTC Level (FT)
RTC Descending (FT)
800
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
600
500
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Required
Terrain
Clearance
(FT)
Required
Terrain Clearance
(FT)
700
400
300
200
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
100
0
0
5
10
15
20
Distance From Runway (NM)
Distance
From Runway (NM)
25
30
Figure 6-90 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
AFCS
FLTA alerts are automatically inhibited when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination runway
elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Premature Descent Alerting
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly
below the normal approach path to a runway (Figure 6-91).
APPENDICES
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is below 700 feet AGL within 15 nm of the destination airport and
ends when the aircraft is 0.5 nm from the runway threshold.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
371
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
800
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Height Above Destination (Feet)
700
600
500
400
300
PDA Alerting Area
200
100
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
Distance to Destination (NM)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-91 PDA Alerting Threshold
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is below 700 feet AGL within 15 nm of the destination airport and
ends when the aircraft is 0.5 nm from the runway threshold.
Inhibiting FLTA and PDA Alerts
NOTE: The ‘Inhibit TAWS’ function only inhibits FLTA and PDA alerts. Alerting for GPWS alerts (EDR, ECR,
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NCR, FIT) and GSD is controlled independently from FLTA and PDA alerts.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
FLTA and PDA aural and visual alerts can be manually inhibited. Discretion should be used when inhibiting
alerts and the system should be enabled when appropriate. When PDA and FLTA alerts are inhibited, the
alert annunciation ‘TAWS INH’ is shown on the PFD and on the TAWS-A Page annunciation window of the
MFD (Figure 6-92).
INDEX
Figure 6-92 TAWS-A Page Menu and Inhibit Annunciation
372
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Inhibiting/enabling FLTA and PDA alerting:
1) Select the TAWS-A Page.
2) Select the TAWS INH Softkey to inhibit or enable TAWS-A (choice dependent on current state).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key. (Figure 6-92)
2) Select ‘Inhibit TAWS’ or ‘Enable TAWS’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
EIS
If PDA and FLTA alerts are inhibited when the Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint in a GPS WAAS
approach, a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation may appear on the PFD next to the Altimeter if the current aircraft
altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix. See the Flight Instruments
Section for details.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Excessive Descent Rate Alert
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide suitable notification when the
aircraft is determined to be closing (descending) upon terrain at an excessive speed. Figure 6-90 shows the
parameters for the alert as defined by TSO-C151b.
6000
5500
5000
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
INK
n: “S
4000
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4500
”
RATE
io
Caut
3500
3000
2500
AFCS
2000
Warning: “PULL UP”
1500
1000
12000
11000
10000
9000
8000
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
Descent Rate (FPM)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
0
0
500
Figure 6-93 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria
APPENDICES
Excessive Closure Rate Alert
The Excessive Closure Rate (ECR) alert provides suitable notification when the aircraft is determined to
be closing upon terrain at an excessive speed for a given aircraft gear and flap configuration.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
Figures 6-94 and 6-95 show the ECR alerting criteria for flaps in the landing configuration and for all other
flight phases respectively.
373
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ECR alerts are automatically inhibited when the aircraft is 5 nm from the nearest airport, except when FLTA
is not available (causing the TAWS N/A or TAWS FAIL annunciation to be displayed), in which case ECR
alerting will remain active until landing.
Closure Rate (FPM)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-94 Excessive Closure Rate Alert Criteria (Flaps Up or Takeoff Configuration)
Closure Rate (FPM)
INDEX
Figure 6-95 Excessive Closure Rate Alert Criteria (Flaps in Landing Configuration)
374
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Into TERRAIN ALERT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Into Terrain (FIT) alerts occur when the aircraft is too low with respect to terrain based on landing
gear status, flap position, and groundspeed. FIT caution alerts are issued when flight conditions meet the
criteria shown in Figure 6-96.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
EIS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
*
*
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude Change Rate (FPM)
* Flap position will not trigger alert if Flap Override option is enabled; see discussion below.
Figure 6-96 Flight Into Terrain Caution Alert Criteria
AFCS
To reduce nuisance FIT alerts on approaches where flap extension is not desired (or is intentionally delayed),
the pilot may override FIT alerting based on the flap position, while all other FIT alerting remains in effect.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-97 TAWS-A Page Menu and FIT Flap Override Annunciation
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
375
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Overriding Flaps-based FIT alerting:
1) Select the TAWS-A Page
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the FLAP OVR Softkey
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key. (Figure 6-97)
2) Select ‘Flap Override’ or ‘Disable Flap Override’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
EIS
When the Flaps Override option is enabled, the annunciation ‘FLAP OVR’ is annunciated on the PFD and
on the TAWS-A Page of the MFD (Figure 6-97). If GPWS alerts are also inhibited (which include FIT), the
‘FLAP OVR’ annunciation is not shown.
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FIT alerts also occur during takeoff or go-around if the aircraft’s height above ground level (as determined by
the radar altimeter) is too close to rising terrain. TAWS-A will issue the aural message “Too Low - Terrain”
and visual annunciations when conditions enter the caution alert area (Figure 6-98).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Radio Altitude Loss (Feet)
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-98 FIT Alerting After Takeoff
376
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Negative Climb Rate After Takeoff Alert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Takeoff alert (also referred to as “Altitude Loss After Takeoff”)
provides alerts when the system determines the aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff.
The aural message “Don’t Sink” is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by an annunciation and a pop-up terrain
alert on the MFD if the TAWS-A Page is not already displayed. NCR alerting for TAWS-A is only active when
departing from an airport and when the following conditions are met:
• Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet
• Distance from the departure airport is 5 nm or less
EIS
• Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110 degrees
• Landing gear or flaps are configured for takeoff
NCR alerts can be triggered by either altitude loss (Figure 6-99) or sink rate (6-100).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1000
800
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
700
600
500
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
400
300
200
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
900
100
0
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
AFCS
Altitude Loss (Feet)
Figure 6-99 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss
1000
800
700
600
APPENDICES
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
900
500
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
400
300
200
100
INDEX
0
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
5500
6000
6500
7000
Sink Rate (FPM)
Figure 6-100 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
377
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Inhibiting GPWS Alerts (EDR, ECR, FIT, and NCR)
NOTE: The ‘Inhibit GPWS’ function only affects GPWS alerts (EDR, ECR, NCR, and FIT). Alerting for FLTA,
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PDA, and GSD is controlled independently from the GPWS alerts listed below.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
EDR, ECR, FIT, and NCR aural and visual alerts can be manually inhibited as a group. Discretion should be
used when inhibiting alerts and the GPWS system should be enabled when appropriate. When these alerts
are inhibited, the alert annunciation ‘GPWS INH’ is shown on the PFD and on the TAWS-A Page annunciation
window of the MFD (Figure 6-101).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-101 TAWS-A Page Menu and GPWS Inhibit Annunciation
Inhibiting/enabling GPWS alerting:
1) Select the TAWS-A Page.
2) Select the GPWS INH Softkey to inhibit or enable GPWS alerts (choice dependent on current state).
AFCS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key. (Figure 6-101)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
b) Select ‘Inhibit GPWS’ or ‘Enable GPWS’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
378
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Excessive below Glideslope/Glidepath Deviation Alert
EIS
Radio Altitude (Feet)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Glideslope Deviation or Glidepath Deviation (GSD) caution alert is issued when the system detects
that the aircraft is significantly below the glidepath for the selected approach in relation to the aircraft’s height
above terrain (Figure 6-102).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
“GLIDESLOPE”
or
“GLIDEPATH”
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Number of Dots Below Glideslope/Glidepath
Figure 6-102 Excessive Below Glideslope/Glidepath Deviation Alert Criteria
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GSD alerting is only active after departure and the following conditions are met:
• An ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, or LNAV+V approach is active and vertical navigation indications are being
displayed.
• Aircraft is below 1000 feet AGL.
• Gear is configured for landing.
AFCS
When a GSD caution alert occurs on an ILS approach, the aural and visual annunciation ‘GLIDESLOPE’
is issued. If a GSD caution alert occurs on an LPV, LNAV/VNAV, or LNAV+V approach, the aural and visual
annunciation ‘GLIDEPATH’ is issued (Figure 6-103).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
379
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Inhbiting GSD Alerts
NOTE: GSD alerting may only be inhibited while a GSD alert is occurring. GSD alerts are inhibited
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
independently from all other FLTA, PDA, and GPWS alerts.
EIS
During a GSD alert, the PFD Softkeys are reconfigured as shown in figure 6-103 to provide an option to
inhibit the alert. A ‘GLIDESLOPE’ alert will display a GS INH Softkey to inhibit the alert. A ‘GLIDEPATH’
alert will display a GP INH Softkey to inhibit the alert. When an inhibit Softkey is pressed, the PFD Softkeys
return to the top-level display. Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level of the PFD Softkeys without
inhibiting the GSD alert.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
AFCS
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-103 GSD Glideslope Alert and PFD Softkeys
Altitude Voice Callout (VCO)
INDEX
APPENDICES
TAWS-A provides aural advisory alerts as the aircraft descends, beginning at 500 feet. When the aircraft is
500 feet above terrain or the destination runway elevation, the aural alert message “Five-hundred” is issued.
Maintenance personnel may enable additional VCO alerts for 400, 300, 200, and 100 feet. There are no
display annunciations or pop-up alerts that accompany the aural message(s). The flight crew cannot inhibit
VCO alerts.
380
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Status
TAWS System Fail
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
GPWS System Fail
None
“GPWS System Failure”
System Test in progress
TAWS TEST
None
None
“TAWS System Test OK”
System Test pass
None
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Aural Message
Alert Type
EIS
Additional
TAWS-A Page
Annunciation
PFD/MFD TAWS-A
Page Annunciation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During power-up, TAWS-A conducts a self-test of its aural and visual annunciations. The system test can also
be manually initiated. A single chime is issued at test completion. TAWS-A System Testing is disabled when
ground speed exceeds 30 knots. TAWS-A terrain alerts will not be issued while a test is in progress.
Table 6-14 TAWS-A System Test Status Annunciations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Manually testing the TAWS-A System:
1) Select the TAWS-A Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Test TAWS System’ and press the ENT Key to confirm the selection. (Figure 6-104)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-104 TAWS-A Page Menu
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
381
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAWS-A Abnormal operations
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hazard Avoidance
If no GDU contains Terrain, Airport Terrain, and Obstacle databases (or the databases are invalid), the aural
message “TAWS System Failure” is generated along with the ‘TAWS FAIL’ alert annunciation.
TAWS-A continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, flap and landing gear
position, radar altimeter input, and GPS status.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
TAWS-A requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should the
navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
‘TAWS N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the TAWS-A Page. The aural message “TAWS Not
Available” is also generated if airborne, and some TAWS-A terrain alerts will not be issued (Table 6-13), while
GPWS alerting (which are not dependent on GPS position) will continue to operate. When the GPS signal
is re-established and the aircraft is within the database coverage area, the aural message “TAWS Available” is
generated.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Class A TAWS also requires radar altimeter input. Should the radar altimeter input fail or become degraded,
the annunciation ‘GPWS FAIL’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the TAWS-A Page. The aural
message “GPWS System Failure” is also generated. The ‘GPWS FAIL’ annunciation will also occur if both GPS
altitude and barometric altitude are unavailable. If only the GPWS system has failed, GPWS-based alerts will
not be available (Table 6-15), while other TAWS-A alerting remains unaffected.
Additional
TAWS-A Page
Annunciation
Aural Message
Terrain, Airport Terrain, or
Obstacle database unavailable
or invalid on all GDUs; software
mismatch among GDUs; TAWS
configuration mismatch among
GDUs; TAWS audio fault
Radar Altimeter unavailable
or invalid, Vertical Speed
unavailable or invalid; GPS
and barometric pressure
unavailable or invalid; software
mismatch among GDUs; TAWS
configuration mismatch among
GDUs; TAWS audio fault
No GPS position, excessively
degraded GPS signal
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
None
“GPWS System Failure”
NO GPS
POSITION
Out of database coverage area
None
“TAWS Not Available”*
“TAWS Available” when sufficient GPS signal is
re-established.
“TAWS Not Available”*
“TAWS Available”* when aircraft enters
database coverage area.
PFD/TAWS-A Page
Annunciation
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Alert Cause(s)
*Aural message occurs in-flight only.
Table 6-15 TAWS-A Abnormal Status Alerts
382
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message Advisory
TAWS GEAR FAULT – Landing Gear
detected in the DOWN position.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alerts for ECR, FIT, NCR, and GSD conditions are determined in part by the landing gear and/or flap position
status sensors. If the aircraft exceeds VLE while the landing gear is reported to be extended, or VFE while the
flaps are reported to be extended, an advisory alert will appear on the PFD after 10 seconds. This advisory may
indicate possible sensor malfunction (if gear or flaps are in fact not extended), or aircraft misconfiguration. In
either case, TAWS-A alerting will continue to operate as if gear or flaps are extended.
Comments
Landing gear position sensors indicate gear is down while airspeed has exceeded VLE
for more than 10 seconds. TAWS-A alerting criteria will operate as if gear is down.
EIS
TAWS FLAP FAULT – Flaps detected in Flap position sensors indicate flaps are configured for landing while airspeed has
the LDG position.
exceeded VFE for more than 10 seconds. TAWS-A alerting criteria will operate as if
flaps are down..
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 6-16 TAWS-A PFD Advisory Alerts
If the aircraft bank angle exceeds 30˚, TAWS-A will disable ECR alerts. ECR alert availability returns when
the bank angle is reduced for at least eight seconds.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 6-17 shows the relationship between TAWS-A annunciations and their effects on individual TAWS-A
alert type availability. An ‘X’ denotes a TAWS-A alert type is available while the corresponding annunciation is
displayed.
TAWS-A Annunciation Displayed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAWS-A Alert Type
X
X
X
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
X
X
X
X
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
X
X
X
X
Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI)
X
X
X
X
Premature Descent Alert (PDA)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Excessive Closure Rate (ECR)
X
X
X
X
X
Negative Climb Rate (NCR)
X
X
X
X
X
Flight Into Terrain (FIT)
X
X
X
X
*X
Glideslope/Glidepath Deviation (GSD)
X
X
X
Altitude Voice Callout (VCO)
**X **X
X
APPENDICES
Excessive Descent Rate (EDR)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
X
AFCS
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC)
X
**X
X
X
X
INDEX
* Portions of FIT Alerting based on flap position are disabled when FLAP OVR annunciation is displayed.
** VCO alerts remain available unless both TAWS and GPWS systems have failed.
Table 6-17 TAWS-A Alert Type Availability
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
383
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
6.6 Traffic Information Service (TIS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: The Traffic Information Service (TIS) is intended for advisory use only. TIS is intended to help the
pilot locate traffic visually. It is the responsibility of the pilot to see and maneuver to avoid traffic.
NOTE: TIS is available only when the aircraft is within the service volume of a TIS-capable terminal radar
EIS
site. Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to both Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS) and TIS.
Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb descent
indication.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: TIS is disabled if a TAS is installed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Information Service (TIS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TIS uses the
Mode S transponder for the traffic data link. TIS receives traffic information from ground stations, and is updated
every 5 seconds. The system displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5-nm radius, from 3000 feet below to
3500 feet above the requesting aircraft. Traffic is displayed according to TCAS symbology.
TIS Symbol
Description
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Non-Threat Traffic
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
AFCS
Table 6-18 TIS Traffic Symbols
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic Advisories (TA) alert the crew to intruding aircraft. When traffic meets the advisory criteria for the TA,
a solid yellow circle symbol is generated. A TA which is detected but is outside the range of the map on which
traffic is displayed are indicated with a message in the lower left corner of the map.
APPENDICES
TIS also provides a vector line showing the direction in which the traffic is moving, to the nearest 45°. Traffic
information for which TIS is unable to determine the bearing (non-bearing traffic) is displayed in the center of the
Traffic Map Page (Figure 6-105) or in a banner at the lower left corner of maps other than the Traffic Map Page
on which traffic can be displayed.
INDEX
The altitude difference between the requesting aircraft and other intruder aircraft is displayed above/below the
traffic symbol in hundreds of feet. If the other aircraft is above the requesting aircraft, the altitude separation
appears above the traffic symbol; if below, the altitude separation appears below. Altitude trend is displayed as
an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than 500 fpm in either direction) to the right of the target symbol. Traffic
symbols for aircraft without altitude reporting capability appear without altitude separation or climb/descent
information.
384
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying TRAFFIC Data
Traffic information can be displayed on the following maps (when TIS is operating):
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Traffic Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• PFD Inset Map
Traffic information is also displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision System (SVS) option is installed and
enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
EIS
Displaying traffic information (maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, an icon is shown to indicate the feature is
enabled for display.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NonThreat
Traffic
AFCS
Traffic
Advisory
Traffic
Display
Enabled
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-105 TIS Traffic on the Navigation Map Page
APPENDICES
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
1) Select the INSET Softkey.
2) Select the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
3) Select the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
4) Select the softkey again to remove traffic data.
385
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of traffic. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which traffic data (symbols
and labels) are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use settings based on those selected for the
Navigation Map Page.
Customizing traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-106).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Traffic’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-107).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-108).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Alerts only
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown (with the option to turn off)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-106 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-107 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
386
Figure 6-108 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Traffic Map Page
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Traffic Map Page is specialized to show surrounding TIS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current
position and altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up
unless there is no valid heading. Map range is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 2 to 12 nm, as indicated
by the map range rings.
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is on the
ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches from Standby to
Operating Mode and the G1000 begins to display traffic information. Refer to the System Status discussion for
more information.
EIS
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Confirm TIS is in Operating Mode:
Press the OPERATE Softkey to begin displaying traffic.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ (shown if TIS is in Standby Mode) and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Mode Annunciation
“TIS Not Available”
Voice Alert Status
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Range
Marking
Rings
APPENDICES
Traffic Advisory
400’ Below,
Climbing
Non-Threat
Traffic
Traffic Status
Banner
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
Select
to Mute
“TIS Not
Available”
Voice Alert
INDEX
Figure 6-109 Traffic Map Page
190-00928-01 Rev. A
AFCS
Non-Threat
Traffic
“Non-Bearing” Traffic
(System Unable to
Determine Bearing)
Distance is 8.0 nm,
1100’ Above,
Descending
387
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
TIS Alerts
When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• A single “Traffic” voice alert is generated.
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ Annunciation appears to the top left of the Attitude Indicator on the PFD, flashing for 5 seconds
and remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with traffic.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
To reduce the number of nuisance alerts due to proximate aircraft, the “Traffic” voice alert is generated only
when the number of TAs increases. For example, when the first TA is displayed, a voice and visual annunciation
are generated. As long as a single TA remains on the display, no additional voice alerts are generated. If a second
TA appears on the display or if the number of TAs initially decreases and then subsequently increases, another
voice alert is generated.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
AFCS
Figure 6-110 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
A “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert is generated when the TIS service becomes unavailable or is out of
range. TIS may be unavailable in the radar coverage area due to the following:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Radar site TIS Mode S sensor is not operational or is out of service
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is beyond the maximum range of the TIS-capable Mode S radar site.
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is above the radar site in the cone of silence and out of range of an adjacent site.
APPENDICES
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is below radar coverage. In flat terrain, the coverage extends from about 3000
feet upward at 55 miles. Terrain and obstacles around the radar site can further decrease radar coverage in all
directions.
• Traffic does not have an operating transponder.
INDEX
The “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert can be manually muted to reduce nuisance alerting. TNA muting
status is shown in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
388
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Muting the “TIS Not Available” voice alert:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Press the TNA MUTE Softkey. The status is displayed in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘‘’Not Available” Mute On’ (shown if TNA muting is currently off) and press the ENT Key.
System Status
EIS
The G1000 performs an automatic test of TIS during power-up. If TIS passes the test, TIS enters Standby
Mode (on the ground) or Operating Mode (in the air). If TIS fails the power up test, an annunciation is shown
in the center of the Traffic Map Page.
FAILED
UNAVAILABLE
Description
Data is not being received from the transponder*
Data is being received from the transponder, but
a failure is detected in the data stream*
The transponder has failed*
TIS is unavailable or out of range
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DATA FAILED
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA
* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-19 TIS Failure Annunciations
System Test
Failed Status
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Data Not
Received from
Transponder
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-111 TIS Power-up Test Failure
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
389
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is on the
ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. If traffic is selected for display on another map while Standby
Mode is selected, the traffic display enabled icon is crossed out (also the case whenever TIS has failed). Once
the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches to Operating Mode and traffic information is displayed. The mode can be
changed manually using softkeys or the page menu.
Mode
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
TIS Operating
OPERATING
TIS Standby
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
TIS Failed*
FAIL
Traffic Display Enabled Icon
(Other Maps)
* See Table 6-15 for additional failure annunciations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 6-20 TIS Modes
Switching between TIS modes:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the STANDBY or OPERATE Softkey to switch between modes. The mode is displayed in the upper left
corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ or ‘Standby Mode’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key. The
annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner
of maps on which traffic can be displayed (Table 6-21).
390
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
TA X.X ± XX ↕
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TRFC COAST
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending)
Appears if traffic data is not refreshed within 6 seconds
If after another 6 seconds data is not received, traffic is removed from the display
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced as the age increases
The displayed data is not current (6 to 12 seconds since last message)
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced when this message is displayed
EIS
AGE MM:SS
Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TA OFF SCALE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
Traffic is removed because it is too old for coasting (12 to 60 seconds since last message)
Traffic may exist within the selected display range, but it is not displayed
TRFC RMVD
Traffic data has failed
Traffic has not been detected
The traffic service is unavailable or out of range
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
TRFC UNAVAIL
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-21 TIS Traffic Status Annunciations
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
391
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
6.7 L-3 Skywatch (Optional)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: The Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is intended for advisory use only. TAS is intended to help the
pilot locate traffic visually. It is the responsibility of the pilot to see and maneuver to avoid traffic.
NOTE: TIS is disabled when Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed.
EIS
NOTE: Refer to the SKYWATCH® (SKY497/SKY899) Pilot’s Guide for a detailed discussion of the TAS.
TAS Symbology
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The optional Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TAS
uses an on-board interrogator-processor and an altitude reporting transponder for the air-to-air traffic data link.
Traffic is displayed according to TCAS symbology using four different symbols.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TAS Symbol
Description
Non-Threat Traffic
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Proximity Advisory (PA)
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
AFCS
Table 6-22 TAS Symbol Description
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
A Non-threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond, indicates that an intruding aircraft is at greater than
±1200 feet relative altitude or the distance is beyond 5 nm.
A Proximity Advisory indicates that the intruding aircraft is within ±1200 feet and is within 5 nm range, but
is still not considered a threat.
INDEX
APPENDICES
A Traffic Advisory (TA) alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous intruding aircraft. Closing rate, distance,
and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A Traffic Advisory that is beyond the selected display range is indicated
by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of the intruder.
392
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Operation
The unit must be in operating mode for traffic to be displayed. The ability to switch from standby to operating
mode on the ground is especially useful for scanning the airspace around the airport before takeoff.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Switching from standby mode to operating mode:
1) On the Traffic Page, press the OPERATE Softkey or press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select
Operating Mode.
2) If using the FMS menu, press the ENT Key to place the TAS in the operating mode.
EIS
3) To switch to Standby Mode from the Traffic Page, press the STANDBY Softkey.
System Test
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Set the range to 2/6 nm.
2) Press the STANDBY Softkey.
3) Press the TEST Softkey. ‘TEST MODE’ is annunciated on the MFD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Self test takes approximately eight seconds to complete. When completed successfully, traffic symbols display
and a voice alert is heard to indicate the system test passed.
Displaying Traffic Data
Traffic information can be displayed on the following maps when the unit is operating:
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
• Traffic Map Page
• Nearest Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• PFD Inset Map
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision System (SVS) option is
installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
AFCS
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Press the OPERATE Softkey to begin displaying traffic. OPERATING is displayed in the Traffic mode field.
4) Press the ALT MODE Softkey to change the altitude volume.
APPENDICES
5) Press the STANDBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode. STANDBY is displayed in the Traffic mode
field.
6) Turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
393
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Operating
Mode
Traffic Display
Range
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Altitude
Mode
Traffic Advisory,
Aircraft is
400’ Below,
Climbing
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
“Non-Bearing”
Traffic (Bearing
Undetermined),
Distance 8.0 nm,
1100’ Above,
Descending
Proximity
Traffic, 1000’
Above,
Descending
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Off Scale
Traffic
Figure 6-112 Traffic Map Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding TAS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and
altitude, without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading.
Map range is adjustable with the RANGE Knob, as indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner.
Displaying traffic information (maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
AFCS
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, a traffic icon is shown to indicate TAS is
enabled for display.
394
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Traffic
Advisory
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Proximity
Traffic
EIS
Non-Threat
Traffic
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TA Off Scale
Banner
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Non-Bearing
Traffic
Advisories
Figure 6-113 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
3) Press the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
4) Press the softkey again to remove traffic data.
AFCS
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
395
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Altitude Display
Changing the altitude display mode:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) On the Traffic Page, press the ALT MODE Softkey.
EIS
2) Press one of the following Softkeys:
•
BELOW
•
NORMAL
•
ABOVE
•
UNREST (unrestricted)
3) To return to the Traffic Page, press the BACK Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following:
•
BELOW
•
NORMAL
•
ABOVE
•
UNREST (unrestricted)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the ENT Softkey.
Traffic Map Page Display Range
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
RANGE Knob from 2 to 40 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
AFCS
Changing the display range on the Traffic Page:
1) Turn the RANGE Knob.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) The following range options are available:
•
2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
•
12 and 24 nm*
•
24 and 40 nm*
INDEX
* Range available only on the SKY899 TAS.
396
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-114).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-115).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections (Figure 6-116).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Alerts and Proximity Advisories
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Alerts only
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-114 Navigation Map Page Menu
APPENDICES
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Figure 6-116 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
Figure 6-115 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
397
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
TAS Alerts
NOTE: Refer to the SKY497/SKY899 documentation for information on alerts generated by the TAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
equipment.
When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
• A “Traffic, Traffic” voice alert is generated.
EIS
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the top right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashing for 5 seconds and
remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with TA traffic
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
Figure 6-117 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
AFCS
System Status
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Mode
TAS Self-test Initiated
INDEX
APPENDICES
TAS Operating
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
TEST
(‘TEST MODE’ also shown in white on
top center of page)
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
OPERATING
TAS Standby
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
TAS Failed*
FAIL
* See Table 6-21 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-23 TAS Modes
398
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If the unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map Page.
DATA FAILED
FAILED
Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the
unit is self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
Table 6-24 TAS Failure Annunciations
EIS
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
TA OFF SCALE
NO TRFC DATA
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the
selected display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude
separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow
(climbing/descending)
TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TRFC FAIL
Description
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TA X.X ± XX ↕
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
AFCS
Table 6-25 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
399
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
6.8 Honeywell KTA 870 (Optional)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: The Traffic Information System (TAS) is intended for advisory use only. TAS is intended to help
the pilot locate traffic visually. It is the responsibility of the pilot to see and maneuver to avoid traffic.
NOTE: TIS is disabled when Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed.
EIS
NOTE: Refer to the Honeywell® KTA 870 Pilot’s Guide for a detailed discussion of the KTA 870 TAS.
TAS Symbology
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TAS uses an onboard interrogator-processor and the Mode S transponder for the air-to-air traffic data link. Traffic is displayed
according to TCAS symbology using four different symbols.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TAS Symbol
Description
Non-Threat Traffic
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Proximity Advisory (PA)
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
AFCS
Table 6-26 TAS Symbol Description
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
A Non-threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond, indicates that an intruding aircraft is at greater than
±1200 feet relative altitude or the distance is beyond 5 nm.
A Proximity Advisory indicates that the intruding aircraft is within ±1200 feet and is within 5 nm range, but
is still not considered a threat.
INDEX
APPENDICES
A Traffic Advisory (TA) alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous intruding aircraft. Closing rate, distance,
and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A Traffic Advisory that is beyond the selected display range is indicated
by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of the intruder.
400
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Operation
The KTA 870 must be in Operating Mode for traffic to be displayed. The unit starts in Operating Mode upon
power-up.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting the STANDBY Softkey forces the unit into Standby Mode. Selecting the NORMAL Softkey allows
the KTA 870 to switch from Standby Mode to Operating Mode as necessary.
Switching from operating mode to standby mode:
On the Traffic Page, select the STANDBY Softkey
EIS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select Standby Mode.
2) Press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Switching from standby mode to operating mode:
On the Traffic Page, select the NORMAL Softkey
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select Normal Mode.
2) Press the ENT Key. The KTA 870 switches from Standby Mode to Operating Mode as necessary.
System Self Test
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Set the range to 2/6 nm.
2) Select the TEST Softkey.
3) Self test takes approximately eight seconds to complete. When completed successfully, traffic symbols are
displayed and a voice alert “TAS System Test Passed” is heard. In the event that the system test fails, the system
reverts to Standby Mode and a voice alert “TAS System Test Failed” is heard.
AFCS
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Select the NORMAL Softkey to begin displaying traffic. OPERATING is displayed in the Traffic mode field.
4) Select the ALT MODE Softkey to change the altitude volume.
APPENDICES
5) Select the STANDBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode. STANDBY is displayed in the Traffic
mode field.
6) Turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
401
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Operating
Mode
Traffic Display
Range
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Altitude
Mode
Traffic Advisory,
Aircraft is
400’ Below,
Climbing
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
“Non-Bearing”
Traffic (Bearing
Undetermined),
Distance 8.0 nm,
1100’ Above,
Descending
Proximity
Traffic, 1000’
Above,
Descending
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Off Scale
Traffic
Figure 6-118 Traffic Map Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding TAS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and
altitude, without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading.
Map range is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 2 to 40 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner.
Displaying TRAFFIC Data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Traffic information can be displayed on the following maps when the KTA 870 unit is operating:
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Traffic Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
Displaying traffic information (maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
APPENDICES
1) Select the MAP Softkey.
2) Select the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
INDEX
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, a traffic icon is shown to indicate TAS is
enabled for display.
402
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying traffic on the Navigation Map
1) Ensure that the TAS system is operating. With the Navigation Map displayed, select the MAP Softkey.
2) Select the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map as shown in the figure.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic
Advisory
Proximity
Traffic
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Non-Threat
Traffic
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TA Off Scale
Banner
Non-Bearing
Traffic
Advisories
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-119 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
1) Select the INSET Softkey.
AFCS
2) Select the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
3) Select the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select the softkey again to remove traffic data.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
403
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Altitude Display
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Pilot can select the volume of airspace in which traffic is displayed. Traffic Advisories (TAs) outside of
these limits will still be shown. Refer to the KTA 870 Pilot’s Guide for specific display thresholds.
Changing the altitude display mode:
1) On the Traffic Page, select the ALT MODE Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Select one of the following Softkeys:
•
BELOW
•
NORMAL
•
ABOVE
•
UNREST (unrestricted)
3) To return to the Traffic Page, select the BACK Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following:
•
BELOW
•
NORMAL
•
ABOVE
•
UNREST (unrestricted)
3) Select the ENT Softkey.
Traffic Map Page Display Range
AFCS
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
RANGE Knob from 2 to 40 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
Changing the display range on the Traffic Page:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Turn the RANGE Knob.
•
2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
•
12 and 24 nm
•
24 and 40 nm
INDEX
APPENDICES
2) The following range options are available:
404
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-120).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-121).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections (Figure 6-122).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Alerts and Proximity Advisories
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Alerts only
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-120 Navigation Map Page Menu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-121 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-122 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
405
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
TAS Alerts
NOTE: Refer to the KTA 870 documentation for information on alerts generated by the TAS equipment.
EIS
When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
• A “Traffic, Traffic” voice alert is generated when the first TA is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the top right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashing for 5 seconds and
remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with TA traffic.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• A single “Traffic” voice alert is generated when the number of TAs increases.
AFCS
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-123 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
406
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Status
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
TAS Self-test Initiated
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
TEST
(‘TEST MODE’ also shown in white on
top center of page)
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Mode
EIS
OPERATING
TAS Operating
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
TAS Failed*
FAIL
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TAS Standby
* See Table 6-16 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-27 TAS Modes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map Page.
DATA FAILED
FAILED
Description
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the
unit is self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
AFCS
Table 6-28 TAS Failure Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
407
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
TA OFF SCALE
EIS
TA X.X ± XX ↕
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the
selected display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude
separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend
arrow (climbing/descending)
TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 6-29 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations
408
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Section 7 Automatic Flight Control System
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7.1 AFCS Overview
Note: The approved Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) and FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual (AFM)
always supersedes this Pilot’s Guide.
• GSA 80 AFCS Servos (4)
• GMC 710 AFCS Control Unit
• GSM 85A / GSM 86 Servo Gearboxes (4)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GDU 1040A Primary Flight Displays (PFDs) (2)
EIS
The GFC 700 is a digital Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS), fully integrated within the G1000 System
avionics architecture. The System Overview section provides a block diagram to support this system description.
GFC 700 AFCS functionality is distributed across the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units (IAUs) (2)
The GFC 700 AFCS can be divided into these main operating functions:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Flight Director (FD) — The Beechcraft 200/B200 has two flight directors, each operating within an IAU and
referred to as pilot-side and copilot-side. Commands for the selected flight director are displayed on both
PFDs.
The flight director provides:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
– Command Bars showing pitch/roll guidance
– Vertical/lateral mode selection and processing
– Autopilot communication
AFCS
• Autopilot (AP) — Autopilot operation occurs within the pitch, roll, and pitch trim servos. It also provides
servo monitoring and automatic flight control in response to flight director steering commands, Attitude and
Heading Reference System (AHRS) attitude and rate information, and airspeed.
• Yaw Damper (YD) — The yaw servo is self-monitoring and provides Dutch roll damping and turn coordination
in response to yaw rate, roll angle, lateral acceleration, and airspeed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Manual Electric Pitch Trim (MEPT) — The pitch trim servo provides manual electric pitch trim capability
when the autopilot is not engaged.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
409
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
AFCS Control Unit
The AFCS Control Unit is positioned above the MFD, and has the following controls:
HDG Key
APR Key
Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode
4
NAV Key
FD Key
5
XFR Key
Selects/deselects Navigation Mode
Activates/deactivates the flight director only
Pressing once turns on the selected flight director in the default vertical and lateral
modes. Pressing again deactivates the flight director and removes the Command
Bars. If the autopilot is engaged, the key is disabled.
Transfers between the pilot and copilot flight directors and controls which flight
director the autopilot is tracking
Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode
Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode
Selects/deselects Flight Level Change Mode
Adjust the Selected Course (while in VOR, LOC, or OBS Mode) in 1° increments on
the Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) of the corresponding PFD
Press to re-center the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) and return course pointer
directly TO the bearing of the active waypoint/station
Toggles Airspeed Reference between IAS and Mach for Flight Level Change Mode
Adjusts the reference in Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes
(see Table 7-2 for change increments in each mode)
Selects/deselects Vertical Path Tracking Mode for Vertical Navigation flight control
Controls the Selected Altitude in 100-ft increments (a finer resolution of 10 feet is
available under approach conditions)
Engages/disengages the yaw damper
Engages/disengages the autopilot
Manually selects/deselects Low Bank Mode
Selects/deselects Backcourse Mode
Adjusts the Selected Heading and bug in 1° increments on the HSI (both PFDs)
Press to synchronize the Selected Heading to the current heading on the pilot-side PFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
2
EIS
3
Selects/deselects Approach Mode
ALT Key
7 VS Key
8 FLC Key
17 CRS Knobs
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
9
SPD Key
11 NOSE UP/DN
Wheel
12 VNV Key
13 ALT SEL Knob
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
10
AFCS
14
15
16
18
1
2
3
4
19
18
17
16
5
6
7
13
12
8
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
19
YD Key
AP Key
BANK Key
BC Key
HDG Knob
15
14
11
10
Annunciator
Light
9
Figure 7-1 GMC 710 AFCS Control Unit
410
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional AFCS Controls
The following AFCS controls are located separately from the AFCS Control Unit:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AP/YD DISC TRIM Disengages the autopilot, yaw damper, and flight director and interrupts pitch trim
operation
INTRPT Switch
(Autopilot
An AP/YD DISC Switch is located on each control wheel.
Disconnect/Trim
This switch may be used to acknowledge an autopilot disconnect alert and mute the
Interrupt)
associated aural tone.
While pressed, allows manual control of the aircraft while the autopilot is engaged and
CWS Button
synchronizes the flight director’s Command Bars with the current aircraft pitch (if
(Control Wheel
not in a Vertical Navigation, Glideslope, or Glidepath Mode) and roll (if in Roll Hold
Steering)
Mode)
EIS
Upon release of the CWS Button, the flight director may establish new pitch and roll
references, depending on the current vertical and lateral modes. CWS operation
details are discussed in the respective mode sections of this manual.
Disengages the autopilot and selects flight director Takeoff (on ground) or Go Around
(in air) Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GA Button
(Go Around)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A CWS Button is located on each control wheel.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If an approach procedure is loaded this button also activates the missed approach when
the selected navigation source is GPS or when the navigation source is VOR/LOC and
a valid frequency has been tuned.
The GA Button is located on the left throttle.
Used to command manual electric pitch trim
MEPT Switch
(Manual Electric An MEPT Switch is located on each control wheel.
Pitch Trim)
The pilot side MEPT Switch has priority over the copilot side MEPT Switch.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
This composite switch is split into left and right sides. The left switch is the ARM
contact and the right switch controls the DN (forward) and UP (rearward) contacts.
Pushing the MEPT ARM Switch disengages the autopilot, if currently engaged, but
does not affect yaw damper operation. The MEPT ARM Switch may be used to
acknowledge an autopilot disconnect alert and mute the associated aural tone.
APPENDICES
Manual trim commands are generated only when both sides of the switch are operated
simultaneously. If either side of the switch is active separately for more than three
seconds, MEPT function is disabled and ‘PTRM’ is displayed as the AFCS Status
Annunciation on the PFDs. The function remains disabled until both sides of the
switch are inactivated.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
411
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
7.2 Flight Director Operation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The flight director function provides pitch and roll commands to the AFCS and displays them on the PFDs.
With the flight director active, the aircraft can be hand-flown to follow the path shown by the Command Bars.
Maximum commanded pitch (−15°, +20°) and roll (25°) angles, vertical acceleration, and roll rate are limited to
values established during AFCS certification. The flight director also provides commands to the autopilot.
Activating the Flight Director
EIS
An initial press of a key listed in Table 7-1 (when the flight director is not active) activates the pilot-side flight
director in the listed modes. The flight director may be turned off and the Command Bars removed from the
displays by pressing the FD Key again. The FD Key is disabled when the autopilot is engaged.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Control Pressed
ALT Key
VS Key
VNV Key
Lateral
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Takeoff (on ground)
Go Around (in air)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
NAV Key
Navigation**
BC Key
Backcourse***
APR Key
Approach**
HDG Key
Heading Select
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FD Key
AP Key
CWS Button
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GA Button
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Modes Selected
ROL
ROL
ROL
TO
GA
ROL
ROL
ROL
GPS
VOR
LOC
BC
GPS
VOR
LOC
HDG
Vertical
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Takeoff (on ground)
TO
Go Around (in air)
GA
Altitude Hold
ALT
Vertical Speed
VS
Vertical Path Tracking* VPTH
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
*Valid VNV flight plan must be entered before VNV Key press activates flight director.
**The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS
course before NAV or APR Key press activates flight director.
APPENDICES
***The selected navigation receiver must have a valid LOC signal before BC Key press
activates flight director.
INDEX
Table 7-1 Flight Director Activation
412
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AFCS Status Box
Lateral Modes
Yaw
Autopilot Damper
Status
Status
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight director mode annunciations are displayed on the PFDs when the flight director is active. Flight
director selection and autopilot and yaw damper statuses are shown in the center of the AFCS Status Box.
Lateral flight director modes are displayed on the left and vertical on the right. Armed modes are displayed in
white and active in green.
Vertical Modes
EIS
Armed
Active
Flight Director Active
Indicator Arrow
Mode
Reference
Armed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AFCS Status Box
Selected
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Command
Bars
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
AFCS
Figure 7-2 PFD AFCS Display
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
413
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Flight Director Modes
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight director modes are normally selected independently for the pitch and roll axes. Unless otherwise
specified, all mode keys are alternate action (i.e., press on, press off). In the absence of specific mode selection,
the flight director reverts to the default pitch and/or roll modes. Mode keys on the AFCS controller are
accompanied by annunciator lights (Figure 7-1) which are illuminated when their respective modes are armed
or active.
EIS
Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green in the AFCS Status Box. Under normal operation,
when the FD Key is pressed, the flight director reverts to the default mode(s) for the axis(es). Automatic
transition from armed to active mode is indicated by the white armed mode annunciation moving to the green
active mode field and flashing for 10 seconds.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If the information required to compute a flight director mode becomes invalid or unavailable, the flight
director automatically reverts to the default mode for that axis. A flashing yellow mode annunciation and
annunciator light indicate loss of sensor (ADC) or navigation data (VOR, LOC, GPS, VNV, WAAS) required to
compute commands. When such a loss occurs, the system automatically begins to roll the wings level (enters
Roll Hold Mode) or maintain the pitch angle (enters Pitch Hold Mode), depending on the affected axis. The
flashing annunciation stops when the affected mode key is pressed or another mode for the axis is selected. If
after 10 seconds no action is taken, the flashing annunciation stops.
Figure 7-3 Loss of VOR Signal
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The flight director is automatically disabled if the attitude information required to compute the default flight
director modes becomes invalid or unavailable.
Switching Flight Directors
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The GFC 700 in the Beechcraft 200/B200 has two flight directors, each operating within an IAU. The
autopilot follows the selected flight director only, indicated by an arrow pointing toward either the pilot or
copilot side, in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Flight directors may be switched by pressing the XFR Key.
The annunciator light arrow for the selected flight director is also illuminated beside the XFR Key. When the
flight directors are switched, the vertical and lateral modes revert to default.
Pilot-side Flight Director Selected
APPENDICES
Copilot-side Flight Director Selected
INDEX
Figure 7-4 Flight Director Selection Indications
414
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Command Bars
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Upon activation of the flight director, Command Bars are displayed in magenta on the PFDs as a single
cue or cross pointers. The Aircraft Symbol (in yellow) changes to accommodate the Command Bar format;
the Command Bars do not override the Aircraft Symbol. The single-cue Command Bars (Figure 7-5) move
together vertically to indicate pitch commands and bank left or right to indicate roll commands. Command
Bars displayed as a cross pointer (Figure 7-6) move independently to indicate pitch (horizontal bar) and roll
(vertical bar) commands. Both PFDs show the same Command Bar format.
Command Bars
EIS
Aircraft Symbol
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 7-5 Single-cue Command Bars
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Command Bars
Aircraft Symbol
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-6 Cross-pointer Command Bars
Changing Command Bar format:
AFCS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Format Active’ in the ‘Flight Director’ box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired format.
’SNGL CUE’ to display Command Bars as a single cue (Aircraft Symbol in figure 7-5).
Or:
’X-POINTER’ to display Command Bars as a cross pointer (Aircraft Symbol in Figure 7-6).
APPENDICES
If the attitude information being sent to the flight director becomes invalid or unavailable, the Command Bars
are removed from the display. The flight director Command Bars also disappear if the pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚
or bank exceeds 65˚.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
415
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
7.3 Vertical Modes
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Table 7-2 lists the vertical modes with their corresponding controls and annunciations. The mode reference is
displayed next to the active mode annunciation for Altitude Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes.
The NOSE UP/DN Wheel can be used to change the vertical mode reference while operating under Pitch Hold,
Vertical Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode. Increments of change and reference value ranges for each parameter
are also listed in the table.
EIS
Vertical Mode
Description
Control Annunciation
Reference
Range
Reference
Change
Increment
Holds the current aircraft pitch
-15° to
attitude; may be used to climb/ (default)
PIT
+20°
descend to the Selected Altitude
Selected Altitude Capture
Captures the Selected Altitude
*
ALTS
Altitude Hold
Holds the current Altitude Reference ALT Key ALT nnnnn ft
Maintains the current aircraft vertical
-4000 to
Vertical Speed
speed; may be used to climb/descend VS Key VS nnnn fpm
+4000 fpm
to the Selected Altitude
100 to
Flight Level Change, IAS Hold Maintains the current aircraft
FLC nnn kt
259 kt
airspeed (in IAS or Mach) while the
FLC Key
aircraft is climbing/descending to the
M 0.15 to
Flight Level Change, Mach Hold Selected Altitude
FLC M .nnn
0.52
Captures and tracks descent legs of VNV
Vertical Path Tracking
VPTH
an active vertical profile
Key
Captures the Vertical Navigation
VNV Target Altitude Capture
**
ALTV
(VNV) Target Altitude
Captures and tracks the WAAS
Glidepath
GP
glidepath on approach
APR
Key
Captures and tracks the ILS glideslope
Glideslope
GS
on approach
Commands a constant pitch angle
Takeoff
and wings level on the ground in
TO
8.6°
preparation for takeoff
GA
Button
Disengages the autopilot and
Go Around
commands a constant pitch angle
GA
8°
and wings level in the air
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pitch Hold
0.5°
100 fpm
1 kt
M 0.01
* ALTS armed automatically when PIT, VS, FLC, TO, or GA active, and under VPTH when Selected Altitude is to be captured
instead of VNV Target Altitude
** ALTV armed automatically under VPTH when VNV Target Altitude is to be captured instead of Selected Altitude
INDEX
Table 7-2 Flight Director Vertical Modes
416
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pitch Hold Mode (PIT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the flight director is activated (the FD Key is pressed) or switched (the XFR Key is pressed), Pitch Hold
Mode is selected by default. Pitch Hold Mode is indicated as the active vertical mode by the ‘PIT’ annunciation.
This mode may be used for climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter), since
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed when Pitch Hold Mode is activated.
In Pitch Hold Mode, the flight director maintains a constant pitch attitude, the pitch reference. The pitch
reference is set to the aircraft pitch attitude at the moment of mode selection. If the aircraft pitch attitude
exceeds the flight director pitch command limitations, the flight director commands a pitch angle equal to the
nose-up/down limit.
EIS
Changing the Pitch Reference
When operating in Pitch Hold Mode, the pitch reference can be adjusted by:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Using the NOSE UP/DN Wheel
• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to establish a new pitch reference, then releasing the
CWS Button
Selected Altitude
Capture Mode Armed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Command Bars Maintain
Desired Pitch Reference
Figure 7-7 Pitch Hold Mode
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
417
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Selected Altitude Capture Mode (ALTS)
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed with activation of the following modes:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Pitch Hold
• Takeoff/Go Around (if the Selected Altitude is at
least 400 feet above the current aircraft altitude)
• Vertical Speed
• Vertical Path Tracking (if the Selected Altitude is to
be captured instead of the VNV Target Altitude)
• Flight Level Change
EIS
The white ‘ALTS’ annunciation indicates Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed (see Figure 7-7 for example).
The ALT SEL Knob is used to set the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) until Selected Altitude
Capture Mode becomes active.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to Selected Altitude
Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed (Figure 7-8). This automatic transition is indicated by the green
‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation. The
Selected Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTS’ annunciation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from Selected Altitude
Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and holds the Selected Altitude (shown as the Altitude Reference). As Altitude
Hold Mode becomes active, the white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes
green for 10 seconds to indicate the automatic transition.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude Reference
(in this case, equal to
Selected Altitude)
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
AFCS
Figure 7-8 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Changing the Selected Altitude
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while in Selected Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Use of the ALT SEL Knob to change the Selected Altitude while Selected Altitude Capture Mode is active
causes the flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode with Selected Altitude Capture Mode armed for the
new Selected Altitude.
418
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Altitude Hold Mode (ALT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Altitude Hold Mode can be activated by pressing the ALT Key; the flight director maintains the current aircraft
altitude (to the nearest 10 feet) as the Altitude Reference. The flight director’s Altitude Reference, shown in the
AFCS Status Box, is independent of the Selected Altitude, displayed above the Altimeter. Altitude Hold Mode
active is indicated by a green ‘ALT’ annunciation in the AFCS Status Box.
Altitude Hold Mode is automatically armed when the flight director is in Selected Altitude Capture Mode (see
Figure 7-8). Selected Altitude Capture Mode automatically transitions to Altitude Hold Mode when the altitude
error is less than 50 feet. In this case, the Selected Altitude becomes the flight director’s Altitude Reference.
EIS
Changing the Altitude Reference
NOTE: Turning the ALT SEL Knob while in Altitude Hold Mode changes the Selected Altitude, but not the
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
flight director’s Altitude Reference, and does not cancel the mode.
With the CWS Button depressed, the aircraft can be hand-flown to a new Altitude Reference. When the
CWS Button is released at the desired altitude, the new altitude is established as the Altitude Reference.
Altitude
Reference
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
AFCS
Selected
Altitude
Bug
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
to Maintain Altitude Reference
Figure 7-9 Altitude Hold Mode
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
419
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Vertical Speed Mode (VS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In Vertical Speed Mode, the flight director acquires and maintains a Vertical Speed Reference. Current aircraft
vertical speed (to the nearest 100 fpm) becomes the Vertical Speed Reference at the moment of Vertical Speed
Mode activation. This mode may be used for climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the
Altimeter) since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed when Vertical Speed Mode is selected.
EIS
When Vertical Speed Mode is activated by pressing the VS Key, ‘VS’ is annunciated in green in the AFCS Status
Box along with the Vertical Speed Reference. The Vertical Speed Reference is also displayed above the Vertical
Speed Indicator. A Vertical Speed Reference Bug corresponding to the Vertical Speed Reference is shown on
the indicator.
Changing the Vertical Speed Reference
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Vertical Speed Reference (shown both in the AFCS Status Box and above the Vertical Speed Indicator)
may be changed by:
• Using the NOSE UP/DN Wheel
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Vertical Speed Reference, then releasing
the CWS Button
NOTE: If the Selected Altitude is reached during CWS maneuvering, the Altitude Reference is not changed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
To adjust the Altitude Reference in this case, the CWS Button must be pressed again after the Selected
Altitude is reached.
AFCS
Vertical Speed
Mode Active
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Selected
Altitude
Selected
Altitude Capture
Mode Armed
Vertical
Speed
Reference
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Bug
Command Bars Indicate Climb to
Attain Vertical Speed Reference
INDEX
Figure 7-10 Vertical Speed Hold Mode
420
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Level Change Mode (FLC)
NOTE: The Selected Altitude should be set before selecting Flight Level Change Mode.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Level Change Mode is selected by pressing the FLC Key. This mode acquires and maintains the
Airspeed Reference (in IAS or Mach) while climbing or descending to the Selected Altitude (shown above
the Altimeter). When Flight Level Change Mode is active, the flight director continuously monitors Selected
Altitude, airspeed, Mach, and altitude.
EIS
The Airspeed Reference is set to the current airspeed upon mode activation. Flight Level Change Mode is
indicated by a green ‘FLC’ annunciation beside the Airspeed Reference in the AFCS Status Box. The Airspeed
Reference is also displayed directly above the Airspeed Indicator, along with a bug corresponding to the Airspeed
Reference along the tape.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Engine power must be adjusted to allow the autopilot to fly the aircraft at a pitch attitude corresponding
to the desired flight profile (climb or descent) while maintaining the Airspeed Reference. The flight director
maintains the current altitude until either engine power or the Airspeed Reference are adjusted and does not
allow the aircraft to climb or descend away from the Selected Altitude.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Changing the Airspeed Reference
The Airspeed Reference (shown in both the AFCS Status Box and above the Airspeed Indicator) may be
adjusted by:
• Using the NOSE UP/DN Wheel
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Airspeed Reference, then releasing the
CWS Button
NOTE: If the Selected Altitude is reached during CWS maneuvering, the Altitude Reference is not changed.
To adjust the Altitude Reference in this case, the CWS Button must be pressed again after the Selected
Altitude is reached.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
During climb, the pilot must select the Airspeed Reference (IAS or Mach), automatic switching does not
occur. For descent, if Mach airspeed reference is selected (above 16,000 ft) the aircraft descends in Mach until
the Mach airspeed reference reaches 250 KIAS, at which point the airspeed reference automatically switches
to IAS. The system determines aircraft climb or descent by the relationship between the current and Selected
altitudes.
APPENDICES
Airspeed Reference units can be manually toggled between IAS and Mach units using the SPD Key. When
the FLC Airspeed Reference is displayed in Mach, the Airspeed Reference Bug is displayed on the Airspeed
Indicator at the IAS corresponding to the selected Mach target speed and the current Mach number is shown
only in the AFCS Status Box.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
421
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Level
Change Mode
Active
Airspeed
Reference
Selected
Altitude Capture
Mode Armed
EIS
Airspeed
Reference
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airspeed
Reference
Bug
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Command Bars Indicate Climb
to Attain Selected Altitude
Figure 7-11 Flight Level Change Mode (IAS)
AFCS
Airspeed
Reference
Bug
APPENDICES
Airspeed
Reference
(Mach)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight Level
Change Mode
Active
Airspeed
Reference
(Mach)
Selected
Altitude Capture
Mode Armed
Command Bars Indicate Climb
to attain Selected Altitude
INDEX
Figure 7-12 Flight Level Change Mode (Mach)
422
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Vertical Navigation Modes (VPTH, ALTV)
Note: VNV is disabled when parallel track or Dead Reckoning Mode is active.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: The Selected Altitude takes precedence over any other vertical constraints.
Vertical Navigation (VNV) flight control is available for enroute/terminal cruise and descent operations any
time that VNV flight planning is available. Refer to the GPS Navigation Section for more information on VNV
flight plans. Conditions for availability include, but are not limited to:
EIS
• The selected navigation source is GPS.
• A VNV flight plan (with at least one altitude-constrained waypoint) or vertical direct-to is active.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• VNV is enabled (VNV ENBL Softkey pressed on the MFD).
• Crosstrack error is valid and within certain limits.
• Desired/actual track are valid or track angle error is within certain limits.
• The VNV Target Altitude of the active waypoint is no more than 250 ft above the current aircraft altitude.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The flight director may be armed for VNV at any time, but no target altitudes are captured during a climb.
The Command Bars provide vertical profile guidance based on specified altitudes (entered manually or loaded
from the database) at waypoints in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to. The appropriate VNV flight control
modes are sequenced by the flight director to follow the path defined by the vertical profile. Upon reaching
the last waypoint in the VNV flight plan, the flight director transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and cancels any
armed VNV modes.
Vertical Path Tracking Mode (VPTH)
Note: If another vertical mode key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is selected, Vertical Path
AFCS
Tracking Mode reverts to armed.
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
autopilot guides the aircraft back to the descent path upon release of the CWS Button.
APPENDICES
When a vertical profile (VNV flight plan) is active and the VNV Key is pressed, Vertical Path Tracking
Mode is armed in preparation for descent path capture. ‘VPTH’ (or ‘/V’ when Glidepath or Glideslope Mode
is concurrently armed) is annunciated in white in addition to previously armed modes. If applicable, the
appropriate altitude capture mode is armed for capture of the next VNV Target Altitude (ALTV) or the Selected
Altitude (ALTS), whichever is greater.
INDEX
Figure 7-13 Vertical Path Tracking Armed Annunciations
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
423
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Prior to descent path interception, the Selected Altitude must be set below the current aircraft altitude
by at least 75 feet. For the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode,
acknowledgment is required within five minutes of descent path interception by:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Pressing the VNV Key
• Adjusting the Selected Altitude
EIS
If acknowledgment is not received within one minute of descent path interception, the white ‘VPTH’
annunciation starts to flash. Flashing continues until acknowledged or the descent path is intercepted. If
the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and the
descent is not captured.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In conjunction with the “TOD [top of descent] within 1 minute” annunciation in the PFD Navigation Status
Box and the “Vertical track” voice message, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, vertical deviation, and
vertical speed required) appear on the PFDs in magenta (Figure 7-14).
Vertical Path Tracking
Armed (Flashing Indicates
Acknowledgment Required
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VNV Target
Altitude
Selected
Altitude
AFCS
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
Enroute
Phase of
Flight
APPENDICES
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
INDEX
Figure 7-14 Vertical Path Capture
424
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When a descent leg is captured (i.e., vertical deviation becomes valid), Vertical Path Tracking becomes
active and tracks the descent profile (Figure 7-15). An altitude capture mode (‘ALTS’ or ‘ALTV’) is armed as
appropriate.
VNV Target Altitude
Capture Armed
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Vertical Path
Tracking Active
Command Bars Indicate Descent to
Maintain Required Vertical Speed
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
EIS
VNV Target
Altitude
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-15 Vertical Path Tracking Mode
AFCS
If the altimeter barometric setting is adjusted while Vertical Path Tracking is active, the flight director
increases/decreases the descent rate by up to 500 fpm to re-establish the aircraft on the descent path (without
commanding a climb). Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNV vertical
deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the aircraft to reestablish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target Altitude,
the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
425
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Reversion to Pitch Hold Mode
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Automatic Flight Control System
• Vertical deviation exceeds 200 feet during an overspeed condition.
Several situations can occur while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active which cause the flight director to
revert to Pitch Hold Mode:
• Vertical deviation experiences a discontinuity that both exceeds 200 feet in magnitude and results in the
vertical deviation exceeding 200 feet in magnitude. Such discontinuities are usually caused by flight plan
changes that affect the vertical profile.
• Vertical deviation becomes invalid (the Vertical Deviation Indicator is removed from the PFD).
EIS
• A display enters Reversionary Mode (this does not apply to an active vertical direct-to).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Unless VNV is disabled, Vertical Path Tracking Mode and the appropriate altitude capture mode become
armed following the reversion to Pitch Hold Mode to allow for possible profile recapture.
Non-Path Descents
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes can also be used to fly non-path descents
while VNV flight control is selected. If the VS or FLC Key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is
selected, Vertical Path Tracking Mode reverts to armed along with the appropriate altitude capture mode to
allow profile re-capture.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-16 Flight Level Change VNV Non-Path Descent
To prevent immediate profile re-capture, the following must be satisfied:
• At least 10 seconds have passed since the non-path transition was initiated
• Vertical deviation from the profile has exceeded 250 feet, but is now less than 200 feet
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Pressing the VNV Key twice re-arms Vertical Path Tracking for immediate profile re-capture.
426
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode (ALTV)
Note: Armed VNV Target Altitude and Selected Altitude capture modes are mutually exclusive. However,
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed implicitly (not annunciated) whenever VNV Target Altitude Capture
Mode is armed.
EIS
VNV Target Altitude Capture is analogous to Selected Altitude Capture Mode and is armed automatically
after the VNV Key is pressed and the next VNV Target Altitude is to be intercepted before the Selected
Altitude. The annunciation ‘ALTV’ indicates that the VNV Target Altitude is to be captured. VNV Target
Altitudes are shown in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to, and can be entered manually or loaded
from a database (see the GPS Navigation Section for details). At the same time as “TOD within 1 minute”
is annunciated in the Navigation Status Box, the active VNV Target Altitude is displayed above the Vertical
Speed Indicator (see Figure 7-14).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to VNV Target
Altitude Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed. This automatic transition is indicated by the green
‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation. The
VNV Target Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTV’ annunciation and remains displayed
above the Vertical Speed Indicator. The Required Vertical Speed Indication (RSVI) is removed once VNV
Target Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
At 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from VNV Target
Altitude Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and tracks the level leg. As Altitude Hold Mode becomes active, the
white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes green for 10 seconds to indicate
the automatic transition. The flight director automatically arms Vertical Path Tracking, allowing upcoming
descent legs to be captured and subsequently tracked.
Altitude Reference (In This Case,
Equal To VNV Altitude Target)
AFCS
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-17 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
Changing the VNV Target Altitude
APPENDICES
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while in VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.
INDEX
Changing the current VNV Target Altitude while VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode is active causes the
flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode. Vertical Path Tracking and the appropriate altitude capture
mode are armed in preparation to capture the new VNV Target Altitude or the Selected Altitude, depending
on which altitude is to be intercepted first.
VNV target altitudes can be changed while editing the active flight plan (see the GPS Navigation Section
for details).
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
427
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Glidepath Mode (GP)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Glidepath Mode is used to track the WAAS-based glidepath. When Glidepath Mode is armed, ‘GP’ is
annunciated in white in the AFCS Status Box.
Selecting Glidepath Mode:
1) Ensure a GPS approach with vertical guidance (LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LNAV +V) is loaded into the active flight plan.
The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan (cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
EIS
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
NOTE: Some RNAV (GPS) approaches provide a vertical descent angle as an aid in flying a stabilized
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
approach. These approaches are NOT considered Approaches with Vertical Guidance (APV). Approaches
that are annunciated on the HSI as LNAV or LNAV+V are considered Nonprecision Approaches (NPA) and
are flown to an MDA even though vertical glidepath (GP) information may be provided.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
WARNING: When flying an LNAV approach (with vertical descent angle) with the autopilot coupled, the
aircraft will not level off at the MDA even if the MDA is set in the altitude preselect.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Upon reaching the glidepath, the flight director transitions to Glidepath Mode and begins to capture and
track the glidepath.
Figure 7-18 Glidepath Mode Armed
Once the following conditions have been met, the glidepath can be captured:
AFCS
• The active waypoint is at or after the final approach fix (FAF).
• Vertical deviation is valid.
• The CDI is at less than full-scale deviation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints has not been suspended (no ‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI)
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Glidepath Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot
INDEX
APPENDICES
guides the aircraft back to the glidepath upon release of the CWS Button.
428
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GPS Approach
Mode Active
Glidepath
Mode Active
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Command Bars Indicate
Descent on Glidepath
Figure 7-19 Glidepath Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
LNAV/VNAV
Approach
Active
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
Glidepath
Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
429
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Glideslope Mode (GS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Glideslope Mode is available for LOC/ILS approaches to capture and track the glideslope. When Glideslope
Mode is armed (annunciated as ‘GS’ in white), LOC Approach Mode is armed as the lateral flight director
mode.
Selecting Glideslope Mode:
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
EIS
3) Press the APR Key.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the APR Key.
Figure 7-20 Glideslope Mode Armed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Once LOC is the navigation source, the localizer and glideslope can be captured. Upon reaching the glideslope,
the flight director transitions to Glideslope Mode and begins to capture and track the glideslope.
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Glideslope Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot
guides the aircraft back to the glideslope upon release of the CWS Button.
Approach
Mode Active
Glideslope
Mode Active
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Active ILS
Frequency Tuned
NAV2 (localizer) is Selected
Navigation Source
Command Bars Indicate Descent
on Localizer/Glideslope Path
Figure 7-21 Glideslope Mode
430
Glideslope
Indicator
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Takeoff (TO) and Go Around (GA) Modes
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Go Around and Takeoff modes are coupled pitch and roll modes and are annunciated as both the vertical and
lateral modes when active. In these modes, the flight director commands a constant set pitch attitude and keeps
the wings level. The GA Button is used to select both modes. The mode entered by the flight director depends
on whether the aircraft is on the ground.
Takeoff Mode provides an attitude reference during rotation and takeoff. This mode can be selected only
while on the ground by pushing the GA Button. The flight director Command Bars assume a wings-level,
pitch-up attitude.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Autopilot Disconnect
Annunciation Flashes
Yellow 5 sec
EIS
Pressing the GA Button while in the air activates the flight director in a wings-level, pitch-up attitude,
allowing the execution of a missed approach or a go around. Go Around Mode disengages the autopilot and
arms Selected Altitude Capture Mode automatically. Subsequent autopilot engagement is allowed. Attempts
to modify the aircraft attitude (i.e., with the NOSE UP/DN Wheel or CWS Button) result in reversion to Pitch
and Roll Hold modes.
Go Around
Mode Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Command Bars Indicate Climb
Takeoff Mode Active
APPENDICES
Figure 7-22 Takeoff and Go Around Modes
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
431
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
7.4 Lateral Modes
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following table relates each GFC 700 lateral mode to its respective control and annunciation. Refer to the
vertical modes section for information regarding Go Around and Takeoff modes.
Lateral Mode
EIS
Roll Hold
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Low Bank
Heading Select
Description
Control Annunciation
Holds the current aircraft roll
attitude or rolls the wings level,
(default)
depending on the commanded
bank angle
Limits the maximum commanded BANK
roll angle
Key
Captures and tracks the Selected HDG
Heading
Key
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation, GPS Arm/Capture/Track
Captures and tracks the selected
Navigation, VOR Enroute Arm/Capture/Track
NAV
navigation source (GPS, VOR,
Key
Navigation, LOC Arm/Capture/Track
LOC)
(No Glideslope)
Captures and tracks a
Backcourse Arm/Capture/Track
localizer signal for backcourse BC Key
approaches
Approach, GPS Arm/Capture/Track
Captures and tracks the selected
Approach, VOR Arm/Capture/Track
navigation source (GPS, VOR, APR Key
Approach, ILS Arm/Capture/Track
LOC)
(Glideslope Mode automatically armed)
Disengages the autopilot and
commands a constant pitch angle
Takeoff
and wings level on the ground in
GA
preparation for takeoff
Button
Disengages the autopilot and
Go Around
commands a constant pitch
angle and wings level in the air
Maximum Roll
Command Limit
ROL
25°
*
15°
HDG
25°
GPS
VOR
25°
25°
LOC
25°
BC
25°
GPS
VAPP
25°
25°
LOC
25°
TO
Wings Level
GA
Wings Level
* No annunciation appears in the AFCS Status Box. The acceptable bank angle range is indicated in green along the Roll
Scale of the Attitude Indicator.
APPENDICES
Table 7-3 Flight Director Lateral Modes
INDEX
The CWS Button does not change lateral references for Heading Select, Navigation, Backcourse, or Approach
Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Heading/Course upon release of the CWS Button.
432
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Roll Hold Mode (ROL)
Note: If Roll Hold Mode is activated as a result of a mode reversion, the flight director rolls the wings
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
level.
When the flight director is activated or switched, Roll Hold Mode is selected by default. This mode is
annunciated as ‘ROL’ in the AFCS Status Box. The current aircraft bank angle is held, subject to the bank angle
condition.
EIS
Figure 7-23 Roll Hold Mode Annunciation
Flight Director Response
Rolls wings level
Maintains current aircraft roll attitude
Limits bank to 25°
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Bank Angle
< 6°
6 to 25°
> 25°
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 7-4 Roll Hold Mode Responses
Changing the Roll Reference
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The roll reference can be changed by pressing the CWS Button, establishing the desired bank angle, then
releasing the CWS Button.
Low Bank Mode
When in Low Bank Mode, the flight director limits the maximum commanded roll angle to 15°. Low bank
arc limits are displayed in green along the Roll Scale.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Low Bank Mode can be manually selected/deselected by pressing the BANK Key while in Heading Select or
Navigation Modes (GPS and VOR). Low Bank Mode is activated automatically above 20,500 feet. The flight
director deactivates Low Bank Mode when descending through 20,500 feet. The annunciator light next to the
BANK Key illuminates while Low Bank Mode is selected.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 7-24 Low Bank Mode Limits
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
433
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Heading Select Mode (HDG)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Heading Select Mode is activated by pressing the HDG Key. Heading Select Mode acquires and maintains
the Selected Heading. The Selected Heading is shown by a light blue bug on the HSI and in the box to the
upper left of the HSI.
Changing the Selected Heading
Note: Pressing the HDG Knob synchronizes the Selected Heading to the current heading.
EIS
The Selected Heading is adjusted using the HDG Knob on either PFD. Pressing the CWS Button and
hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Heading. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the
Selected Heading upon release of the CWS Button.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Turns are commanded in the same direction as Selected Heading Bug movement, even if the bug is turned
more than 180° from the present heading (e.g., a 270° turn to the right). However, Selected Heading
changes of more than 330° at a time result in turn reversals.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Heading Select
Mode Active
Selected
Heading
Selected
Heading
Bug
Command Bars Track
Selected Heading
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-25 Heading Select Mode
434
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Navigation Modes (GPS, VOR, LOC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
flight director to enter Navigation Mode.
Pressing the NAV Key selects Navigation Mode. Navigation Mode acquires and tracks the selected navigation
source (GPS, VOR, LOC). The flight director follows GPS roll steering commands when GPS is the selected
navigation source. When the navigation source is VOR or LOC, the flight director creates roll steering commands
from the Selected Course and deviation. Navigation Mode can also be used to fly non-precision GPS and LOC
approaches where vertical guidance is not required.
EIS
If the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) shows greater than one dot when the NAV Key is pressed, the selected
mode is armed. If the CDI shows less than one dot, Navigation Mode is automatically captured when the NAV
Key is pressed. The armed annunciation appears in white to the left of the active lateral mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 7-26 GPS Navigation Mode Armed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the CDI has automatically switched from GPS to LOC during a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation
Mode remains active, providing GPS steering guidance until the localizer signal is captured. LOC Navigation
Mode is armed automatically when the navigation source switch takes place if the APR Key is not pressed prior
to the automatic source switch.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If Navigation Mode is active and either of the following occur, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode
(wings rolled level):
• Different VOR tuned while in VOR Navigation Mode (VOR Navigation Mode reverts to armed)
• Navigation source manually switched (with the CDI Softkey)
AFCS
• During a LOC/ILS approach, the FAF is crossed while in GPS Navigation Mode after the automatic navigation
source switch from GPS to LOC
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
435
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Changing the Selected Course
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob corresponding to the selected flight director (CRS1 for the pilot
side, CRS2 for the copilot side).
Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in
Navigation Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or GPS flight plan) when the
CWS Button is released.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
GPS Navigation
Mode Active
GPS is Selected
Navigation Source
Selected
Course
Command Bars Indicate Left
Turn to Track GPS Course
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 7-27 Navigation Mode
436
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Approach Modes (GPS, VAPP, LOC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
flight director to enter Approach Mode.
Approach Mode is activated when the APR Key is pressed. Approach Mode acquires and tracks the selected
navigation source (GPS, VOR, or LOC), depending on loaded approach. This mode uses the selected navigation
receiver deviation and desired course inputs to fly the approach. Pressing the APR Key when the CDI is greater
than one dot arms the selected approach mode (annunciated in white to the left of the active lateral mode). If
the CDI is less the 1 dot, the LOC is automatically captured when the APR Key is pressed.
EIS
VOR Approach Mode (VAPP) provides greater sensitivity for signal tracking than VOR Navigation Mode.
Selecting VOR Approach Mode:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Ensure a valid VOR frequency is tuned
2) Ensure that VOR is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the APR Key.
When GPS Approach Mode is armed, Glidepath Mode is also armed.
Selecting GPS Approach Mode:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Ensure a GPS approach is loaded into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan
(cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
AFCS
Figure 7-28 GPS Approach Mode Armed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
437
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
LOC Approach Mode allows the autopilot to fly a LOC/ILS approach with a glideslope. When LOC Approach
Mode is armed, Glideslope Mode is also armed automatically. LOC captures are inhibited if the difference
between aircraft heading and localizer course exceeds 105°.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting LOC Approach Mode:
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
EIS
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
4) Press the APR Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the following occurs, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level):
• Approach Mode is active and a Vectors-To-Final is activated
• Approach Mode is active and Navigation source is manually switched
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• During a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation Mode is active and the FAF is crossed after the automatic
navigation source switch from GPS to LOC
Changing the Selected Course
AFCS
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob corresponding to the selected flight director (CRS1 for the pilot
side, CRS2 for the copilot side).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in
Approach Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or GPS flight plan) when the
CWS Button is released.
Backcourse Mode (BC)
NOTE: When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the localizer front course.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Backcourse Mode captures and tracks a localizer signal in the backcourse direction. The mode may be
selected by pressing the BC Key. Backcourse Mode is armed if the CDI is greater than one dot when the mode
is selected. If the CDI is less than one dot, Backcourse Mode is automatically captured when the BC Key is
pressed. The flight director creates roll steering commands from the Selected Course and deviation when in
Backcourse Mode.
438
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Backcourse
Mode Active
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
LOC2 is Selected Navigation Source
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-29 Backcourse Mode
Changing the Selected Course
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob corresponding to the selected flight director (CRS1 for the pilot
side, CRS2 for the copilot side).
Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not reset any reference data while in Backcourse
Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course when the CWS Button is released.
AFCS
intercepting and flying a dme arc
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The AFCS will intercept and track a DME arc that is part of the active flight plan provided that GPS
Navigation Mode is engaged, GPS is the active navigation source on the CDI, and the DME arc segment is
the active flight plan leg. It is important to note that automatic navigation of DME arcs is based on GPS.
Thus, even if the APR key is pressed and LOC or VOR Approach Mode is armed prior to reaching the Initial
Approach Fix (IAF), Approach Mode will not activate until the arc segment is completed.
APPENDICES
If the pilot decides to intercept the arc at a location other than the published IAF (i.e. ATC provides vectors
to intercept the arc) and subsequently selects Heading Mode or Roll Mode, the AFCS will not automatically
intercept or track the arc unless the pilot activates the arc leg of the flight plan and arms GPS Navigation
Mode. The AFCS will not intercept and fly a DME arc before reaching an IAF that defines the beginning of the
arc segment. Likewise, if at any point while established on the DME arc the pilot deselects GPS Navigation
Mode, the AFCS will no longer track the arc.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
439
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
7.5 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Operation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the POH/AFM for specific instructions regarding emergency procedures.
The autopilot and yaw damper operate the flight control surface servos to provide automatic flight control. The
autopilot controls the aircraft pitch and roll attitudes following commands received from the flight director. Pitch
autotrim provides trim commands to the pitch trim servo to relieve any sustained effort required by the pitch
servo. Autopilot operation is independent of the yaw damper.
EIS
The yaw damper reduces Dutch roll tendencies and coordinates turns. It can operate independently of the
autopilot and may be used during normal hand-flight maneuvers. Yaw rate commands are limited to 6 deg/sec
by the yaw damper.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight Control
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pitch and roll commands are provided to the servos based on the active flight director modes. Yaw damping
is provided by the yaw servo. Servo motor control limits the maximum servo speed and torque. The servo
gearboxes are equipped with slip-clutches set to certain values. This allows the servos to be overridden in case
of an emergency.
Pitch Axis and Trim
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The autopilot pitch axis uses pitch rate to stabilize the aircraft pitch attitude during flight director maneuvers.
Flight director pitch commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with pitch damper control, and sent
to the pitch servo motor. The pitch servo measures the output effort (torque) and provides this signal to the
pitch trim servo. The pitch trim servo commands the motor to reduce the average pitch servo effort.
AFCS
When the autopilot is not engaged, the pitch trim servo may be used to provide manual electric pitch
trim (MEPT). This allows the aircraft to be trimmed using a control wheel switch rather than the trim
wheel. Manual trim commands are generated only when both halves of the MEPT Switch are operated
simultaneously. Trim speeds are scheduled with airspeed to provide more consistent response.
The pilot side MEPT Switch has priority over the copilot side MEPT Switch.
Roll Axis
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The autopilot roll axis uses roll rate to stabilize aircraft roll attitude during flight director maneuvers. The
flight director roll commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with roll damper control, and sent to
the roll servo motor.
APPENDICES
Yaw Axis
INDEX
The yaw damper uses yaw rate and roll attitude to dampen the aircraft’s natural Dutch roll response. It also
uses lateral acceleration to coordinate turns.
440
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Engagement
NOTE: Autopilot engagement/disengagement is not equivalent to servo engagement/disengagement. Use
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
the CWS Button to disengage the pitch and roll servos while the autopilot remains active.
When the AP Key is pressed, the autopilot, yaw damper, and flight director (if not already active) are activated
and the annunciator lights on the AFCS controller for the autopilot and yaw damper are illuminated. The flight
director engages in Pitch and Roll Hold Modes when initially activated.
Yaw Damper
Engaged
EIS
Autopilot
Engaged
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 7-30 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Engaged
When the YD Key is pressed, the system engages the yaw damper independently of the autopilot and the yaw
damper annunciator light is illuminated.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Autopilot and yaw damper status are displayed in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Engagement is indicated
by green ‘AP’ and ‘YD’ annunciations, respectively.
Control Wheel Steering
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
During autopilot operation, the aircraft may be hand-flown without disengaging the autopilot. Pressing and
holding the CWS Button disengages the pitch and roll servos from the flight control surfaces and allows the
aircraft to be hand-flown. At the same time, the flight director is synchronized to the aircraft attitude during
the maneuver. CWS activity has no effect on yaw damper engagement.
The ‘AP’ annunciation is temporarily replaced by ‘CWS’ in white for the duration of CWS maneuvers.
Control Wheel Steering
AFCS
Figure 7-31 CWS Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In most scenarios, releasing the CWS Button reengages the autopilot with a new reference. Refer to flight
director mode descriptions for specific CWS behavior in each mode.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
441
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Disengagement
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The autopilot is manually disengaged by pushing the AP Key on the AFCS Control Unit, the GA Button, or
the MEPT ARM Switch. Manual autopilot disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘AP’
annunciation and a three-second autopilot disconnect aural alert.
Figure 7-32 Manual Autopilot Disengagement
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Pushing the AP/YD DISC Switch or YD Key disengages both the yaw damper and the autopilot. When the
yaw damper and autopilot are manually disengaged, both the ‘AP’ and ‘YD’ annunciation turn yellow and flash
for 5 seconds and a three-second autopilot disconnect aural alert is generated.
Figure 7-33 Yaw Damper Disengagement
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
After manual disengagement, the autopilot disconnect aural alert may be cancelled by pushing the MEPT ARM
or AP/YD DISC Switch (AP/YD DISC Switch also cancels the flashing ‘AP’ annunciation).
Automatic autopilot disengagement is indicated by a flashing red and white ‘AP’ annunciation and by the
autopilot disconnect aural alert, which continue until acknowledged by pushing the AP/YD DISC or MEPT ARM
Switch. Automatic autopilot disengagement occurs due to:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• System failure
• Invalid sensor data
• Inability to compute default flight director modes (FD also disengages automatically)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Yaw damper disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘YD’ annunciation. Automatic yaw
damper disengagement occurs when autopilot disengagement is caused by failure in a parameter also affecting
the yaw damper. This means the yaw damper can remain operational in some cases where the autopilot
automatically disengages. A localized failure in the yaw damper system or invalid sensor data also cause yaw
damper disengagement.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-34 Automatic Autopilot and Yaw Damper Disengagement
442
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.6 Example Flight Plan
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: The following example flight plan and diagrams (not to be used for navigation) in this section are
for instructional purposes only and should be considered not current. Numbered portions of accompanying
diagrams correspond to numbered procedure steps.
EIS
This scenario-based set of procedures (based on the example flight plan found in the Flight Management
Section) shows various GFC 700 AFCS modes used during a flight. In this scenario, the aircraft departs Charles
B. Wheeler Downtown Airport (KMKC), enroute to Colorado Springs Airport (KCOS). After departure, the
aircraft climbs to 12,000 ft and airway V4 is intercepted, following ATC vectors.
0
33
30
3
27
30
30
27
24
24
21
30
24
27
15
27
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
12
21
18
15
18
9
24
21
12
6
Lamar
VOR
(LAA)
Topeka
VOR
(TOP)
12
Hays
VOR
(HYS)
9
V 244
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
9
3
V4
18
V 244
9
6
0
33
KMKC
15
6
KCOS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
3
6
0
33
0
33
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airway V4 is flown to Salina VOR (SLN) using VOR navigation, then airway V244 is flown using GPS Navigation.
The ILS approach for runway 35L and LPV (WAAS) approach for runway 35R are shown and a missed approach
is executed.
12
21
15
18
Figure 7-35 Flight Plan Overview
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
443
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Departure
Climbing to the Selected Altitude and flying an assigned heading:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Before takeoff:
a) Use the ALT SEL Knob to set the Selected Altitude to 12,000 feet.
EIS
b) Push the GA Button to activate Takeoff Mode. The flight director Command Bars establish a pitch up attitude
to follow.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) Press the AP Key to engage the autopilot in a climb, holding the pitch angle commanded in Takeoff Mode and
wings level.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) In this example, Vertical Speed Mode is used to capture the Selected Altitude (Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or
Flight Level Change Mode may be used).
Press the VS Key to activate Vertical Speed Mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Vertical Speed Reference may be adjusted after Vertical Speed Mode is selected using the NOSE UP/DN
Wheel or pushing the CWS Button while hand-flying the aircraft to establish a new Vertical Speed Reference.
3) Use the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading, complying with ATC vectors to intercept Airway V4.
Press the HDG Key to activate Heading Select Mode while the autopilot is engaged in the climb. The autopilot
follows the Selected Heading Bug on the HSI and turns the aircraft to the desired heading.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds; the autopilot
transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
INDEX
APPENDICES
444
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HD
GM
od
EIS
e
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TO M
ode
3
Selected Altitude of 12,000 MSL
ALT Mode
KMKC
2
1
VS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4
e
Mod
ode
M
TO
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-36 Departure
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
445
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Intercepting a VOR Radial
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During climb-out, the autopilot continues to fly the aircraft in Heading Select Mode. Airway V4 to Salina
VOR (SLN) should now be intercepted. Since the enroute flight plan waypoints correspond to VORs, flight
director Navigation Mode using either VOR or GPS as the navigation source may be used. In this scenario, VOR
Navigation Mode is used for navigation to the first VOR waypoint in the flight plan.
Intercepting a VOR radial:
1) Arm VOR Navigation Mode:
EIS
a) Tune the VOR frequency.
b) Press the CDI Softkey to set the navigation source to VOR.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) Use the CRS1 or CRS2 Knob to set the Selected Course to the desired value, 255°. Note that at this point, the
flight director is still in Heading Select Mode and the autopilot continues to fly the Selected Heading, 290°.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) As the aircraft nears the Selected Course, the flight director transitions from Heading Select to VOR Navigation
Mode and the ‘VOR’ annunciation flashes green. The autopilot begins turning to intercept the Selected
Course.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
d) Press the NAV Key. This arms VOR Navigation Mode and the white ‘VOR’ annunciation appears to the left of
the active lateral mode.
3) The autopilot continues the turn until the aircraft is established on the Selected Course.
0
3
Hd
29 g
0o
30
AFCS
33
V4
6
o
255
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
24
VO
R
9
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
27
3
NA
V
Mo
de
2
HD
G
12
M
od
e,
VO
R
Ar
m
ed
15
21
18
APPENDICES
1
INDEX
Figure 7-37 Intercepting a VOR Radial
446
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flying a Flight Plan/GPS Course
Note: Changing the navigation source cancels Navigation Mode and causes the flight director to revert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
back to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level).
As the aircraft closes on Salina VOR, GPS is used to navigate the next leg, airway V244. The aircraft is
currently tracking inbound on Airway V4.
Flying a GPS flight plan:
EIS
1) Transition from VOR to GPS Navigation Mode:
a) Press the CDI Softkey until GPS is the selected navigation source.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Press the NAV Key to activate GPS Navigation Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft along the active flight
plan leg.
0
33
30
33
3
V4
6
3
o
075
30
e
V Mod
PS NA
6
27
G
2
12
15
21
18
12
AFCS
24
9
Hays
VOR
(HYS)
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
V 244
1
24
27
076
Mode
9
o
260
o
AV
VOR N
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
0
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Following the flight plan, the autopilot continues to steer the aircraft under GPS guidance. Note that in GPS
Navigation Mode, course changes defined by the flight plan are automatically made without pilot action
required.
15
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
21
18
Figure 7-38 Transition to GPS Flight Plan
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
447
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Descent
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Automatic Flight Control System
• Flight Level Change descent – Flight Level Change Mode can be used to descend to the Selected Altitude at a
constant airspeed. This descent method does not account for flight plan waypoint altitude constraints.
While flying the arrival procedure, the aircraft is cleared for descent in preparation for the approach to KCOS.
Three methods are presented for descent:
• Vertical Path Tracking descent – Vertical Path Tracking Mode is used to follow the vertical descent path
defined in the GPS flight plan. Altitude constraints correspond to waypoints in the flight plan. Before VNV
flight control can provide vertical profile guidance, a VNV flight plan must be entered and enabled.
EIS
• Non-path descent in a VNV scenario – A VNV flight plan is entered and enabled, however Pitch Hold, Vertical
Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode can be used to descend to the VNV Target Altitude prior to reaching the
planned TOD. Flight Level Change Mode is used in the example.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight Level Change descent:
1) Select Flight Level Change Mode:
a) Using the ALT SEL Knob, set the Selected Altitude to 10,000 feet.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Press the FLC Key to activate Flight Level Change Mode. The annunciation ‘FLC’ appears next to the
Airspeed Reference, which defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed
automatically.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) If desired press the SPD Key to display the Airspeed Reference in Mach.
AFCS
2) Use the NOSE UP/DN Wheel or push the CWS Button while hand-flying the aircraft to adjust the commanded
airspeed while maintaining the same power, or reduce power to allow descent in Flight Level Change Mode
while the autopilot maintains the current airspeed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
APPENDICES
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
1
Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
ALT Mode
2
FLC
Mod
e
INDEX
3
Selected Altitude of 10,000 MSL
ALT Mode
Figure 7-39 FLC Descent
448
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Vertical Path Tracking descent to VNV Target Altitude:
1) Select VNV flight control:
a) Press the VNV Key to arm Vertical Path Tracking Mode. The white annunciation ‘VPTH’ appears.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Using the ALT SEL Knob, set the Selected Altitude below the flight plan’s VNV Target Altitude of 10,000 feet.
EIS
If the Selected Altitude is not at least 75 ft below the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director captures the
Selected Altitude rather than the VNV Target Altitude once Vertical Path Tracking Mode becomes active (ALTS is
armed rather than ALTV).
•
Press the VNV Key
•
Turn the ALT SEL Knob to adjust the Selected Altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) If Vertical Path Tracking Mode is armed more than 5 minutes prior to descent path capture, acknowledgment is
required for the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode. To proceed with
descent path capture if the white ‘VPTH’ annunciation begins flashing, do one of the following
If the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and the
descent is not captured.
2) When the top of descent (TOD) is reached, the flight director transitions to Vertical Path Tracking Mode and
begins the descent to the VNV Target Altitude. Intention to capture the VNV Target Altitude is indicated by the
white ‘ALTV’ annunciation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
AFCS
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude;
the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft at the vertical waypoint.
ALT Mode
TOD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1
Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
2
VPT
APPENDICES
HM
ode
3
VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL
BOD
ALT Mode
Selected Altitude (set below VNAV Target Altitude)
INDEX
Along-track Offset, 3 nm before OPSHN
3 nm
Figure 7-40 VPTH Descent
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
449
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Non-path descent using Flight Level Change Mode:
1) Using Flight Level Change Mode, command a non-path descent to an intermediate altitude above the next VNV
flight plan altitude.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Using the ALT SEL Knob, set the Selected Altitude below the current aircraft altitude to an altitude (in this case,
9,400 feet) at which to level off between VNV flight plan altitudes.
EIS
b) Press the FLC Key before the planned TOD during an altitude hold while VPTH is armed. The Airspeed Reference
defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Vertical Path Tracking and Selected Altitude Capture Mode are armed
automatically.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Reduce power to allow descent in Flight Level Change Mode. The autopilot maintains the Airspeed Reference.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft. After leveling off reset Selected Altitude at
or below 9,000 ft.
AFCS
4) When the next TOD is reached, Vertical Path Tracking becomes active (may require acknowledgment to allow
descent path capture).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude;
the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft at the vertical waypoint.
INDEX
APPENDICES
450
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
VP
TH
M
od
e
Planned
TOD
2
BOD
1
FL
C
Pla
nn
M
od
e
Selected Altitude of 9,400 MSL
VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL
3
ed
EIS
ALT Mode
De
sce
nt
ALT Mode
Pa
th
TOD
VP
TH
Mo
de
VNAV Target Altitude of 9,000 MSL
5
BOD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4
ALT Mode
Selected Altitude
OPSHN
HABUK
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3 nm
Figure 7-41 Non-path Descent
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
451
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Approach
Note: If an approach contains a DME arc, the arc must be flown in Navigation Mode with the GFC 700.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When receiving vectors from ATC, Navigation Mode must be selected prior to intercepting the ARC.
Flying an ILS approach:
1) Transition from GPS Navigation Mode to Heading Select Mode.
EIS
a) Select the Runway 35L ILS approach for KCOS and select ‘VECTORS’ for the transition. Load and activate the
approach into the flight plan.
b) Use the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading after getting vectors from ATC.
c) Press the HDG Key. The autopilot turns the aircraft to the desired heading.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
d) Use Heading Select Mode to comply with ATC vectors as requested.
2) Arm LOC Approach and Glideslope modes.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
a) Ensure the appropriate localizer frequency is tuned.
b) Press the APR Key when cleared for approach to arm Approach and Glideslope modes. ‘LOC’ and ‘GS’ appear
in white as armed mode annunciations.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) The navigation source automatically switches to LOC. After this switch occurs, the localizer signal can be captured
and the flight director determines when to begin the turn to intercept the final approach course. The flight
director now provides guidance to the missed approach point.
3) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the ILS approach:
AFCS
• Push the AP/YD DISC Switch at the decision height and land the aircraft.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Use the GA Button to execute a missed approach.
452
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
KCOS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
LOC APR/
GS Mode
3
PETEY
2
HD
G
od
M
e
PYNON
1
EIS
GPS NAV Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-42 ILS Approach to KCOS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
453
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Flying a RNAV GPS approach with vertical guidance:
WARNING: When flying an LNAV approach (with vertical guidance) with the autopilot coupled, the aircraft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
will not level off at the MDA even if the MDA is set in the altitude preselect.
1) Arm flight director modes for a RNAV GPS approach with vertical guidance:
a) Make sure the navigation source is set to GPS (use CDI Softkey to change navigation source).
b) Select the Runway 35R LPV approach for KCOS. Load and activate the approach into the flight plan.
EIS
2) Press the APR Key once clearance for approach has been received. GPS Approach Mode is activated and
Glidepath Mode is armed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Once the glidepath is captured, Glidepath Mode becomes active. The flight director now provides guidance to
the missed approach point.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the approach:
• Push the AP/YD DISC Switch at the decision height and land the aircraft.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Use the GA Button to execute a missed approach.
454
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
KCOS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
GPS APR/
GP Mode
CEGIX
EIS
4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2
FALUR
HABUK
PYNON
1
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS NAV Mode
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-43 LPV Approach to KCOS
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
455
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Go Around/Missed Approach
Note: As a result of calculations performed by the system while flying the holding pattern, the display may
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
re-size automatically and the aircraft may not precisely track the holding pattern as depicted on the PFD and
MFD.
Flying a missed approach:
EIS
1) Push the GA Button at the Decision height and apply go-around power to execute a missed approach. The
flight director Command Bars establish a nose-up climb to follow. If flying an ILS or LOC approach the CDI also
switches to GPS as the navigation source.
Note that when the GA Button is pushed, the missed approach is activated and the autopilot disconnects,
indicated by the ‘AP’ annunciation flashing yellow for 5 seconds and the autopilot disconnect aural alert.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flashes 5 sec
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Start the climb to the prescribed altitude in the published Missed Approach Procedure (in this case, 10,000 ft).
a) Press the AP Key to re-engage the autopilot.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Press the NAV Key to have the autopilot fly to the hold.
3) Use the ALT SEL Knob to set a Selected Altitude to hold.
AFCS
To hold the current airspeed during the climb, press the FLC Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
APPENDICES
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
INDEX
4) The autopilot flies the holding pattern after the missed approach is activated. Annunciations are displayed in
the Navigation Status Box, above the AFCS Status Box.
456
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4
EIS
MOGAL
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS NAV Mode
3
2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GA Mode
KCOS
1
AFCS
Figure 7-44 Go Around/Missed Approach
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
457
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
7.7 AFCS Annunciations and Alerts
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AFCS Status Alerts
The annunciations in Table 7-5 (listed in order of increasing priority) can appear on the PFDs above the
Airspeed and Attitude indicators. Only one annunciation may occur at a time, and messages are prioritized by
criticality.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
AFCS Status
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-45 AFCS Status Annunciation
Alert Condition
Rudder Mistrim Right
Rudder Mistrim Left
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Aileron Mistrim Right
Aileron Mistrim Left
Elevator Mistrim Down
Elevator Mistrim Up
AFCS
Pitch Trim Failure
(or stuck MEPT Switch)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Yaw Damper Failure
Description
Yaw servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
Roll servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
Pitch servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
If AP engaged, take control of the aircraft and disengage AP
If AP disengaged, move MEPT switches separately to unstick
YD control failure; AP also inoperative
Roll Failure
Roll axis control failure; AP and YD inoperative
Pitch Failure
Pitch axis control failure; AP and YD inoperative
System Failure
APPENDICES
Annunciation
Preflight Test
AP and MEPT are unavailable; FD may still be available, but YD inoperative
Performing preflight system test; aural alert sounds at completion
Do not press the AP/YD DISC Switch during servo power-up and preflight system
tests as this may cause the preflight system test to fail or never to start (if servos
fail their power-up tests). Power must be cycled to the servos to remedy the
situation.
INDEX
Preflight system test failed; aural alert sounds at failure
Table 7-5 AFCS Status Alerts
458
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Overspeed Protection
Note: Overspeed protection is not active in ALT, GS or GP modes.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Flight Level Change, Vertical Path Tracking, or an altitude capture mode is
active, airspeed is monitored by the flight director. Pitch commands are not changed until overspeed protection
becomes active. Overspeed protection is provided in situations where the flight director cannot acquire and
maintain the mode reference for the selected vertical mode without exceeding the certified maximum autopilot
airspeed.
EIS
When an autopilot overspeed condition occurs, the Airspeed Reference appears in a box above the Airspeed
Indicator, flashing a yellow ‘MAXSPD’ annunciation. Engine power should be reduced and/or the pitch reference
adjusted to slow the aircraft. The annunciation disappears when the overspeed condition is resolved.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspeed
Indicator
Figure 7-46 Overspeed Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
459
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Blank Page
460
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Section 8 Additional Features
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: With the availability of SafeTaxi, ChartView, or FliteCharts in electronic form, it is still advisable to
carry another source of charts on board the aircraft.
Additional features of the system include the following:
• Synthetic Vision System (SVS)
• SafeTaxi® diagrams
EIS
• ChartView and FliteCharts® electronic charts
• AOPA’s Airport Directory
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• XM Radio entertainment
• Scheduler
• Flight Data Logging
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The optional Synthetic Vision System (SVS) provides a three-dimensional forward view of terrain features on
the PFD. SVS imagery shows the pilot’s view of relevant features in relation to the aircraft attitude, as well as the
flight path pertaining to the active flight plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 700 airports in the
United States. By decreasing range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up view of the
airport layout can be seen.
The optional ChartView and FliteCharts provide on-board electronic terminal procedures charts. Electronic
charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information. Either ChartView or FliteCharts may be
configured in the system, but not both.
AFCS
AOPA’s Airport Directory offers detailed information for a selected airport, such as available services, hours of
operation, and lodging options.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The optional XM Radio entertainment audio feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver handles more than 170
channels of music, news, and sports. XM Radio offers more entertainment choices and longer range coverage
than commercial broadcast stations.
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display short term or long term reminder messages such as
Switch fuel tanks, Change oil, or Altimeter-Transponder Check in the Messages Window on the PFD.
APPENDICES
The Flight Data Logging feature automatically stores critical flight and engine data on an SD data card.
Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each 1GB of available space on the card.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
461
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
8.1 Synthetic Vision System (SVS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
SVS is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or reliability
upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The SVS terrain display shows land contours (colors are consistent with those of the topographical map display),
large water features, towers, and other obstacles over 200’ AGL that are included in the obstacle database. Cultural
features on the ground such as roads, highways, railroad tracks, cities, and state boundaries are not displayed
even if those features are found on the MFD map. The terrain display also includes a north–south east–west grid
with lines oriented with true north and spaced at one arc-minute intervals to assist in orientation relative to the
terrain.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The optional Synthetic Vision System (SVS) is a visual enhancement to the G1000 Integrated Flight Deck. SVS
depicts a forward-looking attitude display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft. The field of
view is 30 degrees to the left and 35 degrees to the right. SVS information is shown on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD), or on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode (Figure 8‑81). The depicted imagery is
derived from the aircraft attitude, heading, GPS three-dimensional position, and a nine arc-second database of
terrain, obstacles, and other relevant features. The terrain data resolution of nine arc-seconds, meaning that
the terrain elevation contours are stored in squares measuring nine arc-seconds on each side, is required for the
operation of SVS. Loss of any of the required data, including temporary loss of the GPS signal, will cause SVS to
be disabled until the required data is restored.
The Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) is integrated within SVS to provide visual and auditory
alerts to indicate the presence of terrain and obstacle threats relevant to the projected flight path. Terrain alerts
are displayed in red and yellow shading on the PFD.
AFCS
The terrain display is intended for situational awareness only. It may not provide the accuracy or fidelity on
which to base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles. Navigation must not be predicated
solely upon the use of the TAWS terrain or obstacle data displayed by the SVS.
• Pathways
• Airport Signs
• Flight Path Marker
• Runway Display
• Horizon Heading Marks
• Terrain Alerting
• Traffic Display
• Obstacle Alerting
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The following SVS enhancements appear on the PFD:
462
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-1 Synthetic Vision Imagery
SVS Operation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVS is activated from the PFD using the softkeys located along the bottom edge of the display. Pressing the
softkeys turns the related function on or off. When SVS is enabled, the pitch scale increments are reduced to
10 degrees up and 7.5 degrees down.
AFCS
SVS functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. The PFD Softkey leads into the PFD function Softkeys,
including synthetic vision. Pressing the SYN VIS Softkey displays the SVS feature softkeys. The softkeys are
labeled PATHWAY, SYN TERR, HRZN HDG, and APTSIGNS. The BACK Softkey returns to the previous
level of softkeys. Synthetic Terrain must be active before any other SVS feature may be activated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY Softkeys are only available when the SYN TERR Softkey is
activated (gray with black characters). After activating the SYN TERR Softkey, the HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS,
and PATHWAY softkeys may be activated in any combination to display desired features. When system power
is cycled, the last selected state (on or off) of the SYN TERR, HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY
softkeys is remembered by the system.
APPENDICES
• PATHWAY Softkey enables display of rectangular boxes that represent course guidance.
• SYN TERR Softkey enables synthetic terrain depiction.
• HRZN HDG Softkey enables horizon heading marks and digits.
• APTSIGNS Softkey enables airport signposts.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
463
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD
SYN VIS
BACK
Pressing the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.
BACK
EIS
PATHWAY SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns to the previous level of softkeys.
Figure 8-2 SVS Softkeys
Activating and deactivating SVS:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the SYN TERR Softkey. The SVS display will cycle on or off with the SYN TERR Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Activating and deactivating Pathways:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the PATHWAY Softkey. The Pathway feature will cycle on or off with the PATHWAY Softkey.
AFCS
Activating and deactivating Horizon Headings:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the HRZN HDG Softkey. The horizon heading display will cycle on or off with the HRZN HDG Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Airport Signs:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
APPENDICES
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
INDEX
3) Press the APTSIGNS Softkey. Display of airport signs will cycle on or off with the APTSIGNS Softkey.
464
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SVS Features
Pathways
Color
Matches CDI
Indicating
NAV Source
Flight
Path
Marker
Airplane
Symbol
EIS
Zero
Pitch Line
(ZPL) with
Compass
Heading
Marks
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Altitude
Airport
Runway
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Synthetic
Terrain
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVS
Softkeys
Figure 8-3 SVS on the Primary Flight Display
NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude deviation
information provided by the CDI, VSI, and VDI.
AFCS
Pathways
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pathways provide a three-dimensional perspective view of the selected route of flight shown as colored
rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the active flight plan. The box
size represents 700 feet wide by 200 feet tall during enroute, oceanic, and terminal flight phases. During
an approach, the box width is 700 feet or one half full scale deviation on the HSI, whichever is less. The
height is 200 feet or one half full scale deviation on the VDI, whichever is less. The altitude at which the
pathway boxes are displayed is determined by the higher of either the selected altitude or the VNAV altitude
programmed for the active leg in the flight plan (Figure 8-4).
APPENDICES
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
The color of the rectangular boxes may be magenta, green, or white depending on the route of flight and
navigation source selected. The active GPS or GPS overlay flight plan leg is represented by magenta boxes
that correspond to the Magenta CDI. A localizer course is represented by green boxes that correspond to a
green CDI. An inactive leg of an active flight plan is represented by white boxes corresponding to a white line
drawn on the Inset map or MFD map indicating an inactive leg.
465
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Programmed
Altitudes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-4 Programmed and Selected Altitude
AFCS
Pathways provide supplemental glidepath/glideslope information on an active ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, and
some LNAV approaches. Pathways are intended as an aid to situational awareness and should not be used
independent of the CDI, VDI, glide path indicator, and glide slope indicator. They are removed from the
display when the selected navigation information is not available. Pathways are not displayed beyond the
active leg when leg sequencing is suspended and are not displayed on any portion of the flight plan leg that
would lead to intercepting a leg in the wrong direction.
Departure and Enroute
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Prior to intercepting an active flight plan leg, pathways are displayed as a series of boxes with pointers at
each corner that point in the direction of the active waypoint. Pathways are not displayed for the first leg
of the flight plan if that segment is a Heading-to-Altitude leg. The first segment displaying pathways is the
first active GPS leg or active leg with a GPS overlay. If this leg of the flight plan route is outside the SVS
field of view, pathways will not be visible until the aircraft has turned toward this leg. While approaching
the center of the active leg and prescribed altitude, the number of pathway boxes decreases to a minimum
of four.
INDEX
Climb profiles cannot be displayed due to the variables associated with aircraft performance. Flight
plan legs requiring a climb are indicated by pathways displayed at a level above the aircraft at the altitude
selected or programmed.
466
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Descent and Approach
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pathways are shown descending only for a programmed descent (Figures 8-5, 8-6). When the flight plan
includes programmed descent segments, pathways are displayed along the descent path provided that the
selected altitude is lower than the programmed altitude.
When an approach providing vertical guidance is activated, Pathways are shown level at the selected
altitude up to the point along the final approach course where the altitude intercepts the extended vertical
descent path, glidepath, or glideslope. From the vertical path descent, glidepath, or glideslope intercept
point, the pathways are shown inbound to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) along the published lateral
and vertical descent path, or at the selected altitude, whichever is lower.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
During an ILS approach, the initial approach segment is displayed in magenta at the segment altitudes
if GPS is selected as the navigation source on the CDI. When switching to localizer inbound with LOC
selected as the navigation source on the CDI, pathways are displayed in green along the localizer and glide
slope.
VOR, LOC BC, and ADF approach segments that are approved to be flown using GPS are displayed in
magenta boxes. Segments that are flown using other than GPS or ILS, such as heading legs or VOR final
approach courses are not displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Altitude
set for Enroute
Selected Altitude
set for Departure
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Climbs NOT
displayed
by pathway
Non-programmed descents NOT displayed by pathway
TOD
AFCS
Selected Altitude
for Step Down
Programmed descent
displayed by pathway
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selected Altitude or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
APPENDICES
Figure 8-5 SVS Pathways, Enroute and Descent
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
467
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Missed Approach
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Upon activating the missed approach, pathways lead to the Missed Approach Holding Point (MAHP) and
are displayed as a level path at the published altitude for the MAHP, or the selected altitude, whichever is
the highest. If the initial missed approach leg is a Course-to-Altitude (CA) leg, the pathways boxes will
be displayed level at the altitude published for the MAHP. If the initial missed approach leg is defined by
a course using other than GPS, pathways are not displayed for that segment. In this case, the pathways
displayed for the next leg may be outside the field of view and will be visible when the aircraft has turned
in the direction of that leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Pathways are displayed along each segment including the path required to track course reversals that are
part of a procedure, such as holding patterns. Pathways boxes will not indicate a turn to a MAHP unless a
defined geographical waypoint exists between the MAP and MAHP.
FAF
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Descent displayed
by pathway
Selected Altitude
or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
MAP Climbs NOT displayed
by pathway
Turn Segment
NOT displayed
by pathway
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
MAHP
INDEX
Figure 8-6 SVS Pathways, Approach, Missed Approach, and Holding
468
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Path Marker
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Flight Path Marker (FPM), also known as a Velocity Vector, is displayed on the PFD at groundspeeds
above 30 knots. The FPM depicts the approximate projected path of the aircraft accounting for wind speed
and direction relative to the three-dimensional terrain display.
The FPM is always available when the Synthetic Terrain feature is in operation. The FPM represents the
direction of the flight path as it relates to the terrain and obstacles on the display, while the airplane symbol
represents the aircraft heading.
EIS
The FPM works in conjunction with the Pathways feature to assist the pilot in maintaining desired altitudes
and direction when navigating a flight plan. When on course and altitude the FPM is aligned inside the
pathway boxes as shown (Figure 8-7).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The FPM may also be used to identify a possible conflict with the aircraft flight path and distant terrain or
obstacles. Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft’s flight path extending above the FPM could indicate
a potential conflict, even before an alert is issued by TAWS. However, decisions regarding terrain and/or
obstacle avoidance should not be made using only the FPM.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight Path
Marker
(FPM)
AFCS
Wind
Vector
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-7 Flight Path Marker and Pathways
Zero Pitch Line
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents the aircraft attitude with respect
to the horizon. It may not align with the terrain horizon, particularly when the terrain is mountainous or
when the aircraft is flown at high altitudes.
469
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Horizon Heading
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows approximately 60 degrees of compass
heading in 30‑degree increments on the Zero Pitch Line. Horizon Heading tick marks and digits appearing
on the zero pitch line are not visible behind either the airspeed or altitude display. Horizon Heading is used
for general heading awareness, and is activated and deactivated by pressing the HRZN HDG Softkey.
Traffic
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the SVS display or may appear as a
EIS
partial symbol.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate locations as determined by the related traffic systems.
Traffic symbols are displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are getting closer, and smaller
when they are further away. Traffic within 1000 feet laterally of the aircraft will not be displayed on the SVS
display. Traffic symbols and coloring are consistent with that used for traffic displayed in the Inset map or
MFD traffic page. If the traffic altitude is unknown, the traffic will not be displayed on the SVS display. For
more details refer to the traffic system discussion in the Hazard Avoidance section.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airport Signs
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on the synthetic terrain
display. When activated, the signs appear on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 nm from
an airport and disappear at approximately 4.5 nm. Airport signs are shown without the identifier until
the aircraft is approximately eight nautical miles from the airport. Airport signs are not shown behind the
airspeed or altitude display. Airport signs are activated and deactivated by pressing the APTSIGNS Softkey.
AFCS
Traffic
Airport
Sign
without
Identifier
(Between
8 nm and
15 nm)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airport
Sign with
Identifier
(Between
4.5 nm and
8 nm)
Figure 8-8 Airport Signs
470
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Runways
WARNING: Do not use SVS runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of the aircraft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
EIS
Runway data provides improved awareness of runway location with respect to the surrounding terrain. All
runway thresholds are depicted at their respective elevations as defined in the database. In some situations,
where threshold elevations differ significantly, crossing runways may appear to be layered. As runways are
displayed, those within 45 degrees of the aircraft heading are displayed in white. Other runways will be gray
in color. When an approach for a specific runway is active, that runway will appear brighter and be outlined
with a white box, regardless of the runway orientation as related to aircraft heading. As the aircraft gets closer
to the runway, more detail such as runway numbers and centerlines will be displayed. Not all airports have
runways with endpoint data in the database, therefore, these runways are not displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Runway
Selected for
Approach
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Other
Runway
on Airport
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-9 Airport Runways
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
471
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
TAWS Alerting
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain alerting on the synthetic terrain display is triggered by Forward-looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA)
alerts. In addition to the yellow terrain shading for a caution alert and the red shading for a warning alert,
TAWS-B alerting will also indicate potential impact points. These potential impact points correspond to red
and/or yellow X symbols on the PFD Inset Map (as shown in Figure 8-10), MFD map displays, and TAWS-B
Page on the MFD. Terrain shading will only occur on the synthetic terrain display on the PFD and TAWS-A
Page on the MFD when using the optional TAWS-A system. No terrain shading nor potential impact points
will be displayed on the PFD inset map or the MFD map display. For more detailed information regarding
TAWS, refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
In some instances, a terrain or obstacle alert may be issued with no conflict shading displayed on the
synthetic terrain. In these cases, the conflict is outside the SVS field of view to the left or right of the
aircraft.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TERRAIN
Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Terrain
Caution
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Potential
Impact
Point
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-10 Terrain Alert
472
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic terrain display by standard two-dimensional tower symbols found
on the Inset map and MFD maps and charts. Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view with relative
height above terrain and distance from the aircraft. When employing a TAWS-B system, unlike the Inset
map and MFD moving map display, obstacles on the synthetic terrain display do not change colors to warn
of potential conflict with the aircraft’s flight path until the obstacle is associated with an actual FLTA alert.
Obstacles greater than 1000 feet below the aircraft altitude are not shown. Obstacles are shown behind the
airspeed and altitude displays.
As with terrain alerting on a TAWS-A system, obstacle alerting is limited to the synthetic terrain display on
the PFD and the TAWS-A Page on the MFD.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TERRAIN
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Obstacle
Warning
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Potential
Impact
Point
AFCS
Figure 8-11 Obstacle
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Field of View
APPENDICES
The PFD field of view can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page. Two dashed lines forming a
V‑shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent the forward viewing area shown on the PFD.
Configuring field of view:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Map Setup and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
473
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Field of
View
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Map Setup Menu, Map Group, Field of View Option
Figure 8-12 Option Menus
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Map Group and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Map Group options to FIELD OF VIEW.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select On or Off.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
The following figure compares the PFD forward looking depiction with the MFD plan view and FIELD OF
VIEW turned on.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Lines
Depict
PFD Field
of View
SVS View on the PFD
INDEX
Field of View on the MFD
Figure 8-13 PFD and MFD Field of View Comparison
474
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.2 SafeTaxi
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when viewing airports at close range. The
maximum map ranges for enhanced detail are pilot configurable. When viewing at ranges close enough to
show the airport detail, the map reveals taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots, and airport
landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent features. Resolution is greater at
lower map ranges. When the MFD display is within the SafeTaxi ranges, the airplane symbol on the airport
provides enhanced position awareness.
EIS
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways, and/or complex
ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are defined with a magenta circle or
outline around the region of possible confusion.
• User Waypoint Information Page
• Weather Datalink Page
• Trip Planning Page
• Airport Information Page
• Nearest Pages
• Intersection Information Page
• Active and Stored Flight Plan Pages
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Inset Map (PFD)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the maximum
configured range. The following is a list of pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
• Navigation Map Page
• VOR Information Page
• NDB Information Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
475
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways, runways, and airport
features. In the example shown, the aircraft is on taxiway Bravo inside the High Alert Intersection boundary
on KSFO airport. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta. When panning over the airport, features such as
runway holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor.
EIS
Taxiway
Identification
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Aircraft
Position
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airport
Features
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport Hot
Spot Outline
DCLTR Softkey
Removes
Taxiway
Markings
Figure 8-14 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The DCLTR Softkey (declutter) label advances to DCLTR-1, DCLTR -2, and DCLTR-3 each time the softkey is
selected for easy recognition of decluttering level. Selecting the DCLTR Softkey removes the taxiway markings
and airport feature labels. Selecting the DCLTR-1 Softkey removes VOR station ID, the VOR symbol, and
intersection names if within the airport plan view. Selecting the DCLTR-2 Softkey removes the airport runway
layout, unless the airport in view is part of an active route structure. Selecting the DCLTR-3 Softkey cycles back
to the original map detail. Refer to Map Declutter Levels in the Flight Management Section.
476
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Configuring SafeTaxi range:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Map Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-15 Navigation Map PAGE MENU, Map Setup Option
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to SAFETAXI.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the range of distances.
6) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired distance for maximum SafeTaxi display range.
7) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
SAFETAXI
Option
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SafeTaxi
Range
Options
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-16 MAP SETUP Menu, Aviation Group, SAFETAXI Range Options
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
477
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
SafeTaxi Cycle Number and Revision
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SafeTaxi database is revised every 56 days. SafeTaxi is always available for use after the expiration date.
When turning on the system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or
not available.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
SafeTaxi Database
Figure 8-17 Power-up Page, SafeTaxi Database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Normal operation. SafeTaxi database is valid and within current cycle.
SafeTaxi database has expired.
AFCS
Database card contains no SafeTaxi data.
Table 8-1 SafeTaxi Annunciation Definitions
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The SafeTaxi Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be found
on the AUX - System Status page, as seen in Figure 8-18.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is
shown.
478
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The SafeTaxi database cycle number shown in Figure 8-18, 09S3, is deciphered as follows:
09 – Indicates the year 2009
S – Indicates the data is for SafeTaxi
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3 – Indicates the third issue of the SafeTaxi database for the year
The SafeTaxi EFFECTIVE date 07–MAY–09 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. SafeTaxi
EXPIRES date 02–JUL–09 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SafeTaxi Data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-18 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Current Information
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SafeTaxi information appears in blue and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in blue when data is
current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in blue
when data is current and in yellow when expired (Figures 8‑18 and 8-19). NOT AVAILABLE appears in blue
in the REGION field if SafeTaxi data is not available on the database card (Figure 8‑19). An expired SafeTaxi
database is not disabled and will continue to function indefinitely.
APPENDICES
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey a second time. The softkey label will change to PFD1 DB. The DATABASE
window will now be displaying database information for PFD1. As before, scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is shown.
Select the PFD1 DB Softkey. The softkey label will change to PFD2 DB. The DATABASE window will now
display database information for PFD2. Again, scroll through the listed information by turning the FMS Knob
or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is shown.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for instructions on revising the SafeTaxi database.
479
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 8-19 illustrates possible SafeTaxi database conditions that may appear on the AUX - System Status
Page. The EFFECTIVE date is the beginning date for this database cycle. If the present date is before the
effective date, the EFFECTIVE date appears in yellow and the EXPIRES date appears in blue. The EXPIRES date
is the revision date for the next database cycle. NOT AVAILABLE indicates that SafeTaxi is not available on the
database card or no database card is inserted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Current Date is before Effective Date
SafeTaxi Database has Expired
SafeTaxi Database Not Installed
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-19 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Expired, SafeTaxi Not Available
480
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.3 ChartView
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed in full
color with high-resolution. The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the plan view
of approach charts and on airport diagrams. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta.
The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Airport Diagrams
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• NOTAMs
EIS
• Approaches
ChartView Softkeys
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ChartView functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, selecting the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO, DP, STAR, APR, WX, NOTAM,
and GO BACK. The chart selection softkeys shown below appear on the Airport Information Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Selecting the CHRT OPT Softkey advances to the next level of softkeys: ALL, HEADER, PLAN, PROFILE,
MINIMUMS, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.
While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SHW CHRT
CHRT
INFO
DP
STAR
APR
WX
NOTAM
GO BACK
AFCS
CHRT OPT
Selecting the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.
HEADER
PLAN
PROFILE
MINIMUMS FIT WDTH FULL SCN
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ALL
BACK
Selecting the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.
APPENDICES
Figure 8-20 ChartView SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
481
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Terminal Procedures Charts
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, select the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to Show Chart.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu
Figure 8-21 Option Menus
AFCS
On the Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu, select the desired chart and press the ENT Key
to display the chart.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen.
The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability
of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.
APPENDICES
Figure 8-22 Chart Not Available Banner
INDEX
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
Figure 8-23 Unable To Display Chart Banner
482
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When a chart is not available by selecting the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, selecting the
SHW CHRT Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport runway
diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are available, that
page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport is shown.
EIS
Selecting a chart:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, select the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Select the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
AFCS
Chart Scale
Select Desired
Approach Chart
from Menu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Scroll Through
Chart With
the Joystick
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-24 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
483
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart page can be scrolled using the Joystick. Pressing
the Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft symbol is shown on the chart only if the chart is to scale and the aircraft position is within
the boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not displayed when the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears
(Figure 8‑28). If the Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, the aircraft symbol is not shown. The
Aircraft Not Shown Icon may appear at certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Selecting the CHRT Softkey switches between the ChartView diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the Gainesville, FL (KGNV) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Select CHRT Softkey
to Switch Between
ChartView and WPT Airport Information Page
Figure 8-25 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page
484
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting the INFO Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view is on a different chart. If the
displayed chart is the airport diagram, the INFO Softkey has no effect.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft position is shown in magenta on the ChartView diagrams when the location of the aircraft is
within the chart boundaries. In the example shown, the aircraft is turning onto Taxiway Bravo on the Charlotte,
NC (KCLT) airport.
EIS
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart for certain airports.
This information source is not related to the INFO Softkey. When the INFO Box is selected using the FMS
Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank. The Charlotte, NC airport has five additional charts offering information;
the Airport Diagram, Take-off Minimums, Class B Airspace, Airline Parking Gate Coordinates, and Airline
Parking Gate Location. (The numbers in parentheses after the chart name are Jeppesen designators.)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Aircraft
Current
Position
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 8-26 Airport Information Page, INFO View, Full Screen Width
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
485
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the example shown in Figure 8-26, the Class B Chart is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Charlotte Class B Airspace Chart (Figure 8-27).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-27 Airport Information Page, Class B Chart Selected from INFO View
Selecting the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Chart Not
To Scale
INDEX
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-28 Departure Information Page
486
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
Chart Not
To Scale
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Change Range
and Scroll
Through the
Chart With the
Joystick
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-29 Arrival Information Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
Figure 8-30 Approach Information Page
487
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, and includes weather data such
as METAR and TAF from the XM Data Link Receiver, when available. Weather information is available only
when an XM Data Link Receiver is installed and the XM Weather subscription is current.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WX Info
When
Available
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
WX Softkey
Selected
Figure 8-31 Weather Information Page
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Recent NOTAMS applicable to the current ChartView cycle are included in the ChartView database. Selecting
the NOTAM Softkey shows the local NOTAM information for selected airports, when available. When NOTAMS
are not available, the NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled as shown in Figure 8-31. The
NOTAM Softkey may appear on the Airport Information Page and all of the chart page selections.
488
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-32 NOTAM Available
NOTAM Softkey
Appears for
Selected Airports
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Local
NOTAM on
This Airport
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
NOTAM Softkey
Selected
Figure 8-33 Airport Information Page, Local NOTAMs
INDEX
Selecting the NOTAM Softkey again removes the NOTAMS information.
Selecting the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page, Nearest Pages, or Flight
Plan Page).
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
489
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Chart Options
Selecting the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level (Figure 8-20).
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting the ALL Softkey shows the complete approach chart on the screen.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Complete
Chart
Shown
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-34 Approach Information Page, ALL View
490
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting the HEADER Softkey shows the header view (approach chart briefing strip) on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Approach
Chart
Briefing Strip
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-35 Approach Information Page, Header View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting the PLAN Softkey shows the approach chart two dimensional plan view.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Approach
Chart Plan
View
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-36 Approach Information Page, Plan View
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
491
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting the PROFILE Softkey displays the approach chart descent profile strip.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Approach
Chart Descent
Profile Strip
Figure 8-37 Approach Information Page, Profile View, Full Screen Width
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting the MINIMUMS Softkey displays the minimum descent altitude/visibility strip at the bottom of the
approach chart.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Minimum
Descent
Altitude/
Visibility Strip
Figure 8-38 Approach Information Page, Minimums View, Full Screen Width
492
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If the chart scale has been adjusted to view a small area of the chart, selecting the FIT WIDTH Softkey
changes the chart size to fit the available screen width.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Select FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
Figure 8-39 Airport Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Selected
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
493
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Selecting the FULL SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
Selecting Additional Information:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, select the FULL SCN Softkey to display the information windows
(AIRPORT, INFO).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the AIRPORT, INFO, RUNWAYS, or FREQUENCIES Box (INFO Box shown).
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired
choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Available
Information
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Select FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Chart on Full
Screen and Chart with
Info Window
INDEX
Figure 8-40 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window
Selecting the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
494
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the FULL SCREEN and COLOR SCHEME Options.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Chart Setup Option
Full Screen On/Off Selection
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-41 Page Menus
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
495
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Day/Night View
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the MFD softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-42 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option (Figure 8‑43).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
AFCS
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
INDEX
APPENDICES
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
496
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-43 Arrival Information Page, Day View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-44 Arrival Information Page, Night View
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
497
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
ChartView Cycle Number and Expiration Date
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView database is revised every 14 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the
cycle expiration date to the disables date. ChartView is disabled 70 days after the expiration date and is no
longer available for viewing. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page displays the current status of the
ChartView database. See the table below for the various ChartView Power-up Page displays and the definition
of each.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ChartView Database
Figure 8-45 Power-up Page, ChartView Database
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Blank Line. System is not configured for ChartView. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for ChartView but no chart database is installed.
Contact Jeppesen for a ChartView database.
Normal operation. ChartView database is valid and within current
cycle.
ChartView database is within 1 week after expiration date. A new cycle
is available for update.
ChartView database is beyond 1 week after expiration date, but still
within the 70 day viewing period.
ChartView database has timed out. Database is beyond 70 days after
expiration date. ChartView database is no longer available for viewing.
System time is not available. GPS satellite data is unknown or the
system has not yet locked onto satellites. Check database cycle number
for effectivity.
System is verifying chart database when new cycle is installed for the
first time.
After verifying, chart database is found to be corrupt. ChartView is not
available.
Table 8-2 ChartView Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
498
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The ChartView time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. The database
CYCLE number, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the ChartView subscription appear in either blue or yellow
text. When the ChartView EXPIRES date is reached, ChartView becomes inoperative 70 days later. This is
shown as the DISABLES date. When the DISABLES date is reached, charts are no longer available for viewing.
The SHW CHRT Softkey label then appears subdued and is disabled until a revised issue of ChartView is
installed.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
EIS
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the ChartView database information is
shown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The ChartView database cycle number shown in the figure, 0904, is deciphered as follows:
09 – Indicates the year 2009
04 – Indicates the fourth issue of the ChartView database for the year
The EXPIRES date 05–MAR–09 is the date that this database should be replaced with the next issue.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The DISABLES date 14–MAY–09 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ChartView
Data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-46 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Current and Available
The ChartView database is obtained directly from Jeppesen. Refer to Updating Jeppesen Databases in
Appendix B for instructions on revising the ChartView database.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
499
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Other possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown in Figure 8-47. The EXPIRES date, in yellow,
is the revision date for the next database cycle. The DISABLES date, in yellow, is the date that this database
cycle is no longer viewable. CYCLE NOT AVAILABLE in blue, indicates no ChartView data is available on the
database card or no database card is inserted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ChartView has Expired, but is not Disabled
ChartView Database is Disabled
ChartView Database is Not Available
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-47 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Expired, ChartView Disabled, ChartView Not Available
500
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.4 FliteCharts
• Departure Procedures (DP)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of National Aeronautical Charting Office (NACO) terminal procedures
charts. The charts are displayed with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts. FliteCharts database
subscription is available from Garmin. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Approaches
• Airport Diagrams
FliteCharts Softkeys
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FliteCharts functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, selecting the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO, DP, STAR, APR, WX, and
GO BACK. The chart selection softkeys appear on the Airport Information Page.
Selecting the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Selecting the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and advances to the next level of
softkeys: ALL, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
NOTAMs are not available with FliteCharts. The NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled.
CHRT OPT
CHRT
INFO
DP
STAR
WX
APR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SHW CHRT
GO BACK
AFCS
Selecting the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.
FIT WDTH
FULL SCN
BACK
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ALL
Selecting the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.
APPENDICES
Figure 8-48 FliteCharts SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
501
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Terminal Procedures Charts
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, select the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to Show Chart.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu
Figure 8-49 Option Menus
AFCS
On the Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu, select the desired chart and press the ENT Key
to display the chart.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen.
The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability
of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.
APPENDICES
Figure 8-50 Chart Not Available Banner
INDEX
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
Figure 8-51 Unable To Display Chart Banner
502
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When a chart is not available by selecting the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, selecting the
SHW CHRT Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport runway
diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are available, that
page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport is shown.
EIS
Selecting a chart:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, select the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Select the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
Chart Not
To Scale
AFCS
Select Desired
Approach Chart
from Menu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pan Chart
With the
Joystick
APPENDICES
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
INDEX
Figure 8-52 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
503
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart can be panned using the Joystick. Pressing the
Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft symbol is not shown on FliteCharts. The Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, and
the Aircraft Not Shown Icon is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Selecting the CHRT Softkey switches between the FliteCharts diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the Gainesville, FL (KGNV) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Select CHRT Softkey
to Switch Between
Navigation Map Page
and FliteCharts
INDEX
Figure 8-53 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page
504
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting the INFO Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view is on a different chart. If the
displayed chart is the airport diagram, the INFO Softkey has no effect.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart (Figure 8-60) or to
the right of the chart (Figure 8-54) for certain airports. This information source is not related to the INFO
Softkey. When the INFO Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank. The DeKalb
Peachtree Airport has three additional charts offering information; the Airport Diagram, Alternate Minimums,
and Take-off Minimums.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Info Box
Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-54 Airport Information Page, INFO View with Airport Information
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
505
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the example shown in Figure 8-54, ALTERNATE MINIMUMS is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays
the IFR Alternate Minimums Chart (Figure 8-55).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-55 Airport Information Page, ALTERNATE MINIMUMS Selected from INFO View
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Selecting the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
Figure 8-56 Departure Information Page
506
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-57 Arrival Information Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
Figure 8-58 Approach Information Page
507
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Selecting the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, when available, and includes
weather data such as METAR and TAF from the XM Data Link Receiver. Weather information is available only
when an XM Data Link Receiver is installed and the XM Weather subscription is current.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting Additional Information:
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, select the WX Softkey to display the information windows (AIRPORT,
INFO).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the INFO Box.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. When the INFO Box is selected the G1000 softkeys
are blank. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired choice with the large FMS Knob and press the
ENT Key to complete the selection.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Info Available
on This
Airport
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
WX Info
When
Available
APPENDICES
Figure 8-59 Weather Information Page, WX Softkey Selected
Chart Not
To Scale
Softkeys are
Blank during
Info Box
Selection
WX Softkey
Selected
INDEX
Selecting the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page or Flight Plan Page).
508
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Chart Options
Selecting the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level (Figure 8-48).
Selecting the ALL Softkey shows the complete chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Complete
Chart
Shown
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-60 Airport Information Page, ALL View Selected
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
509
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting the FIT WIDTH Softkey fits the width of the chart in the display viewing area. In the example
shown, the chart at close range is replaced with the full width chart.
Select FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-61 Approach Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Selected
510
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting the FULL SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Select FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Chart on
Full Screen and Chart
with Info Window
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-62 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window
Selecting the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
511
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the FULL SCREEN and COLOR SCHEME Options.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
Chart Setup Option
Full Screen On/Off Selection
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-63 Page Menus
512
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Day/Night View
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the MFD softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-64 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option (Figure 8‑65).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
AFCS
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
513
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-65 Approach Information Page, Day View
INDEX
Figure 8-66 Approach Information Page, Night View
514
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FliteCharts Cycle Number and Expiration Date
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts data is revised every 28 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the cycle
expiration date to the disables date. FliteCharts is disabled 180 days after the expiration date and are no longer
available for viewing upon reaching the disables date. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page displays
the current status of the FliteCharts database. See the table below for the various FliteCharts Power-up Page
displays and the definition of each.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FliteCharts Database
Figure 8-67 Power-up Page, FliteCharts Database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Power-up Page Display
AFCS
Definition
Blank Line. System is not configured for FliteCharts. Contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for FliteCharts but no chart database is installed.
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for the FliteCharts
database
Normal operation. FliteCharts database is valid and within current
cycle.
FliteCharts database is beyond the expiration date, but still within the
180 day viewing period.
FliteCharts database has timed out. Database is beyond 180 days
after expiration date. FliteCharts database is no longer available for
viewing.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Table 8-3 FliteCharts Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
Other possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown in Figure 8-68. ‘FliteCharts Expires’ plus a
date in white, indicates the chart database is current. ‘Chart data is out of date!’ in yellow, indicates charts are
still viewable, but approaching the disable date.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
When the 180 day grace period has expired, ‘Chart data is disabled.’ in yellow indicates that the FliteCharts
database has expired and is no longer viewable. ‘Chart Data: N/A’ appears in white if no FliteCharts data is
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
515
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. The FliteCharts
database REGION, CYCLE number, EFFECTIVE, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the subscription appear in
either blue or yellow text. Dates shown in blue are current data. Dates shown in yellow indicate the data is not
within the current subscription period.
FliteCharts becomes inoperative 180 days after the FliteCharts EXPIRES date is reached, and is no longer
available for viewing. This date is shown as the DISABLES date. After the disable date the SHW CHRT Softkey
label appears subdued and is unavailable until a revised issue of FliteCharts is installed.
EIS
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the FliteCharts database information is
shown.
The FliteCharts database cycle number shown in the figure, 0905, is deciphered as follows:
09 – Indicates the year 2009
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
05 – Indicates the fifth issue of the FliteCharts database for the year
The FliteCharts EFFECTIVE date 07–MAY–09 is the first date that this database is current.
The FliteCharts EXPIRES date 04–JUN–09 is the last date that this database is current.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The DISABLES date 01–DEC–09 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
APPENDICES
FliteCharts
Data
INDEX
Figure 8-68 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Current and Available
The FliteCharts database is provided from Garmin. Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for
instructions on revising the FliteCharts database.
516
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The other three possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown here. The EXPIRES date, in yellow,
is the revision date for the next database cycle. The DISABLES date, in yellow, is the date that this database cycle
is no longer viewable. REGION and CYCLE NOT AVAILABLE in blue, indicate that FliteCharts database is not
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
FliteCharts Database is Disabled
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FliteCharts Expired, but is not Disabled
FliteCharts Database is Not Available
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-69 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Expired, FliteCharts Disabled, FliteCharts Not Available
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
517
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
8.5 AOPA Airport Directory
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association (AOPA) Airport Directory database offers detailed information
regarding services, hours of operation, lodging options, and more. This information is viewed on the Airport
Information Page by selecting the INFO Softkey until INFO-2 is displayed as shown in Figure 8-70.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-70 AOPA Information on the Airport Information Page
518
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AOPA Database Cycle Number and Revision
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The AOPA Airport Directory database is revised four times per year. Check fly.garmin.com for the current
database. The Airport Directory is always available for use after the expiration date. When turning on the
system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or not available.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AOPA Database
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-71 Power-up Page, Airport Directory Database
Power-up Page Display
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Definition
Normal operation. AOPA Airport Directory database is valid and within
current cycle.
AOPA Airport Directory database has expired.
Database card contains no AOPA Airport Directory data.
AFCS
Table 8-4 Airport Directory Annunciation Definitions
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
519
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
The Airport Directory Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be
found on the AUX - System Status page, as seen in Figure 8-72.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the Airport Directory database information
is shown.
The Airport Directory database cycle number shown in the figure, 09D2, is deciphered as follows:
09 – Indicates the year 2009
D – Indicates the data is for Airport Directory
EIS
2 – Indicates the second issue of the Airport Directory database for the year
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Airport Directory EFFECTIVE date 15–APR–09 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. The
Airport Directory EXPIRES date 14–JUL–09 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport Directory
Data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-72 AUX – System Status Page, Airport Directory Current Information
INDEX
APPENDICES
Airport Directory information appears in blue and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in blue when
data is current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in
blue when data is current and in yellow when expired (Table 8-4). NOT AVAILABLE appears in blue in the
REGION field if Airport Directory data is not available on the database card. An expired Airport Directory
database is not disabled and will continue to function indefinitely.
520
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.6 XM Radio Entertainment
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about XM Weather products.
The optional XM Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver is available for the pilot’s and
passengers’ enjoyment. The GDL 69A can receive XM Satellite Radio® entertainment services at any altitude
throughout the Continental U.S. Entertainment audio is available only on the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver, not
the GDL 69.
EIS
XM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly
search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions.
XM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
www.xmradio.com.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Activating XM Satellite Radio Services
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The service is activated by providing XM Satellite Radio with either one or two coded IDs, depending on the
equipment. Either the Audio Radio ID or the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to XM Satellite Radio
to activate the entertainment subscription.
It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions with the GDL 69A.
Either or both services can be activated. XM Satellite Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send an
activation signal that, when received by the GDL 69A, allows it to play entertainment programming.
These IDs are located:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• On the XM Information Page on the MFD (Figure 8-73)
• On the XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit (available at www.garmin.com, P/N
190-00355-04)
AFCS
Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be located.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
521
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
NOTE: The LOCK Softkey on the XM Information Page (Auxiliary Page Group) is used to save GDL 69A
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
activation data when the XM services are initially set up. It is not used during normal XM Radio operation,
but there should be no adverse effects if inadvertently selected during flight. Refer to the GDL 69/69A XM
Satellite Radio Activation Instructions (190-00355-04, Rev H or later) for further information.
Activating the XM Satellite Radio services:
EIS
1) Contact XM WX Satellite Radio through the e-mail address listed on their website (www.xmradio.com) or by the
customer service phone number listed on the website. Follow the instructions provided by XM Satellite Radio
services.
2) Select the Auxiliary Page Group.
3) Select the next to last page in the AUX Page Group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Select the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
5) Verify that the desired services are activated.
6) Select the LOCK Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight YES.
8) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Data
Radio ID
Audio
Radio ID
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Weather
Products
Window
LOCK Softkey
is Used to Save
Activation Data
During Initial
Setup
RADIO
and INFO
Softkeys
Figure 8-73 XM Information Page
INDEX
If XM weather services have not been activated, all the weather product boxes are blank on the XM Information
Page and a yellow Activation Required message is displayed in the center of the Weather Data Link Page (Map
Page Group). The Service Class refers to the groupings of weather products available for subscription.
522
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Using XM Radio
The XM Radio Page provides information and control of the audio entertainment features of the XM Satellite
Radio.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting the XM Radio Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the displayed AUX - XM Information Page.
3) Select the RADIO Softkey to show the XM Radio Page where audio entertainment is controlled.
EIS
Active
Channels
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Channel
List
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Volume
Field
Categories
Field
AFCS
Figure 8-74 XM Radio Page
Active Channel and Channel List
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Active Channel Box on the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected channel that the XM Radio
is using.
The Channels List Box of the XM Radio Page shows a list of the available channels for the selected category.
Channels can be stepped through one at a time or may be selected directly by channel number.
APPENDICES
Selecting a channel from the channel list:
1) While on the XM Radio Page, select the CHNL Softkey.
2) Select the CH + Softkey to go up through the list in the Channel Box, or move down the list with the
CH – Softkey.
INDEX
Or:
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
523
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
1) Press the FMS Knob to highlight the channel list and turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the channels.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting a channel directly:
1) While on the XM Radio Page, select the CHNL Softkey.
2) Select the DIR CH Softkey. The channel number in the Active Channel Box is highlighted.
3) Select the numbered softkeys located on the bottom of the display to directly select the desired channel
number.
EIS
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
Category
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Category Box of the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected category of audio. Categories of
channels such as jazz, rock, or news can be selected to list the available channels for a type of music or other
contents. One of the optional categories is PRESETS to view channels that have been programmed.
Selecting a category:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the CATGRY Softkey on the XM Radio Page.
2) Select the CAT + and CAT - Softkeys to cycle through the categories.
Or:
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Categories list. Highlight the desired category with the small FMS Knob
and press the ENT Key. Selecting All Categories places all channels in the list.
INDEX
Figure 8-75 Categories List
524
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Presets
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Up to 15 channels from any category can be assigned a preset number. The preset channels are selected by
selecting the PRESETS and MORE Softkeys. Then the preset channel can be selected directly and added to
the channel list for the Presets category.
Setting a preset channel number:
1) On the XM Radio Page, while listening to an Active Channel that is wanted for a preset, select the PRESETS
Softkey to access the first five preset channels (PS1 - PS5).
EIS
2) Select the MORE Softkey to access the next five channels (PS6 – PS10), and again to access the last five
channels (PS11 – PS15). Selecting the MORE Softkey repeatedly cycles through the preset channels.
3) Select any one of the (PS1 - PS15) softkeys to assign a number to the active channel.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Select the SET Softkey on the desired channel number to save the channel as a preset.
Select PRESETS to
Access the Preset
Channels Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Select MORE to Cycle
Through the Preset
Channels
Select SET
to Save Each
Preset Channel
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-76 Accessing and Selecting XM Preset Channels
Selecting the BACK Softkey, or 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, returns the system to the top level softkeys.
Volume
AFCS
Radio volume is shown as a percentage of full volume. Volume level is controlled by selecting the VOL
Softkey, which brings up the MUTE Softkey and the volume increase and decrease softkeys.
Adjusting the volume:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the XM Radio Page displayed, select the VOL Softkey.
2) Select the VOL – Softkey to reduce volume or select the VOL + Softkey to increase volume. (Once the VOL
Softkey is selected, the volume can also be adjusted using the small FMS Knob.)
3) Select the MUTE Softkey to mute the audio. Select the MUTE Softkey again to unmute the audio.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-77 Volume Control
XM Radio volume may also be adjusted on each passenger headset.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
525
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
8.7 Scheduler
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., Change oil, Switch fuel tanks,
or Altimeter-Transponder Check) in the Alerts Window on the PFD. Messages can be set to display based on
a specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or recurrently
whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting automatically reset
to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is cycled, all messages are retained until
deleted, and message timer countdown is resumed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-78 Scheduler (Utility Page)
Entering a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the Messages Window and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to Type.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the message type:
• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time
APPENDICES
• One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
INDEX
8) For periodic and one-time messages, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.
526
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
9) For event-based messages:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MM-YY) and press the ENT Key.
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.
Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
5) Press the ENT Key while the message line is cleared to clear the message time.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Scheduler messages appear in the Messages Window on the PFD. When a scheduler message is waiting, the
ALERTS Softkey label changes to ADVISORY. Pressing the ADVISORY Softkey opens the Messages Window
and acknowledges the scheduler message. The softkey label reverts to ALERTS when pressed. Pressing the
ALERTS Softkey again removes the Messages Window from the display, and the scheduler message is deleted
from the message queue.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-79 PFD Messages Window
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
527
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
8.8 Flight Data Logging
NOTE: Some aircraft installations may not provide all aircraft/engine data capable of being logged by the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
system.
The Flight Data Logging feature will automatically store critical flight and engine data on an SD data card (up
to 16GB) inserted into the top card slot of the MFD. Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each
1GB of available space on the card.
EIS
Data is written to the SD card once each second while the MFD is powered on. All flight data logged on a
specific date is stored in a file named in a format which includes that date (dataYYYY_MM_DD.csv). The file is
created automatically each time the G1000 system is powered on, provided an SD card has been inserted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The status of the Flight Data Logging feature can be viewed on the AUX-UTILITY Page. If no SD card has been
inserted, “NO CARD” is displayed. When data is being written to the SD card, “LOGGING DATA” is displayed.
The .csv file may be viewed with Microsoft Excel® or other spreadsheet applications.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The following is a list of data parameters the G1000 system is capable of logging for the Beechcraft 200/B200
aircraft.
• Date
• Time
• GPS altitude (MSL)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GPS altitude (WGS84 datum)
• Baro-Corrected altitude (feet)
• Baro Correction (in/Hg)
• Indicated airspeed (kts)
AFCS
• Vertical speed (fpm)
• GPS vertical speed (fpm)
• OAT (degrees C)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• True airspeed (knots)
• Pitch Attitude Angle (degrees)
• Roll Attitude Angle (degrees)
APPENDICES
• Lateral and Vertical G Force (g)
• Ground Speed (kts)
• Autopilot On/Off
• Longitude (degrees; geodetic;
+East)
• AFCS roll/pitch commands
• Magnetic Heading (degrees)
• HSI source
• Selected course
• Com1/Com2 frequency
• Nav1/Nav2 frequency
• AFCS roll/pitch modes
• GPS fix
• GPS horizontal alert limit
• GPS vertical alert limit
• WAAS GPS horizontal
protection level
• CDI deflection
• WAAS GPS vertical protection
level
• VDI/GP/GS deflection
• Fuel Qty (right & left)(gals)
• Wind Direction (degrees)
• Fuel Flow (gph)
• Wind Speed (knots)
• Turbine RPM
• Active Waypoint Identifier
• Oil Pressure (psi)
• Distance to next waypoint (nm)
• Oil Temperature (deg. F)
• Bearing to next waypoint
(degrees)
• ITT (deg. F)
• Torque
• Magnetic variation (degrees)
INDEX
• Ground Track (degrees
magnetic)
• Latitude (degrees; geodetic;
+North)
528
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The file containing the recorded data will appear in the format shown in Figure 8-80. This file can be imported
into most computer spreadsheet applications.
Local 24hr Time
HHMMSS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Local Date
YYMMDD
Nearest Airport
(A blank will be
inserted if no
airport is found)
log_090210_104506_KIXD.csv
EIS
Figure 8-80 Log File Format
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Data logging status can be monitored on the AUX-UTILITY Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
529
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
8.9 Abnormal Operation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SVS Troubleshooting
SVS is intended to be used with traditional attitude, heading, obstacle, terrain, and traffic inputs. SVS is
disabled when valid attitude or heading data is not available for the display. In case of invalid SVS data, the PFD
display reverts to the standard blue-over-brown attitude display.
SVS becomes disabled without the following data resources:
EIS
• Attitude data
• Heading data
• GPS position data
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• 9 Arc-second Terrain data
• Obstacle data
• TAWS function is not available, in test mode, or failed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• The position of the aircraft exceeds the range of the terrain database.
Reversionary Mode
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVS can be displayed on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. If it is enabled when switching
to Reversionary Mode, SVS will take up to 30 seconds to be displayed. The standard, non-SVS PFD display will
be shown in the interim.
Figure 8-81 SVS Reversionary Mode
530
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Unusual Attitudes
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Unusual attitudes are displayed with red chevrons overlaid on the display indicating the direction to fly to
correct the unusual attitude condition. The display shows either a brown or blue colored bar at the top or
bottom of the screen to represent earth or sky. This is intended to prevent losing sight of the horizon during
extreme pitch attitudes.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-82 Unusual Attitude Display
The blue colored bar is also displayed when terrain gradient is great enough to completely fill the display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Blue Band
AFCS
Terrain
Completely
Fills Display
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-83 Blue Sky Bar with Full Display Terrain
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
531
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver Troubleshooting
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Ensure the owner/operator of the aircraft in which the Data Link Receiver is installed has subscribed to XM
• Ensure the XM subscription has been activated
• Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link Receiver
• Ensure that nothing is plugged into the MUSIC 1 or MUSIC 2 jacks because that would prevent XM radio
from being heard
EIS
For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information Box on the AUX - System Status Page for Data Link
Receiver (GDL 69/69A) status, serial number, and software version number. If a failure has been detected in the
GDL 69/69A the status is marked with a red X.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting the AUX - System Status Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
INDEX
Figure 8-84 LRU Information Window on System Status Page
532
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If a failure still exists, the following messages may provide insight as to the possible problem:
NO SIGNAL
LOADING
OFF AIR
---
Message Location
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
Weather Datalink Page - center of page
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
Description
Data Link Receiver antenna error; service required
Data Link Receiver updating encryption code
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
CHECK ANTENNA
UPDATING
Loss of signal; signal strength too low for receiver
EIS
Acquiring channel audio or information
Channel not in service
Missing channel information
No communication from Data Link Receiver
WEATHER DATA LINK FAILURE Weather Datalink Page - center of page
within last 5 minutes
ACTIVATION REQUIRED
Weather Datalink Page - center of page XM subscription is not activated
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 8-5 GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver Error Messages
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
533
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Blank Page
534
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Annunciations and Alerts
Note: The Pilot’s Operating Handbook and FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual (AFM/POH) supersedes
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
information found in this document.
The G1000 Alerting System conveys alerts using the following:
EIS
• Alerts Window: The Alerts Window displays text messages for up to 64 prioritized alert messages. Pressing
the ALERTS Softkey displays the Alerts Window. Pressing the ALERTS Softkey a second time removes the
Alerts Window from the display. When the Alerts Window is displayed, the FMS Knob can be used to scroll
through the alert message list.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Softkey Annunciation: During certain alerts, the ALERTS Softkey may appear as a flashing annunciation to
accompany an alert. The ALERTS Softkey assumes a new label (ADVISORY). By selecting the softkey when
flashing an annunciation, the alert is acknowledged. The softkey label then returns to ALERTS. If alerts are
still present, the ALERTS label is displayed in white with black text. Selecting the ALERTS Softkey a second
time views the alert text messages.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• System Annunciations: Typically, a large red ‘X’ appears over instruments whose information is supplied by
a failed Line Replaceable Unit (LRU). See the G1000 System Annunciations Section for more information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
System
Annunciation
(Red ‘X’)
AFCS
Alerts
Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Softkey
Annunciation
Figure A-1 G1000 Alerting System
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
535
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
• Audio Alerting System: The G1000 System issues audio alert tones when specific system conditions are met.
See the Alert Level Definitions Section for more information. The annunciation tone may be tested from the
AUX - System Status Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Testing the system annunciation tone and annunciator lights:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) Select the ANN TEST Softkey.
Or:
EIS
a) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Highlight ‘Enable Annunciator Test Mode’ and press the ENT Key.
Figure A-2 System Status Page, System Annunciation Testing
Press to Test
Annunciation Tone and
Annunciation Lights
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Alert Level Definitions
The G1000 Alerting System, as installed in Beechcraft 200/B200 Series aircraft, uses one alert level.
• ANNUNCIATION OR MESSAGE ADVISORY: This level of alert provides general information.
APPENDICES
An annunciation alert is accompanied by a flashing ‘ADVISORY’ Softkey annunciation (see Figure A-3).
Pressing the ADVISORY Softkey acknowledges the presence of the annunciation alert.
INDEX
Message advisory alerts issue a flashing ‘ADVISORY’ Softkey annunciation (see Figure A-3). Pressing the
ADVISORY Softkey acknowledges the presence of the message advisory alert and displays the alert text
message in the Alerts Window.
Figure A-3 Softkey Annunciation (ALERTS Softkey Labels)
536
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Aircraft Alerts
The following alerts are configured specifically for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series. White annunciation
window text signifies advisories. See the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) for recommended pilot actions.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Audio Alert/Voice Message
None
None
None
None
None
EIS
Alerts Window Message
AVN FAN 1 FAIL – Avionics cooling fan #1 is inoperative.
AVN FAN 2 FAIL – Avionics cooling fan #2 is inoperative.
MFD FAN FAIL – MFD cooling fan is inoperative..
PFD 1 FAN FAIL – PFD #1 cooling fan is inoperative.
PFD 2 FAN FAIL – PFD #2 cooling fan is inoperative.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Message Advisory Alerts
Advisory alerts issue a flashing ‘ADVISORY’ Softkey annunciation. Pressing the ADVISORY Softkey
acknowledges the presence of the advisory alert and displays the alert text message in the Alerts Window.
Audio Alert/Voice Message
None
None
None
None
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Alerts Window Message
TAWS GEAR FAULT – Landing Gear detected in the DOWN position.
TAWS FLAP FAULT – Flaps detected in the LDG position.
WOW FAULT – Miscompare between weight on wheels inputs.
WOW INVALID – Weight on wheels inputs invalid.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Aural Alerts
AFCS
The following aural alerts are announced by the system using a voice of male or female gender (see the AUX
- System Setup Page for the default configured voice gender; contact a Garmin-authorized service center to
change the audio alert voice). Terrain Awareness and Warning System voice alerts are also generated (refer to
the TAWS Alerts section).
Description
The aircraft has descended below the preset minimum descent altitude or decision altitude.
The aircraft is one minute from Top of Descent. Issued only when vertical navigation is enabled.
Played when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued with the TIS system.
The aircraft is outside the Traffic Information Service (TIS) coverage area.
Played when first Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued with an optional TAS system. “Traffic” for each
subsequent TA.
Played when the optional traffic system passes a pilot-initiated self test.
“Traffic Advisory System - SKY 497 TAS
Test Passed”
“TAS System Test OK”
- KTA 870 TAS
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
- SKY 899 TAS
APPENDICES
“SKYWATCH System
Test Passed”
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Aural Alert
“Minimums”
“Vertical track”
“Traffic”
“Traffic Not Available”
“Traffic, Traffic”
537
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
Description
Played when the optional traffic system fails a pilot-initiated self test.
“Traffic Advisory System - SKY 497 TAS
Test Failed”
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Aural Alert
“SKYWATCH System
Test Failed”
- SKY 899 TAS
“TAS System Test Fail”
- KTA 870 TAS
EIS
Comparator Annunciations
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Comparator monitors critical values generated by redundant sensors. If differences in the sensors exceed
a specified amount, this discrepency is annunciated in the Comparator Window as a ‘MISCOMP’ (miscompare).
If one or both of the sensed values are unavailable, it is annunciated as a ‘NO COMP’ (no compare) as seen in
Figure A-4. The following is a list of the possible annunciations:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Comparator
Window
Figure A-4 Sensor Comparator Window
AFCS
Comparator Window Text
ALT MISCOMP
IAS MISCOMP
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
HDG MISCOMP
PIT MISCOMP
ROL MISCOMP
ALT NO COMP
IAS NO COMP
HDG NO COMP
PIT NO COMP
ROL NO COMP
Condition
Difference in altitude sensors is > 200 ft.
If both airspeed sensors detect < 35 knots, this is inhibited.
If either airspeed sensor detects > 35 knots, and the difference in sensors is > 10 knots.
If either airspeed sensor detects > 80 knots, and the difference in sensors is > 7 knots.
Difference in heading sensors is > 6 degrees.
Difference in pitch sensors is > 5 degrees.
Difference in roll sensors is > 6 degrees.
No data from one or both altitude sensors.
No data from one or both airspeed sensors.
No data from one or both heading sensors.
No data from one or both pitch sensors.
No data from one or both roll sensors..
538
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Reversionary Sensor Annunciations
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Reversionary sensor selection is annunciated in the Reversionary Sensor Window, as shown in Figure A-5.
These annunciations reflect reversionary sensors selected on one or both PFDs. Pressing the SENSOR Softkey
gives access to ADC1, ADC2, AHRS1, and AHRS2 Softkeys. These softkeys allow manual switching of sensors. In
the case of certain types of sensor failures, the G1000 may make some sensor selections automatically. The GPS
sensor cannot be switched manually.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Reversionary
Sensor
Window
Figure A-5 Reversionary Sensor Windows
Condition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Both PFDs are displaying data from the number one Air Data Computer.
Both PFDs are displaying data from the number two Air Data Computer.
Both PFDs are displaying data from the number one Attitude & Heading Reference System.
Both PFDs are displaying data from the number two Attitude & Heading Reference System.
Both PFDs are displaying data from the number one GPS receiver.
Both PFDs are displaying data from the number two GPS receiver.
PFD2 is displaying data from the #1 Air Data Computer.
PFD1 is displaying data from the #2 Air Data Computer.
PFD2 is displaying data from the #1 AHRS.
PFD1 is displaying data from the #2 AHRS.
PFD2 is displaying data from the #1 GPS.
PFD1 is displaying data from the #2 GPS.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Reversionary Sensor
Window Text
BOTH ON ADC1
BOTH ON ADC2
BOTH ON AHRS1
BOTH ON AHRS2
BOTH ON GPS1
BOTH ON GPS2
USING ADC1
USING ADC2
USING AHRS1
USING AHRS2
USING GPS1
USING GPS2
G1000 System Annunciations
APPENDICES
When a new message is issued, the ALERTS Softkey flashes to alert the flight crew of a new message. It
continues to flash until acknowledged by pressing the softkey. Active messages are displayed in white text.
Messages that have become inactive change to gray text. The ALERTS Softkey flashes if the state of a displayed
message changes or a new message is displayed. The inactive messages can be removed from the Message
Window by pressing the flashing ALERTS Softkey.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
The G1000 System Messages convey messages to the flight crew regarding problems with the G1000 system.
Typically, a large red ‘X’ appears in a window when a related LRU fails or detects invalid data.
539
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed on windows associated with
the failed data. The following section describes various system annunciations. Refer to the AFM/POH for
additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Appendix A
NOTE: Upon power-up of the G1000 system, certain windows remain invalid as G1000 equipment begins to
EIS
initialize. All windows should be operational within one minute of power-up. Should any window continue
to remain flagged, the G1000 system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
System
Annunciation
Red ‘X’
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Messages Window
Alerts Softkey Annunciation
Figure A-6 G1000 System Messages
AFCS
GIA 63W
Integrated
Avionics Units
GIA 63W
Integrated
Avionics Units
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GDC 74B Air
Data Computer
GRS 77 AHRS
Or
GMU 44
Magnetometer
APPENDICES
GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
Or
GIA 63W
Integrated
Avionics Unit
INDEX
GIA 63W
Integrated
Avionics Units
GDC 74B Air Data Computer
GTX 33 Transponder Or GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units
Figure A-7 G1000 System Failure Annunciations
540
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: Upon power-up, certain windows remain invalid as G1000 equipment begins to initialize. All windows
should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any window continues to remain flagged, the
G1000 System should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System Annunciation
Comment
Attitude and Heading Reference System is aligning.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Display system is not receiving attitude information from the AHRS.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Display system is not receiving airspeed input from air data computer.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Display system is not receiving valid heading input from AHRS.
AFCS
Display system is not receiving altitude input from the air data computer.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Display system is not receiving vertical speed input from the air data computer.
APPENDICES
Display system is not receiving valid transponder information.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
541
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
System Annunciation
Comment
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GPS information is either not present or is invalid for navigation use.
Note that AHRS utilizes GPS inputs during normal operation. AHRS operation may be degraded if
GPS signals are not present (see AFM/POH).
EIS
Other Various Red X
Indications
A red ‘X’ through any other display field (such as engine instrumentation display) indicates that the
field is not receiving valid data.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
This section describes various G1000 system message advisories. Certain messages are issued due to an LRU
or an LRU function failure. Such messages are normally accompanied by a corresponding red ‘X’ annunciation
as shown previously in the G1000 System Annunciation section.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
G1000 System Message Advisories
Note: This Section provides information regarding G1000 message advisories that may be displayed by
the system. Knowledge of the aircraft, systems, flight conditions, and other existing operational priorities
must be considered when responding to a message. Always use sound pilot judgment. The AFM/POH takes
precedence over any conflicting guidance found in this section.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MFD & PFD Message Advisories
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Message
DATA LOST – Pilot stored data was
lost. Recheck settings.
XTALK ERROR – A flight display
crosstalk error has occurred.
PFD1 SERVICE – PFD1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
PFD2 SERVICE – PFD2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
MFD1 SERVICE – MFD1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
MANIFEST – PFD1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
MANIFEST – PFD2 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
MANIFEST – MFD1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
PFD1 CONFIG – PFD1 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
PFD2 CONFIG – PFD2 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
542
Comments
The pilot profile data was lost. System reverts to default pilot profile and settings. The
pilot may reconfigure the MFD & PFD with preferred settings, if desired.
The MFD and PFD are not communicating with each other. The G1000 system should
be serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD self-test has detected a problem. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The PFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
G1000 system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Comments
The MFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
G1000 system should be serviced.
The MFD and PFD have different software versions installed. The G1000 system
should be serviced.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The PFD and/or MFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by dimming
the display. If problem persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A key is stuck on the PFD and/or MFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing
it several times. The G1000 system should be serviced if the problem persists.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The PFD1 configuration module backup memory has failed. The G1000 system should
be serviced.
The PFD1 voltage is low. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The PFD2 voltage is low. The G1000 system should be serviced.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Message
MFD1 CONFIG – MFD1 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
SW MISMATCH – GDU software
version mismatch. Xtalk is off.
PFD1 COOLING – PFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
PFD2 COOLING – PFD2 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
MFD1 COOLING – MFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
PFD1 KEYSTK – PFD1 [key name] Key
is stuck.
PFD2 KEYSTK – PFD2 [key name] Key
is stuck
MFD1 KEYSTK – MFD1 [key name]
Key is stuck.
CNFG MODULE – PFD1 configuration
module is inoperative.
PFD1 VOLTAGE – PFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage.
PFD2 VOLTAGE – PFD2 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage.
MFD1 VOLTAGE – MFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage.
The MFD voltage is low. The G1000 system should be serviced.
Database Message Advisories
Comments
AFCS
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the navigation database. Attempt to
reload the navigation database. If problem persists, the G1000 system should be
serviced.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Message
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 navigation
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1
navigation database error exists.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2
navigation database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 basemap
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 basemap
database error exists.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 basemap
database error exists.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the basemap database. The G1000 system
should be serviced.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
543
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain database
error exists.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 terrain database
error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain database
missing.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 terrain database
missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle
database error exists.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 obstacle
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle
database missing.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 obstacle
database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 airport terrain
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 airport terrain
database error exists.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 airport terrain
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 airport terrain
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 airport terrain
database missing.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 airport terrain
database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
544
Comments
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the
terrain card is properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists,
the G1000 system should be serviced.
The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
Ensure that the terrain card is properly inserted in the specified display. Replace
terrain card. If problem persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the obstacle database. Ensure that the
data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the G1000
system should be serviced.
The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified
LRU. Ensure that the terrain card is properly inserted in the specified display.
Replace terrain card. If problem persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the airport terrain database. Ensure that
the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the G1000
system should be serviced.
The airport terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the
specified LRU. Ensure that the terrain card is properly inserted in the specified
display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists, the G1000 system should be
serviced.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the Safe Taxi database. Ensure that the
data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the G1000
system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Chartview
database error exists.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Comments
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the Chartview database (optional feature).
Ensure that the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem
persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 FliteCharts
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the FliteCharts database (optional feature).
database error exists.
Ensure that the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem
persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Airport
The MFD detected a failure in the Airport Directory database. Ensure the data card
Directory database error exists.
is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
DB MISMATCH – Navigation database The PFDs and MFD have different navigation database versions installed. Crossfill is
version mismatch. Xtalk is off.
off. Install correct navigation database version in both displays.
DB MISMATCH – Navigation database The PFDs and MFD have different navigation database types installed (Americas,
type mismatch. Xtalk is off.
European, etc.). Crossfill is off. Install correct navigation database type in both
displays.
DB MISMATCH – Terrain database
The PFDs and MFD have different terrain database versions installed. Crossfill is off.
version mismatch.
Install correct terrain database version in both displays.
DB MISMATCH – Terrain database type The PFDs and MFD have different terrain database types installed. Crossfill is off.
mismatch.
Install correct terrain database type in both displays.
DB MISMATCH – Obstacle database
The PFDs and MFD have different obstacle database versions installed. Crossfill is
version mismatch.
off. Install correct obstacle database version in both displays.
DB MISMATCH – Airport Terrain
The PFDs and MFD have different airport terrrain databases installed. Crossfill is off.
database mismatch.
Install correct airport terrain database in both displays.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GMA 1347D Message Advisories
The audio panel self-test has detected a failure. The audio panel is unavailable. The
G1000 system should be serviced.
An error has occurred in transferring data between the two GMAs. The G1000 system
should be serviced.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The audio panel configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory.
The G1000 system should be serviced.
APPENDICES
The audio panel has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The audio panel self-test has detected a problem in the unit. Certain audio functions may
still be available, and the audio panel may still be usable. The G1000 system should be
serviced when possible.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Comments
AFCS
Message
GMA1 FAIL – GMA1 is inoperative.
GMA2 FAIL – GMA2 is inoperative.
GMA XTALK – GMA crosstalk error
has occurred.
GMA1 CONFIG – GMA1 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
GMA2 CONFIG – GMA2 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GMA1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
MANIFEST – GMA2 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
GMA1 SERVICE – GMA1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
GMA2 SERVICE – GMA2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
545
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
GIA 63W Message Advisories
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 temperature
too low.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 temperature
too low.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 over
temperature.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 over
temperature.
GIA1 SERVICE – GIA1 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
GIA2 SERVICE – GIA2 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA1 communication
halted.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA2 communication
halted.
MANIFEST – GIA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GIA2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GFC software mismatch,
communication halted.
COM1 TEMP – COM1 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM2 TEMP – COM2 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM1 SERVICE – COM1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
COM2 SERVICE – COM2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
546
Comments
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 have an error in the audio configuration. The G1000 system
should be serviced.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to
warm up to operating temperature.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the G1000 system
should be serviced.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The G1000 system
should be serviced.
A GIA mismatch has been detected, where only one is WAAS capable. The G1000
system should be serviced.
The GIA1 and/or GIA 2 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
Incorrect servo software is installed, or gain settings are incorrect.
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM1 and/or COM2. The
transmitter operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the G1000 system
should be serviced.
The system has detected a failure in COM1 and/or COM2. COM1 and/or COM2 may
still be usable. The G1000 system should be serviced when possible.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Appendix A
The COM1 and/or COM2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
position. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem
persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
GPS integrity is insufficient for the current phase of flight.
Loss of GPS navigation due to insufficient satellites.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Loss of GPS navigation due to position error.
Loss of GPS navigation due to GPS failure.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Abort approach due to loss of GPS navigation.
Vertical guidance generated by WAAS is unavailable, use LNAV only minimums..
Displayed after passing the first waypoint of a true north approach when the nav
angle is set to ‘AUTO’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver may still
be available. The G1000 system should be serviced.
AFCS
A failure has been detected in the NAV1 and/or NAV2 receiver. The receiver may still
be available. The G1000 system should be serviced.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The remote NAV1 and/or NAV2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
state. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists,
the G1000 system should be serviced.
APPENDICES
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The G1000
system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The receiver
may still be available. The G1000 system should be serviced when possible.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
The COM1 and/or COM2 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or
“pressed”) position. Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
If the problem persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
EIS
G/S1 SERVICE – G/S1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
G/S2 SERVICE – G/S2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
Comments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
G/S2 FAIL – G/S2 is inoperative.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message
COM1 PTT – COM1 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
COM2 PTT – COM2 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
COM1 RMT XFR – COM1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
COM2 RMT XFR – COM2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
LOI – GPS integrity lost. Crosscheck
with other NAVS.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Insufficient satellites.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Position error.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. GPS fail.
ABORT APR – Loss of GPS navigation.
Abort approach.
APR DWNGRADE – Approach
downgraded.
TRUE APR – True north approach.
Change HDG reference to TRUE.
GPS1 SERVICE – GPS1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
GPS2 SERVICE – GPS2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV1 SERVICE – NAV1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV2 SERVICE – NAV2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV1 RMT XFR – NAV1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
NAV2 RMT XFR – NAV2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
G/S1 FAIL – G/S1 is inoperative.
547
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
GEA 71 Message Advisories
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
GEA1 CONFIG – GEA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
GEA2 CONFIG – GEA2 config error.
Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GEA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GEA2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
Comments
The GEA1 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The G1000 system should be serviced.
The GEA2 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The G1000 system should be serviced.
The #1 GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The #2 GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
GTX 33 Message Advisories
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Message
XPDR1 CONFIG – XPDR1 config error.
Config service req’d.
XPDR2 CONFIG – XPDR2 config error.
Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GTX1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GTX2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
XPDR1 SRVC – XPDR1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
XPDR2 SRVC – XPDR2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
XPDR1 FAIL – XPDR1 is inoperative.
XPDR2 FAIL – XPDR2 is inoperative.
Comments
The transponder configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The transponder configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The transponder has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The transponder has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The #1 transponder should be serviced when possible.
The #2 transponder should be serviced when possible.
There is no communication with the #1 transponder.
There is no communication with the #2 transponder.
GRS 77 Message Advisories
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Message
AHRS1 TAS – AHRS1 not receiving
valid airspeed.
APPENDICES
AHRS2 TAS – AHRS2 not receiving
valid airspeed.
INDEX
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 using backup
GPS source.
AHRS2 GPS – AHRS2 using backup
GPS source.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
any GPS information.
AHRS2 GPS – AHRS2 not receiving
any GPS information.
548
Comments
The #1 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS
relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The G1000 system should
be serviced.
The #2 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS
relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The G1000 system should
be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The G1000
system should be serviced when possible.
The #2 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The G1000
system should be serviced when possible.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check AFMS
limitations. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The #2 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check AFMS
limitations. The G1000 system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Comments
The #1 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The #2 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The #1 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The #2 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
The #1 AHRS and #2 AHRS magnetic model database versions do not match.
The #1 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model
when practical.
The #2 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model
when practical.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The aircraft is outside geographical limits for approved AHRS operation. Heading is
flagged as invalid.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The #1 AHRS has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The #2 AHRS has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Message
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
backup GPS information.
AHRS2 GPS – AHRS2 not receiving
backup GPS information.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 operating
exclusively in no-GPS mode.
AHRS2 GPS – AHRS2 operating
exclusively in no-GPS mode.
AHRS MAG DB – AHRS magnetic
model database version mismatch.
AHRS1 SRVC – AHRS1 Magnetic-field
model needs update.
AHRS2 SRVC – AHRS2 Magnetic-field
model needs update.
GEO LIMITS – AHRS1 too far North/
South, no magnetic compass.
GEO LIMITS – AHRS2 too far North/
South, no magnetic compass.
MANIFEST – GRS1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GRS2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GMU 44 Message Advisories
Comments
A fault has occurred in the #1 GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS uses
GPS for backup mode operation. The G1000 system should be serviced.
A fault has occurred in the #2 GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS uses
GPS for backup mode operation. The G1000 system should be serviced.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Message
HDG FAULT – AHRS1 magnetometer
fault has occurred.
HDG FAULT – AHRS2 magnetometer
fault has occurred.
MANIFEST – GMU1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GMU2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
The GMU 44 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
APPENDICES
GDL 69A Message Advisories
Message
GDL69 CONFIG – GDL 69 config
error. Config service req’d.
GDL69 FAIL – GDL 69 has failed.
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
Comments
GDL 69 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The G1000 system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GDL 69. The receiver is unavailable. The G1000
system should be serviced
MANIFEST – GDL software mismatch, The GDL 69 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
communication halted.
549
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
GDC 74B Message Advisories
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
ADC1 ALT EC – ADC1 altitude error
correction is unavailable.
ADC2 ALT EC – ADC2 altitude error
correction is unavailable.
ADC1 AS EC – ADC1 airspeed error
correction is unavailable.
ADC2 AS EC – ADC2 airspeed error
correction is unavailable.
MANIFEST – GDC1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GDC2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
Comments
GDC1 or GDC2 is reporting that the altitude error correction is unavailable. The
G1000 system should be serviced.
GDC1 or GDC2 is reporting that the airspeed error correction is unavailable. The
G1000 system should be serviced.
The GDC 74B has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
GCU 477 Message Advisories
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Message
GCU CNFG – GCU Config error.
Config service req’d.
GCU FAIL – GCU is inoperative.
MANIFEST – GCU software
mismatch, ommunication halted.
GCU KEYSTK – GCU [keyname] Key
is stuck
Comments
GCU 477 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The G1000 system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GCU 477. The GCU 477 is unavailable.
The GCU 477 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
A key is stuck on the GCU 477 bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it
several times. The G1000 system should be serviced if the problem persists.
GMC 710 Message Advisories
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Message
GMC CNFG – GMC Config error.
Config service req’d.
GMC FAIL – GMC is inoperative.
MANIFEST – GMC software
mismatch, communication halted.
GMC KEYSTK – GMC [keyname] Key
is stuck
Comments
Error in the configuration of the GMC 710.
A failure has been detected in the GMC 710. The GMC 710 is unavailable.
The GMC 710 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
A key is stuck on the GCMC 710 bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it
several times. The G1000 system should be serviced if the problem persists.
GWX 68 Message Advisories
INDEX
Message
GWX CONFIG – GWX config error.
Config service req’d.
GWX FAIL – GWX is inoperative.
550
Comments
GWX 68 configuration settings do not match those of the GDU configuration. The
G1000 system should be serviced.
The GDU is not recieving status packet from the GWX 68 or the GWX 68 is reporting
a fault. The GWX 68 radar system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Comments
A failure has been detected in the GWX 68. The GWX 68 may still be usable.
The GWX 68 indicates severe weather within ±10 degrees of the aircraft heading at a
range of 80 to 320 nm.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
GWX SERVICE – Needs service.
Return unit for repair.
WX ALERT – Possible severe weather
ahead.
MANIFEST – GWX software
mismatch, communication halted.
The GWX 68 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
Miscellaneous Message Advisories
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
190-00928-01 Rev. A
EIS
Message
Comments
FPL WPT LOCK – Flight plan waypoint Upon power-up, the G1000 system detects that a stored flight plan waypoint is
is locked.
locked. This occurs when an navigation database update eliminates an obsolete
waypoint. The flight plan cannot find the specified waypoint and flags this message.
This can also occur with user waypoints in a flight plan that is deleted.
Remove the waypoint from the flight plan if it no longer exists in any database,
Or - update the waypoint name/identifier to reflect the new information.
FPL WPT MOVE – Flight plan
The system has detected that a waypoint coordinate has changed due to a new
waypoint moved.
navigation database update. Verify that stored flight plans contain correct waypoint
locations.
TIMER EXPIRD – Timer has expired.
The system notifies the pilot that the timer has expired.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains a procedure that is no longer consistent
Verify user modified procedures.
with the navigation database. This alert is issued only after an navigation database
update. Verify that the user-modified procedures in stored flight plans are correct and
up to date.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains an airway that is no longer consistent
Verify stored airways.
with the navigation database. This alert is issued only after an navigation database
update. Verify use of airways in stored flight plans and reload airways as needed.
FPL TRUNC – Flight plan has been
This occurs when a newly installed navigation database eliminates an obsolete
truncated.
approach or arrival used by a stored flight plan. The obsolete procedure is removed
from the flight plan. Update flight plan with current arrival or approach.
LOCKED FPL – Cannot navigate
This occurs when the pilot attempts to activate a stored flight plan that contains
locked flight plan.
locked waypoint. Remove locked waypoint from flight plan. Update flight plan with
current waypoint.
WPT ARRIVAL – Arriving at waypoint
Arriving at waypoint [xxxx], where [xxxx] is the waypoint name.
-[xxxx]
STEEP TURN – Steep turn ahead.
A steep turn is 15 seconds ahead. Prepare to turn.
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
The aircraft is inside the special use airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead less Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft will penetrate the special use
than 10 minutes.
airspace within 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
than 2 nm.
551
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
APPR INACTV – Approach is not
active.
SLCT FREQ – Select appropriate
frequency for approach.
SLCT NAV – Select NAV on CDI for
approach.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
bad geometry.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
invalid leg type.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
past IAF.
UNABLE V WPT – Can’t reach current
vertical waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VNV – Unavailable. Unsupported leg
type in flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VNV – Unavailable. Excessive
crosstrack error.
VNV – Unavailable. Excessive track
angle error.
VNV – Unavailable. Parallel course
selected.
NO WGS84 WPT – Non WGS 84
waypoint for navigation -[xxxx]
TRAFFIC FAIL – Traffic device has
failed.
STRMSCP FAIL – Stormscope has
failed.
FAILED PATH – A data path has failed.
MAG VAR WARN – Large magnetic
variance. Verify all course angles.
Comments
The system notifies the pilot that the loaded approach is not active. Activate
approach when required.
The system notifies the pilot to load the approach frequency for the appropriate NAV
receiver. Select the correct frequency for the approach.
The system notifies the pilot to set the CDI to the correct NAV receiver. Set the CDI to
the correct NAV receiver.
Bad parallel track geometry.
Invalid leg type for parallel offset.
IAF waypoint for parallel offset has been passed.
The current vertical waypoint can not be reached within the maximum flight path
angle and vertical speed constraints. The system automatically transitions to the next
vertical waypoint.
The lateral flight plan contains a procedure turn, vector, or other unsupported leg
type prior to the active vertical waypoint. This prevents vertical guidance to the active
vertical waypoint.
The current crosstrack exceeds the limit, causing vertical deviation to go invalid.
The current track angle error exceeds the limit, causing the vertical deviation to go
invalid.
A parallel course has been selected, causing the vertical deviation to go invalid.
The selected waypoint [xxxx] does not use the WGS 84 datum. Cross-check position
with alternate navigation sources.
The system is no longer receiving data from the traffic system. The traffic device
should be serviced.
Stormscope has failed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
INDEX
APPENDICES
A data path connected to the GDU or the GIA 63/W has failed.
The GDU’s internal model cannot determine the exact magnetic variance for
geographic locations near the magnetic poles. Displayed magnetic course angles may
differ from the actual magnetic heading by more than 2°.
SCHEDULER [#] – <message>.
Message criteria entered by the user.
SVS – SVS DISABLED: Out of available Synthetic Vision is disabled because the aircraft is not within the boundaries of the
terrain region.
installed terrain database.
SVS – SVS DISABLED: Terrain DB
Synthetic Vision is disabled because a terrain database of sufficient resolution (9 arcresolution too low.
second or better) is not currently installed.
552
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AFCS Alerts
System Status Field
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure A-8 AFCS System Status Field
The following alert annunciations appear in the AFCS System Status field on the PFD.
EIS
Condition
Pitch Failure
Annunciation Description
Pitch axis control failure. AP and YD are inoperative.
Elevator Mistrim Up
A condition has developed causing the pitch servo to provide a sustained force. Be
prepared to apply nose up control wheel force upon autopilot disconnect.
A condition has developed causing the pitch servo to provide a sustained force. Be
prepared to apply nose down control wheel force upon autopilot disconnect.
A condition has developed causing the roll servo to provide a sustained left force.
Ensure the slip/skid indicator is centered and observe any maximum fuel imbalance
limits.
A condition has developed causing the roll servo to provide a sustained right force.
Ensure the slip/skid indicator is centered and observe any maximum fuel imbalance limits.
A condition has developed causing the yaw servo to provide a sustained force. Ensure
the slip/skid indicator is centered and observe any maximum fuel imbalance limits.
A condition has developed causing the yaw servo to provide a sustained force.
Ensure the slip/skid indicator is centered and observe any maximum fuel imbalance
limits.
Performing preflight system test. Upon completion of the test, the aural alert is
heard.
Preflight system test has failed.
Elevator Mistrim
Down
Aileron Mistrim Left
Aileron Mistrim
Right
Rudder Mistrim Left
Rudder Mistrim
Right
Preflight Test
APPENDICES
If annunciated when AP is engaged, take control of the aircraft and disengage the
autopilot. If annunciated when AP is not engaged, move each half of the MET
switch separately to check if a stuck switch is causing the annunciation.
AP, YD, and MET are unavailable. FD may still be available.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MET Switch Stuck,
or Pitch Trim Axis
Control Failure
System Failure
AFCS
YD control failure; AP is inoperative
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Yaw Damper Failure
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Roll axis control failure. AP and YD are inoperative.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Roll Failure
NOTE: Do not press the AP/YD DISC TRIM INTRPT switch during servo power-up and preflight system tests
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
as this may cause the preflight system test to fail or never to start (if servos fail their power-up tests). Power
must be cycled to the servos to remedy the situation.
553
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
TAWS ALERTS
Annunciations appear on both PFDs and the MFD. Pop-up alerts appear only on the MFD.
PFD/MFD TAWS
Page
Annunciation
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alert Type
MFD Map Page
Pop-Up Alert
Aural Message
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
or
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up” †
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning
(ITI)
or
Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
or
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up” †
†
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
†
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance Warning (ROC)
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up” †
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning
(IOI)
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up” †
†
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
†
Excessive Descent Rate Warning
(EDR)
“Pull Up”
or
*[Whoop, Whoop]“Pull Up”
*Excessive Closure Rate Warning
(ECR)
[Whoop, Whoop]“Pull Up”
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution
(ITI)
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain” †
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain” †
†
†
AFCS
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance Caution (ROC)
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution
(IOI)
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle” †
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle” †
†
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
†
Premature Descent Alert Caution
(PDA)
“Too Low, Terrain”
Excessive Descent Rate Caution
(EDR)
“Sink Rate”
*Excessive Closure Rate Caution
(ECR)
“Terrain, Terrain”
Negative Climb Rate Caution (NCR)
†
or
“Don’t Sink” †
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
INDEX
* TAWS-A Only
† Default Selection
554
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MFD Map Page
Pop-Up Alert
Aural Message
“Too Low, Terrain”
*Flight Into Terrain Gear Caution
(FIT)
“Too Low, Gear”
*Flight Into Terrain Flaps Caution
(FIT)
“Too Low, Flaps”
*Flight Into Terrain Takeoff Caution
(FIT)
“Too Low, Terrain”
None
None
“Glide Slope”
or
“Glide Path”
“Five-Hundred” or *“Four-Hundred” or *“ThreeHundred” or *“Two-Hundred” or *“One-Hundred”
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitude Voice Callout (VCO)
(all except “Five-Hundred” are
configurable)
or
or
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
*Glide Slope Deviation Caution
(GSD)
(depends on approach type)
EIS
*Flight Into Terrain High Speed
Caution (FIT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD/MFD TAWS
Page
Annunciation
Alert Type
* TAWS-A Only
† Default Selection
TAWS System Status Annunciations
TAWS System Fail
Aural Message
“TAWS System Failure”
“GPWS System Failure”
TAWS Alerting is disabled
None
None
*GPWS Alerting is disabled
None
None
*Flap Override is enabled
None
None
None
None
No GPS position, excessively
degraded GPS signal, or out
of database coverage area
None
System Test in progress
None
“TAWS Not Available”
“TAWS Available” when sufficient GPS signal is
re-established.
(aural message only in flight)
None
None
“TAWS System Test OK”
or
None
APPENDICES
System Test pass
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
None
AFCS
*GPWS System Fail
*Glideslope/Glidepath
Alerting is disabled
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PFD/MFD TAWS
MFD Map Page
Page Annunciation Pop-Up Alert
None
Alert Type
190-00928-01 Rev. A
INDEX
* TAWS-A Only
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
555
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
Flight plan Import/Export Messages
In some circumstances, some messages may appear in conjunction with others.
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Plan Import/Export Results
‘Flight plan successfully imported.’
‘File contained user waypoints only. User
waypoints imported successfully. No stored
flight plan data was modified.’
‘No flight plan files found to import.’
‘Flight plan import failed.’
‘Flight plan partially imported.’
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
‘File contained user waypoints only.’
‘Too many points. Flight plan truncated.’
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
‘Some waypoints not loaded. Waypoints
locked.’
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
‘User waypoint database full. Not all loaded.’
‘One or more user waypoints renamed.’
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
‘Flight plan successfully exported.’
‘Flight export failed.’
Description
A flight plan file stored on the SD card was successfully imported as a stored flight plan.
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints. These
waypoints have been saved to the system user waypoints. No flight plans stored in the
system have been modified.
The SD card contains no flight plan data.
Flight plan data was not successfully imported from the SD card.
Some flight plan waypoints were successfully imported from the SD card, however others
had errors and were not imported. A partial stored flight plan now exists in the system.
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints. One or
more of these waypoints did not import successfully.
The flight plan on the SD card contains more waypoints than the system can support. The
flight plan was imported with as many waypoints as possible.
The flight plan on the SD card contains one or more waypoints that the system cannot find
in the navigation database. The flight plan has been imported, but must be edited within
the system before it can be activated for use.
The flight plan file on the SD card contains user waypoints. The quantity of stored user
waypoints has exceeded system capacity, therefore not all the user waypoints on the SD
card have been imported. Any flight plan user waypoints that were not imported are
locked in the flight plan. The flight plan must be edited within the system before it can be
activated for use.
One or more imported user waypoints were renamed when imported due to naming
conflicts with waypoints already existing in the system.
The stored flight plan was successfully exported to the SD card.
The stored flight plan was not successfully exported to the SD card. The SD card may not
have sufficient available memory or the card may have been removed prematurely.
556
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Appendix B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SD Card Use
The system uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load and store various types of data. For basic flight operations,
SD cards are required for database storage as well as Jeppesen navigation and ChartView database updates.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION: Do not load Jeppesen navigation data (except ChartView) onto Garmin Supplemental Data
Cards.
NOTE: Loading a database in the system prior to its effective date will result in the expiration date on the
EIS
power-up screen and the effective date on the AUX-System Status Page being displayed in yellow.
Jeppesen Databases
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Jeppesen navigation database is updated on a 28-day cycle. The ChartView database is updated on a
14-day cycle. If the ChartView database is not updated within 70 days of the expiration date, ChartView will
no longer function. Both of these databases are provided directly from Jeppesen.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Note: The Jeppesen aviation navigation database is now referred to as the ‘navigation database’. Previously
this database had been referred to as the ‘aviation database’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The ChartView database should be copied to the Garmin supplied Supplemental Data Card which will reside
in the bottom card slot on the MFD. The navigation database must be installed from the Jeppesen or user
supplied SD data card. Contact Jeppesen (www.jeppesen.com) for subscription and update information.
NOTE: After the navigation database is installed, the card may be removed.
Updating the active Jeppesen navigation database (not using the Dual Navigation Database or
Automatic Database Synchronization Features):
AFCS
1) With the system OFF, insert the SD card containing the navigation database update into the top card slot of the
display (PFD or MFD) to be updated (label of SD card facing left).
2) Turn the system ON. A prompt similar to the following is displayed in the upper left corner of the display:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure B-1: Standby Navigation Database Prompt
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
3) Press the NO Softkey to proceed to the active database update, or press the YES Softkey to start the standby
database update to the SD card in the bottom card slot.
557
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix B
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) A prompt similar to the following is displayed, press the YES Softkey to update the active navigation
database.
Figure B-2 Database Update Confirmation
5) After the update completes, the display starts in normal mode.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Turn the system OFF and remove the SD card.
7) Repeat steps 1 through 4 for the other PFD and the MFD. The MFD and PFD databases are now updated.
Remove the SD card when finished.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) During MFD startup, verify that the correct update cycle is loaded.
Dual Navigation Database FEATURE
The dual navigation database feature allows each display to store an upcoming navigation database on the
bottom SD card so that the system can automatically load it to replace the active database when the new
database becomes effective (the next cycle becomes available seven days prior to its effective date).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
If a navigation database loader card is inserted into the top SD card slot of a display, and an SD card is in the
bottom slot, the system will prompt the user (upon on-ground power up) as to whether the database should
be stored on the bottom SD card as the standby database. If the user responds affirmatively, the system will
copy the navigation database from the top SD card to the bottom SD card. As long as the bottom SD card
remains in the card slot, this standby navigation database will be available for the system to use as the active
database as soon as it becomes effective.
APPENDICES
The system checks the active and standby databases upon (on-ground only) power-up. If the standby
database is current and the active database is out of date, the display will upload the standby database
into the active internal database location. Uploading the standby database to the active location takes
approximately 45-55 seconds. The pilot is alerted that the update is complete by a system alert message,
‘NAV DB UPDATED’.
Loading a standby navigation database:
INDEX
1) With the system OFF, insert the SD card containing the navigation database update into the top card slot of the
desired PFD or MFD.
2) Verify that an SD card is inserted in the bottom slot.
558
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Appendix B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Turn the system ON. A prompt similar to the following is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure B-3 Standby Navigation Database Prompt
4) Press the YES Softkey, to start the update.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) After the navigation database files are copied to the bottom SD card. A prompt similar to the following is
displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure B-4 Active Navigation Database Prompt
6) Press the YES Softkey to manually update the active navigation database, or press the NO Softkey to allow the
system to automatically update the active navigation database as applicable per database effectivity.
AFCS
7) After the update, the display starts in normal mode.
8) Repeat steps 1-7 for each PFD and the MFD, if updating manually.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
9) Verify the effectivity of the active navigation database in each PFD and the MFD on the AUX-System Status
Page.
NOTE: The system compares the active databases on each PFD and the MFD, and displays a system alert
APPENDICES
message ‘DB Mismatch’ if they are not identical. Similarly, if the standby databases on each PFD and the
MFD are not identical, the system will display a ‘DB Mismatch’ alert for the standby navigation databases.
Garmin recommends enabling the automatic database synchronization feature to protect against database
mismatches.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
559
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix B
Garmin Databases
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following databases are stored on Supplemental Data Cards provided by Garmin:
• Expanded basemap
• Airport terrain
• SafeTaxi
• Terrain
• Obstacle
• FliteCharts
• Airport Directory
(AOPA)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
After subscribing to the desired database product, these database products will be downloaded to three
Supplemental Data Cards (with the exception of FliteCharts, which is loaded on only one card). Insert each
Supplemental Data Card into the correct location shown in Figure B-5. These cards must not be removed
except to update the databases stored on each card.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PFD1
PFD2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MFD
Figure B-3 Correct Database Locations
AFCS
Since these databases are not stored internally in the displays, a Supplemental Data Card containing identical
database versions must be kept in each display unit.
The basemap database contains data for the topography and land features, such as rivers, lakes, and towns.
It is updated only periodically, with no set schedule. There is no expiration date.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The terrain database contains the terrain mapping data. The airport terrain database contains increased
resolution terrain data around airports. These databases are updated periodically and have no expiration date.
APPENDICES
The obstacle database contains data for obstacles, such as towers, that pose a potential hazard to aircraft.
Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included in the obstacle database. It is very important to note that not all
obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database. This database is
updated on a 56-day cycle.
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies. Garmin
INDEX
accurately processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of
the data.
The AOPA Airport Directory provides data on airports and heliports throughout the U.S., and offers detailed
information for over 5,300 U. S. airports, along with the names and phone numbers of thousands of FBOs. This
database is updated four times per year and has no expiration date
560
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Appendix B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected airports. These diagrams aid in following
ground control instructions by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to taxiways,
ramps, runways, terminals, and services. This database is updated on a 56-day cycle.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The FliteCharts database contains procedure charts for the United States only. This database is updated on a
28-day cycle. If not updated within 180 days of the expiration date, FliteCharts will no longer function.
Updating Garmin Databases
EIS
The Garmin database updates can be obtained by following the instructions detailed in the ‘Aviation
Databases’ section of the Garmin website (fly.garmin.com). Once the updated files have been downloaded
from the website, a PC equipped with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program the
new databases onto the existing Supplemental Data Cards. Equipment required to perform the update is as
follows:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Windows-compatible PC computer (Windows 2000 or XP recommended)
• SanDisk SD Card Reader, P/Ns SDDR-93 or SDDR-99 or equivalent card reader
• Updated database obtained from the Garmin website
• Existing Supplemental Database SD Cards (010-00330-41, -42, or -43) from both PFDs and MFD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In some cases it may be necessary to obtain an unlock code from Garmin in order to make the database
product functional. It may also be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized service
facility in order to use some database features.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
After the data has been copied to the appropriate data cards, perform the following steps:
1) Insert one SD card in the bottom card slot of the MFD and one in the bottom card slot of each PFD. The SD card
containing the ChartView or FliteCharts database must be inserted into the bottom slot on the MFD.
AFCS
2) Apply power to the system. View the MFD power-up screen. Check that the databases are initialized and
displayed on the power-up screen. When updating the terrain and FliteCharts databases, an ‘in progress’
message may be seen. If this message is present, wait for the system to finish loading before proceeding to
step 3.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure B-6 Database Information on the Power-up Screen
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
561
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix B
3) Acknowledge the Power-up Page agreement by pressing the ENT Key or the right most softkey.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
Unselected
MFD1 DB Selected PFD1 DB Selected
Figure B-7 Display Database Softkey
EIS
6) Press the Display Database Softkey (Figure B-7) to place the cursor in the ‘Database’ box.
7) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the database list and check that all databases are current and there are
no errors.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the Display Database Softkey to view the Database info pertaining to the desired PFD or MFD.
9) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the database list and check that all databases are current and there are
no errors.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
10) Repeat steps 8 and 9 until all the databases in each applicable display have been verified.
11) Power down the system.
Automatic Database Synchronization Feature
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The automatic database synchronization feature automatically transfers the database from a single SD
database card to the SD cards on each PFD and the MFD to ensure that all databases are synchronized
throughout the system. After power-up, the system compares all copies of each applicable database. If similar
databases do not match, the most recent valid database is automatically copied to each card in the system that
does not already contain that database.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The following databases are checked and synchronized: Standby Navigation, Basemap, Safetaxi, Airport
Terrain, Obstacle, Airport Directory (AOPA), and Terrain. This feature applies only to databases that are
stored on the SD card that resides in the bottom slot of each display. This feature does not apply to the active
navigation database which is stored internally in each display, or to the charts databases (FliteCharts and
ChartView) which are only required to be present on the MFD. The typical procedure would be to download
new databases to the MFD card, then synchronize the data to the PFD(s).
NOTE: The 9-arc second terrain database may take as long as 100 minutes to synchronize using this method.
APPENDICES
Therefore the user may want to transfer the data using a PC, or connect the system to a ground power
source while performing the database synchronization.
INDEX
If the automatic database synchronization feature is enabled, the standby navigation database can be loaded
onto a single SD card (using the Dual Navigation Database Feature) and placed in the bottom card slot of
the MFD. After power-up, the system will transfer the standby navigation database from that card to the
bottom SD card in each PFD. After the sync completes, if the active navigation database is out-of-date and the
standby database is effective, the standby database will be transferred and used as the internal active database
upon the next power cycle.
562
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Appendix B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The synchronization progress may be monitored on the AUX-System Status Page in the Sync Status section
of the Database Window (Figure B-8). This section shows the synchronization status of each applicable
database, including the percent complete, time remaining, and to which displays the databases are being
copied. When the synchronization is complete, the status is listed as ‘Complete’, followed by the displays to
which the databases were copied. This sub-section is only present when a sync is occurring or has occurred
on the current power-up.
An indication of ‘Complete’ still requires a power cycle before the synchronized databases will be used by
the system.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure B-8 AUX-System Status Page, Database Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Display Database Softkey (Figure B-7) is used to place the cursor in the Database Window. Upon
first press of the Display Database Softkey, the softkey will change to a selected state (black text on gray
background) and the cursor will appear in the Database Window. At this point the user can scroll through
all databases in the Database Window to view status information. If the Display Database Softkey is pressed
repeatedly, the softkey will cycle through PFD1, PFD2, and MFD. Database status information in the Database
Window will reflect the database of the selected PFD or MFD. After a successful sync and restart, verify that
the proper databases are now in use on the AUX–System Status Page (Figure B-8).
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
563
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix B
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If an error occurs during the synchronization, an error message will be displayed, followed by the affected
display in the Sync Status section of the Database Window (Figure B-9). If a synchronization completes on
one display, but an error occurs on another, the error message will be displayed with the affected diaplay
listed after it. When an error message (Table B-1) is displayed, the problem must be corrected before the
synchronization can be completed. A power cycle is required to restart synchronization when ‘Card Full’ or
‘Err’ is shown.
Database Synchronization Error Message
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure B-9 Synchronization Error Message
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Error Message
Canceled
Card Full
Err
Timeout
Description
An active synchronization has been canceled using the SYNC DBS Softkey
SD card does not contain sufficient memory
Displayed for all other errors that may cause the synchronization process to be halted
System timed-out prior to the database transfer completing
Table B-1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The SYNC DBS Softkey (Figure B-10) on the AUX–System Status Page allows the flight crew control over
the automatic database synchronization feature. When database synchronization is enabled, the SYNC DBS
Softkey is displayed as black text on gray background. When database synchronization is disabled, the
softkey is displayed as white text on black background. If the SYNC DBS Softkey is pressed while a database
synchronization is in progress, the current synchronization process will be canceled.
Enabled
Disabled
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure B-10 SYNC DBS Softkey
564
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Appendix B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Performing a database synchronization:
1) Remove the MFD database card from the bottom card slot of the MFD.
2) Update the Garmin databases on the MFD card.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Insert the MFD database card into the bottom card slot of the MFD.
4) Apply power to the system, check that the databases are initialized and displayed on the power-up screen.
When updating the terrain and FliteCharts databases, an ‘in progress’ message may be seen. If this message is
present, wait for the system to finish loading before proceeding to step 5.
5) Acknowledge the Power-up Page agreement by pressing the ENT Key or the right most softkey.
EIS
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Make sure the SYNC DBS Softkey is in the enabled state (Figure B-10).
9) Monitor the Sync Status in the Database Window, wait for all databases to complete synching.
10) Remove and reapply power to the system, select the AUX-System Status Page, and verify that all databases have
been synchronized.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Canceling an automatic database synchronization:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the SYNC DBS Softkey (if needed) to disable (Figure B-10) automatic database synchronization.
4) Acknowledge the cancellation by pressing the ENT Key.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
565
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix B
Blank Page
566
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Appendix C
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Glossary
auxiliary
Automated Weather Observing System
B ALT
BARO
BATT
BC
Bearing
barometric altitude
barometric setting
battery
backcourse
The compass direction from the
present position to a destination
waypoint.
beat frequency oscillator
backspace
bearing
BFO
BKSP
BRG
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CO
COM
CONFIG
COOL
COPLT
center runway
degrees Celsius
Course to Altitude
calculator
Indicated airspeed corrected for
installation and instrument errors.
Course to DME distance
Course Deviation Indicator
Control Display Unit
Course to Fix
Cylinder Head Temperature
checklist
channel
Course to Intercept
cloud
clear
centimeter
Communication, Navigation, &
Surveillance
carbon monoxide
communication radio
configuration
coolant
co-pilot
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
C
ºC
CA
CALC
Calibrated
Airspeed
CD
CDI
CDU
CF
CHT
CHKLIST
CHNL
CI
CLD
CLR
cm
CNS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
190-00928-01 Rev. A
AUX
AWOS
EIS
AIM
AIRMET
ALRT
ALT
ALT, ALTN
AMPS
ANNUNC
ANT
AP
AP DISC
APR
APT
ARINC
ARSPC
ARTCC
ARV
AS
ASB
ASOS
ATC
ATCRBS
ATIS
ATK
AUTOSEQ
accuracy
active, activate
air data computer
Automatic Direction Finder
Attitude Direction Indicator
Arc to fix
Automatic Flight Control System
Airplane Flight Manual
Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
airframe
Above Ground Level
Attitude and Heading Reference
System
Airman’s Information Manual
Airman’s Meteorological Information
alert
altitude
alternator
amperes
annunciation
antenna
autopilot
autopilot disconnect
approach
airport, aerodrome
Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
airspace
Air Route Traffic Control Center
arrival
airspeed
Aviation Support Branch
Automated Surface Observing System
Air Traffic Control
ATC Radar Beacon System
Automatic Terminal Information Service
along-track
automatic sequence
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ACC
ACT, ACTV
ADC
ADF
ADI
AF
AFCS
AFM
AFMS
AFRM
AGL
AHRS
567
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix C
Course
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Course to
Steer
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
CR
CRG
CRNT
Crosstrack
Error
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CRS
CRS
CRSR
CTA
CTRL
Cumulative
CVR
CVRG
CWS
CYL
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
D ALT
DB, DBASE
dBZ
DCLTR,
DECLTR
DEC FUEL
deg
DEIC, DEICE
DEP
Desired Track
INDEX
DEST
DF
DFLT
DGRD
568
The line between two points to be
followed by the aircraft.
The recommended direction to steer
in order to reduce course error or stay
on course. Provides the most efficient
heading to get back to the desired
course and proceed along the flight
plan.
Course to Radial
Cockpit Reference Guide
current
The distance the aircraft is off a
desired course in either direction, left
or right.
course
Course to Steer
cursor
Control Area
control
The total of all legs in a flight plan.
Cockpit Voice Recorder
coverage
control wheel steering
cylinder
density altitude
database
decibels ‘Z’ (radar return)
declutter
decrease fuel
degree
de-icing
departure
The desired course between the active
“from” and “to” waypoints.
destination
Direct to Fix
default
degrade
DH
Dilution of
Precision
DIR
DIS
Distance
DME
DOP
DP
DPRT
DR
DSBL
DTK
E
ECU
Efficiency
EGT
EIS
ELEV
ELEV
EMERGCY
EMI
ENDUR
Endurance
ENG
ENGD
ENR
Enroute Safe
Altitude
decision height
A measure of GPS satellite geometry
quality on a scale of one to ten (lower
numbers equal better geometry,
where higher numbers equal poorer
geometry).
direction
distance
The ‘great circle’ distance from the
present position to a destination
waypoint.
Distance Measuring Equipment
Dilution of Precision
Departure Procedure
departure
dead reckoning
disabled
Desired Track
empty, east
Engine Control Unit
A measure of fuel consumption,
expressed in distance per unit of fuel.
Exhaust Gas Temperature
Engine Indication System
elevation
elevator
emergency
Electromagnetic Interference
endurance
Flight endurance, or total possible
flight time based on available fuel on
board.
engine
engaged
enroute
The recommended minimum altitude
within ten miles left or right of the
desired course on an active flight plan
or direct-to.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Appendix C
glideslope
go-around
gallon(s)
gearbox
Garmin Air Data Computer
Garmin Satellite Data Link
Garmin Display Unit
Garmin Engine/Airframe Unit
geographic
Garmin Flight Control
Garmin Integrated Avionics Unit
Global Navigation Satellite Landing
System
GMA
Garmin Audio Panel System
GMT
Greenwich Mean Time
GMU
Garmin Magnetometer Unit
GND
ground
gph
gallons per hour
GPS
Global Positioning System
Grid MORA
Grid Minimum Off-Route Altitude;
one degree latitude by one degree
longitude in size and clears the highest
elevation reference point in the grid by
1000 feet for all areas of the grid
Groundspeed The velocity that the aircraft is
travelling relative to a ground position.
Ground Track see Track
GRS
Garmin Reference System
GS
Ground speed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
190-00928-01 Rev. A
G/S, GS
GA
gal, gl
GBOX
GDC
GDL
GDU
GEA
GEO
GFC
GIA
GLS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
degrees Fahrenheit
Course From Fix to Altitude
Federal Aviation Administration
Full Authority Digital Engine Control
Final Approach Fix
failure
Course From Fix to Distance
Federal Communication Commission
forecast
Course From Fix to DME Distance
flight director
Fault Detection and Exclusion
fuel flow
Flight Information Services-Broadcast
Flight Information Service Data Link
flight level
Flight Level Change
Course From Fix to Manual Termination
Flight Management System
Fuel On Board
Estimated
Time Enroute
Fuel On
Board
flight plan
feet per minute
frequency
freezing
Flight Service Station
foot/feet
The fuel flow rate, expressed in units of
fuel per hour.
The total amount of usable fuel on
board the aircraft.
EIS
ºF
FA
FAA
FADEC
FAF
FAIL
FC
FCC
FCST
FD
FD
FDE
FFLOW
FIS-B
FISDL
FL
FLC
FM
FMS
FOB
Estimated
Time of
Arrival
FPL
fpm
FREQ
FRZ
FSS
ft
Fuel Flow
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ETA
ETE
EXPIRD
enter
Estimated Position Error
Estimated Position Uncertainty
error
Enroute Safe Altitude
A measure of horizontal GPS position
error derived by satellite geometry
conditions and other factors.
The estimated time at which the
aircraft should reach the destination
waypoint, based upon current speed
and track.
The estimated time it takes to reach
the destination waypoint from the
present position, based upon current
ground speed.
Estimated Time of Arrival
Estimated Time Enroute
expired
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENT
EPE
EPU
ERR
ESA
Estimated
Position Error
569
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix C
GTX
Garmin Transponder
HA
HDG
Heading
Hold Terminating at Altitude
heading
The direction an aircraft is pointed,
based upon indications from a
magnetic compass or a properly set
directional gyro.
Hold Terminating at Fix
Horizontal Figure of Merit
mercury
high
High Sensitivity
Hold with Manual Termination
A measure of the uncertainty in the
aircraft’s horizontal position.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
HF
HFOM
Hg
HI
HI SENS
HM
Horizontal
Figure of
Merit
hPa
HPL
hr
HSDB
HSI
HT
HUL
Hz
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
I
IAF
IAT
IAU
ICAO
INDEX
APPENDICES
ICS
ID
IDENT, IDNT
IF
IFR
IG
ILS
570
hectopascal
Horizontal Protection Level
hour
High-Speed Data Bus
Horizontal Situation Indicator
heat
Horizontal Uncertainty Level
Hertz
Inner Marker
Initial Approach Fix
Indicated Air Temperature
Integrated Avionics Unit
International Civil Aviation
Organization
Intercom System
Identification/Morse Code Identifier
identification
Initial Fix
Instrument Flight Rules
Imperial gallon
Instrument Landing System
IMC
in
INACTV
INC FUEL
IND
Indicated
INFO
in HG
INT
INTEG
IrDA, IRDA
Instrument Meteorological Conditions
inch
inactive
increase fuel
indicated
Information provided by properly
calibrated and set instrumentation on
the aircraft panel.
information
inches of mercury
intersection(s)
integrity (RAIM unavailable)
Infrared Data Association
KEYSTK
kg
kHz
km
kt
key stuck
kilogram
kilohertz
kilometer
knot
L
LAT
LBL
lb
LCD
LCL
LED
Left Over Fuel
On Board
left, left runway
latitude
label
pound
Liquid Crystal Display
local
Light Emitting Diode
The amount of fuel remaining on
board after the completion of one or
more legs of a flight plan or direct-to.
Left Over Fuel The amount of flight time remaining,
Reserve
based on the amount of fuel on board
after the completion of one or more
legs of a flight plan or direct-to, and a
known consumption rate.
Leg
The portion of a flight plan between
two waypoints.
LIFR
Low Instrument Flight Rules
LNAV
Lateral Navigation
LO
low
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Appendix C
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
pressure altitude
Passenger Address
Proximity Advisory
passenger(s)
personal computer
Primary Flight Display
Procedure Turn to Course Intercept
pitch
position
parts per million
Present Position
pressure
procedure(s), procedure turn
pounds per square inch
Procedure Turn
APPENDICES
P ALT
PA
PA
PASS
PC
PFD
PI
PIT, PTCH
POSN
PPM
P. POS
PRES, PRESS
PROC
psi
PT
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Outer Marker
Outside Air Temperature
Omni Bearing Selector
offset
oxygen
AFCS
O
OAT
OBS
OFST
OXY
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NRST
north
navigation
NAVigation AID
Non-directional Beacon
Next Generation Radar
nautical mile(s)
No Procedure Turn Required
(Procdeure shall not be executed
without ATC clearance)
nearest
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
190-00928-01 Rev. A
N
NAV
NAVAID
NDB
NEXRAD
nm
NoPT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MKR
MOA
MOV
mpm
MSA
Middle Marker
meter
Magnetic
Magnetic Variation
Missed Approach Hold Point
manifold pressure (inches Hg)
Manual Squelch
Missed Approach Point
Master Avionics Squelch
maximum
maximum speed (overspeed)
barometric minimum descent altitude
manual electric trim
Meteorological Aviation Routine
manual electric pitch trim
Multi Function Display
Military Grid Reference System
megahertz
microphone
minimum
Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe
altitude within ten miles of the aircraft
present position.
marker beacon
Military Operations Area
movement
meters per minute
Minimum Safe Altitude
message
Mean Sea Level
meter
millivolt(s)
Marginal Visual Flight Rules
EIS
M
m
MAG
MAG VAR
MAHP
MAN IN
MAN SQ
MAP
MASQ
MAX
MAXSPD
MDA
MET
METAR
MEPT
MFD
MGRS
MHz
MIC
MIN
Minimum
Safe Altitude
MSG
MSL
MT
mV
MVFR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
LRU
LT
LTNG
LVL
localizer
loss of integrity (GPS)
longitude
Localizer Performance with Vertical
guidance
Line Replacement Unit
left
lightning
level
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
LOC
LOI
LON
LPV
571
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix C
PTK
PTT
PWR
parallel track
Push-to-Talk
power
SEL, SLCT
SFC
SIAP
QTY
quantity
R
RAD
RAIM
REQ
RES
REV
RF
RMI
RMT
RNG
RNWY
ROL
ROM
rpm
RST FUEL
RSV
RT
RVRSNRY
RX
right, right runway
radial
Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring
random access memory
reference
remaining (fuel remaining above
Reserve)
required
reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot)
reverse, revision, revise
Constant Radius Turn to Fix
Radio Magnetic Indicator
remote
range
runway
roll
read only memory
revolutions per minute
reset fuel
reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot)
right
reversionary
receive
SID
SIGMET
Sim
SLP/SKD
SMBL
SPD
SPI
SPKR
SQ
SRVC, SVC
STAL
STAR
STATS
STBY
STD
STRMSCP
SUA
SUSP
SVS
SW
SYS
select
surface
Standard Instrument Approach
Procedures
Standard Instrument Departure
Significant Meteorological Information
simulator
slip/skid
symbol
speed
Special Position Identification
speaker
squelch
service
stall
Standard Terminal Arrival Route
statistics
standby
standard
Stormscope
Special Use Airspace
suspend
Synthetic Vision System
software
system
S
SA
SAT
SBAS
SCIT
SD
sec
south
Selective Availability
Static Air Temperature
Satellite-Based Augmentation System
Storm Cell Identification and Tracking
Secure Digital
second(s)
T
TA
TACAN
TAF
TAS
TAS
TAT
TAWS
TCA
TCAS
TEL
TEMP
true
Traffic Advisory
Tactical Air Navigation System
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
True Airspeed
Traffic Advisory System, true airspeed
Total Air Temperature
Terrain Awareness and Warning System
Terminal Control Area
Traffic Collision Avoidance System
telephone
temperature
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
RAM
REF
REM
572
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Appendix C
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
transfer
transponder
cross-talk
cross-track
AFCS
190-00928-01 Rev. A
XFER, XFR
XPDR
XTALK
XTK
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
velocity (airspeed)
Heading Vector to Altitude
VOR approach
variation
Heading Vector to DME Distance
volts, direct current
vertical
A measure of the uncertainty in the
aircraft’s vertical position.
watt(s), west
Wide Area Augmentation System
warning (GPS position error)
World Geodetic System - 1984
waypoint(s)
world wide
weather
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
V, Vspeed
VA
VAPP
VAR
VD
Vdc
VERT
Vertical Figure
of Merit
W
WAAS
WARN
WGS-84
WPT
WW
WX
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
unavailable
user
Coordinated Universal Time
Universal Transverse Mercator /
Universal Polar Stereographic Grid
EIS
UNAVAIL
USR
UTC
UTM/UPS
Vertical Speed The vertical speed necessary to
Required
descend/climb from a current position
and altitude to a defined target
position and altitude, based upon
current groundspeed.
VFOM
Vertical Figure of Merit
VFR
Visual Flight Rules
VHF
Very High Frequency
VI
Heading Vector to Intercept
VLOC
VOR/Localizer Receiver
VM
Heading Vector to Manual Termination
VMC
Visual Meteorological Conditions
VNAV, VNV
vertical navigation
VOL
volume
VOR
VHF Omni-directional Range
VORTAC
very high frequency omnidirectional
range station and tactical air
navigation
VPL
Vertical Protection Level
VPROF
VNV profile, vertical profile
VPTH
VNV path, vertical path
VR
Heading Vector to Radial
VS
vertical speed
VSI
Vertical Speed Indicator
VSR
Vertical Speed Required
VTF
vector to final
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Track Angle
Error
TRG
TRK
TRSA
TRUNC
TTL
TURN
TX
terminal
Track Between Two Fixes
Temporary Flight Restriction
True Heading
Traffic Information System
Turbine Inlet Temperature
Track Angle Error
Terminal Maneuvering Area
Timer/Reference
topographic
Direction of aircraft movement relative
to a ground position; also ‘Ground
Track’
The angle difference between the
desired track and the current track.
target
track
Terminal Radar Service Area
truncated
total
procedure turn
transmit
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TERM
TF
TFR
T HDG
TIS
TIT
TKE
TMA
TMR/REF
Topo
Track
573
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix C
Blank Page
574
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Appendix D
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Frequently Asked Questions
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a particular aspect of G1000 operational capability is not addressed by these commonly asked questions or in
the index, contact Garmin (see the copyright page or back cover for contact information) or a Garmin-authorized
dealer. Garmin is dedicated to supporting its products and customers.
What is WAAS?
EIS
The Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS) uses a system of ground stations to correct any GPS signal
errors. These ground stations correct for errors caused by ionospheric disturbances, timing, and satellite
orbit errors. It also provides vital integrity information regarding the health of each GPS satellite. The signal
correction is then broadcast through one of two geostationary satellites. This correction information can then
be received by any WAAS-enabled GPS receiver.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WAAS is designed to provide the additional accuracy, availability, and integrity necessary to enable users to
rely on GPS for all phases of flight. WAAS is currently available in the United States, including Alaska and
Hawaii.
How does WAAS affect approach operations?
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Both LNAV/VNAV and LPV approaches use the accuracy of WAAS to include vertical (glide path) guidance
capability. The additional accuracy and vertical guidance capability allows improved instrument approaches to
an expanded number of airports throughout the U.S.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The implementation of LPV approaches further improves precision approach capabilities. LPV approaches
are designed to make full use of the improved GPS signal from the WAAS. This approach combines the LNAV/
VNAV vertical accuracy with lateral guidance similar to the typical Instrument Landing System (ILS). LPV
approaches allow lower approach minimums.
What is RAIM and how does it affect approach operations?
AFCS
RAIM is an acronym for Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring. RAIM is a GPS receiver function that
performs the following functions:
• Monitors and verifies integrity and geometry of tracked GPS satellites
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Notifies the pilot when satellite conditions do not provide the necessary coverage to support a certain phase
of flight
• Predicts satellite coverage of a destination area to determine whether the number of available satellites is
sufficient to satisfy requirements
APPENDICES
NOTE: If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become
active, as indicated by the “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP” message and the LOI annunciation
flagging on the HSI.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
575
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix D
For RAIM to work correctly, the GPS receiver must track at least five satellites. A minimum of six satellites is
required to allow RAIM to eliminate a single corrupt satellite from the navigation solution.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
RAIM ensures that satellite geometry allows for a navigation solution calculation within a specified protection
limit (2.0 nm for oceanic and en route, 1.0 nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). The
G1000 System monitors RAIM and issues an alert message when RAIM is not available (see Appendix A).
Without RAIM, GPS position accuracy cannot be monitored. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF,
the pilot must fly the missed approach procedure.
Why are there not any approaches available for a flight plan?
EIS
Approaches are available for the final destination airport in a flight plan or as a direct-to (keep in mind
that some VOR/VORTAC identifiers are similar to airport identifiers). If a destination airport does not have a
published approach, the G1000 indicates “NONE” for the available procedures.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
What happens when an approach is selected? Can a flight plan with an approach, a departure, or an
arrival be stored?
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When an approach, departure, or arrival is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach, departure,
or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan, along with a header line showing the title of the selected
instrument procedure. The original en route portion of the flight plan remains active, unless the instrument
procedure is activated. This may be done either when the procedure is loaded or at a later time.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight plans can also be stored with an approach, a departure, or an arrival. Note that the active flight plan
is erased when the system is turned off. Also, the active flight plan is overwritten when another flight plan is
activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, a departure, or an arrival, the G1000 uses the waypoint
information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the database is changed or updated, the
G1000 System automatically updates the information, provided the procedure has not been modified. Should
an approach, departure, or arrival procedure no longer be available, the flight plan becomes locked until the
procedure is deleted from the flight plan.
AFCS
Can “slant Golf” (“/G”) be filed using the G1000?
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
“/G” may be filed for a flight plan. The G1000 System meets the requirements of TSO-C145a Class 3 and
ETSO-C145 Class 3 installations. GPS approaches are not to be flown with an expired database. See the
approved AFM/POH as well as the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for more information.
What does the OBS Softkey do?
APPENDICES
The OBS Softkey is used to select manual sequencing of waypoints. Activating OBS mode sets the current
active-to waypoint as the primary navigation reference and prevents the system from sequencing to the next
waypoint in a flight plan. When OBS mode is cancelled, automatic waypoint sequencing is continued, and
the G1000 automatically activates the next waypoint in the flight plan once the aircraft has crossed the present
active waypoint.
INDEX
•
•
•
•
576
Normal (OBS not activated)
Automatic sequencing of waypoints
Manual course change on HSI not possible
Always navigates ‘TO’ the active waypoint
Must be in this mode for final approach course
•
•
•
•
OBS
Manual sequencing - ‘holds’ on selected waypoint
Manually select course to waypoint from HSI
Indicates ‘TO’ or ‘FROM’ waypoint
Cannot be set for final approach course or published holding patterns
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Appendix D
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When OBS mode is active, the G1000 allows the pilot to set a desired course to/from a waypoint using the
CRS/BARO Knob and HSI (much like a VOR).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The most common application for using the OBS Softkey is the missed approach. The G1000 suspends
automatic waypoint sequencing (indicated by a ‘SUSP’ annunciation placed on the HSI) when the missed
approach point (MAP) is crossed. This prevents the G1000 from automatically sequencing to the missed
approach holding point (MAHP). During this time, the OBS Softkey designation changes to SUSP. Pressing
the SUSP Softkey reactivates automatic waypoint sequencing. The OBS Softkey then resumes its normal
functionality.
Why does the G1000 not automatically sequence to the next waypoint?
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The G1000 only sequences flight plan waypoints when automatic sequencing is enabled (i.e., no “OBS” or
‘SUSP’ annunciation). For automatic sequencing to occur, the aircraft must also cross the “bisector” of the turn
being navigated. The bisector is a line passing through the waypoint common to two flight plan legs at an
equal angle from each leg.
How can a waypoint be skipped in an approach, a departure, or an arrival?
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The G1000 allows the pilot to manually select any approach, departure, or arrival leg as the active leg of
the flight plan. This procedure is performed on the MFD from the Active Flight Plan Page by highlighting the
desired waypoint and selecting the ACT LEG Softkey then the ENT Key to approve the selection. The GPS
then provides navigation along the selected flight plan leg.
When does turn anticipation begin?
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The G1000 smooths adjacent leg transitions based on a normal 15° bank angle (with the ability to roll up to
30°) and provides three pilot cues for turn anticipation:
• A waypoint alert (‘Next DTK ###° in # seconds’ or ‘Next HDG ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10
seconds before the turn point and flashes as it counts down to zero.
AFCS
• A flashing turn advisory (‘Turn [right/left] to ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10 seconds before the
turn and flashes as it counts down to zero. ‘Turn [right/left] to ###° now’ or ‘Next [DTK/HDG] to ###° now’
is displayed when the pilot is to begin the turn and the HSI (GPS mode) automatically sequences to the next
DTK or HDG value.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• The To/From indicator on the HSI flips momentarily to indicate that the midpoint of the turn has been
crossed.
When does the CDI scale change?
APPENDICES
Once a departure is activated, the G1000 Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) full scale deflection is set to 0.3
nm. The CDI scale changes to 1.0 nm (terminal mode) then ramps up to 2.0 nm (enroute mode) at 30 nm
from the departure airport. When 31 nm from the destination, the CDI scale smoothly transition from 2.0 nm
back to 1.0 nm (terminal mode). At 2.0 nm before the FAF during an active approach, the CDI scale transitions
down further based on the type of approach activated (LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, LPV). When a missed approach is
activated, the CDI is set to 0.3 nm. See the Flight Instruments Section for more details on CDI scaling.
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
577
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix D
Why does the HSI not respond like a VOR when OBS mode is active?
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Unlike a VOR, the CDI scale used on GPS equipment is based on the crosstrack distance to the desired
course, not on the angular relationship to the destination. Therefore, the CDI deflection on the GPS is constant
regardless of the distance to the destination and does not become less sensitive when further away from the
destination.
What is the correct missed approach procedure? How is the missed approach holding point selected?
EIS
To comply with TSO specifications, the G1000 does not automatically sequence past the MAP. The first
waypoint in the missed approach procedure becomes the active waypoint when the SUSP Softkey is selected
after crossing the MAP. All published missed approach procedures must be followed, as indicated on the
approach plate.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
To execute the missed approach procedure prior to the MAP (not recommended), select the Active Flight Plan
Page and use the ACT LEG Softkey to activate the missed approach portion of the procedure.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
After a missed approach, how can the same approach be re-selected? How can a new approach be
activated?
NOTE: Do not attempt to reactivate the current approach prior to crossing the missed approach point
(MAP). If an attempt to do so is made, an alert message “Are you sure you want to discontinue the current
approach?” appears. The G1000 directs the pilot back to the transition waypoint and does not take into
consideration any missed approach procedures, if the current approach is reactivated.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
After flying the missed approach procedure, the pilot may reactivate the same approach for another attempt by
pressing the PROC Key. Once the clearance is given for another attempt, activate the approach by highlighting
‘Activate Approach’ using the large FMS Knob and pressing the ENT Key. The G1000 provides navigation
along the desired course to the waypoint and rejoins the approach in sequence from that point.
AFCS
To activate a new approach for the same airport, select the new procedure by pressing the PROC Key. Choose
‘Select Approach’, select the desired approach from the list shown, and press the ENT Key. Select the
desired transition, then activate the approach using the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To activate a new approach to a different airport, press the Direct-to Key and select the desired airport using
the FMS Knobs. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected airport, then follow the steps in the preceding
paragraph to select an approach for the new airport.
578
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Appendix E
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Map Symbols
NOTE: Refer to the Flight Management Section for the topography legend and the Hazard Avoidance
Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Section for XM Weather Product legends.
Line Symbols
Item
Symbol
Unknown Airport
Symbol
EIS
Item
ICAO Control Area
Class B Airspace
Mode C Tower Area
Non-towered, Non-serviced Airport
Non-towered, Serviced Airport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Towered, Serviced Airport
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Warning Area Prohibited Area
Alert Area
Restricted Area
Caution Area Training Area
Danger Area
Unknown Area
Class C
Terminal Radar Service Area
Mode C Area
Towered, Non-serviced Airport
Military Operations Area (MOA)
Restricted (Private) Airport
State or Province Border
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Heliport
International Border
NAVAIDS
Road
Item
Symbol
LOM (compass locator at outer marker)
Railroad
AFCS
Intersection
Latitude/Longitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NDB (non-directional radio beacon)
VOR
VOR/DME
APPENDICES
VOR/ILS
VORTAC
TACAN
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
579
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix E
Miscellaneous
Item
Symbol
ARTCC Frequency or FSS Frequency
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Stormscope Lightning Strikes
Item
Symbol
Lightning Strike (0-6 sec ago)
Lightning Strike (6-20 sec ago)
Default Map Pointer
Lightning Strike (20-60 sec ago)
Elevation Pointer
EIS
Lightning Strike (60-120 sec ago)
Traffic
Wind Vector
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Item
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Measuring Pointer
Symbol
Non-threat Traffic (hollow diamond)
Overzoom Indicator
Proximity Advisory
User Waypoint
Traffic Advisory, Out of Range
Vertical Navigation Along Track Waypoint
Traffic Advisory
Parallel Track Waypoint
AFCS
Unanchored Flight Path Waypoint
Top of Descent (TOD)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Bottom of Descent (BOD)
INDEX
APPENDICES
Navigating using Dead Reckoning
580
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Appendix E
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Terrain Avoidance Colors and Symbols
Potential Impact Point
Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude
100 ft Threshold
1000 ft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Projected Flight Path
Unlighted Obstacle
EIS
Terrain Color
Terrain Location
Red (WARNING) Terrain above, or within 100 ft below the aircraft altitude
Yellow (CAUTION) Terrain between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Black
Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure E-1 TAWS Color Chart
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure E-2 TAWS Potential Impact Points
Obstacle Symbol
Obstacle Location
Red
(WARNING)
Obstacle within 100 ft of
or above aircraft altitude
Yellow
(CAUTION)
Obstacle within 1000 ft of
aircraft altitude
Gray
Obstacle more than 1000
ft below aircraft altitude
AFCS
Obstacle
Color
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
Height < 1000 ft AGL > 1000 ft AGL < 1000 ft AGL > 1000 ft AGL
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Obstacle Symbols and Colors
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
581
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix E
Hazard Avoidance Features
Feature
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This table identifies the symbols displayed in the
lower right corner of PFD or MFD maps to indicate
which hazard avoidance features are activated for
display.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Feature
City Forecast display enabled
Surface Analysis display enabled
Freezing Levels display enabled
TAWS display enabled
Winds Aloft display enabled
Traffic display enabled
County Warnings display enabled
NEXRAD display enabled
Cyclone Warnings display enabled
Cloud Top display enabled
Icing Potential (CIP and SLD) (ICNG)
Echo Top display enabled
Pilot Weather Report (PIREPs)
XM Lightning display enabled
Air Report (AIREPs)
Cell Movement display enabled
SIGMETs/AIRMETs display enabled
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Symbol
Turbulence (TURB)
Loss of hazard avoidance feature, (a
white X is shown over the symbol to
indicate not available; e.g., traffic)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
METARs display enabled
Symbol
582
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Index
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
B
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Backcourse Mode-------------------------------------------438
Backlighting-------------------------------------------------- 49
Barometric setting, Altimeter----------------------52, 60–61
Basic Empty Weight----------------------------------------260
Basic Operating Weight------------------------------------260
Bearing/distance, measuring------------------------------156
Bearing information------------------------------------ 66–67
Bearing Information Windows----------------------------- 53
Bearing line------------------------------------- 339, 342, 343
Bearing source----------------------------------------------- 67
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
C
Calibrated Airspeed-----------------------------------------257
Cargo---------------------------------------------------------261
CDI---------------------------- 250, 267, 279, 287, 294, 552
Chart Not Available---------------------------------- 482, 502
Chart options----------------------------------------- 490, 509
CHART SETUP box----------------------------------- 496, 513
ChartView--------------------------------------- 461, 481, 499
Clearance Recorder-----------------------------------------137
Closest Point-------------------------------------------------238
COM channel spacing--------------------------------------114
COM Frequency Box----------------------------------------106
Command Bars----------------------------------------------415
Communication (COM) Frequency Box------------------- 52
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
APPENDICES
190-00928-01 Rev. A
WAAS------------------------------------------------------454
Approach Mode-------------------------------- 437, 452, 454
APR softkey------------------------------------------- 253, 259
Arc HSI--------------------------------------------------------- 64
Arrival procedure-206, 220, 248, 250, 251, 253, 276, 279,
288
Attitude---------------------------------------------------------- 1
Attitude & Heading Reference System-------------------539
Attitude Indicator-----------------------------------52, 57–58
Audio Panel Fail-Safe Operation--------------------------142
Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS)--------- 409–460
Alerts and annunciations------------------------ 458–459
Controls-------------------------------------------- 410–411
Status Annunciations------------------------------------458
Status Box-------------------------------------------------413
Automatic squelch------------------------------------------115
Autopilot--------------------------------- 409, 440–442, 553
Autopilot Disconnect-------------------------- 411, 431, 442
Auto-tuning--------------------------------------------------124
Auto-tuning, COM------------------------------------------110
Auto-tuning, NAV-------------------------------------------120
Auto Zoom---------------------------------------------------149
Auxiliary Pages (AUX)--------------------------------------- 34
AUX - system status page-478, 480, 499, 500, 515, 516,
517, 520
Aviation Symbols------------------------------------- 161, 206
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activate a Flight Plan---------------------------------------225
Active database-------------------------------- 557, 558, 562
Active frequency------------------------------------- 106, 116
ADF audio----------------------------------------------------117
AFCS Status Box--------------------------------------- 52, 413
AHRS---------------------------------------- 19, 548, 549, 550
Aircraft Symbol----------------------------------------------415
Air Data Computer--------------------------------------1, 539
Airport
Information-----------------------------------------------180
Airspace Alerts--------------------------------- 197, 198, 296
Airspeed Indicator----------------------------------52, 54–55
Airspeed Reference----------------------------410, 421–422
Airways
Collapsed--------------------------------------------------238
Expanded--------------------------------------------------238
Alerting System-------------------------------------- 535, 539
Audio------------------------------------------------------536
Alerts---------------------------------------------------------535
AFCS-------------------------------------------------------553
Aircraft-----------------------------------------------------537
Arrival------------------------------------------------------- 41
Audio voice------------------------------------------------ 41
Aural-------------------------------------------------------537
Levels------------------------------------------------------536
TAWS-------------------------------------------------------554
Alerts Window------------------------------------------------ 79
Along Track Offset------------------------------------------230
ALT------------------------------------------------------------292
Altimeter---------------------------------------------52, 59–60
Altimeter barometric setting------------------------------- 52
Altitude
Constraints----------------------------------------- 241, 279
Altitude alerting---------------------------------------------- 82
Altitude Hold Mode----------------------------------------419
Altitude Reference----------------------------- 418, 419, 427
Annunciations
Comparator-----------------------------------------------538
G1000 System--------------------------------------- 20, 539
Reversionary Sensor-------------------------------------539
Test tone---------------------------------------------- 42, 536
Annunciations, softkey-------------------------------------- 79
Annunciation Window-------------------------------------- 79
Annunciator lights------------------------------------------134
AOPA Airport Directory----------- 461, 518, 519, 520, 560
AP-------------------------------------------------------------553
Approach-----------------------------------------------------576
Activating-------------------------------------------------254
ILS----------------------------------------------------------452
Loading--------------------------------------- 222, 251, 253
Missed-----------------------------------------------------456
Removing--------------------------------------------------254
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A
I-1
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Index
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Comparator Annunciations--------------------------------538
Comparator Window---------------------------------------- 80
COM Tuning Failure-----------------------------------------140
Controls (Softkeys)-------------------------------------- 21–24
Control Wheel Steering (CWS)--------------------- 411, 441
Copy a Flight Plan------------------------------------------225
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)--------------------- 68–71
Course To Altitude------------------------------------------255
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT °F)--------------------- 90
D
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Database(s)--------------------------------------------------- 16
Databases----------------------------------------------------557
Database synchronization--------- 42, 559, 562, 564, 565
Data link-------------------------------------------------------- 1
Datalink receiver troubleshooting------------------------532
Data logging-------------------------------------------------529
Date and time------------------------------------------------ 37
Day/Night views-------------------------------------- 496, 513
Day view---------------------------------------------- 497, 514
Dead Reckoning---------------------------------------------- 86
Decision Height (DH)---------------------------------------- 53
Declutter, display--------------------------------------------- 87
Delete Flight Plans------------------------------------------226
Deleting
An entire airway----------------------------------- 227, 228
An entire procedure------------------------------ 227, 228
An individual waypoint--------------------------- 227, 228
Flight Plan Items-----------------------------------------227
Density Altitude---------------------------------------------258
Departure
Procedure------------------------------218, 232, 245, 247
Select------------------------------------245, 248, 251, 254
Time--------------------------------------------------------256
Timer-------------------------------------------------------- 45
Digital audio entertainment---------------------------------- 4
Dilution of Precision (DOP)--------------------------------- 28
Direct-to-- 173, 199, 200, 201, 202, 203, 204, 239, 240,
277, 279, 294
Display backup----------------------------------------- 18, 103
DME audio---------------------------------------------------117
DME Information Window---------------------------------- 67
DME tuning--------------------------------------------------126
DR mode------------------------------------------------------ 86
Dual navigation database---------------------------------558
E
INDEX
Emergency frequency---------------------------------------140
Engine Indication System (EIS)------------------------ 89–98
Entering Flight ID-------------------------------------------127
Estimated Landing Fuel------------------------------------262
Estimated Position Error (EPE)----------------------------- 28
Excess Fuel Weight-----------------------------------------262
Excessive Descent Rate Alert----------------------- 360, 373
I-2
F
Failure
Input-------------------------------------------------------- 19
FD-------------------------------------------------------------553
Field of View (SVS)------------------------------------------172
Flight director (FD)-----------------------------409, 412–413
Modes, lateral------------------------------------- 432–459
Modes, vertical------------------------------------ 416–430
Switching--------------------------------------------------414
Flight Level Change Mode-------------------- 421, 448, 450
Flight plan
Closest point to reference------------------------------238
Storing-----------------------------------------------------576
Flight plan Import/Export Messages---------------------556
Flight timer---------------------------------------------------- 45
FliteCharts-------------------------------------------- 461, 501
FliteCharts cycle---------------------------------------------516
FliteCharts expiration--------------------------------------516
FliteCharts functions---------------------------------------501
FPA----------------------------------------------------- 241, 284
Frequency
Nearest----------------------------------------------------194
Frequency spacing------------------------------------------114
Frequently asked questions--------------------------------575
Fuel
Efficiency--------------------------------------------------258
Endurance-------------------------------------------------258
Remaining-------------------------------------------------258
Required---------------------------------------------------258
Statistics---------------------------------------------------258
Fuel Flow (FFLOW GPH)------------------------------------ 90
Fuel on Board---------------------------------- 258, 261, 262
Fuel Quantity (FUEL QTY GAL)----------------------------- 90
G
Gain-----------------------------------------------------------342
Garmin Databases------------------------------------------560
GDC 74A-------------------------------------------------------- 1
GDL 69/69A----------------------------------------------1, 299
GDU 1040------------------------------------------------------ 1
GEA 71---------------------------------------------------------- 1
GFC 700------------------------------------------------------409
GIA 63----------------------------------------------------------- 1
Glidepath-----------------------------------------------------292
Glidepath Indicator------------------------------------------ 62
Glidepath Mode (GP)-------------------------- 428, 437, 454
Glideslope----------------------------------------------------292
Glideslope Indicator----------------------------------------- 62
Glideslope Mode------------------------------------- 430, 452
Global Positioning System (GPS)
Navigation----------------------------------------- 199–298
Receiver information--------------------------------- 27–29
GMA 1347------------------------------------------------- 1, 16
GMU 44--------------------------------------------------------- 1
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Index
I
M
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
Magnetometer-------------------------------------------- 1, 20
Map
Pages-------------------------------------------------------- 33
Panning----------------------------------------------------151
Symbols----------------------------------------------------579
Marker beacon----------------------------------------------125
Marker Beacon Annunciations----------------------------- 81
APPENDICES
Land Symbols------------------------------------------------160
Lateral modes, flight director----------------------- 432–459
LNAV----------------------------------------------------------267
LO SENS------------------------------------------------------125
Low Altitude Annunciation--------------------------------- 83
LPV----------------------------------------------- 267, 294, 443
National Weather Service----------------------------------323
NAV1 audio--------------------------------------------------117
NAV2 audio--------------------------------------------------117
Navigation
Database------------------------------------------- 241, 242
Map--------------------------------------------------------202
Navigation Mode----------------------- 435–436, 446–447
Navigation mode selection--------------------------------116
Navigation (NAV) Frequency Box-------------------------- 52
Navigation source-------------------------------------- 68–70
Navigation Status Box-------------------------------------- 52
Nav radio selection-----------------------------------------116
Nearest
Airport-------------- 177, 178, 179, 180, 194–197, 253
Airport Minimum Runway Length---------------------180
Airports Page-------------------------------- 178, 179, 180
Airport Surface Matching-------------------------------180
VOR------------------------------------------------- 194–195
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
L
AFCS
Key(s)------------------------------------------------------- 8, 10
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
J
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
IDENT function----------------------------------------------129
ID indicator--------------------------------------------------119
ILS approach-------------------------------------------------452
Indicated Altitude-------------------------------------------257
Initialization (system)---------------------------------------- 16
Inset Map, PFD----------------------------------------------- 53
Intercom------------------------------------------------------135
Intersection
Information---------------------------------------- 182–183
Inverting a flight plan--------------------------------------225
IOI------------------------------------------------ 359, 370, 554
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
N
Hazard Avoidance features--------------------------------582
Heading------------------------------------------------------- 52
Heading Select Mode--------------------------------------434
HI SENS-------------------------------------------------------125
Horizontal scan-------------- 338, 339, 340, 341, 344, 345
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)------------------ 63–75
HSI double green arrow------------------------------------116
HSI magenta arrow-----------------------------------------116
HSI single green arrow-------------------------------------116
EIS
K
H
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Jeppesen aviation database-------------------------------557
MASQ processing-------------------------------------------- 99
Measurement units, changing displayed----------------- 40
Menus--------------------------------------------------------- 31
Message Advisories-----------------------------------------536
Database--------------------------------------------------543
G1000 System--------------------------------------------542
GCU 477--------------------------------------------------550
GDC 74B--------------------------------------------------550
GDL 69A---------------------------------------------------549
GEA 71----------------------------------------------------548
GIA 63W--------------------------------------------------546
GMA 1347D----------------------------------------------545
GMC 710--------------------------------------------------550
GMU 44---------------------------------------------------549
GRS 77-----------------------------------------------------548
GTX 33----------------------------------------------------548
GWX 68---------------------------------------------------550
MFD & PFD------------------------------------------------542
Miscellaneous--------------------------------------------551
Message Advisory Alerts-----------------------------------537
Messages
Reminder--------------------------------------------------- 47
MET-----------------------------------------------------------553
Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA)------------------------ 53
Minimums----------------------------------------------------537
MISCOMP----------------------------------------------------538
Missed Approach----------- 206, 255, 263, 267, 294, 456
Mistrim-------------------------------------------------------553
MKR/MUTE--------------------------------------------------125
Mode S--------------------------------------------23, 127, 129
Mode selection softkeys---------------------- 127, 128, 129
Morse code identifier---------------------------------------119
Multi Function Display (MFD)
Softkeys----------------------------------------------------- 26
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Go Around Mode------------------------------431, 456–457
GPS Window-------------------------------------------------564
Ground mapping--------------------------------------------346
Groundspeed------------------------------------------------- 46
GRS 77---------------------------------------------------------- 1
GTX 33 Mode S Transponders-------------------------1, 127
I-3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Index
Nearest airports, frequency tuning-----------------------110
Nearest Pages (NRST)--------------------------------------- 34
Night view-------------------------------------------- 497, 514
NO COMP----------------------------------------------------538
Non-path descent------------------------------426, 450–451
Normal operating mode------------------------------------ 17
ROC---------------------------------------------- 359, 370, 554
Roll Hold Mode---------------------------------------------433
RS-232----------------------------------------------------------- 4
RS-485----------------------------------------------------------- 3
RVSI---------------------------------------------------- 285, 286
RX indicator--------------------------------------------------107
O
S
OBS Mode----------------------------------------------- 74–75
Obstacles---------------------------------------------- 545, 546
Odometer----------------------------------------------------- 46
Oil Pressure (OIL PSI)---------------------------------------- 90
Omni Bearing Selector (OBS)----------------------- 576–577
Other Statistics--------------------------------------- 256, 258
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)---------------------------- 52
Overview-------------------------------------------------------- 1
SafeTaxi------------------------------------------ 461, 475, 478
SafeTaxi database-------------------------------------------479
SBAS--------------------------------------------- 263, 265, 266
Scheduler------------------------------ 47–48, 461–462, 526
SD card-------------------------------------------------------- 15
Sector scan-------------------------------------------- 342, 343
Secure Digital (SD) card------------------------------------557
Selected Altitude--- 52, 59, 82, 417, 418, 420, 421, 423,
427
Selected Altitude Bug--------------------------------------- 52
Selected Altitude Capture Mode-417, 418, 419, 420, 423,
431
Selected Course-----------------------53, 64, 436, 438, 439
Selected Heading--------------------------------64, 410, 434
Selecting a COM radio-------------------------------------106
Sensor------------------------------------------------- 538, 539
Sequencing, automatic-------------------------------------577
Sequencing waypoints, suspend--------------------------- 75
Servos, AFCS-------------------------------------------------409
SIGMET-------------------------------------------------------316
Simultaneous COM Operation----------------------------136
Skywatch-----------------------------------------------------392
Slip/Skid Indicator----------------------------------------52, 57
Softkey annunciations--------------------------------------- 79
Softkeys-------------------------------------------------- 21–24
Sort Flight Plans---------------------------------------------225
Speaker-------------------------------------------------------134
STAB----------------------------------------------------------344
Standby database------------------------------ 557, 558, 562
Standby frequency----------------------------- 106, 110, 116
Standby frequency field------------------------------------106
Stereo headsets---------------------------------------------134
Stormscope WX-500 Series II-----------------------------347
Stuck microphone-------------------------------------------140
Sunrise--------------------------------------------------------257
Sunset--------------------------------------------------------257
Surface Analysis---------------------------------------------319
SVS------------------------------------------------------------552
SVS troubleshooting----------------------------------------530
Symbols, map------------------------------------------------579
Synthetic vision (SVS)------------------------------- 461, 462
System annunciations---------------------------20, 535, 540
System Setup Page------------------------------------------ 36
System Status Page------------------------------------------ 42
System time--------------------------------------------------- 52
P
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Page groups--------------------------------------------- 32–35
Parallel Track------------------------------------------ 231, 232
Passenger Address (PA) System---------------------------136
Passenger(s)-------------------------------------------------261
PFD failure---------------------------------------------------141
Pilot and Stores Weight------------------------------------260
Pilot profiles--------------------------------------------- 38–39
Pitch Hold Mode--------------------------------------------417
Pitch indication----------------------------------------------- 57
Power ON settings------------------------------------------134
Primary Flight Display (PFD)
Softkeys------------------------------------------------ 21–23
Procedures
GFC 700-------------------------------------------- 443–457
AFCS
Q
Quick tuning 121.500 MHz-------------------------------109
R
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Radar altitude------------------------------------------------ 84
Radar Signal Attenuation----------------------------------331
Radar Signal Reflectivity-----------------------------------331
Radar, Weather----------------------------------------------329
RAIM-------------------------------- 250, 263, 264, 265, 266
Range---------------------------------------------------------170
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM)-29–30,
263, 575
Reminder messages----------------------------------------- 47
Required
Vertical Speed--------------------------------------------285
Vertical Speed Indicator---------------------------------285
Reversionary Mode-----------------------------------------142
Reversionary Sensor Annunciations----------------------539
Reversionary Sensor Window------------------------------ 80
I-4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Index
W
WAAS-------------------------------------------- 267, 443, 546
WAAS precision approach---------------------------------454
Warranty--------------------------------------------------------- i
WATCH------------------------------------------------ 344, 345
Waypoint
Automatic sequencing--------------------------- 576, 577
Skipping---------------------------------------------------577
Waypoint Selection Submenu----------200, 209, 213, 264
Weather Attenuated Color Highlight--------------------344
Weather (real-time)-------------------------------------------- 4
Weather Softkeys-------------------------------------------304
Wind--------------------------------------------------- 146, 169
Wind data----------------------------------------------------- 53
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
X
XM radio---------------------------------------------- 521, 523
XM radio active channel-----------------------------------523
XM radio channel list---------------------------------------523
XM radio presets--------------------------------------------525
XM radio service class--------------------------------------522
XM radio troubleshooting---------------------------------532
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
INDEX
190-00928-01 Rev. A
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Vertical deviation-------------------------------------- 60, 425
Vertical deviation guidance-------------------------------242
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
V
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Unable to display chart----------------------------- 482, 502
Unmuted Inputs---------------------------------------------134
Updating Garmin databases------------------------------479
EIS
U
Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)--------------62, 285, 286
Vertical navigation------------------------------------------241
Direct-to-------------------------------------------- 240, 241
Vertical Navigation flight control------------------ 423–427
Vertical Path Tracking Mode------------------423–424, 449
Vertical scan------------------------------------------ 340, 341
Vertical speed guidance-----------------------------------242
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)------------------------------ 61
Vertical Speed Mode---------------------------------------420
Vertical Speed Reference----------------------------------420
Vertical track-------------------------------------------------537
VFR code-----------------------------------------------------133
VNAV-------------------------------------------------- 204, 552
VNAV Target Altitude-------------------------------- 423–426
VNAV Target Altitude Capture Mode--------------------427
VNV---------------------------------------------------- 284, 573
VNV guidance
Disabling--------------------------------------------------240
Enabling---------------------------------------------------239
VNV indications, PFD---------------------------------------- 78
VNV Target Altitude----------------------------------------- 62
Voice alerts, TIS Traffic-------------------- 81, 388, 398, 406
Volume-------------------------------------------------------525
VOR
Nearest--------------------------------------------- 194–195
VOR selection------------------------------------------------116
VSI-------------------------------------------------------------286
Vspeed references------------------------------------------- 53
Vspeeds-------------------------------------------------- 55–56
VS TGT------------------------------------------------- 241, 284
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TA-------------------------------------------------------------537
Tachometer (RPM)------------------------------------------- 90
TAF------------------------------------------------------------317
Takeoff Mode------------------------------------------------431
TAS---------------------------- 338, 340, 341, 342, 343, 548
TAWS--------------------------------- 82, 370, 381, 554, 555
TAWS-B------------------------------------------------ 353, 365
TAWS System Status Annunciations---------------------555
Terminal procedures charts------------------------- 482, 502
Terrain-------------------------------------370, 545, 554, 555
Color indications-----------------------------------------581
Terrain Awareness and Warning System---------- 353, 365
Tilt------------------------------------------------------ 340, 341
Tilt line--------------------------------------------------------341
Timer
Departure--------------------------------------------------- 45
Flight-------------------------------------------------------- 45
Timer, PFD generic------------------------------------------- 43
TIS-------------------------------------------------------------384
TOD---------------------------------------------- 284, 285, 291
TOPO DATA------------------------------------- 157, 158, 167
Top of Descent--------------------------------------- 284, 285
TOPO SCALE-------------------------------------------------159
Track----------------------------------------------------------- 63
Traffic Advisory (TA)---------------------- 81, 338, 537, 538
Traffic Annunciation----------------------------------------- 53
Traffic Information Service (TIS)
Voice alerts------------------------------------------------- 81
Transponder code entry------------------------------------131
Transponder data box--------------------------------------- 99
Transponder ground mode--------------------------------129
Transponder mode field-------------------------99, 129, 130
Transponder standby mode-------------------------------129
Transponder Status Box------------------------------------- 52
Trend Vector
Turn Rate--------------------------------------------------- 66
Trip Planning------------------------------------ 256, 257, 258
Trip statistics--------------------------------------46, 257, 258
True Airspeed-------------------------------------- 52, 54, 258
Turn anticipation--------------------------------------------577
Turn Rate Indicator------------------------------------------ 66
TX indicator--------------------------------------------------107
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
T
I-5
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Index
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
XM Satellite Radio------------------------------------------299
XM Satellite Weather---------------------------------------299
Activating-------------------------------------------------299
AIREPs-----------------------------------------------------327
AIRMETs---------------------------------------------------316
Cell Movement-------------------------------------------315
Cloud Tops------------------------------------------------313
County Warnings-----------------------------------------323
Cyclones & Hurricanes----------------------------------324
Echo Tops--------------------------------------------------312
Freezing Level---------------------------------------------321
Icing--------------------------------------------------------325
Lightning--------------------------------------------------314
NEXRAD---------------------------------------------------308
PIREPs-----------------------------------------------------327
SIGMETs---------------------------------------------------316
Surface Analysis------------------------------------------319
Turbulence-------------------------------------------------326
Winds Aloft------------------------------------------------322
XM weather/radio--------------------------------------------- 4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Z
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Zoom
Auto--------------------------------------------------------149
I-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 200/B200 Series
190-00928-01 Rev. A
Untitled-1 1
11/13/2007 9:15:37 AM
G1000
®
Integrated Flight Deck
Pilot’s Guide
®
G1000 Pilot’s Guide
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062, U.S.A.
p:913.397.8200
f:913.397.8282
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road
Houndsdown Business Park
Southampton, SO40 9RB, U.K.
p:44/0870.8501241
f:44/0870.8501251
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road
Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
p:886/02.2642.9199
f:886/02.2642.9099
www.garmin.com
Quest Kodiak 100
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
p:503.391.3411
f:503.364.2138
190-00590-01
Revision B
Quest Kodiak 100
System Software 0552.03 or later
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising